Loading...
EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS - 11-0025-UT U. earwatef � A„ eel, mac. CERTIFICATE OFSUBSTANTIAL CO T,1;TION Project: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST.WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMEN'I"S Contract Number: #11-0025-UT Contract Date: October 17,2014 Notice to Proceed Date: November 3,2014 Marshall St. WRF Lab Electrical Im royements: Substantial Completion Date: April 24.2015 Warranty Expiration Date: April 24,2016 East WRF Generator: Substantial Completion Date: June 15,2015 Warranty Expiration Date:June 15,2016 Consultant: McKim and Creed The work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project(or specified part of the Project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. IDEFINITION OF SUBSTANTIAL,COMPLETION Substantial completion is the stage in construction when a projector designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with contract documents so that the Owner can use the work or portion thereoffor its intended use.Items that affect operational integrity and function of the work must be capable of continuous use. e f 3 , / Jf 066Y `i-U V'� c` UUY, By:� s � R ��0s� Consultant McKim and Creed Authorised Representative ate The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. By: /0)) -,2e9lS" Contractor B.L. Smith Electric Authorized Representative Date The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full possession of the specified area osf the Project on June 15,2015. The responsibility for utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set f?rth in the Contract Documents. By ear -- .... City of Cleaater rized Representative Date warwater Certificate of Substantial Completion, Page 2 of 2 PROJECT PUNCH LIST N/A PROJECT ONE YEAR WARRANTY Contract Section III, 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and(ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom... Where defective Work(and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Marshall St. WRF Lab Electrical Improvements: Substantial Completion Date: April 24, 2015 Warranty Expiration Date: April 24, 2016 East WRF Generator: Substantial Completion Date: June 15, 2015 Warranty Expiration Date: June 15, 2016 A copy of this signed and executed document should be provided to the following parties: Project Owner Project Contractor Project Consultant(if applicable) City Construction Office Specialist Project File LL tef t�: , fwa CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION LETION Project: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST.WRF LAE ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS Contract Number: #11-0025-UT Contract Date: October 17,2014 Notice to Proceed Date: November 3,2014 Marshall St. WRF Lab Electrical Improvements: Substantial Completion Date: April 24,2015 Warranty Expiration Date: April 24,2016 East WRF Generator: Substantial Completion Date: June 15,2015 Warranty Expiration Date: June 15,2016 Consultant: McKim and Creed The work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project(or specified part of the Project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. IDEFINI'TION OF SUBSTANTIAL,COMPLETION Substantial completion is the stage in construction when a projector designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with contract documents so that the Owner can use the work or portion thereoffor its intended use. Items that affect operational integrity and function of the work must be capable of continuous use. �)06vt� v' U c-,1 ' Consultant McKim and Creed Authorized Representative ate The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. By: /0)) Contractor B.L. Smith Electric Authorized Representative Date The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full possession of the specified area osf the Project on June 15,2015. The responsibility for utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set f in the Co act Documents. By. City of Clea 4ater rized Representative Date 0 Clearwater Certificate of Substantial Completion, Page 2 of 2 PROJECT PUNCH LIST N/A PROJECT ONE YEAR WARRANTY Contract Section Ill, 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and(ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom... Where defective Work(and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Marshall St. WRF Lab Electrical Improvements: Substantial Completion Date: April 24, 2015 Warranty Expiration Date: April 24, 2016 East WRF Generator: Substantial Completion Date: June 15, 2015 Warranty Expiration Date: June 15, 2016 A copy of this signed and executed document should be provided to the following parties: Project Owner Project Contractor Project Consultant (if applicable) City Construction Office Specialist Project File EAST WRF GENERATOR and MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT No. 11- 0025 -UT) CONFORMED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Clearwater ISSUED FOR BID JULY /2014 ADDENDUM NO. 1 For EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT 11- 0025 -UT DATE: August 13, 2014 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: Responses to Bidder's Questions QUESTION 1: The following spec section does not clearly state that the Electrical Contractor has to carry the GC license. B.L. Smith does not carry a GC license at this time. Are we able to bid the project jointly with a GC? Section II- 2.1 (Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication.) RESPONSE 1: The following revised language for Section IVa, 01110 -3, Paragraph 1.3, removes the requirement for the Electrical Prime Contractor to also possess a General Contractors license. In addition to this change, the new wording removes the subjective phrase "significant wastewater experience" and replaces it with an objective measure of previously executed municipal /industrial work. Contract Documents Section IVa, 01110 -3, Paragraph 1.3 - Delete Paragraph 1.3 in its entirety and replace with: 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. Contracting Method: Work shall be constructed under one prime Electrical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall hold a Certified Electrical Contractor license in the State of Florida and self perform over 60% percent of the total labor work using their own workforce. Electrical Contractor shall have significant municipal and /or industrial experience, new construction or improvements, and thus have successfully executed these types of contract(s) with individual value(s) in excess of one million dollars. Such experience to be verified during bid selection. Electrical contractor shall supply and install all electrical equipment including owner purchased generator and fuel day tank. The Electrical Contractor may elect to subcontract out the site /civils structural, or instrumentation and controls portion of this contract. END OF ADDENDUM #1 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: /s/William B. Horne, II City Manager Page 1 of 1 1 1 1 1 1 City of Clearwater, Florida EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT No. 11- 0025 -UT) 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS 1 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' SECTION IIa SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVb SECONDARY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL 1 SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT 1 DOCUMENTATION I SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 1 1 1 1 Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer Cover and Table of Contents.docx Page I1 10/10/2008 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACT 11- 0025 -UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com /cityprojects, ON FRIDAY, JULY 25, 2014, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of: East Plant WRF - The complete installation of an owner purchased engine generator system and day tank. Bidder shall provide and install all other appurtenances associated with this equipment as shown in contract documents including platform and demolition of existing standby generator. Marshall St. Laboratory — Provide and install Uninterruptable Power supply and equipment for Toad shedding of circuits, along with new standby circuits as shown in contract documents. MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Thursday, August 7, 2014 at 10:30 a.m. at the East Water Reclamation Facility, Breakroom, 3141 Gulf to Bay Blvd., Clearwater, Florida, 33759 -4506. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services BIdg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, AUGUST 28, 2014. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT # 11- 0025 -UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of Electrical with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $1,000,000. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. Sectionl.docx Page 1 of 2 3/1/2013 The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager (727) 562 -4633 Sectionl.docx Page 2 of 2 3/1/2013 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 1I INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSIVENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 8 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 Sectionll.docx i 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www .myclearwater.com /cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid /proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin /Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical Sectionll.docx Page 1 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of SectionIl.docx Page 2 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Sectionll.docx Page 3 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5 "x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and Sectionll.docx Page 4 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees Sectionll.docx Page 5 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. Sectionll.docx Page 6 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (5) Section II — Instructions to Bidders Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5 The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statues (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must Sectionll.docx Page 7 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. Sectionll.docx Page 8 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction - related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction - related Best Management Practices. References EPA website Sectionll.docx Page 9 of 9 7/29/2013 SECTION IIa SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION IIa SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders have the meanings state in the Instructions to Bidders. 1. Delete Paragraph 9.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of aggregate subcontract work shall not exceed forty percent (40 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall directly perform a minimum of sixty percent (60 %) of the Work. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. Section IIa Page 1 of 1 7/17/2014 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents. 1 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 SectionllI.docxx i 7/7/2014 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 7 OTHER WORK 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 24 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 30 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 35 Sectionlll.docxx ii 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 36 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17 MISCELLANEOUS 40 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 40 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 41 19 MATERIAL USED 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 42 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2 TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42 21.3 CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 42 21.4 ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 43 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1 GENERAL 44 22.2 EXAMPLE 44 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3 FIXED SIGN 45 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 45 23.5 SIGN COLORING 46 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 46 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 46 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 47 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 48 Sectionlll.docxx iii 7/7/2014 Sectionlll.docxx iv 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding SectionIll.docxx Page 1 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent Sectionlll.docxx Page 2 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Sectionlll.docxx Page 3 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre - construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Sectionlll.docxx Page 4 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable SectionIIl.docxx Page 5 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. Sectionlll.docxx Page 6 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. Sectionlll.docxx Page 7 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. Sectionlll.docxx Page 8 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Sectionlll.docxx Page 9 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: SectionIII.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: SectionIII.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. SectionlILdocxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. SectionlILdocxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed SectionIll.docxx Page 12 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Sectionlll.docxx Page 13 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. Sectionlll.docxx Page 14 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 1II — General Conditions All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. Sectionlll.docxx Page 15 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. Sectionlll.docxx Page 16 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when Sectionlll.docxx Page 17 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The SectionllI.docxx Page 18 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not Sectionlll.docxx Page 19 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also knonw as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction Sectionlll.docxx Page 20 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix Sectionlll.docxx Page 21 of 51 7/7/2014 6. Section III — General Conditions • ....#...�. ".1... GAS .- a — - - -- gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. Sectionlll.docxx Page 22 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 " =20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail address Thomas.Mahony(c ,myClearwater.com. 6.12CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. Sectionlll.docxx Page 23 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. SectionIII.docxx Page 24 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work.' The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. Sectionlll.docxx Page 25 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's Sectionlll.docxx Page 26 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. Sectionlll.docxx Page 27 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) SectionllI.docxx Page 28 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full - unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. Sectionlll.docxx Page 29 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. Sectionlll.docxx Page 30 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these Sectionlll.docxx Page 31 of 51 7/7/2014 Section II1 — General Conditions inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been SectionlII.docxx Page 32 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree Section111.docxx Page 33 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and Sectionlll.docxx Page 34 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. Sectionlll.docxx Page 35 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. SectionIIL.docxx Page 36 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II1 — General Conditions 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As- built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and Sectionlll.docxx Page 37 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Sectionlll.docxx Page 38 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. Sectionlll.docxx Page 39 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 15.3CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. SectionIll.docxx Page 40 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and /or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: Michael.Pryor @myC 1 earwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. if requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. Sectionlll.docxx Page 41 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in SECTION V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, and materials for consideration as ODP materials (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copies of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials. Invoices for ODP materials shall be issued to the Owner in care of the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Sectionlll.docxx Page 42 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for materials delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and /or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice and additional information, if available, to the Owner for payment within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in ODP materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials. SectionIll.docxx Page 43 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property Sectionlll.docxx Page 44 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f r r f 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. Sectionlll.docxx Page 45 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 23.5SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. Sectionlll.docxx Page 46 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: rwater T4" P T Post ('Typ -} 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Sectionlll.docxx Page 47 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. Sectionlll.docxx Page 48 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. Sectionlll.docxx Page 49 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity /Corporation SectionIIl.docxx Page 50 of 51 7/7/2014 1 STATE OF COUNTY OF I I 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 201, by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did /did not take an oath. NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Sectionlll.docxx Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: Page 51 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ■ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Index of Technical Specifications Sign and Seal Sheet for CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS (Project No. 11-0025-UT) SPECIFICATIONS Thomas Reed Meriwether; P.E. Florida P.E. #75938 SECTION IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVA - SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01110, 01143, 01210, 01230, 01271, 01291, 01297, 01301, 01310, 01312, 01322, 01330, 01411, 01420, 01452, 01510, 01511, 01512, 01522, 01570, 01651, 01661, 01721, 01723, 01724, 01740, 01751, 01772, 01781, 01782, 01783, 01821 DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220, 02315, 02380, 02742 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03100, 03200, 03251, 03300 DIVISION5 - METALS 05051, 05501, 05511, 05522 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13400 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15055 ,011 1111/01 r �•a� E N SF is,Fjy S. F- ; No 75938 to _ *' STATE OF %.#4L O it10," N 1G\ tg./2.0 July 18, 2014 Page i of ii Sign and Seal Sheet Index of Technical Specifications Sign and Seal Sheet for CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS (Project No. 11-0025-UT) DIVISION 16 16050, 16133, 16144, 16611 - ELECTRICAL 16061, 16062, 16070, 16075, 16121, 16122, 16131, 16132, 16134, 16135, 16136, 16137, 16138, 16141, 16142, 16143, 16215, 16231, 16271, 16282, 16412, 16440, 16442, 16501, SECTION IVB - SECONDARY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS July 18, 2014 Page ii of ii Sign and Seal Sheet 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 4 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 5 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 5 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 5 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 6 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 6 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 6 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 6 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 6 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 8 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 8 6 CONCRETE 9 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 9 7.1 EXCAVATION 9 7.2 FORMS 9 8 REINFORCEMENT 10 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 10 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 10 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 10 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 11 12 DEWATERING 11 12.1 GENERAL 11 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 12 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 12 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 14 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 14 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 15 SectionlV.docx i 11/26/2013 1 13. 2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 15 I 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 15 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 15 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 16 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 16 14 BACKFILL 16 I 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 16 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 16 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 17 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 17 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 17 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 17 18 UNDERDRAINS 17 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 18 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 18 19 STORM SEWERS 18 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 18 19.2 TESTING 18 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 19 20.1 MATERIALS 19 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 19 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 20 20.2 INSTALLATION 20 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 20 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 21 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 21 20.4 TESTING 21 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 21 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 21 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 21 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 22 21 DRAINAGE 22 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22 22.1 BASE 22 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 24 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 24 22.2 SUBGRADE 24 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 24 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 24 SectionlV.docx ii 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 24 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 25 23.1.1 AGGREGATE 25 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 25 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 25 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 26 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 26 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 27 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 27 23.6.1 CRACKS 27 23.6.2 POTHOLES 27 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 27 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 28 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 29 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 29 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 29 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 29 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 30 25.1 IRRIGATION 30 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 30 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 31 25.1.3 EXECUTION 35 25.2 LANDSCAPE 39 25.2.1 GENERAL 39 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 44 25.2.3 EXECUTION 47 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 54 26.1 INTENT 54 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 54 26.3 MATERIALS 54 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 55 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 55 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 55 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 56 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 56 26.9 PAYMENT 56 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 56 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 56 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 57 29 CONCRETE CURBS 57 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 57 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 57 SectionlV.docx iii 11/26/2013 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 57 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 57 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 57 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 58 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 58 31 SODDING 58 32 SEEDING 58 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 59 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 59 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 59 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 60 34 MATERIAL USED 60 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 60 36 STREET SIGNS 60 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 60 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 60 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 60 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 60 37.4 EQUIPMENT 60 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 61 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 61 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 61 37.8 LIGHTING 61 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 61 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX 62 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 62 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 62 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 62 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 62 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 62 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 62 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 63 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 63 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES 63 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 63 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 64 38.9 MAINTENANCE 64 �. 38.10 COMPLIANCE 64 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 67 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 67 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SectionlV.docx iv 11/26/2013 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 67 41.1 SCOPE 67 41.2 MATERIALS 68 41.2.1 GENERAL 68 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 68 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 70 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 70 41.2.5 HYDRANTS 71 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 72 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 72 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 72 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES 73 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 73 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 73 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 73 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 73 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 75 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 75 41.4 TESTS 76 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 76 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 76 41.5 STERILIZATION 76 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 76 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 76 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 76 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 77 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS 77 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 77 41.6.1 GENERAL 77 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 78 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 78 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 78 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 78 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 79 43 TENNIS COURTS 79 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 79 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 79 43.1.2 BASE COURSE 79 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 79 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 79 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 79 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 80 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 81 43.2.1 GENERAL 81 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 82 SectionlV.docx v 11/26/2013 43.2.3 SLOPE 82 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 83 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 83 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 83 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 83 43.2.8 FENCING 84 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS 84 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 84 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 86 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 86 43.2.13 CONCRETE 86 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 86 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 87 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 87 43.2.17 WARRANTY 87 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 88 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 88 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 88 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 88 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 89 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS 89 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 89 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 89 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 89 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 89 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 90 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 90 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 90 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 90 45.1 INTENT 90 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 91 45.3 MATERIALS 91 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 91 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 92 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 92 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 92 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 92 45.9 PAYMENT 92 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 93 46.1 MATERIALS 93 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 93 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 93 46.1.3 SAMPLES 93 46.1.4 REJECTION 93 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 93 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 94 SectionlV.docx vi 11/26/2013 i 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 94 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS 94 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 94 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 94 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 94 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 94 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 94 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 95 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER 95 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES 95 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 95 46.4.7 BACKFILLING 96 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 96 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 96 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 96 47.1 SCOPE 96 47.2 MATERIALS 96 47.3 PIPE 96 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 97 47.5 FITTINGS 97 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 97 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 97 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 97 48.3 COMPOSITION 97 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 98 48.5 MATERIALS 98 48.6 WATER 98 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 98 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 98 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 99 48.10 PROPORTIONING 99 48.11 MIXING 99 48.12 APPLICATION 99 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 100 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 100 48.15 CURING 100 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 100 48.17 INSPECTION 101 48.18 EQUIPMENT 101 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 102 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 102 49.2 PAYMENT 102 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 102 49.3.1 MATERIALS 102 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 103 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 103 SectionlV.docx vii 11/26/2013 49.4.1 MATERIALS 104 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 104 49.6 GROUTING MIX 104 49.7 LINER MIX 104 49.8 WATER 105 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 105 49.10 EQUIPMENT 105 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 105 49.11.1 PREPARATION 105 49.11.2 MIXING 106 49.11.3 SPRAYING 106 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 106 49.11.5 CURING 106 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 107 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 107 49.12.1 SCOPE 107 49.12.2 MATERIALS 107 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 109 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 111 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 111 51.1 SCOPE 111 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 112 51.2.1 ASPHALT 112 51.2.2 CONCRETE 112 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 112 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 112 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 113 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 113 51.6 PLAYING LINES 113 51.7 GENERAL 113 51.8 LIMITATIONS 113 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 114 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 114 53.1 MATERIAL 114 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 114 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: 116 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 117 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 117 53.2 PERFORMANCE 117 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 118 54.1 SCOPE 118 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 118 54.3 WORK METHODS 119 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 119 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 119 SectionlV.docx viii 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.4 LITTER 119 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 119 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 119 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 119 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL 119 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 120 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 120 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 120 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA 120 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 120 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 120 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 120 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 120 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 121 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 121 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 121 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 121 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 121 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 122 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 122 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 122 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 123 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 123 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 123 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 123 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 123 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 124 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 124 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 124 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 124 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 124 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 124 57 RIPRAP 124 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 124 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 125 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 125 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 125 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING 125 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 125 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 126 60 SIGNING AND MARKING 126 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 126 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 126 SectionlV.docx ix 11/26/2013 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 126 62 TREE PROTECTION 127 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 127 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 127 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 128 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 129 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 129 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 129 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 129 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 130 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 130 63.6 POSTING 130 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 130 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 130 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 130 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 130 SectionlV.docx x 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT Project Number: 11- 0025 -UT Scope of Work: A. The Work is being performed for the City of Clearwater (CITY). B. The Work is located at the site of the East Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) and the Marshall Street WRF. The addresses of the WRFs are: 1. East WRF: 3141 Gulf To Bay Blvd, Clearwater, FL 2. Marshall Street WRF: 1605 Harbor Dr, Clearwater, FL C. The Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, constructing the Work outlined below and specifically detailed in all related specifications and drawings that will require two separate building permits. The Work shall be as follows: 1. East WRF: The project generally consists of, but is not limited to, a Base Bid and one Additive Alternate. Base Bid shall be subject to the construction documents that consist of: a. Installation of owner purchased generator system and day tank. This includes the enclosure, coordination with delivery and handling and storage if necessary. b. Provide and install generator reinforced elevated concrete platform, and equipment pads. c. Provide and install Four Automatic Transfer Switches in existing footprint. d. Provide and install Switchboard and Breakers e. Replacement of one main breaker trip unit and recalibration f. Provide and Install all power and control conduit and wire including concrete reinforced ductbanks g. Provide and Install PLC & HMI including all software and programming to communicate with existing plant SCADA including screen creation in both systems. h. Provide the relocation of two bulk fuel tanks including removal of fuel, cleaning and recertification. (Inspect tanks by manufacturer's representative prior to moving and after relocating.) i. Provide all connection piping from bulk tanks to day tank and from day tank to generator. j. Project includes the demolition of two engine generators, fuel systems and removal of four ATS, all conduit, wire and appurtenances associated with this equipment. Items to be returned to City at their discretion. Clean, repaint and modify, two existing generator rooms. SectionlV.docx Page 1 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications k. Provide for the testing of all equipment and training of selected personnel. 1. Provide coordination with plant and power Utility for plant shutdowns (Limit 20 minutes). This also includes the requirement to provide continuous standby and temporary power (including fuel) to keep the plant continuously up and running. m. Relocation and reconnection of light pole. n. Provide and install Lightning Protection System for Elevated Generator and supporting structure and relocated fuel tanks. o. Installation of Surge Protection Devices for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment. P. Patching and repaving of area as needed or required. q. An allowance for obstructions to the installation of new ductbanks. Additive Alternate Bid Item: r. Provide One "Joe Filter" complete with spares, by Simplex 2. Marshall Street WRF: The project generally consists of, but is not limited to: a. Coordinate with City Lab Personnel for all shutdowns and equipment turnovers. Provide temporary back up power as needed. Shutdowns shall not interfere with the analyzing of product. b. Remove existing Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) and appurtenances. Return all equipment to CITY. c. Provide and install new 208/120V Three Phase UPS with separate battery cabinet, Maintenance Bypass Switch, and Panelboard. d. Remove existing emergency panelboard EL1 and replace with new 208/120V Three Phase Emergency panelboard (EL 1). Reconnect all existing and new circuits. e. Provide and install new PLC & HMI with load shedding program, f. Provide and install CT's for existing ATS g. Provide motor contactors as shown on drawings. h. Provide and install new local single phase UPS's for specific lab equipment as required. i. Replace existing UPS distribution panels with new. Relocate electric circuits from existing panelboards to new panelboards. j. Provide new circuits as indicated, and install red and orange receptacles as required for all UPS and emergency generator branch circuits. k. Provide programming and integration for load shedding power management scheme specified. 1. Provide training to maintenance personnel on monitoring and maintaining UPS and Power Management System. m. Installation of Surge Protection Devices for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment. SectionlV.docx Page 2 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Items consist of: 1. One 800kW Generator w/Enclosure & Day Tank (as referenced in Section 16231). 2. Sales Tax Savings on the Generator w/Enclosure & Day Tank 3. Coordination, Installation, Testing, and Contractor Warranty for the Generator, Enclosure and Day Tank. 4. Refer to Section IVa, Division 01 — General Requirements, 01271 Measurement and Payment and Section IVa, Division 16 — Electrical, 16231 Engine Generator System for particulars. The Contractor shall provide 2 (two) fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. CONTRACT PERIOD: 302 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS SectionlV.docx Page 3 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT Project Number: 11- 0025 -UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 /1 Scope Of Work 2.1 // Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 /1 Definition Of Terms 4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work 5 ■ Excavation For Underground Work 6 /1 Concrete 7 /1 Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 /1 Reinforcement 9 ■ Obstructions 10 ►1 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 r Dewatering 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 I:1 Backfill 15 ■ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 ►1 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ❑ Underdrains 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 /1 Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 ►1 Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ❑ General Planting Specifications 26 ❑ Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways 28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 ►1 Concrete Curbs 30 ❑ Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 ►1 Sodding 32 ❑ Seeding 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 0 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ❑ Street Signs . SectionlV.docx Page 4 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37 ►1 Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 ❑ Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 0 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ❑ Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 ❑ Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ❑ Gunite Specifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 // Project Information Signs 51 ❑ In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ❑ Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 ❑ Riprap 58 ►1 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 ❑ Tree Protection 63 ❑ Project Web Pages 64 n Overhead Electric Line Clearance 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and SectionlV.docx Page 5 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute SectionlV.docx Page 6 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SectionlV.docx Page 7 of 130 1 1/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE l8 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. SectionlV.docx Page 8 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. SectionlV.docx Page 9 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M -86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. SectionlV.docx Page 10 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. SectionlV.docx Page 11 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: SectionlV.docx Page 12 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/I PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 µg /1 0.025 lag /1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg /1 2.9 µg/I Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg /I 5.6 tg /I Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg /1 86.0 lag/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg /1 50.0 µg/1 Benzene 1.0 tg /1 1.0 tg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. SectionlV.docx Page 13 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/I, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg /l. In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. SectionlV.docx Page 14 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. SectionlV.docx Page 15 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214 -351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. SectionlV.docx Page 16 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off - site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly - chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. SectionlV.docx Page 17 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. SectionlV.docx Page 18 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The work under this Section shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber SectionlV.docx Page 19 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. SectionlV.docx Page 20 of 130 11/26/2013 ' Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. ' 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from ' the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING ' 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown Tying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test ' section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the ' amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the 1 line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 1 Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. SectionlV.docx Page 21 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a SectionlV.docx Page 22 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 -7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11 and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionlV.docx Page 23 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. SectionlV.doex Page 24 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330 - 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of " or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SectionlV.docx Page 25 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNESS (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) Type S —I Type S—I with Type S —III Top Layer Type S —III FC -3 Type S —III with FC -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1 %2 1 %2 2 11/4 3/4 * 1 1 21/4 1'/4 11/4 PA 1 1'/2 1 3 1'/2 1'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S —III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. SectionlV.docx Page 26 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are SectionlV.docx Page 27 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre - wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 1/2" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. SectionlV.docx Page 28 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and /or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. SectionlV.docx Page 29 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf /landscape areas except at road /paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. SectionlV.docx Page 30 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 r 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. SectionlV.docx Page 31 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA -C -509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. SectionlV.docx Page 32 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 r A 1 1 �l 1 E 1 1 w r 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low- density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 SectionlV.docx Page 33 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. SectionlV.docx Page 34 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r t r 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, SectionlV.docx Page 35 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than 1/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. SectionlV.docx Page 36 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. SectionlV.docx Page 37 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 251.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. SectionlV.docx Page 38 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and /or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. SectionlV.docx Page 39 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 - 432 -4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with SectionlV.docx Page 40 of 130 11/26/2013 C.W.: SPR.: ST. TR.: MIN.: GAL.: O.C.: DIA.: Section IV — Technical Specifications no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. Straight trunk. Minimum. Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: B &B: PPP: FG: STD.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. SectionlV.docx Page 41 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Owner 's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. SectionlV.docx Page 42 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and /or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. SectionlV.docx Page 43 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well - developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and /or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. SectionlV.docx Page 44 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). SectionlV.docx Page 45 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - '/2 feet above grade. SectionlV.docx Page 46 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed /turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. SectionlV.docx Page 47 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - 1/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as SectionlV.docx Page 48 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 'A" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. SectionlV.docx Page 49 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. SectionlV.docx Page 50 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. SectionlV.docx Page 51 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and /or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor. SectionlV.docx Page 52 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SectionlV.docx Page 53 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in /in /deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. SectionlV.docx Page 54 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 - 344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed- circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. SectionlV.docx Page 55 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In -the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV.docx Page 56 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. SectionlV.docx Page 57 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and /or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 Ib. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. SectionlV.docx Page 58 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. SectionlV.docx Page 59 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre- construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. SectionlV.docx Page 60 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. SectionlV.docx Page 61 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. SectionlV.docx Page 62 of 130 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and /or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and /or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. SectionlV.docx Page 63 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and /or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV.docx Page 64 of 130 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence $32 Re- inspection Fee 3rd occurrence $80 Re- inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. SectionlV.docx Page 65 of 130 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionlV.docx Page 66 of 128 11/26/2013 all EMI NMI MI OD Mt IMO RIO OM Mk NO NM IMO MI MN INN MI OM i 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionlV.docx Page 67 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SectionlV.docx Page 68 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements ofASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI /AW WA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionlV.docx Page 69 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI /A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be a- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionlV.docx Page 70 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1 -1/2 -inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SectionlV.docx Page 71 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SectionlV.docx Page 72 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionlV.docx Page 73 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI /AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionlV.docx Page 74 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.docx Page 75 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionlV.docx Page 76 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and /or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionlV.docx Page 77 of 131 1 1/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C 110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV.docx Page 78 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6 -inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC -70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.docx Page 79 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and /or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty -eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV.docx Page 80 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionlV.docx Page 81 of 131 11/26/2013 43.2.1.6 Section IV — Technical Specifications BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T -180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionlV.docx Page 82 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2 -1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub - surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub - surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.docx Page 83 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT -25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non -lift -off type, and offset to permit 180- degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty -six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionlV.docx Page 84 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral- reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction - driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier /Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. SectionlV.docx Page 85 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 -0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionlV.docx Page 86 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. other) and 2 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing New conduits will be required for the three (3) new the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS to the existing light pole, it is suggested the pole locations and utilize existing conduits. light poles and the Contractor shall include of the new light poles. The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionlV.docx Page 87 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB - SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and /or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SectionlV.docx Page 88 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionlV.docx Page 89 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionlV.docx Page 90 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D2290 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 300,000 psi 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionlV.docx Page 91 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionlV.docx Page 92 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and /or the scope of work. SectionlV.docx Page 93 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 211/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionlV.docx Page 94 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionlV.docx Page 95 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre - fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and /or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionlV.docx Page 96 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 r t 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and /or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionlV.docx Page 97 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionlV.docx Page 98 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionlV.docx Page 99 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SectionlV.docx Page 100 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionlV.docx Page 101 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and /or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionlV.docx Page 102 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV.docx Page 103 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. SectionlV.docx Page 104 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionlV.docx Page 105 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some Leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV.docx Page 106 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and /or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SectionlV.docx Page 107 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant /Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x10 llcm /sec to 7.6x10 cm /sec at 100% RH at 50% RH 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionlV.docx Page 108 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and /or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and /or sand blast structure. SectionlV.docx Page 109 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and /or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing /crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionlV.docx Page 110 of 131 11/26/2013 I49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING Section IV — Technical Specifications ' 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 1 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionlV.docx Page 111 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60 -80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20 -40 gallons 600 -900 pounds 112 -138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non - coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionlV.docx Page 112 of 131 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionlV.docx Page 113 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ- W -461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 1/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite SectionlV.docx Page 114 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A -313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D -142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC l (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionlV.docx Page 115 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS Ater the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% SectionlV.docx Page 116 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionlV.docx Page 117 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionlV.docx Page 118 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionlV.docx Page 119 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid- September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his /her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionlV.docx Page 120 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionlV.docx Page 121 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and /or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SectionlV.docx Page 122 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.docx Page 123 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand- cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionlV.docx Page 124 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre - construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionlV.docx Page 125 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionlV.docx Page 126 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionlV.docx Page 127 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. SectionlV.docx Page 128 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion - tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design /aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV.docx Page 129 of 131 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 SectionlV.docx Page 130 of 131 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionlV.docx Page 131 of 131 11/26/2013 SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION IVa SECTION PAGE DIVISION 1— GENERAL REOUIREMENTS 01110 Summary of Work 01110 -1 01143 Coordination with Owner' s Operations (MOPO) 01143 -1 01210 Allowances 01210 -1 01230 Alternatives 01230 -1 01271 Measurement and Payment 01271 -1 01291 Schedule of Values 01291 -1 01297 Progress Payment Procedures 01297 -1 01301 Pre - Construction Conference 01301 -1 01310 Project Coordination 01310 -1 01312 Progress Meetings 01312 -1 01322 Progress Schedule 01322 -1 01330 Submittal Procedures 01330 -1 01411 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 01413 -1 01420 References 01420 -1 01452 Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor 01420 -1 01510 Temporary Utilities 01510 -1 01511 Temporary Electricity 01511 -1 01512 Temporary Lighting 01512 -1 01522 Contractor's Field Office and Sheds 01522 -1 01570 Temporary Controls 01570 -1 01651 Transportation and Handling of Products 01651 -1 01661 Storage and Protection of Products 01661 -1 01721 Protection of the Work and Property 01721 -1 01723 Cutting and Patching 01723 -1 01724 Connections to Existing Facilities 01724 -1 01740 Cleaning 01740 -1 01751 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation 01751 -1 01772 Closeout Requirements 01772 -1 01781 Operations and Maintenance Data 01781 -1 01782 Record Documents 01782 -1 01783 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 01783 -1 01821 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel 01821 -1 11- 0025 -UT TOC -i Table of Contents CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) SECTION IVa SECTION PAGE DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 Demolition 02220 -1 02315 Excavation and Backfll 02315 -1 02380 Drilled Piers 02380 -1 02742 Bituminous Paving 02742 -1 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100 -1 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200 -1 03251 Concrete Joints 03251 -1 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03300 -1 DIVISION 4 — MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 - METALS 05051 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts 05051 -1 05501 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05501 -1 05511 Pre - Engineered Aluminum Stairs 05511 -1 05522 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05522 -1 DIVISION 6 — WOODS AND PLASTICS (NOT USED) DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS (NOT USED) DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 Painting 09900 -1 DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT TOC -ii Table of Contents CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) SECTION IVa $ ECTION PACE DIVISION 11 - EOUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12 — FURNISHING (NOT USED DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, 13400 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 13400 -1 DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL (NOT USED) 15055 Pipe Hangers and Supports 15055 -1 DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16050 General Provisions 16050 -1 16061 Grounding Systems 16062 -1 16062 Lightning Protection System 16062 -1 16070 Supports Systems 16070 -1 16075 Electrical Identification 16075 -1 16121 Instrumentation and Communication Cables 16121 -1 16122 600 Volt Cables 16122 -1 16131 Rigid Conduits 16131 -1 16132 Flexible Conduits 16132 -1 16133 Sealed Fittings 16133 -1 16134 Expansion/Deflection Fittings 16134 -1 16135 Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes 16135 -1 16136 Outlet Boxes 16136 -1 16137 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems 16137 -1 16138 Manholes and Handho les for Electrical Systems 16138 -1 16141 Low - Voltage Receptacles 16141 -1 16142 Snap Switches 16142 -1 16143 Disconnect Switches 16143 -1 16144 Control Stations 16144 -1 16215 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies 16215 -1 11- 0025 -UT TOC -iii Table of Contents CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NO. 1 GENERATOR IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) SECTION IVa ,SECTION, PAGE DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL (CONT.) 16231 Engine Generator System 16231 -1 16271 Dry -Type Transformers 16271 -1 16282 Surge Protective Devices 16282 -1 16412 Automatic Transfer Switches 16412 -1 16440 Switchboards 16440 -1 16442 Panelboards 16442 -1 16501 Lighting 16501 -1 16611 Uninterruptible Power Supply 16611 -1 11- 0025 -UT t + + END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS + + TOC -iv Table of Contents SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Table of Articles for this Section is: Article Title 1.1 Section Includes 1.2 Location and Description of Work 1.3 Other Construction Contracts 1.4 Work By Others 1.5 Work By CITY 1.6 Owner - furnished Equipment and Materials 1.7 Assigned Procurement Contracts 1.8 Sequence and Progress of Work 1.9 CONTRACTOR's Use of Site 1.10 Easements and Rights -of -Way 1.11 Notices to CITY and Authorities of Properties Adjacent to the Work 1.12 Salvage of Equipment and Materials 1.2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work is being performed for the City of Clearwater (CITY). B. The Work is located at the site of the East Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) and the Marshall Street WRF. The address of the WRFs are: 1. East WRF: 3141 Gulf To Bay Blvd, Clearwater, FL 2. Marshall Street WRF: 1605 Harbor Dr, Clearwater, FL C. The Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, constructing the Work outlined below and specifically detailed in all related specifications and drawings that will require two separate building permits. The Work shall be as follows: 1. East WRF: a. Provide all temporary back up power systems per plans and specifications. Coordinate with City for all shutdowns. b. Provide and install one new emergency generator and associated components. Including concrete platform and generator enclosure per drawings and specifications. 11- 0025 -UT 01110 -1 Summary of Work c. Repair and testing of existing power circuit breaker in MCB -1 while plant is on existing generator power. d. Provide and install new 50 gallon fuel day tank with transfer pumps and all associated piping. e. Remove fuel from existing diesel storage tanks. Provide and coordinate with CITY on tank relocation. Remove and dispose of existing fuel piping and relocate two existing bulk 2000 gallon diesel storage tanks to new generator location. Remove existing fuel for salvage and refill completely prior to start up. f. Inspect tanks by manufacturer's representative prior to moving and after relocating. Clean tanks as needed for completion of the Work. g. Remove two existing generator Day Tanks and associated piping. h. Remove two existing emergency generators and all associated appurtenances and return to the CITY. i. Provide and install generator platform as cast -in -place concrete elevated platform supported on a drilled pier foundation system. j. Provide and install cast -in -place concrete pads for relocated diesel fuel storage. k. Clean, repaint and modify per drawings, two existing generator rooms 1. Provide and install replacement Automatic Transfer Switches `ATS' (Total of 4) in existing footprints. These are located in three separate electrical rooms. m.Install new ductbank between north and south electrical rooms. n. Provide and install new PLC and HMI screen for monitoring and control of generator, fuel system and ATS's. Coordinate with plant SCADA system for transfer of signals. o. Installation of Lightning Protection System for Elevated Generator and supporting structure and relocated fuel tanks. p. Installation of Surge Protection Devices for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment. q. Training for all systems. r. Allowance for ductbank and conduit replacement . 2. Marshall Street WRF: a. Coordinate with City Lab Personnel for all shutdowns and equipment turnovers. Provide temporary back up power as needed. b. Remove existing Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) and appurtenances. Return all equipment to CITY. c. Provide and install new 208/120V Three Phase UPS with separate battery cabinet, Maintenance Bypass Switch, and Panelboard. d. Remove existing emergency panelboard EL1 and replace with new 208/120V Three Phase Emergency panelboard (ELI) as specified and shown on drawings. Reconnect all existing and new circuits. e. Provide and install new PLC, CT's and contactors as shown. f. Provide and install new local single phase UPS's for specific lab equipment as noted on drawings. g. Replace existing UPS distribution panels with new. Relocate electric circuits from existing panelboards to new panelboards. 11- 0025 -UT 01110 -2 Summary of Work h. Provide and install red and orange receptacles as required for all UPS and emergency generator branch circuits. i. Provide programming and integration for load shedding power management scheme specified. j. Provide training to maintenance personnel on monitoring and maintaining UPS and Power Management System. k. Installation of Surge Protection Devices for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. Contracting Method: Work shall be constructed under one prime Electrical Contractor. Electrical Contractor shall, in addition to electrical licenses, have a General Contractors (GC) license in the State of Florida and self perform over 60% percent of the total labor work using their own workforce. Electrical Contractor shall have significant wastewater experience. Electrical contractor shall supply and install generator, fuel system and all electrical equipment. As an option, he may elect to subcontract out the site /civil, structural, or instrumentation and controls portion of this contract. 1.4 WORK BY OTHERS A. Other construction contracts have been or will be awarded by CITY that are in close proximity to or border on the Work of this Contract. Work under these other contracts is briefly described as follows: 1. East WRF Influent Pump Station & Effluent Sand Filter Rehab. 1.5 WORK BY CITY A. CITY will perform the following in connection with the Work: 1. Operate all existing valves, gates, pumps, equipment, and appurtenances that will affect CITY's operation, unless otherwise specified or indicated. 1.6 CITY - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Items of equipment and materials to be furnished by CITY for installation by CONTRACTOR are: I. None. 1.7 ASSIGNED PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS A. Contracts for procurement of goods described in this paragraph will be assigned to CONTRACTOR as specified in the Agreement. 1. None. 1.8 SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK 11- 0025 -UT 01110 -3 Summary of Work A. Requirements for sequencing and coordinating with CITY's operations, including maintenance of plant operations during construction, and requirements shutdowns, are in Section 01143, Coordination with CITY's Operations. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. CONTRACTOR's use of the Site shall be confined to the areas shown. B. Move stored products that interfere with operations of CITY, other contractors, and others performing work for CITY. 1.10 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS -OF -WAY A. Easements and rights -of -way will be provided by CITY in accordance with the General Conditions. Confine construction operations within CITY's property, public rights -of -way, easements obtained by CITY, and the limits shown. Use care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. Do not enter private property outside the construction limits without permission from the owner of the property. 1.11 NOTICES TO CITY AND AUTHORITIES OF PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO THE WORK A. Notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect their property, facilities, or use of property. B. When it is necessary to temporarily obstruct access to property, or when utility service connection will be interrupted, provide notices sufficiently in advance to enable affected persons to provide for their needs. Conform notices to Laws and Regulations and, whether delivered orally or in writing, include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused thereby. C. Notify utility owners and other concerned entities at least 10 full business days prior to cutting or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near Underground Facilities or exposed utilities. 1.12 SALVAGE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Existing equipment and materials removed and not shown or specified to be reused in the Work will become CONTRACTOR's property, unless otherwise stated. See exceptions above in Scope. B. Existing equipment and materials removed by CONTRACTOR shall not be reused in the Work, except where so specified or indicated. II - 0025 -UT 01110 -4 Summary of Work C. Carefully remove in manner to prevent damage all equipment and materials specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused or to remain property of CITY. Store and protect salvaged items specified or indicated to be used in the Work. Replace in kind or with new items equipment, materials, and components damaged in removal, storage, or handling through carelessness or improper procedures. D. CONTRACTOR may furnish and install new items, with CITY's approval, instead of those specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused, in which case such removed items will become CITY'S property of first right of refusal. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01110 -5 Summary of Work 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01110 -6 Summary of Work SECTION 01143 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S OPERATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. This Section includes requirements for coordinating with CITY's operations during the Work, and includes requirements for tie -ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work without impact on CITY's operations except as allowed in this Section. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals shown, specified and required to coordinate with CITY's operations during the Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Specification sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01110, Summary of Work. 2. Section 01724, Connections to Existing Facilities. D. Except for shutdowns specified in this Section, perform the Work such that CITY's facility remains in continuous satisfactory operation during the Project. Schedule and conduct the Work such that the Work does not: impede CITY's production or processes, create potential hazards to operating equipment and personnel, reduce the quality of the facility's products or effluent, or cause odors or other nuisances. E. Work not specifically covered in this Section or in referenced Sections may, in general, be completed at any time during regular working hours in accordance with the CITY Bid Documents and Special Conditions, subject to the requirements in this Section. F. CONTRACTOR has the option of providing additional temporary facilities that can eliminate or mitigate a constraint without additional cost to CITY, provided such additional temporary facilities: do not present hazards to the public, personnel, structures, and equipment; that such additional temporary facilities do not adversely affect CITY's ability to comply with Laws and Regulations, permits, and operating requirements; that such temporary facilities do not 11- 0025 -UT 01143 -1 Coordination with Owner's Operations generate or foster the generation of odors and other nuisances; and that requirements of the Contract Documents are fulfilled. G. Coordinate shutdowns with CITY. When possible, combine multiple tie -ins into a single shutdown to minimize impacts on CITY's operations and processes. H. Do not shut off or disconnect existing operating systems, unless accepted by CITY in writing. Operation of existing equipment will be by CITY unless otherwise specified or indicated. I. Bypassing: 1. Diversion of flows around treatment processes is allowed but must be coordinated with the CITY. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Substitute Sequence Submittal: When deviation from specified sequence is proposed, provide submittal explaining in detail the proposed sequence change and its effects, including evidence that CITY's operations will not be adversely affected by proposed change. List benefits of proposed sequence change, including benefits to Progress Schedule. Submit in accordance with Section 01630, Substitution Procedures. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shutdown Planning Submittal: a. For each shutdown, submit an inventory of labor and materials required to perform the shutdown and tie -in tasks, an estimate of time required to accomplish the complete shutdown including time for CITY to take down and start up existing equipment, systems, or conduits, and written description of steps required to complete the Work associated with the shutdown. b. Furnish submittal to CITY at least thirty days prior to proposed shutdown start date. Do not start shutdown until obtaining CITY's acceptance of shutdown planning submittal. 2. Shutdown Notification: After acceptance of shutdown planning submittal and prior to starting the shutdown, provide written notification to CITY of date and time each shutdown is to start. Provide notification at least 3 days in advance of each shutdown. 1.3 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS A. Specified in the Contract Documents are the sequence and shutdown durations, where applicable, for CITY'S equipment, systems, and conduits that are to be taken out of service temporarily for the Work. New equipment, materials, and systems may be used by CITY after the specified field quality controls and testing 11- 0025 -UT 01143 -2 Coordination with Owner's Operations are successfully completed and the materials or equipment are Substantially Complete. B. The following constraints apply to coordination with CITY's operations: 1. Operational Access: CITY'S personnel shall have access to equipment and areas that remain in operation. 2. Temporary Partitions and Enclosures: CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary partitions and enclosures necessary to maintain dust -free, heated, and ventilated spaces in areas that are adjacent to the Work and that must be kept operational. Comply with Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 3. Schedule and perform equipment and system start-ups for Tuesday through Thursday. Equipment and systems shall not be placed into operation on Monday, Friday, Saturday, and Sunday without prior approval of CITY. 4. Dead End Valves or Pipe: Provide blind flanges, watertight bulkheads, or valve at temporary and permanent terminuses of pipes and conduits. Blind flanges and bulkheads shall be suitable for the service and braced and blocked, as required, or otherwise restrained as directed by CITY. Temporary valves shall be suitable for their associated service. Where valve is provided at permanent terminus of pipe or conduit, also provide on downstream side of valve a blind flange with drain /flushing connection. 5. CITY will assist CONTRACTOR in dewatering process tanks, basins, conduits, and other work areas to be dewatered for shutdowns. Maintain clean and dry work area by pumping and properly disposing of fluid that accumulates in work areas. 6. Draining and Cleaning of Conduits, Tanks, and Basins: a. Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall dewater process tanks, basins, conduits, and pipelines at beginning of each shutdown. Flush, wash down, and clean tanks, basins, pipelines, conduits, and other work areas. b. CONTRACTOR shall remove liquids and solids and dispose of them at appropriate location at the Site as directed by CITY. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, contents of pipes, tanks, basins, and conduits undergoing modifications shall be transferred to existing process tanks or conduits at the Site with capacity sufficient to accept such discharges, using hoses, piping, pumps, or other means provided by CONTRACTOR. Discharge of fluids across floors is not allowed. c. If drainage point is not available on the piping or conduit to be drained, provide a wet tap using tapping saddle and valve or other method approved by ENGINEER. Uncontrolled spillage of contents of pipes or conduits is not allowed. d. Spillage shall be brought to ENGINEER's attention immediately, both verbally and in writing, and reported in accordance with Laws and Regulations. CONTRACTOR shall wash down spillage to floor drains or sumps and flush the system to prevent clogging and odors. If spillage is not suitable for discharge to the drainage system, such as chemical spills, as determined by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall 11- 0025 -UT 01143 -3 Coordination with Owner's Operations remove spillage by other method, such as vactor truck, acceptable to ENGINEER. 7. Regular plant deliveries of sludge and sodium bisulfate shall not be postponed due to road closure. 8. Screw pumps cannot be shutdown, see Section 1.5 below. 1.4 SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Perform the Work in the specified sequence. Certain phases or stages of the Work may require working 24 -hour days or work during hours outside of regular working hours. Work may be accelerated from a later stage to an earlier stage if CITY' s operations are not adversely affected by proposed sequence change, with CITY's acceptance. Stages specified in this Article 1.4 are sequence- dependent. B. Sequence: 1. Repair and test existing power circuit breaker in MCB -1 while plant is on existing generator power 2. Install temporary generator, fuel supply, and ATS at Temporary Generator and ATS Staging Area No. 1 and connect as shown on Contract Drawings 3. Remove Existing Generator No. 1 and demolish pad. Relocate existing Fuel Tank No. 1 to permanent location as shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Install new generator system as shown on Contract Drawings and with relocated Fuel Tank No. 1 connected. Connect to North Side distribution as shown on Contract Drawings. 5. Test and confirm 6. Relocate temporary generator, fuel supply, and ATS to Temporary Generator and ATS Staging Area No. 2 and connect as shown on Contract Drawings 7. Remove Existing Generator No. 2 and demolish pad. Relocate existing Fuel Tank No. 2 to permanent location as shown on Contract Drawings. 8. Connect South Side distribution to new generator system as shown on Contact Drawings. 9. Test and confirm 10. Replace ATS 3 and test 11. Remove temporary generator system 1.5 SHUTDOWNS A. General: 1. Terminology: A "shutdown" is when a portion of the normal operation of CITY's facility, whether equipment, systems, piping, roadway or conduit, has to be temporarily suspended or taken out of service to perform the Work. 2. Work that may interrupt normal operations shall be accomplished at times convenient to CITY. At the East Plant the Influent Screw pumps cannot be shut down. Temporary power to one or more pumps or bypass pumping 11- 0025 -UT 01143 -4 Coordination with Owner's Operations must be provided. All other plant shutdowns cannot exceed 20 minutes without temporary solutions for the process. Some power interruptions may need to be done during low flow periods. At the Marshall Street Lab all shutdowns of equipment most be closely coordinated as to NOT interrupt ongoing processes. Refrigeration and Incubation must not be disturbed for a maximum of 1hr. Coordinate all power interruptions with Lab personnel. Some power interruptions may need to be done after working hours. 3. Furnish at the Site, in close proximity to the shutdown work areas, tools, equipment, spare parts and materials, both temporary and permanent, necessary to successfully complete the shutdown. Complete to the extent possible, prefabrication of piping and other assemblies prior to the associated shutdown. Demonstrate to ENGINEER's satisfaction that CONTRACTOR has complied with these requirements before commencing the shutdown. 4. If CONTRACTOR's operations cause an unscheduled interruption of CITY's operations, immediately re- establish satisfactory operation for CITY. 5. Unscheduled shutdowns or interruptions of continued safe and satisfactory operation of CITY's facilities that result in fines or penalties by authorities having jurisdiction shall be paid solely by CONTRACTOR if, in ENGINEER's opinion, CONTRACTOR did not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or was negligent in the Work, or did not exercise proper precautions in conducting the Work. 6. Shutdowns shall be in accordance with Table 01143 -A of this Section. 7. For temporary, short-term shutdowns of smaller piping, conduits, equipment, and systems, coordinate requirements for such shutdowns with ENGINEER and CITY. B. Shutdowns of Electrical Systems: Comply with Laws and Regulations, including the National Electric Code. CONTRACTOR shall lock out and tag circuit breakers and switches operated by CITY and shall verify that affected cables and wires are de- energized to ground potential before shutdown Work is started. Upon completion of shutdown Work, remove the locks and tags and notify ENGINEER that facilities are available for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. In addition to requirements of this Section, conform to requirements of Section 01723, Cutting and Patching, and Section 01724, Connections to Existing Facilities. 1I-0025-UT 01143 -5 Coordination with Owner's Operations 3.2 SCHEDULES A. The schedules listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, are part of this Specification section: 1. Table 01143 -A, Schedule of Shutdowns. At a minimum these are some of the more major power interruptions, others still may be needed. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01143 -6 Coordination with Owner's Operations 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE 01143 -A SCHEDULE OF SHUTDOWNS EAST PLANT Shut- down No. Area Equipment Constraints Maximum Duration 1 Repair of Main Circuit Breaker Main Breaker In Main E- room Teco temp disconnect, on generator power 4hr 2 Tie —In of Temporary Generator Location One Main circuit Breaker & ATS Main breaker 20min 3 Replacement of ATS -1 MCC -1000 Multiple short shutdowns of MCC -1000 (Maximum 3 Occurrences) 20min 4 Replacement of ATS -1 A MCC -1001 Multiple short shutdowns of MCC- 1001 (Maximum 3 Occurrences) 20min 5 Tie —In of Temporary Generator Location Two MCC -2000 Multiple short shutdowns of MCC -2000 (Maximum 3 Occurrences) 20min 6 Replacement of ATS -2 MCC -2000 Multiple short shutdowns of MCC -2000 (Maximum 3 Occurrences) 20min 7 Replacement of ATS -3 MCC -3000 Multiple short shutdowns of MCC -3000 (Maximum 3 Occurrences) 20min TABLE 01143 -A SCHEDULE OF SHUTDOWNS Marshall St. Lab Shut- down No. Area Equipment Constraints Maximum Duration 1 Change out of EL 1 Panel EL -1 in electrical room Provide temporary power of critical equipment 4hr 2 Replacement of UPS UPS in UPS room Provide temporary power of critical equipment 4hr 11- 0025 -UT 01143 -7 Coordination with Owner's Operations 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01143 -8 Coordination with Owner's Operations SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the following types of allowances: 1. Contingency allowances. B. Authorization of Allowances: 1. Work that will be paid under an allowance will be authorized in OWNER's written instruction to CONTRACTOR. 2. Do not perform Work under an allowance without written authorization of OWNER. 1.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contingency allowances are stipulated amounts available as reserve for sole use by OWNER to cover unanticipated costs. B. When authorization of Work under contingency allowance is contemplated by OWNER for a defined scope, submit Change Order proposal to ENGINEER. Prepare Change Order proposal in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, except that payments within limit of contingency allowance shall exclude cost of bond and insurance premiums. 1.4 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included, in the Contract Price, amounts equal to the allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall be done for such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to ENGINEER. Upon final payment, the Contract Price shall be adjusted as required and an appropriate Contract Modification issued. CONTRACTOR agrees that the original Contract Price includes such sums as CONTRACTOR deems proper for costs and profit on account of allowances. No demand for additional cost or profit in connection therewith will be allowed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for allowances in accordance to Section 01330, Submittal Procedures, and Division 16 specifications. 11- 0025 -UT 01 21 00 -1 Allowances PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Contingency Allowances: 1. Schedule of Contingency Allowances: Include the following allowances for use in accordance with OWNER's instructions: Contract and Bid/Payment Item No. Allowance Name Include Contingency Allowance Amount Of 7 Unforeseen Installation Conflicts for the New Underground Ductbank $60,000 8 Replacement of New Direct Buried Conduit with Exposed Conduit $10,000 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01 21 00 -2 Allowances 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01230 ALTERNATIVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section identifies each alternative and describes the basic changes that shall be incorporated into the Work when that alternative is made part of the Work. B. Coordination: 1. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate related Work as required to complete the Work under each alternative included in the Contract. Include as part of each alternative miscellaneous devices, accessories, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not shown or indicated as part of the alternative. 2. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify in writing each entity involved of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Alternative No. 1 1. Manufacturer: Joe Filter by Simplex 2. Description: a. 2PPM water coalescing separator with collection sump and water detection switch. b. 7 GPM, cast -iron gear pump, 1/4 HP, 120V motor. c. Spares: (1) spin -on water separator filter & (2) Fuses, 2 AMP 250VAC. d. 6 gallon holding tank with float switch e. 18' cord with plug, 120V f. '/2" inlet ball valve and'' Y2" outlet ball valve, quick disconnect couplings g. up to 2,000 gallons 3. Reliance Energy Resources LLC Diesel Fuel Test Kits a. (12) Dissolved Water Detection Kits for Diesel b. (12) Fuel Degradation Test Kits for Diesel PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT 01230 -1 Alternatives 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01230 -2 Alternatives SECTION 01271 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The items listed starting with Article 1.5 of this Section refer to and are the same pay items listed in the Bid Form and constitute all pay items for completing the Work. No direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory works, plant services, CONTRACTOR's field offices, layout surveys, Project signs, sanitary requirements, testing, safety provisions and safety devices, submittals and record drawings, water supplies, power and fuel, traffic maintenance, removal of waste, security, coordination with CITY's operations, information technology (including hardware, software, and services) required during construction, bonds, insurance, or other requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. Compensation for all services, items, materials, and equipment shall be included in prices stipulated for the unit price pay items listed in this Section and included in the Contract. B. Each unit price shall include an amount considered by the CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 1.2 ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES A. ENGINEER's estimated quantities for items of Unit Price Work, as included in the Contract, are approximate only and are included solely for purpose of comparing Bids and pricing. CITY does not expressly or by implication agree that nature of materials encountered below the ground surface or actual quantities of material encountered or required will correspond with the quantities included in the Contract at the time of award and reserves right to increase or decrease quantities or to eliminate quantities as the CITY may deem necessary. Except as provided in Article 1.3 of this Section, CONTRACTOR or CITY will not be entitled to adjustment in price of Unit Price Work items as a result of change in estimated quantity and agrees to accept the unit prices accepted in the Bid as complete and total compensation for additions caused by changes or alterations in the Unit Price Work directed by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 01271 -1 Measurement and Payment 1.3 ADJUSTMENT OF UNIT PRICES FOR INCREASE OR DECREASE OF ESTIMATED QUANTITIES A. Increases or decreases in the quantity of an item of Unit Price Work will be determined by comparing total payable quantity of Unit Price Work with ENGINEER's estimated quantity indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Notwithstanding other provision of the Contract Documents, if total payable quantity of Unit Price Work for an item with an as- awarded total value of five percent or more of the as- awarded Contract Price, varies from ENGINEER's estimated of quantity by more than 25 percent above or below ENGINEER's estimated quantity, that item's unit price will be subject to review by CITY. If warranted, an equitable adjustment will be made by Change Order to credit CITY with reduction in cost or compensate CONTRACTOR for increased cost resulting from the change in quantity. The unit price adjustment, if any, will be based on cost increase or decrease due solely to variation above 125 percent or below 75 percent of ENGINEER's estimated quantity. C. CITY's review for possible unit price cost adjustment will be at a time CITY deems reasonable and proper. D. Payment for Unit Price Work item that has an as- awarded computed total value of less than five percent of the sum of the as- awarded total Contract Price will be made at the unit price in the Contract, regardless of an increase or decrease in quantity. 1.4 RELATED PROVISIONS A. Payments to CONTRACTOR: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Agreement. B. Changes in Contract Price: Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. C. Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01291, Schedule of Values. 1.5 BID ITEMS A. Item 1: Mobilization /Demobilization and General Conditions (East WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 1 shall be based on an allowance for mobilization/demobilization and General Conditions. 2. Payment for mobilization will include costs associated preparatory work and operations including moving of personnel, equipment, facility, and all else necessary to commence Work. The costs of bonds, insurance, and pre - construction expenses shall also be included. 3. Payment for demobilization will include costs associated with finalizing 11- 0025 -UT 01271 -2 Measurement and Payment work including but not limited to those operations necessary for the removal of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals from the project site. 4. Payment for General Conditions will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 specifications, and any other requirements of the Contract Documents not addressed by any other of the following bid items. 5. Payment shall be in accordance with Section 01291.. B. Item 2 -a: Owner- Direct Purchase (ODP) 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank (East WRF) 1. The Contractor will provide the price of specific items of equipment, as listed below: • 800kW Generator w/Enclosure & Day Tank (Section 16231) 2. The Contractor shall employ the services of the selected Vendor of the ODP equipment and incorporate such materials and services into the project. 3. The Contractor shall negotiate with and select a Vendor for the equipment listed above. The selected Vendor shall agree to provide the materials and services as described in the applicable scope of work. The equipment prices will be held firm by the selected Vendor for nine (9) months from the date of "Notice to Proceed ". The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the ordering of the equipment and the services from the selected Vendor throughout the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all the costs related to the equipment or service price increases by the selected Vendor after the nine (9) months from the date of the "Notice to Proceed ". 4. The Contractor shall provide under Bid Item 2 -c all the work not described in the selected Vendor's scope of supply including, but not limited to, all coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, transportation, unloading, and storage. 5. Measurement for payment of lump sum price included in the Bid Form for 800kW Generator w/Enclosure & Day Tank shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment will be deducted from the Contract by Change Order. 6. Payment of the lump sum price included in Pay Item 2 -a shall not be made. It is intended that this equipment be directly purchased by the Owner in order to realize tax savings. C. Item 2 -b: ODP 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank: Sales Tax Savings (East WRF) 1. Measurement for payment of lump sum price stipulated in the Bid Form for ODP — Sales Tax Savings shall not be made. It is intended that this tax savings amount be deducted from the Contract by Change Order. 2. Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 2 -b shall not be made. D. Item 2 -c: ODP 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank: Coordination, Installation, Testing, and Contractor Warranty of Generator, Enclosure & Day Tank (East WRF) 11- 0025 -UT 01271 -3 Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for the 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank Coordination, Installation, Testing, and Contractor Warranty of Generator, Enclosure & Day Tank shall not be made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid. 2. Payment: The General Contractor will provide the price of specific items of equipment and materials, as listed below: • 800kW Generator w/Enclosure & Day Tank: Coordination, Installation, Testing, and Contractor Warranty, (Section 16231) The Contractor shall provide all work not described in the Vendor's scope of supply including, but not limited to, installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O &M manuals in electronic format and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned Vendor's scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but necessary for the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section. E. Item 3: Structural (East WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 3 shall be full compensation for providing all site work, concrete work and masonry work required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Divisions 2, 3 and 5 and other related Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Structural Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Divisions 2, 3 and 5 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Item 4: Electrical (East WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 4 shall be full compensation for providing all electrical work required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Divisions 1 and 16 and other related Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Electrical Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 and 16 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Item 5: Mechanical (East WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 5 shall be full compensation for providing all exposed piping, valves and specials required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Division 15 and other related Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Mechanical Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 15 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract 01271 -4 Measurement and Payment 11- 0025 -UT Documents. H. Item 6: Instrumentation & Controls (East WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 6 shall be full compensation for providing all instrumentation and controls work required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Divisions 1 and 13 and other related Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Instrumentation & Controls Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 and 13 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract Documents. I. Item 7: Allowance for unforeseen installation conflicts for the new Underground Ductbanks. (East WRF) See Appendix for list of Record Drawings that indicate the owner's best knowledge of potential underground conflicts for the proposed ductbank route. 1. Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor. 2. Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 01210 Allowances. J. Item 8: Allowance for the replacement of the new Direct Buried Conduit with Exposed Conduit (East WRF) 1. Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor. 2. Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 01210 Allowances. K. Item 9: Mobilization/Demobilization and General Conditions (Marshall Street WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 9 shall be based on an allowance for mobilization/demobilization and General Conditions. 2. Payment for mobilization will include costs associated preparatory work and operations including moving of personnel, equipment, facility, and all else necessary to commence Work. The costs of bonds, insurance, and pre - construction expenses shall also be included. 3. Payment for demobilization will include costs associated with finalizing work including but not limited to those operations necessary for the removal of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals from the project site. 4. Payment for General Conditions will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 specifications, and any other requirements of the Contract Documents not addressed by any other of the following bid items. L. Item 10: Electrical (Marshall Street WRF) L Measurement of lump sum price for Item 10 shall be full compensation for providing all electrical work required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Divisions 1 and 16 and other related 11- 0025 -UT 01271 -5 Measurement and Payment Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Electrical Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 and 16 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract Documents. M. Item 11: Instrumentation & Controls (Marshall Street WRF) 1. Measurement of lump sum price for Item 11 shall be full compensation for providing all instrumentation and controls work required to construct the Project as shown on the drawings and as specified under Divisions 1 and 13 and other related Divisions but not specifically included under other items. 2. Payment for Instrumentation & Controls Work will include costs associated with all of the work necessary to comply with the requirements of the Division 1 and 13 specifications, and any other related requirements of the Contract Documents. N. Item 12: East WRF: Simplex Model "Joe Filter" and connection appurtenances. (East WRF) Additive Alternate 1. Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor. 2. Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with Section 01230 Alternatives. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01271 -6 Measurement and Payment SECTION 01291 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Submit to CITY for acceptance a Schedule of Values that allocates cost to each item of the Work in accordance with the Bid Items found in Section IVa 01271, Measurement and Payment. Schedule of Value list of line items shall correspond to each aspect of the Work, establishing in detail the portion of the Contract Price allocated to each major component of the Work. B. Upon request of CITY, support values with data that substantiate their correctness. C. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values to CITY for initial review. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate CITY's comments into the Schedule of Values and resubmit to CITY. CITY may require corrections and re- submittals until Schedule of Values is acceptable. D. Schedule of Values and the Progress Schedule updates specified in Section 01322, Progress Schedule, shall be basis for preparing each Application for Payment. Schedule of Values may be used as a basis for negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. E. Include in Schedule of Values unit price payment items with their associated quantity. Provide in the Schedule of Values detailed breakdown of unit prices when required by CITY. F. Requirements for preliminary Schedule of Values and Schedule of Values are: 1. Schedule of Values shall show division of Work between CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors. Line items for Work to be done by Subcontractor shall include the word, "(SUBCONTRACTED) ". 2. Schedule of Values shall include breakdown of costs for materials and equipment, installation, and other costs used in preparing the Bid by CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor. List purchase and delivery costs for materials and equipment for which CONTRACTOR may apply for payment as stored materials. 3. Include separate amounts for each Specification Section in the Contract Documents by structure, building, and work area. 4. Identify each line item with number corresponding to the associated Specification Section number. List sub -items of major products or systems, as appropriate or when requested by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 01291 -1 Schedule of Values 5. Sum of individual values shown on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of associated payment item. Sum of payment item totals in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price. 6. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit. Do not include overhead and profit as separate item(s). 7. Include separate line item for each allowance, and for each unit price item 8. Include line item for bonds and insurance in amount not exceeding 2.0 percent of the Contract Price. This may be applied for in the first Application for Payment. 9. Include items for the General Conditions, permits (when applicable), construction Progress Schedule, and other items required by CITY. Include such items in Applications for Payment on schedule accepted by CITY 10. Line items for Site maintenance such as dust control, snow removal, compliance with storm water pollution prevention plans and permits, spill prevention control and countermeasures plans, and for construction photographic documentation; temporary utilities and temporary facilities, field offices, temporary controls, field engineering, and similar Work shall be included in the Schedule of Values and proportioned in Applications for Payment throughout duration of the Work. 11. Include separate line items under each appropriate payment item for mobilization and demobilization. Document for CITY the activities included in mobilization and demobilization line items. a. Mobilization will be limited to 2 percent of the Contract Price, and will be paid in 2 payments, with each payment being 50% of the total mobilization cost. b. Demobilization shall be at least 2 percent of the Contract Price and shall be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial Completion, or other schedule accepted by CITY. 12. Costs for submittals, operations and maintenance manuals, field testing, and training of operations and maintenance personnel shall be as follows, unless otherwise accepted by CITY: a. Up to eight percent of cost (including overhead and profit) of each equipment item, exclusive of transportation and installation costs associated with that item, may be allocated to preparation of submittals and may be included in the Application for Payment following CITY's approval of Shop Drawings (and acceptance of other submittals, as applicable) required for fabricating or purchasing for that item for the Work. b. Up to three percent of total cost of each item (including overhead and profit), including materials and equipment, and installation, may be apportioned to testing and included in the Application for Payment following CITY's acceptance of the associated written Site testing report(s). 11- 0025 -UT 01291 -2 Schedule of Values c. Up to a total of four percent of equipment cost (including overhead and profit), exclusive of transportation and installation costs, may be apportioned to operations and maintenance manuals and training of operations and maintenance personnel, which may be included in the Application for Payment following completion of training for that item. 13. Schedule of Values shall include an itemized list of Work by work area, as applicable, for Work included in Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations. 14. Submit Schedule of Values on 8.5 -inch by 11 -inch white paper. 15. Coordinate Schedule of Values with resource loading of the Progress Schedule, in accordance with Section 01322, Progress Schedule. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit to CITY 5 copies of Schedule of Values. 2. Content of Schedule of Values submittals shall conform to Article 1.1 of this Section. 3. Time Frames for Submittals: a. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within ten days of date that the Contract Times commence running in accordance with the Notice to Proceed. b. Submittal of the Schedule of Values shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. CITY will not accept Applications for Payment without an acceptable Schedule of Values. c. When required by CITY, promptly submit updated Schedule of Values to include cost breakdowns for changes in the Contract Price. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01291 -3 Schedule of Values 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01291 -4 Schedule of Values SECTION 01297 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. General. 1. CONTRACTOR's requests for payment shall be in accordance with the Agreement, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications. 2. Applications for Payment shall be in the form of Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) document C -620, "Contractor's Application for Payment ". B. Procedure: 1. Submit to CITY three originals of each complete Application for Payment and other documents to accompany the Application for Payment. 2. CITY will act on request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. C. Each request for progress payment shall include: 1. Completed Application for Payment form, including summary/signature page, progress estimate sheets, and stored materials summary. Progress estimate sheets shall have the same level of detail as the Schedule of Values. 2. For materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored, submit documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Legibly indicate on invoice or bill of sale the specific materials or equipment included in the payment request and corresponding bid /payment item number for each. 3. For payment requests that include payment for Work under an allowance, submit documentation acceptable to CITY of the authorization of allowance Work. 4. For payment requests (other than request for final payment) that include reduction or payment of retainage in an amount greater than that required in the Contract Documents, submit on form acceptable to CITY consent of surety to partial release or reduction of retainage. D. Requirements for request for final payment are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01772, Closeout Requirements. E. The allowance indicated for permit, licenses and fees Allowance in Bid Form and Schedule of Values is to pay for all permits, licenses and other fees required of the CONTRACTOR from the various agencies having jurisdiction for construction of 11- 0025 -UT 01297 -1 Progress Payment Procedures the project. The allowance shown on the Schedule of Bid Prices is an estimate of fees required. Payment will be based on the actual permit, license or fee paid directly to agency, documented by paid receipts, specifically excluding any labor, mark -up, overhead and profit, administration and other costs involved in obtaining permits or licenses or paying fees. Fees specifically excluded from this allowance include but are not limited to reinspection fees and expired permit fees. The CITY reserves the right to award any, all, or none of the money associated with this allowance. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 ATTACHMENTS A. The forms listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, are part of this Specification Section: 1. EJCDC document C -620, "Contractor's Application for Payment" (four pages). 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01297 -2 Progress Payment Procedures SECTION 01301 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. A pre - construction conference will be held for the Project. 2. CONTRACTOR shall attend the conference prepared to discuss all items on the agenda. 3. CITY will distribute an agenda, preside at conference, and prepare and distribute minutes to all conference participants and others as requested. B. Purpose of conference is to designate responsible personnel, establish working relationships, discuss preliminary schedules submitted by CONTRACTOR, and review administrative and procedural requirements for the Project. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters will be established. C. Date, Time and Location: Conference will be held after execution of the Contract and before Work starts at the Site. CITY will establish the date, time, and location of conference and notify the interested and involved parties. D. Prior to the conference, submit the following preliminary schedules in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Progress Schedule. 2. Schedule of Submittals. 3. Schedule of Values. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide information required and contribute appropriate items for discussion. CONTRACTOR shall bring to the conference the following, with sufficient number of copies for each attendee: 1. Preliminary Progress Schedule, as submitted to CITY. 2. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals, as submitted to CITY. 3. Preliminary Schedule of Values, as submitted to CITY. 4. List of emergency contacts for CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors. Emergency contacts shall be reachable 24 -hours per day, 7 days per week. 1.2 REQUIRED ATTENDANCE A. Representative of each entity attending the conference shall be authorized to act on that entity's behalf. 11- 0025 -UT 01301 -1 Pre - Construction Conference B. Contractor Attendance: Conference shall be attended by CONTRACTOR's project manager, Site superintendent, project managers for major Subcontractors, and major equipment Suppliers as CONTRACTOR deems appropriate. C. Other attendees will be representatives of: 1. CITY. 2. Authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, i.e. Building Dept. Electrical & Building Inspectors. 3. Utility owners, as applicable. 4. Others as requested by CITY, or CONTRACTOR. 1.3 AGENDA A. Purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish working relationships. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters will be established. A complete agenda will be furnished to CONTRACTOR prior to the conference date. However, CONTRACTOR shall be prepared to discuss all of the following: 1. Designation of responsible personnel. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Progress Schedule. 4. Critical work sequencing. 5. Transmittal, review and distribution of CONTRACTOR submittals. 6 Schedule of Submittals. 7. Processing of Field Orders, requests for information and clarification, and Change Orders. 8. Requirements for copies of Contract Documents. 9. Schedule of Values. 10. Processing and schedule of Applications for Payments. 11. Use of Site, office and storage areas. 12. CITY's requirements. 13. CONTRACTOR responsibility for safety and first aid procedures. 14. Security. 15. Housekeeping. 16. Field offices. 17. Maintaining record drawings. 18. Permits. 19. Emergency telephone numbers. 20. Operation and maintenance manuals. 21. Temporary utilities. 22. Pre - submittal conference(s). 23. Any other Project related items. 24. Discuss AHJ's electrical inspection requirements and proper advanced notification request procedure for inspections. 11- 0025 -UT 01301 -2 Pre - Construction Conference PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01301 -3 Pre- Construction Conference 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01301 -4 Pre - Construction Conference SECTION 01310 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work, including testing agencies whether hired by CONTRACTOR, CITY, or others; Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others with whom coordination is necessary, in accordance with the General Conditions, Special Conditions, and this Section, to complete the Work within the Contract Times and in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. In accordance with the General Conditions as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with and coordinate the Work with other contractors, utility service companies, CITY's employees working at the Site, and other entities working at the Site, in accordance with Section 01110, Summary of Work. C. CONTRACTOR will not be responsible or liable for damage unless damage is through negligence of CONTRACTOR, or Subcontractors, Supplier, or other entity employed by CONTRACTOR. D. Attend and participate in all project coordination and progress meetings, and report on the progress of the Work and compliance with the Progress Schedule. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 1 I - 0025 -UT 01310 -1 Project Coordination 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01310 -2 Project Coordination SECTION 01312 PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Progress meetings will be held throughout the Project. CONTRACTOR shall attend each progress meeting prepared to discuss in detail all items on the agenda. 2. CITY will preside at progress meetings and will prepare and distribute minutes of progress meetings to all meeting participants and others as requested. B. Date and Time: 1. Regular Meetings: Every month on a day and time agreeable to CITY, and CONTRACTOR. 2. Other Meetings: As required. C. Place: CONTRACTOR's field office at the Site or other location mutually agreed upon by CITY and CONTRACTOR. 1.2 REQUIRED ATTENDANCE A. Representatives present for each entity shall be authorized to act on that entity's behalf. B. Required Attendees: 1. CONTRACTOR: 2. CITY. 3. Others, as appropriate. 1.3 AGENDA A. Agenda will include, but will not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Transcript of previous meeting. 2. Progress since last meeting. a. CONTRACTOR's. b. Subcontractor's. 3. Completion status. 4. Planned progress for next period. 5. Problems, conflicts and observations. 6. Status of Shop Drawings, and requests for information or clarification. 7. Change Orders. 11-0025-UT 01312 -1 Progress Meetings 8. Payment Applications. 9. Quality standards and control. 10. Schedules, updated Project Schedules, including off -site fabrication and delivery schedules; corrective measures, if required. 11. Coordination between parties. 12. Permits. 13. Safety concerns. 14. Construction photographs. 15. Record drawings. 16. Punch list status. 17. RFI and AAR status. 18. Other business. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01312 -2 Progress Meetings SECTION 01322 PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit Progress Schedules and related documents in accordance with the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section, unless otherwise accepted by CITY. 2. Maintain and update Progress Schedules and related documents. 3. Progress Schedule shall be resource - loaded CPM Progress Schedule. 4. CITY's acceptance of the Progress Schedule or related documents, and comments or opinions concerning activities in the Progress Schedule and related documents shall not control CONTRACTOR's independent judgment concerning means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, unless the associated means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure is directed by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for complying with the Contract Times. B. Use of Float: 1. Float belongs to the Project and may be used by CITY or CONTRACTOR to accommodate changes in the Work, or to mitigate the effect of events that delay performance or conformance with the Contract Times. 2. Changes or delays that influence Activities that have float and that do not extend the Critical Path are not justification for an extension of the Contract Times. C. Factors Affecting the Progress Schedule: 1. In preparing the Progress Schedule, take into consideration submittal requirements and submittal review times, time for fabricating and delivering materials and equipment, Subcontractors' work, availability and abilities of workers, availability of construction equipment, weather conditions, restrictions in operations at the Site and coordination with CITY's operations, and other factors that have the potential to affect completion of the Work within the Contract Times. 2. Comply with sequencing requirements indicated in the following: a. Section 01110, Summary of Work. b. Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations. 11-0025-UT 01322 -1 Progress Schedule 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The following terms are defined for this Section and supplement the terms defined in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions: 1. Activity: An element of the construction work that has the following specific characteristics: consumes time, consumes resources, has a definable start and finish, is assignable, and is measurable. 2. Constraint: An imposed date on the Progress Schedule or an imposed tie between Activities. The Contract Times are Constraints. 3. CPM Progress Schedule: Computerized Progress Schedule in Critical Path Method (CPM) format which accounts for the entire Work, defines the interrelationships between elements of the Work, reflects the uncompleted Work, and indicates the sequence with which the Work has been completed, indicates the sequence in which uncompleted Work will be completed, and indicates the duration of each Activity. 4. Critical Path: The continuous chain of Activities with the longest duration for completion within the Contract Times. 5. Early Start: The earliest possible date an Activity can start according to the assigned relationships among Activities. 6. Early Finish: The earliest date an Activity can finish according to the assigned relationships among the Activities. 7. Late Finish: The latest date an Activity can finish without extending the Contract Times. 8. Late Start: The latest date an Activity can start without extending the Contract Times. 9. Float: The time difference between the calculated duration of the Activity chain and the Critical Path. 10. Total Float: The total number of days that an Activity (or chain of Activities) can be delayed without affecting the Contract Times. 11. Network Diagram: A time - scaled logic diagram depicting the durations and relationships of the Activities. 12. Work Areas, Area, or System: A logical breakdown of the Project elements or a group of Activities which, when collectively assembled, are readily identifiable on the Project (for example, yard piping, a structure or building, a treatment process, or other logical grouping). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Progress Schedule Preparer: a. CONTRACTOR shall retain services of a scheduling consultant or shall self - prepare and maintain the Progress Schedule using qualified employee with experience in scheduling, and experienced with the scheduling software required for this Project, and experience serving as Progress Schedule preparer on construction projects of similar type, size, and scope to this Project. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -2 Progress Schedule b. Progress Schedule preparer shall have not less than five years experience using the schedule software required on construction projects of similar type, size, and scope as this Project. c. Prior to engaging a scheduling consultant or using a qualified employee, submit to CITY the following: 1) Name and address of proposed Progress Schedule preparer and the names of personnel who will be assigned to scheduling the Project. 2) Information sufficient to demonstrate that proposed Progress Schedule preparer and scheduling personnel to be assigned to the Project possess qualifications complying with requirements of this Section. For each person assigned, submit list of similar type, size, contract value of projects, names and contact information of engineer or architect and owner. d. CITY's Review of Qualifications: 1) CITY will respond to CONTRACTOR whether proposed scheduling personnel are acceptable within 14 days after CITY's receipt of complete qualifications. 2) If qualifications are not acceptable, submit qualifications of acceptable personnel within 14 days of receipt of CITY's non- acceptance. 3) CITY's acceptance or non - acceptance of qualifications does not release CONTRACTOR from its obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quantity of each submittal required and timing of submittals are in this Section. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: I. Ninety -day Bar Chart: a. Preliminary 90 -day bar chart. b. Acceptable 90 -day bar chart. 2. Initial Progress Schedules: a. Preliminary Progress Schedule with associated Network Diagrams, narrative report, and mathematical tabulations. b. Acceptable Progress Schedule with associated Network Diagrams, narrative report, and mathematical tabulations. c. Preliminary resource - loaded Progress Schedule and associated reports. d. Acceptable resource - loaded Progress Schedule and associated reports. e. Submit each Progress Schedule submittal with letter of transmittal complying with requirements of Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 3. Progress Schedule Updates. a. Progress Schedule updates shall comply with requirements of this Section, and shall include updated Progress Schedule, narrative report, updated Network Diagram when relationships among Activities are changed, and updated mathematical tabulations. b. Submit updated Progress Schedule at each progress meeting. If a 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -3 Progress Schedule Progress Schedule remains unchanged from one progress meeting to the next, submit a written statement to that effect. For monthly Progress Schedule submittals, bring to progress meeting the number of copies of the updated Progress Schedule specified in Section 01312, Progress Meetings. 4. Look -Ahead Schedules a. Submit 60 -day look -ahead schedule at each progress meeting. 5. Time Impact Analyses: Submit in accordance with this Section. 6. Recovery Schedule: Submit in accordance with this Section. 7. Qualifications: a. Progress Schedule preparer, and other personnel that will assist Progress Schedule preparer in preparing and maintaining the Progress Schedule. 1.5 INITIAL PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Type and Organization of Progress Schedules: 1. Prepare Progress Schedule using the latest version of Primavera Project Planner software with Primavision, unless other scheduling software is acceptable to CITY. 2. Sheet Size: 22 inches by 34 inches, unless otherwise accepted by CITY. 3. Time Scale: Indicate first date of each work week. 4. Activity Designations: Indicate title and related Specification Section number. 5. Progress Schedules shall be CPM Progress Schedules. 6. Organization: a. Indicate on the separate Schedule of Submittals dates for submitting and reviewing Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals. b. Group deliveries of materials and equipment into a separate sub - schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule. c. Group construction into Work Area sub - schedules (that are part of the Progress Schedule) by Activity. d. Clearly indicate the Critical Path on the Progress Schedule. e. Organize each Work Area sub - schedule by Specification Section number. B. Preliminary Progress Schedule: 1. Within 7 days after the Contract Times commence running, CONTRACTOR shall submit to CITY the preliminary Progress Schedule covering the entire Project, with associated Network Diagrams. 2. Submit ten copies of preliminary Progress Schedule and associated reports and schedule - related documents to accompany the preliminary Progress Schedule, in accordance with the Submittals Article of this Section. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 3. CITY will conduct a timely review of the preliminary Progress Schedule. 4. Preliminary Progress Schedule shall comply with the Contract Documents relative to Progress Schedules, but need not be resource - loaded. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -4 Progress Schedule C. Initial Acceptance of Progress Schedule: 1. At least 75 days after the Contract Times commence running, a scheduling conference attended by CONTRACTOR, Progress Schedule preparer, CITY, and others as appropriate will be held at the Site to review for acceptability to CITY the preliminary Progress Schedule and associated Network Diagram and other reports and schedule - related documents required. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional 15 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the Progress Schedule and associated Network Diagram. Other than bonds and insurance, mobilization, and approved Shop Drawings (and acceptance of other submittals, as applicable) required for fabricating or purchasing materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, no progress payment will be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable Progress Schedule, Network Diagram, and other reports and schedule - related documents required are submitted to CITY. 2. Submit ten copies each of acceptable Progress Schedule with Network Diagram, reports, and other schedule- related documents required to accompany the initial acceptable Progress Schedule, in accordance with the Submittals Article of this Section. Submit in accordance with Section01330, Submittal Procedures. 3. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to CITY if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Such acceptance will not impose on CITY responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. 4. Initially- accepted Progress Schedule shall be identified as the baseline Progress Schedule. D. Resource - Loaded Progress Schedule: 1. Within seven days after CITY's acceptance of the Progress Schedule, submit to CITY resource - loaded Progress Schedule complying with resource - loading requirements in this Section. 2. Submit ten copies each of the preliminary and the acceptable resource - loaded Progress Schedules and associated reports to accompany the initial submittals of resource - loaded Progress Schedules in accordance with the Submittals Article of this Section. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 3. Resource - loaded Progress Schedules will be reviewed by CITY within fourteen days of CITY's receipt, and CITY's comments will be transmitted to CONTRACTOR. 4. Make revisions required in accordance with CITY's comments and resubmit to CITY within seven days of CONTRACTOR's receipt of CITY's comments. 5. Resource - loaded Progress Schedule accepted by CITY shall be the basis for determining the amount of each CONTRACTOR progress payment. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -5 Progress Schedule E. If the Progress Schedule reflects completion date(s) different than the Contract Times, the Contract Times are not thereby voided, nullified, or affected. The Contract Times govern. Where the Progress Schedule reflects completion date(s) that are earlier than the Contract Times, CITY may accept such Progress Schedule with CONTRACTOR to specifically understand that no Claim for additional Contract Times or additions to the Contract Price shall be brought against CITY resulting from CONTRACTOR's failure to complete the Work by the earlier date(s) indicated on the accepted Progress Schedule. 1.6 PROGRESS SCHEDULE UPDATES A. Updates: 1. Update the Progress Schedule each month. If during progress of the Work events develop that necessitate changes in the initially accepted Progress Schedule (e.g., baseline Progress Schedule), identify updated Progress Schedules sequentially as Progress Schedule Revision 1, 2, 3, and continuing in sequence as required. Number the Progress Schedule submittals in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 2. CONTRACTOR's Progress Schedule update shall include a narrative report in accordance with this Section. Narrative report shall include description of current progress and status of each Area of the Project, a description of progress for the period, a description of the Critical Path, a discussion of current or potential delays, Change Orders (pending and approved in since the previous Progress Schedule update), and other problems associated with maintaining the Work on schedule. 3. The update to the Progress Schedule shall be based on retained logic. Progress override logic is not allowed. 4. Required scheduling software, and schedule organization, format, and content for updated Progress Schedules are identical to that required in this Section for initial Progress Schedules. 5. Submit to CITY ten hard copies of the updated Progress Schedule, Network Diagram, narrative report, and other schedule - related reports and documents required, and two compact discs (CD) each with a complete software backup copy of the Progress Schedule. 6. Submit updated Network Diagrams when revisions are proposed to the logic. Indicate in the narrative report delays that have occurred since the previous updated Progress Schedule. Payment for out -of- sequence Work is not allowed. B. Monthly Schedule Meeting: 1. During the month, utilizing the previous month's 60 -day look -ahead schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record the percent complete, start and finish dates of each scheduled Activity with the remaining duration for each Activity started but not completed, including Activities associated with procurement of materials and equipment. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -6 Progress Schedule 2. On the same day each month, at least one week prior to a progress meeting, CONTRACTOR, Progress Schedule preparer, CITY, and others as appropriate shall meet at the Site and tour the Work to review and update the schedule and progress information gathered by CONTRACTOR during the month. After acceptance of CONTRACTOR's updated data, Progress Schedule preparer shall use this information to update the Progress Schedule. 1.7 NETWORK DIAGRAMS (PERT CHARTS) A. Network Diagrams, General: 1. Prepare and submit Network Diagrams, as generated using the scheduling software on paper of the size indicated for Progress Schedules in this Section. 2. Group Network Diagrams by Area and show the order and interdependence of Activities and sequence and quantities in which the Work will be accomplished. 3. Do not use match lines on Network Diagrams. Depict interrelationships to or from Activities outside the Area shown using an Activity symbol with Activity number and description. 4. In preparing Network Diagrams, comply with the basic concept of precedence diagramming method (PDM) network scheduling to show how start of a given Activity depends on completion of preceding Activities, and how the Activity's completion may affect the start of subsequent Activities. 5. Level of schedule detail shall define the day -to -day Activities of the Work. B. Network Diagram Content: 1. Clearly indicate the Critical Path and distinguish the Critical Path from other paths on the network. 2. Organize Network Diagrams by grouping into major Work Areas, including one for procurement of materials and equipment, and by specific Activity within each Area. 3. Logic diagrams shall include the following: a. Activity number. b. Activity description. c. Activity duration (in work days). d. Critical Path denoted. e. Float for each Activity. f. Activity or System designation. g. Coded Area designation. h. Responsibility code (e.g., CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, trade, operation, Suppliers, or other entity responsible for accomplishing an Activity). i. Shift number (if more than one shift per day is to be employed). C. Network Diagram Revisions: 1. General: 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -7 Progress Schedule a. When conditions develop that require revisions to logic or durations of the Network Diagram associated with the initially accepted Progress Schedule (e.g., baseline Progress Schedule), identify updates to the Network Diagram in the same manner required in this Section for Progress Schedule updates. b. Revision of the logic or durations from the baseline Progress Schedule initially accepted by CITY shall be submitted to CITY for acceptance. c. Incorporate into the Progress Schedule revisions to logic or duration accepted by CITY, and include in monthly narrative report both a description of revisions and listing of Activities affected by revisions. d. Changes resulting from Change Orders and other additions or deletions, shall be fully incorporated into the Progress Schedule and Network Diagram on the first update after the associated Change Order is approved by CITY, including adjustments to the Contract Price. 2. Submit revised Network Diagrams with updated Progress Schedule submittals. 1.8 RESOURCE LOADING REPORTS A. Resource Loading: 1. After CITY's initial acceptance of the Progress Schedule, CONTRACTOR shall assign resources for personnel labor - hours, materials, and equipment to each construction Activity within each responsibility code. Submit resource schedule reports with each updated Progress Schedule. 1.9 NARRATIVE REPORT A. Prepare and include with the preliminary Progress Schedule and each subsequent Progress Schedule submittal, written narrative report describing the schedule - related requirements of the Contract Documents and CONTRACTOR's plan and schedule for complying with such requirements. Narrative report shall describe the methods of sequencing and operation, resources to be employed, time frames for the construction of each of the major Systems on the Project, and time frames for complying with the Contract Times and CONTRACTOR's interim schedule milestones. 1.10 TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS A. Time Impact Analyses, General: 1. Prepare and submit a time impact analysis when one or more of the following occurs: a Change Order proposal is prepared, a Work Change Directive is issued that will affect the Progress Schedule, or when delays are experienced. Time impact analysis shall illustrate the influence of each Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay, as applicable, on the Contract Times and schedule milestones. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -8 Progress Schedule 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Each time impact analysis shall include a sketch (fragnet) demonstrating how CON'T'RACTOR proposes to incorporate the changes in the Work or, as applicable, delays into the Progress Schedule. Fragnet shall include all logic, resource changes, and additions required as result of said Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay. 3. Fragnet shall show all CPM logic revisions for the Work associated with the Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay and its relationship to other Activities in the Network Diagram. 4. Time impact analysis shall demonstrate the time impact, based on date the Change Order or Work Change Directive was given to CONTRACTOR, or as applicable the date the delay was implemented; the status of the Work at that point in time; and the Activity duration of affected Activities. Activity duration used in the time impact analysis shall be those included in the latest update of the Progress Schedule accepted by CITY, closest to the time of the start of the delay or start of the Change Order or Work Change Directive, as adjusted by mutual, written agreement of the parties and CITY. 5. Timing of Time Impact Analysis: a. Submit each time impact analysis within 7 days after the following, as applicable: 1) Start of the delay. 2) After the submittal of Change Order proposal. 3) After CONTRACTOR receipt of Work Change Directive. b. When CONTRACTOR does not submit time impact analysis for a specific change or delay, within the specified period of time for such submittal, such non - submittal shall be construed that no extension of the Contract Times is required. B. Evaluation by CITY and Acceptance: 1. CITY's evaluation of each time impact analysis comprised of complete information will be completed in timely manner after CITY's receipt. Changes in the Contract Times will be made only by Change Order. 2. When mutual agreement is reached between the parties on effect of the change or delay in the Project, incorporate into the next Progress Schedule update the associated fragnets illustrating the influence of changes and delays. 1.11 RECOVERY SCHEDULES A. Recovery Schedules, General: 1. When updated Progress Schedule indicates that the ability to comply with the Contract Times falls 30 or more days behind schedule, and there is no excusable delay, Change Order, or Work Change Directive to support an extension of the Contract Times, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a Progress Schedule demonstrating CONTRACTOR's plan to accelerate the Work to achieve compliance with the Contract Times ( "recovery schedule ") for CITY's acceptance. 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -9 Progress Schedule 2. Submit recovery schedule within 7 days after submittal of updated Progress Schedule where need for recovery schedule is indicated. B. Implementation of Recovery Schedule: 1. At no additional cost to CITY, do one or more of the following: furnish additional labor, provide additional construction equipment, provide suitable materials, employ additional work shifts, expedite procurement of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, and other measures necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 2. Upon acceptance of recovery schedule by CITY, incorporate recovery schedule into the next Progress Schedule update. C. Lack of Action: 1. CONTRACTOR's refusal, failure, or neglect to take appropriate recovery action, or to submit a recovery schedule, shall constitute reasonable evidence that CONTRACTOR is not prosecuting the Work or separable part thereof with the diligence that will ensure completion within the Contract Times. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for CITY to exercise remedies available to CITY under the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01322 -10 Progress Schedule SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals in accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. 2. Provide submittals well in advance of need for the material or equipment, or procedure (as applicable), in the Work and with ample time required for delivery of material or equipment and to implement procedures following CITY's approval or acceptance of the associated submittal. Work covered by a submittal will not be included in progress payments until approval or acceptance of related submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. CONTRACTOR is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and corrected at the Site, for information pertaining solely to the fabrication processes and to techniques of construction, and for coordinating the work of all trades. CONTRACTOR's signature of submittal's stamp and letter of transmittal shall be CONTRACTOR's representation that CONTRACTOR has met his obligations under the Contract Documents relative to that submittal. 4. CONTRACTOR shall group Shop Drawing submittals such that the Engineer's agreed maximum number of first time Shop Drawing submittals of forty five (45) is not exceeded. If exceeded, per the General Conditions, subsequent Shop Drawing submittals will be backcharged to CONTRACTOR at the rate of three (3.0) times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due CONTRACTOR for Work completed. 5. CONTRACTOR shall group RFIs submittals such that the Engineer's agreed maximum number of first time RFIs submittals of twenty five (25) is not exceeded. If exceeded, per the General Conditions, subsequent RFIs submittals will be backcharged to CONTRACTOR at the rate of three (3.0) times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due CONTRACTOR for Work completed. B. Samples: 1. Conform submittal of Samples to the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and the Specification Section in which the Sample is specified. 2. Furnish at the same time Samples and submittals that are related to the same unit of Work or Specification Section. CITY will not review submittals 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -1 Submittal Procedures without associated Samples, and will not review Samples without associated submittals. 3. Samples shall clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, all related parts and attachments, and full range of color, texture, pattern, and material. 1.2 TYPES OF SUBMITTALS A. Submittal types are classified as follows: 1) Action Submittals, 2) Informational Submittals, 3) Closeout Submittals, and 4) Maintenance Material submittals. Type of each required submittal is designated in the respective Specification Sections; when type of submittal is not specified in the associated Specification Section, submittal will be classified as follows: 1. Action Submittals include: a. Shop Drawings. b. Product data. c. Delegated design submittals, which include documents prepared, sealed, and signed by a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work. Delegated design submittals do not include submittals related to temporary construction unless specified otherwise in the related Specification Section. Delegated design submittals include: design drawings, design data including calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such design professional. d. Samples. e. Testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations. 2. Informational Submittals include: a. Certificates. b. Design data not sealed and signed by a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier. c. Pre - construction test and evaluation reports, such as reports on pilot testing, subsurface investigations, potential Hazardous Environmental Condition, and similar reports. d. Supplier instructions, including installation data, and instructions for handling, starting -up, and troubleshooting. e. Source quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of shop testing. f. Field or Site quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of operating and acceptability tests at the Site. g. Supplier reports. h. Sustainable design submittals (other than sustainable design closeout documentation). i. Special procedure submittals, including health and safety plans and other procedural submittals. j. Qualifications statements. 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -2 Submittal Procedures 3. Closeout Submittals include: a. Maintenance contracts. b. Operations and maintenance data. c. Bonds, such as maintenance bonds and bonds for a specific product or system. d. Warranty documentation . e. Record documentation. f. Sustainable design closeout documentation. g. Software. 4. Maintenance Material Submittals include: a. Spare parts. b. Extra stock materials. c. Tools. 5. When type of submittal is not specified and is not included in the list above, CITY will determine the type of submittal. B. Not Included in this Section: Administrative and procedural requirements for following are covered elsewhere in the Contract Documents: 1. Requests for interpretations of the Contract Documents. 2. Changes in Contract Price (Allowances), Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Applications for Payment 4. Progress Schedules. 5. Photographic documentation. 6. Reports and documentation required in accordance with applicable permits 7. Site survey data. 1.3 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED IN THIS SECTION A. Informational Submittals: Provide the following: 1. Schedule of Submittals: a. Timing: 1) Provide submittal within time frames specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule. b. Content: In accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Special Conditions, and this Section. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. Identify on Schedule of Submittals all submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Indicate submittals that are on the Project's critical path. Indicate the following for each submittal: 1) Date by which submittal will be provided to CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -3 Submittal Procedures 2) Whether submittal will be for a substitution or "equal ". Procedures for substitutions and "or equals" are specified in the General Conditions and the Division 01 Specifications 3) Date by which CITY's response is required. At least 14 days shall be allowed from CITY's receipt of each submittal. Allow increased time for large or complex submittals. 4) For submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of other contractors. c. Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format, specified for Progress Schedules. d. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. e. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate submittals on the Project's critical path, or that that places extraordinary demands on CITY for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include submittals not required by the Contract Documents. f. In preparing Schedule of Submittals: 1) Considering the nature and complexity of each submittal, allow sufficient time for review and revision. 2) Reasonable time shall be allowed for: CITY's review and processing of submittals, for submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning submittals to CONTRACTOR. 3) Identify and accordingly schedule submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times. 1.4 PROCEDURE FOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Identification System: Use the following submittal identification system, consisting of submittal number and review cycle number. 1. Submittal Number: Shall be separate and unique number correlating to each individual submittal required. CONTRACTOR shall assign submittal number as follows: a. First part of submittal number shall be the applicable Specification Section number, followed by a hyphen. b. Second part of submittal number shall be a three -digit number (sequentially numbered from 001 through 999) assigned to each separate and unique submittal provided under the associated Specification Section. c. Typical submittal number for the third submittal provided for Section 15061, Ductile Iron Process Pipe, would be "15061- 003 ". 2. Review Cycle Number: Shall be a letter designation indicating the initial submittal or re- submittal associated with each submittal number: a. "A" = Initial (first) submittal. b. `B" = Second submittal (e.g., first re- submittal). c. "C" = Third submittal (e.g., second re- submittal). 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -4 Submittal Procedures 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Examples: Example Description Submittal Identification Submittal No. Review Cycle Initial (first) review cycle of the third submittal provided under Section 15061, Ductile Iron Process Pipe 15061 -003- A Second review cycle (first re- submittal) of third submittal provided under Section 15061, Ductile Iron Process Pipe 15061 -003- B B. Letter of Transmittal for Submittals: 1. Provide separate letter of transmittal with each submittal. Each submittal shall be for one Specification Section. 2. At beginning of each letter of transmittal, provide a reference heading indicating: CONTRACTOR's name, CITY's name, Project name, Contract name and number, transmittal number, and submittal number. 3. For submittals with proposed deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, letter of transmittal shall specifically describe each proposed variation. C. Contractor's Review and Stamp: 1. Contractor's Review: Before transmitting submittals to CITY, review submittals to: a. assure proper coordination of the Work; b. determine that each submittal is in accordance with CONTRACTOR's desires; c. verify that submittal contains sufficient information for CITY to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Incomplete or inadequate submittals will be returned without review. 3. Contractor's Stamp and Signature: a. Each submittal provided shall bear CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval and signature, as evidence that submittal has been reviewed by CONTRACTOR and verified as complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Submittals without CONTRACTOR's stamp and signature will be returned without review. Signatures that appear to be computer - generated will be regarded as unsigned and the associated submittal will be returned without review. c. CONTRACTOR's stamp shall contain the following: "Project Name: Contractor's Name: Date: Reference Item /Submittal Title: Specifications: Section: 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -5 Submittal Procedures Page No.: Paragraph No.: Drawing No.: of Location of Work: Submittal No. and Review Cycle: Coordinated by Contractor with Submittal Nos.: I hereby certify that the Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents relative to Contractor's review and approval of this submittal. Approved By (for Contractor): " D. Submittal Marking and Organization: 1. Mark on each page of submittal and each individual component submitted with submittal number and applicable Specification paragraph. 2. Arrange submittal information in same order as requirements are written in the associated Specification Section. 3. Each Shop Drawing sheet shall have title block with complete identifying information satisfactory to CITY. 4. Package together submittals for the same Specification Section. Do not provide required information piecemeal. E. Format of Submittal and Recipients: 1. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Furnish in accordance with Table 01330 -A, except that submittals of Samples shall be as specified elsewhere in this Section: TABLE 01330 -A: SUBMITTAL CONTACTS AND REQUIRED COPIES Submittals shall be electronic format as agreed to with the CITY prior to Notice to Proceed. 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -6 Submittal Procedures i 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Address for Deliveries Contact Person E -mail Address No. of Hard - copies Remarks a. City: 100 South Myrtle Ave, #200 Clearwater, FL 33758 Jeff Walker jeff.walker(aimyclearwater.com Nine b. Resident Project Representative: At the Site. Maria De La Cantera and Loren Pratt Maria .delaCanteraamyClearwater.com One (Marshall Street Lab) And loren.pratt(cr,myClearwater.com (East WRF) Notes: TBD = To Be Determined Submittals shall be electronic format as agreed to with the CITY prior to Notice to Proceed. 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -6 Submittal Procedures i 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Samples: a. Securely label or tag Samples with submittal identification number. Label or tag shall include clear space at least three inches by three inches in size for affixing CITY's review stamp. Label or tag shall not cover, conceal, or alter appearance or features of Sample. Label or tag shall not be separated from the Sample. b. Submit number of Samples required in Specifications. If number of Samples is not specified in the associated Specification Section, provide at least three identical Samples of each item required for CITY's approval. Samples will not be returned to CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR requires Sample(s) for CONTRACTOR's use, notify CITY in writing and provide additional Sample(s). CONTRACTOR is responsible for furnishing, shipping, and transporting additional Samples. c Deliver one Sample to CITY's office at the Site. Deliver balance of Samples to CITY at address listed in Table 01330 -A, unless otherwise directed by CITY. 3. Closeout Submittals: a. Provide the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with Table 01330 -A: maintenance contracts; bonds for specific products or systems; warranty documentation; and sustainable design closeout documentation. On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original signature of entity issuing the document. b. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. c. Record Documentation: Submit in accordance with Section 01782, Record Documents. d. Software: Submit number of copies required in Specification Section where the software is specified. If number of copies is not specified, provide two copies on compact disc in addition to software loaded on to CITY's computer(s) or microprocessor(s). 4. Maintenance Material Submittals: For spare parts, extra stock materials, and tools, submit quantity of items specified in associated Specification Section. Furnish in accordance with Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. F. Distribution: 1. Distribution of Hardcopies: CITY will distribute each reviewed submittal requiring CITY's written response as follows: a. CONTRACTOR: Five copies (except closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals). b. CITY: Two copies. c. Resident Project Representative: One copy (except closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals). 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -7 Submittal Procedures G. Resubmittals: CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by CITY and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings, and submit, as required, new samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by the CITY on previous submittals. 1.5 CITY'S REVIEW A. Timing: CITY's review will conform to timing accepted by CITY in the accepted Schedule of Submittals. B. Submittals not required in the Contract Documents will not be reviewed by CITY and will not be recorded in CITY's submittal log. All hardcopies of such submittals will be returned to CONTRACTOR. C. Action Submittals, Results of CITY's Review: Each submittal will be given one of the following dispositions: 1. Approved: Upon return of submittal marked "Approved ", order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending CITY's approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents. 2. Approved as Corrected: Upon return of submittal marked "Approved as Corrected ", order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending CITY's approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents, provided it is in accordance with corrections indicated. 3. Approved as Corrected — Resubmit: Upon return of submittal marked "Approved as Corrected — Resubmit ", order, ship, or fabricate materials and equipment included in the submittal (pending CITY's approval or acceptance, as applicable, of source quality control submittals) or otherwise proceed with the Work in accordance with the submittal and the Contract Documents, provided it is in accordance with corrections indicated. Provide to CITY record re- submittal with all corrections made. Receipt of corrected re- submittal is required before materials or equipment covered in the submittal will be eligible for payment. 4. Revise and Resubmit: Upon return of submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit ", make the corrections indicated and re- submit to CITY for approval. 5. Not Approved: This disposition indicates material or equipment that cannot be approved. Upon return of submittal marked "Not Approved ", repeat initial submittal procedure utilizing approvable material or equipment. D. Informational Submittals, Results of CITY's Review: 1. Each submittal will be given one of the following dispositions: 11- 0025 -UT 01330 -8 Submittal Procedures a. Accepted: Information included in submittal conforms to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents, and is acceptable. No further action by CONTRACTOR is required relative to this submittal, and the Work covered by the submittal may proceed, and products with submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. b. Not Accepted: Submittal does not conform to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Revise submittal and re- submit to indicate acceptability and conformance with the Contract Documents. 2. The following types of Informational Submittals, when acceptable to CITY, will not receive a written response from CITY. Disposition as "accepted" will be recorded in CITY's submittal log. When submittals of the following are not acceptable, CITY will provide written response to CONTRACTOR a. Material safety data sheets (MSDS). b. Compaction testing reports. c. Concrete testing reports. d. Manufacturer's instructions. E. Closeout Submittals, Results of CITY's Review: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. When acceptable, Closeout Submittals will not receive a written response from CITY. Disposition as "accepted" will be recorded in CITY's submittal log. When Closeout Submittal is not acceptable, CITY will provide written response to CONTRACTOR. F. Maintenance Material Submittals, Results of CITY's Review: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. When acceptable, Maintenance Material Submittals will not receive a written response from CITY. Disposition as "accepted" will be recorded in CITY's submittal log. When Maintenance Material Submittal is not acceptable, CITY will provide written response to CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR is responsible for costs associated with transporting and handling of maintenance materials until compliance with the Contract Documents is achieved. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 1 I - 0025 -UT 01330 -9 Submittal Procedures 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01330 -10 Submittal Procedures SECTION 01411 SPILL PREVENTION CONTROL AND COUNTERMEASURES PLAN PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, professional engineering (when required), and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to comply with Laws and Regulations regarding spill prevention control and countermeasures (SPCC) planning and compliance, including 40 CFR Part 112. B. CONTRACTOR shall determine whether a SPCC Plan is required. If SPCC Plan is required, CONTRACTOR shall prepare, implement and maintain SPCC Plan as required by Laws and Regulations. C. Determination of Need for SPCC Plan: 1. CONTRACTOR shall determine need for SPCC Plan. 2. Professional Engineer: a. If the Site will include storage of more than 10,000 gallons of oil in above - ground storage, or if the Site does not comply with oil discharge history criteria specified in 40 CFR 112, CONTRACTOR shall retain a qualified professional engineer to determine need for SPCC Plan and, if SPCC Plan is required, professional engineer shall prepare or supervise preparation of SPCC Plan. b. If a professional engineer is not required to prepare the full SPCC Plan, but the SPCC Plan includes environmentally - equivalent SPCC measures, or impracticality determinations, CONTRACTOR shall retain a qualified professional engineer to prepare and certify those portions of the SPCC Plan dealing with environmentally equivalent measures and impracticality determinations; the balance of the SPCC Plan may be prepared by and self - certified by CONTRACTOR. 3. Submit to CITY letter presenting results of evaluation of whether a SPCC Plan is required for the Project in accordance with Laws and Regulations. D. SPCC Plan is required if the Project activities at the Site meet the following criteria: 1. The Site and activities thereon are not exempt from Laws and Regulations. 2. Oil is stored, used, transferred, or otherwise handled at the Site. 3. Maximum oil storage capacity at the Site equals or exceeds either of the following thresholds: 42,000 gallons of completely buried capacity, or 1,320 of above - ground capacity. Capacity includes total storage tank volume and operational storage volume at the Site for contractors and Subcontractors, including bulk storage tanks, containers with 55- gallon storage capacity and larger, mobile tanks located at the Site, and other containers covered by 11- 0025 -UT 01411 -1 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan Laws and Regulations. Motive storage containers, such as those on construction equipment and vehicles, is not included. Oil includes petroleum products, fuel oil, hydraulic fluid, oil sludge, oil refuse, oil mixed with wastes other than dredged material, synthetic oil, vegetable oil, animal fats and oils, and other oils defined in Laws and Regulations. 4. There is reasonable expectation, based on location of the Site, that oil spill would reach navigable waters of the United States or adjoining shorelines. E. If SPCC Plan is not required, CONTRACTOR shall ensure that conditions that preclude the need for SPCC Plan, including the activities of all contractors and Subcontractors at the Site, are maintained throughout duration of the Project. Should changes that affect the storage, use, or handling of oil at the Site occur, reassess the need for SPCC Plan at no additional cost to CITY and provide to CITY evaluation letter regarding need for SPCC Plan. F. If SPCC Plan is required, develop SPCC Plan and submit for acceptance by CITY. SPCC Plan shall be specific to the Site and shall include the following: 1. Stamp, original signature, and license number of CONTRACTOR'S professional engineer, when self - certification by CONTRACTOR is not allowed by Laws and Regulations. 2. Site plan identifying the name (or tag number) and location of each tank and container that will contain a substance regulated in 40 CFR 112 and other Laws and Regulations, including above - ground and buried tanks. Site plan shall indicate general directions of storm water runoff, including storm sewers and drainage inlets, and storm sewer outfall locations. 3. For each tank and container on the Site plan, provide a table that lists the tank or container's name and tag number, type of oil stored, and maximum storage capacity. List total storage capacity of all tanks and containers at the Site covered by SPCC Laws and Regulations. 4. Predictions of direction, rate of flow, and total quantity of oil that could be discharged from the Site as result of storage tank or container failure. 5. Operating procedures that prevent oil spills, including procedures for oil handling, details of secondary containment structures at fuel and oil transfer areas, and details and descriptions of equipment to be used for oil handling, including piping. 6. Details of and descriptions of control measures installed at the Site by CONTRACTOR to prevent spill from reaching navigable waters, including secondary containment and diversionary structures. For on -shore Sites, one of the following must be used, at minimum: dikes, berms, or retaining walls; curbing; culverts, gutters, or other drainage systems; weirs, booms, or other barriers; spill diversion ponds; retention ponds; sorbent materials. Where appropriate, the SPCC Plan shall clearly demonstrate that containment or diversionary structures or equipment are not practical. Include brittle fracture evaluation, where required, for field- constructed above - ground storage containers undergoing repair, alteration, construction, or change in service. 11- 0025 -UT 01411 -2 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 7. Plans for countermeasures to contain, clean up, and mitigate effects of oil spill that reaches navigable waters, including written commitment of manpower, equipment, and materials to quickly control and remove spilled oil. Include estimation of time required to contain spill after spill occurs. 8. Contact list and telephone numbers for facility response coordinator, National Response Center, cleanup contractors, and all appropriate federal, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction to be contacted in event of spill or discharge. 9. Program for monthly inspections of the Site by CONTRACTOR for SPCC Plan compliance. Notify CITY of each inspection at least 72 hours in advance. 10. Measures for Site security relative to oil storage. 11. Procedures for safely handling mobile containers such as totes, drums, and fueling vehicles and construction equipment that remain at the Site. 12 Procedures and schedules for periodic testing of integrity of tanks and containers, and associated piping and valves. 13. Plans for bulk storage container compliance. 14. Plans for personnel training and oil spill prevention briefings. 15. For SPCC Plans that do not follow the format listed in Laws and Regulations, provide cross - reference to requirements of Laws and Regulations, including 40 CFR 112.7. G. Obtain acceptance of SPCC Plan by CITY, for coordination with CITY's Site - specific SPCC Plan, if any. H. SPCC Plan shall be reviewed by CONTRACTOR's professional engineer (when professional engineer is required) and CITY every five years, as applicable. I. Post a copy of accepted, certified SPCC Plan in conspicuous location at the Site and provide copies to CITY, other contractors, and Subcontractors as appropriate. All contractors shall comply with SPCC Plan. J. In event of violation of SPCC Plan or release of oils attributable to construction operations, CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Immediately issue notifications in accordance with Laws and Regulations, including 40 CFR 110 and 40 CFR 112. When required by Laws and Regulations, report to National Response Center, US Environmental Protection Agency, and other authorities having jurisdiction, if any. 2. Have spill clean -up performed in conformance with Laws and Regulations and the SPCC Plan. 3. Pay fines or civil penalties (or responsible portion thereof) imposed on CITY by authorities having jurisdiction, and pay costs associated with clean -up of spills. 11- 0025 -UT 01411 -3 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Professional Engineer: a. When required by Laws and Regulations, engage a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Site is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. b. Submit qualifications data. c. Responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to: 1) Carefully reviewing Laws and Regulations relative to SPCC. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of criteria specified in the Contract Documents for submittal to CITY by CONTRACTOR, and obtaining from authorities having jurisdiction clarifications regarding Laws and Regulations as required. 3) Preparing or supervising the preparation of letter -report evaluation of need for SPCC Plan in accordance with the Contract Documents. Evaluation shall include professional engineer's seal, registration number, and original signature. 4) When SPCC Plan is required, preparing, supervising the preparation of, or reviewing the SPCC Plan (or designated portions thereof when oil storage at the Site will be 10,000 gallons or less) in accordance with the Contract Documents. SPCC Plan (or designated portions thereof) shall include professional engineer's seal, registration number, and original signature. 5) Periodically re- evaluating the need for SPCC Plan and issuing findings as letter - reports with seal, license number, and signature. When SPCC Plan is required, periodically evaluating the SPCC Plan and providing recommendations for compliance with Laws and Regulations, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6) Certifying that: a) it is familiar with the Laws and Regulations, including 40 CFR 112, and b) it has visited, examined, and is familiar with the Site, planned modifications to the Site under the Project as such modifications pertain to SPCC Laws and Regulations, and c) it has performed the evaluations and prepared SPCC Plan in accordance with the Contract Documents, and d) procedures for required testing and inspections have been established, and e) the said evaluations and SPCC Plan are adequate for the Project, and f) the said evaluations and SPECC Plan conform to all Laws and Regulations, applicable industry standards, and to prevailing standards of practice. 11- 0025 -UT 01411 -4 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: With each evaluation letter and SPCC Plan submittal, include certification signed by preparer of submittal that the submittal conforms to the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Signature on all certifications shall be original. 2. Evaluations: a. Submit letter presenting results of evaluation of whether a SPCC Plan is required for the Project. Submit evaluation no later than fourteen days after the Contract Times commence running, unless longer time is allowed by CITY. b. Submit updated evaluations as required when conditions at the Site change. Submit updated evaluation no later than seven days after the conditions at the Site change, or within seven days of CITY's request, unless longer time is allowed by CITY. 3. SPCC Plan: When SPCC Plan is required: a. Submit to CITY. Submit within fourteen days of receipt of CITY's acceptance of evaluation submittal. b. Update and resubmit the SPCC Plan, or acceptable SPCC Plan amendments, as required when conditions at the Site change. Submit updated SPCC Plan or amendments no later than seven days after the change in conditions at the Site change giving rise to the SPCC Plan change or amendment, or within seven days of CITY'S request, unless longer time is allowed by CITY. 4. SPPC Plan Distribution: When SPCC Plan is required, submit copies of letters transmitting SPCC Plan and amendments (if any) to contractors and Subcontractors working at the Site. 5. Qualifications Statements: CONTRACTOR's professional engineer, when requested by CITY. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01411 -5 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01411 -6 Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions and terminology applicable to all the Contract Documents are included in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. B. Terminology used in the Specifications includes: 1. "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar locations in the Contract Documents. Terminology such as "shown ", "noted ", "scheduled ", and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference without limitation on the location. 2. "Installer ", "applicator ", or "erector" is CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by CONTRACTOR, either as an employee or Subcontractor, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application or similar Work. Installers shall be experienced in the Work that installer is engaged to perform. a. The term "experienced ", when used with the term "installer" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; being familiar with Laws and Regulations; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with requirements of the Supplier of the material or equipment being installed. 3. Trades: Use of a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter ", unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or required by Laws or Regulations. Such terminology also does not imply that specified requirements apply exclusively to trade personnel of the corresponding generic name. 4. "Assigned specialists" and similar terms: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by specialists recognized as experts in those operations. Engage said specialists for those activities, and their engagement is a requirement over which CONTRACTOR has no option. These requirements do not conflict with enforcement of building codes and other Laws and Regulations. Also, such requirements are not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -1 References 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES A. References in the Contract Documents to local code(s) shall mean the following: 1. State of Florida. 2. City of Clearwater. 3. National Electric Code. 4. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS A. Common abbreviations that may be found in the Contract Documents are listed below, alphabetically by their written -out meaning: alternating current a -c ampere A . Architectural Barriers Act ABA Americans with Disabilities Act ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG ante meridian a.m. average avg biochemical oxygen demand BOD brake horsepower bhp British thermal unit Btu Centigrade (or Celsius) C chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC chlorofluorocarbons CFC Code of Federal Regulations CFR cubic inch cu in cubic foot cu ft cubic yard cu yd, or CY cubic feet per minute cfm cubic feet per second cfs decibel db degree Centigrade (or Celsius) (Write) degrees C or °C degrees Fahrenheit degrees F or °F diameter dia direct current d -c dollars $ 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -2 References each ea efficiency eff Fahrenheit F feet ft feet per hour fph feet per minute fpm feet per second fps figure Fig flange flg foot -pound ft-lb gallon gal gallons per hour gph gallons per minute gpm gallons per second gps gram g grams per liter g/L Hertz Hz horsepower hp or HP hour hr human - machine interface HMI inch in. inches water gage in. w.g. inch -pound in. -lb inside diameter ID iron pipe size IPS thousand pounds kips thousand pounds per square inch ksi kilovolt- ampere kva kilowatt kw kilowatt-hour kwhr or kwh linear foot lin ft or LF liter L Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (USGBC) LEED maximum max mercury Hg milligram mg 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -3 References milligrams per liter mg /1 or mg/L milliliter ml millimeter mm million gallons per day mgd or MGD million gallon MG minimum min national pipe threads NPT net positive suction head NPSH net positive suction head available NPSHA net positive suction head required NPSHR nitrogen oxide (total concentration of mono - nitrogen oxides NOx such as nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2)) nominal pipe size NPS number no. operator interface terminal OIT ounce oz ounce -force ozf outside diameter OD parts per hundred pph parts per million ppm parts per billion ppb polyvinyl chloride PVC post meridian p.m. pound lb pounds per square inch psi pounds per square inch absolute psia pounds per square inch gauge psig pounds per square foot psf process control system PCS programmable logic controller PLC revolutions per minute rpm second sec specific gravity sp gr, or SG square sq square foot sq ft, or sf square inch sq in. square yard sq yd, or SY 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -4 References standard std standard cubic feet per minute scfm total dynamic head TDH totally - enclosed fan - cooled TEFC volt V volts alternating current vac volts direct current vdc volatile organic compounds VOC 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Article 3 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, relative to reference standards and resolving discrepancies between reference standards and the Contract Documents. Provisions of reference standards are in effect in accordance with the Specifications. B. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in the Work shall be familiar with reference standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable reference standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where reference standards are needed for a construction activity, obtain copies of standards from the publication source. C. Abbreviations and Names: Where reference standards, specifications, codes, manuals, Laws or Regulations, or other published data of international, national, regional or local organizations are referred to in the Contract Documents, the organization issuing the standard may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. Following acronyms or abbreviations that may appear in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings indicated below. Listing is alphabetical by acronym. AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ACS American Chemical Society ADSC- International Association of Foundation Drilling. IAFD AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AF &PA American Forest and Paper Association ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (formerly Anti- 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -5 References Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)) AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIChE American Institute of Chemical Engineers AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association AMP National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Architectural Metal Products Division ANSI American National Standards Institute APA The Engineered Wood Association API American Petroleum Institute APHA American Public Health Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society for Non - Destructive Testing ASQ American Society for Quality ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BAAQM Bay Area Air Quality Management District D BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association CBMA Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association CDA Copper Development Association 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -6 References CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung eV (German Institute for Standardization) DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ETL Intertek Testing Services, Inc. (formerly ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.) FCC Federal Communications Commission FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency FHWA Federal Highway Administration FM Factory Mutual (FM Global) FRPI Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics Institute FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America HEW United States Department of Health, Education and Welfare HI Hydraulic Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HUD United States Department of Housing and Urban Development IBC International Building Code ICC International Code Council ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (formerly Instrument Society of America) ISO Insurance Services Office ISO International Organization for Standardization LPI Lightning Protection Institute MIA Marble Institute of America 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -7 References ML /SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association MS Military Specifications MSS Manufacturers' Standardization Society MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NAPF National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. NARUC National Association of Regulatory Utilities Commissioners NBHA National Builders Hardware Association NBS United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electric Code NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NETA International Electrical Testing Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NHPMA Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association NIST United States Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NSSGA National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute PPI Plastics Pipe Institute PGMC Primary Glass Manufacturers Council PS Product Standards Section, United States Department of Commerce RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (part of AISC) 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -8 References RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SCAQMD Southern California Air Quality Management District SCPRF Structural Clay Products Research Foundation SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SWI Steel Window Institute TCNA Tile Council of North America TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. USAB United States Access Board USDOE United States Department of Energy USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency USGBC United States Green Building Council USGS United States Geological Survey USPHS United States Public Health Service WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WCMA Wood Component Manufacturers Association WDMA Window and Door Manufacturers Association WWEMA Water and Wastewater Equipment Manufacturers Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01420 -9 References 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01420 -10 References SECTION 01452 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall employ and pay for services of independent testing laboratory to perform specified services. 2. Inspection, sampling, and testing shall be as specified in the Specifications including but not limited to: a. Section 01416, Special Instructions. b. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. c. Section 03600, Grout. d. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. e. Section 05501, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. f. Section 09900, Painting. g. Other tests in the Contract Documents that are not specifically assigned to others. 3. CONTRACTOR shall pay for: a. Tests not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents as being CITY's responsibility. b. Tests made for CONTRACTOR's convenience. c. Repeat tests required because of CONTRACTOR's negligence or defective Work, and retesting after failure of test for the same item to comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Testing laboratory is not authorized to approve or accept any portion of the Work or defective Work; rescind, alter, or augment requirements of Contract Documents; and perform duties of CONTRACTOR. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and /or Testing. 2. ISO/IEC 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories. 3. NIST SRM, Standard Reference Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11- 0025 -UT 01452 -1 Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor A. Qualifications: 1 Testing Laboratory: a. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM E329. b. Testing laboratory shall be licensed to operate in the same state as the Site. Where applicable, laboratory shall be certified by the authority having jurisdiction for the types of testing required. c. Testing equipment used by laboratory shall be calibrated at maximum intervals of twelve months by devices of accuracy traceable to one of the following: NIST SRM, ISO/IEC 17025, certified by state or local bureau of weights and measures, or values of natural physical constants generally accepted in the engineering and scientific community. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Quality Control Submittals and Test Reports: Testing laboratory shall promptly submit to CONTRACTOR results of testing and inspections, including: a. Date issued. b. Project title, number, and name of the Site. c. Testing laboratory name and address. d. Name and signature of inspector or person obtaining samples. e. Date of inspection or sampling. f. Record of temperature and weather. g. Date of test. h. Identification of material or product tested, and associated Specification Section. i. Location in the Project. j. Type of inspection or test. k. Results of tests and observations regarding compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Testing Laboratory: 1) Qualifications statement indicating experience and facilities for tests required under the Contract Documents. 2) Copy of report of inspection of facilities during most recent NIST inspection tour. Include memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported during inspection. 3) Copy of certificate of calibration for each instrument or measuring device proposed for use, by accredited calibration agency. 1.5 TESTING LABORATORY DUTIES A. Testing laboratory shall: 1. Cooperate with CONTRACTOR and provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. 11- 0025 -UT 01452 -2 Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor 2. Perform required inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of construction; comply with applicable reference standards and the Contract Documents; and ascertain compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Promptly notify CITY and CONTRACTOR of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work that are observed during performance of services. 4. Promptly submit to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of inspections and tests. 5. Perform additional tests and services, as required by CONTRACTOR. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Cooperate with testing laboratory personnel. 2. Provide to testing laboratory preliminary representative samples of materials and products to be tested, in required quantities. 3. Promptly submit to CITY copies of results of tests and inspections received from testing laboratory. 4. Provide to laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed for concrete and other material mixes to be tested by testing laboratory. 5. Provide labor and facilities: a. For access to the Work to be tested, and where required, to Suppliers' operations. b. For obtaining and handling samples at the Site. c. For facilitating inspections and tests. d. For testing laboratory's exclusive use for storing and curing of test samples. e. Forms for preparing concrete test beams and cylinders. 6. Notify laboratory and CITY sufficiently in advance of operations to allow assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 7. Arrange with laboratory and pay for additional services, sampling, and testing required for CONTRACTOR's convenience. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01452 -3 Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01452 -4 Testing.aboratory Services Furnished by Contractor SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary utilities required for the Project. 1. Make all arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services and obtain required permits and approvals for temporary utilities. 2. Pay all utility service costs, including cost of electricity, water, fuel, and other utility services required for the Work. 3. Continuously maintain adequate utilities for all purposes during the Project, until removal of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. At minimum, provide and maintain temporary utilities through Substantial Completion and removal of temporary field offices and sheds. 4. Should CITY occupy part of the Project prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, cost of utilities consumed via temporary utilities serving the portion occupied by CITY will be shared proportionately between CITY and CONTRACTOR as mutually agreed to by the parties. 5. Maintain, including cleaning, temporary utilities and continuously provide consumables as required. 6. Temporary utilities and temporary facilities shall be adequate for personnel using the Site and requirements of Project. 7. Provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities in compliance with Laws and Regulations and, when applicable, requirements of utility owners. B. Provide the following temporary utilities: 1. Electricity. 2. Lighting. 3. Telephone and communications. 4. Heating, ventilating, and temporary enclosures. 5. Water. 6. Sanitary facilities. 7. First -aid facilities. 8. Fire protection. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Electrical: 1. Provide temporary electrical service required for the Work and per Specification 01510, including continuous power for temporary field offices and sheds. Provide temporary outlets with circuit breaker protection and ground fault protection. 11- 0025 -UT 01510 -1 Temporary Utilities B. Lighting. 1. Minimum lighting shall be five foot - candles for open areas and ten foot - candles for stairs and shops. Provide minimum of one, 300 -watt lamp every 15 feet in indoor Work areas. Provide night security lighting of five foot - candles, minimum, within 50 feet of all parts of the Site during hours of darkness, controlled by photocell. C. Telephone and Communications. 1. Provide temporary telephone and communications required for CONTRACTOR's operations at the Site and for summoning emergency medical assistance. D. Heating, Ventilating, and Enclosures. 1. Provide sufficient temporary heating, ventilating, and enclosures to ensure safe working conditions and prevent damage to existing facilities and the Work. 2. Except where otherwise specified, temporary heating shall maintain temperature of the area served between 50 degrees F and maximum design temperature of building or facility and its contents. 3. Maintain temperature of areas occupied by CITY's personnel or electronic equipment, including offices, lunch rooms, locker rooms, toilet rooms, and rooms containing computers, microprocessors, and control equipment, between 65 degrees F and 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 75 percent. 4. Required temperature range for storage areas and certain elements of the Work, including preparation of materials and surfaces, installation or application, and curing as applicable, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents for the associated Work and the Supplier's recommended temperature range for storage, application, or installation, as appropriate. 5. Provide temporary ventilation sufficient to prevent accumulation in construction areas and areas occupied by CITY of hazardous and nuisance levels or concentrations of dust and particulates, mist, fumes or vapors, odors, and gases, associated with construction. 6. Provide temporary enclosures and partitions required to maintain required temperature and humidity. E. Water. 1. Provide temporary water facilities including piping, valves, meters if not provided by owner of existing waterline, backflow preventers, pressure regulators, and other appurtenances. Provide freeze - protection as required. 2. Provide water for temporary sanitary facilities, field offices, Site maintenance and cleaning and, when applicable, disinfecting and testing of systems. 3. Continuously maintain adequate water flow and pressure for all purposes during the Project, until removal of temporary water system. 11- 0025 -UT 01510 -2 Temporary Utilities F. Sanitary Facilities. 1. Provide suitably - enclosed chemical or self - contained toilets for CONTRACTOR's employees and visitors to the Site. Location of temporary toilets shall be acceptable to CITY. 2. Provide supply of potable drinking water and related facilities and consumables for all personnel using the Site. 3. Provide suitable temporary washing facilities for employees and visitors. G. First -aid Facilities. 1. Provide temporary first -aid stations at or immediately adjacent to the Site's major work areas, and inside CONTRACTOR's temporary field office. Locations of first -aid stations shall be determined by CONTRACTOR's safety representative. 2. Provide list of emergency telephone numbers at each hardwired telephone at the Site. List shall be in accordance with the list of emergency contact information required in Section 01301, Pre - Construction Conference. H. Fire Protection. 1. Provide temporary fire protection, including portable fire extinguishers rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers, for each temporary building and for every 3,000 square feet of floor area under construction. 2. Comply with NFPA 241, Safeguarding Building Construction, Alternation, and Demolition Operations, and requirements of fire marshals and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 1.3 USE OF CITY'S SYSTEM A. Use of Permanent Utility Systems Provided Under the Project: 1. Permanent electrical, lighting, water, heating, ventilating, and fire protection systems and first -aid facilities may be used to provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities if the following are met: a. Obtain CITY's written permission to use permanent systems. b. Permanent systems to be used for temporary utilities or temporary facilities shall have achieved Substantial Completion, including complete functionality of all controls. c. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs while using permanent system, including operation, maintenance, replacement of consumables, and provide replacement parts. 2. Do not use the following permanent facilities: a. Telephone and communication facilities. b. Sanitary facilities. 11- 0025 -UT 01510 -3 Temporary Utilities PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for temporary systems may be new or used, but shall be adequate for purposes intended and shall not create unsafe conditions, and shall comply with Laws and Regulations. B. Provide required materials, equipment, and facilities, including piping, wiring, and controls. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temporary facilities in neat, orderly, manner, and make structurally, mechanically, and electrically sound throughout. B. Location of Temporary Utilities and Temporary Facilities: 1. Locate temporary systems for proper function and service. 2. Temporary systems shall not interfere with or provide hazards or nuisances to: the Work under this and other contracts, movement of personnel, traffic areas, materials handling, hoisting systems, storage areas, finishes, and work of utility companies. 3. Do not install temporary utilities on the ground, with the exception of temporary extension cords, hoses, and similar systems in place for short durations. C. Modify and extend temporary systems as required by progress of the Work. 3.2 USE A. Maintain temporary systems to provide safe, continuous service as required. B. Properly supervise operation of temporary systems: 1. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Enforce safe practices. 3. Prevent abuse of services. 4. Prevent nuisances and hazards caused by temporary systems and their use. 5. Prevent damage to finishes. 6. Ensure that temporary systems and equipment do not interrupt continuous progress of construction. 11- 0025 -UT 01510 -4 Temporary Utilities C. At end of each work day, check temporary systems and verify that sufficient consumables are available to maintain operation until work is resumed at the Site. Provide additional consumables if the supply on hand is insufficient. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary utilities, facilities, equipment, and materials when no longer required. Repair damage caused by temporary systems and their removal and restore the Site to condition required by the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. B. Where temporary utilities are disconnected from existing utility, provide suitable, watertight or gastight (as applicable) cap or blind flange, as applicable, on service line, in accordance with requirements of utility owner. C. When permanent utilities and systems that were used for temporary utilities, upon Substantial Completion replace all consumables such as filters and Light bulbs and parts used during the Work. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01510 -5 Temporary Utilities 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01510 -6 Temporary Utilities SECTION 01511 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary electrical service during the Project. At minimum, provide temporary electrical service through Substantial Completion of the entire Project and removal of temporary field offices and sheds. B. Cost of electricity used for the Project, including cost of electricity for start-up and testing, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. C. Source: Electric power for temporary electrical service is available from Duke Energy unless an agreement from the CITY establishes a source from their distribution. Point of connection to power source shall be determined by Duke or the CITY. D. Limits of Temporary Electric Service: 1. Provide and maintain temporary electric service so that electricity can be obtained at all locations within the Project's work areas using extension of no more than 100 feet. 2. Temporary electric service required beyond limits shown or indicated shall be provided by contractor requiring such power, who shall provide their own portable generator or other means of temporary electric service. 3. Each contractor using temporary electric service shall provide their own extension cords, drop lights, power tools, other small devices, and distribution system. E. Continuously provide electric power to construction field offices and sheds. F. Unless existing equipment is specified as being taken temporarily out of service to accommodate portions of the Project, provide temporary electric power to maintain continuous operation of existing facilities during change over of electrical equipment. G. Restrictions: 1. Existing Systems: Modify and extend existing system for temporary electric service. 2. Obtain OWNER's permission to use electricity from existing system. 11- 0025 -UT 01511 -1 Temporary Electricity PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY SERVICE REQUIRED A. Materials and equipment used for temporary electric service may be new or used, and shall be in first - class, fully serviceable condition. Temporary electric service shall not create unsafe conditions. Comply with Laws and Regulations and requirements of electric utility. B. Size of Temporary Electric Service: 1. Temporary electric service is required for lighting, power tools, construction field offices and sheds, and similar usages. Electric space heaters, dewatering pumps and equipment, and large welding machines are not included in required temporary electric service. 2. If needed, a temporary electric system shall be 480 -volt, three - phase, 60 Hertz, with sufficient capacity to provide service for construction use by all trades and with the following minimum facilities: a. 100 ampere frame with 100 ampere trip primary circuit breaker. b. 15 KVA, three -phase transformer with 480 -volt primary and 208/120 - volt secondary, three -pole secondary safety switch, and 208 /120 -volt, three - phase, four -wire distribution panel. C. Provide each electrical outlet with circuit breaker protection and comply with ground fault protection per requirements of NEC Article 406, Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs, and UL 943, Standard for Ground -Fault Circuit - Interrupters. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temporary electric service in neat, orderly manner. Temporary electric service shall be structurally and electrically sound throughout. B. Modify temporary electric service and rearrange wiring as Project progress requires. C. Locate all temporary electrical facilities to avoid interfering with the Work, hoisting, materials handling, storage, traffic areas, existing operable facilities, and work under other contracts. D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for and shall return to original condition those portions of permanent electric system used in completing the Work. 3.2 USE A. Properly supervise use of temporary electric service. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations and safe practices, and prevent abuse of services. 11- 0025 -UT 01511 -2 Temporary Electricity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove materials and equipment associated with temporary electric service when temporary electric service is no longer required. B. Repair damage caused by temporary electric service and its removal and restore the Site to condition in accordance with the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01511 -3 Temporary Electricity 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01511 -4 Temporary Electricity SECTION 01512 TEMPORARY LIGHTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary lighting as necessary. 2. CONTRACTOR shall pay cost of temporary lighting, including costs of installation, maintenance, and removal. 3. Provide temporary lighting throughout the Project. At minimum, provide temporary lighting through Substantial Completion of the entire Project and removal of temporary field offices and sheds. 4. Electric power for temporary lighting is specified in Section 01511, Temporary Electricity. B. Provide temporary lighting as follows: 1. Work Lighting: Lighting required for adequate illumination of work areas under this Contract and other contracts. a. Required Illumination for Work Lighting 1) General: Five foot - candles. 2) Stairs: Ten foot - candles. 3) Construction Plant and Shops: Ten foot - candles. 4) For Detail and Finishing Work: Twenty foot - candles. 5) For Testing and Inspection: Thirty foot - candles. 6) At First -aid Stations: Thirty foot - candles. 7) Areas ofOWNER's Operations: One 300 -watt lamp at intervals of 15 feet on centers. b. Periods of Service for Work Lighting: Continuous from 15 minutes prior to 15 minutes past scheduled work hours on workdays 2. Safety Lighting: Lighting required for: a. Adequate illumination for safe movement of authorized persons throughout the Site. b. Adequate illumination for public safety, when applicable. c. Special warning lighting for hazardous conditions. d. Required Illumination for Safety Lighting: 1) General: Five foot - candles, minimum. 2) For Potentially Hazardous Conditions: As required by Laws and Regulations. e. Periods of Service for Safety Lighting: 1) Within the Site (areas without public access): At all times that authorized personnel are present. 2) Public Access Areas: At all times. 11- 0025 -UT 01512 -1 Temporary Lighting 3. Security Lighting: Lighting required to assist in protecting the Project from unauthorized entry. Provide within 50 feet of all parts of the Project. Provide during hours of darkness, with photocell control. 4. Temporary field offices and sheds, storage areas, and other temporary construction facilities. Provide temporary lighting as specified and required, with continuous service. C. Restrictions: 1. Existing Systems: Cannot be used for temporary lighting. 2. Permanent System Provided Under the Project: Obtain OWNER's written permission for using permanent system provided under the Project, indicating conditions of use. When permanent system is used for temporary lighting, provide temporary lamps for temporary lighting. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials and equipment used for temporary lighting may be new or used, and shall be in fully serviceable condition and adequate for the service intended. Temporary lighting shall not create unsafe conditions. Comply with Laws and Regulations including the NEC and, where applicable, requirements of electric utility. B. Provide all required facilities for temporary lighting, including wiring, switches, accessories, and supports. C. At CONTRACTOR's option, UL- approved, patented, specialty products may be used. D. Receptacles and Fixtures: 1. Standard products shall comply with UL requirements. 2. Provide heavy -duty guards on fixtures. 3. Provide appropriate types of fixtures for environment in which fixture is used, in accordance with applicable NEC articles and NEMA standards. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temporary lighting in neat, orderly manner. Temporary lighting system shall be structurally and electrically sound throughout. B. Modify and extend temporary lighting as progress of the Project requires. 11- 0025 -UT 01512 -2 Temporary Lighting C. Locate temporary lighting to avoid providing or contributing to hazards and interfering with the Work, movement of personnel, hoisting, materials handling, storage, traffic areas, existing operable facilities, and work under other contracts D. Install switches for temporary lighting at entrance to each area, or successive areas, so that access to all areas of the Site is via lighted areas. 3.2 USE A. Properly supervise use of temporary lighting. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations and safe practices, and prevent abuse of services. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove materials and equipment associated with temporary lighting when temporary lighting is no longer required. B. Repair damage caused by temporary lighting and its removal, and restore the Site to condition in accordance with the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. C. Upon Substantial Completion, remove temporary lamps provided in permanent fixtures used for lighting during the Work and provide new lamps in their place. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01512 -3 Temporary Lighting 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01512 -4 Temporary Lighting SECTION 01522 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide field office for CONTRACTOR's use with at least the minimum facilities specified. 2. Provide required storage and work sheds. 3. Pay for required permits and utilities. Field offices and sheds shall comply with Laws and Regulations. B. Location: 1. Locate field offices and sheds in accordance with the Contract Documents and in accordance with the Site mobilization discussions at the preconstruction conference. C. Furnish in field office one complete set of the Contract Documents for ready reference by interested parties. In addition to the reference set, comply with Section 01782, Record Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS, FURNISHINGS, AND EQUIPMENT A. Field Office and Furnishings: 1 Construction: As required by CONTRACTOR and sufficient for Project meetings. 2. Utilities and Services: Provide the following: a. Telephone service. b. Computer network and related facilities as required for CONTRACTOR needs. 3. Furnishings: a. Conference Facilities: Provide conference area with conference table and chairs sufficient for twenty people. Conference facilities and furnishings shall be provided with suitable utilities, lighting, and temperature controls prior to the first progress meeting, unless otherwise approved by CITY. b. Other furnishings required by CONTRACTOR. 4. Provide on field office an exterior identification sign displaying CONTRACTOR's company name. Maximum size of sign shall be four feet 11- 0025 -UT 01522 -1 Contractor's Field Office and Sheds by eight feet. Sign shall be suitable for outdoor use for the duration of the Project. 5. Furnish and maintain at CONTRACTOR's field office twelve protective helmets for use by visitors to the Site. B. Storage and Work Sheds: 1. Provide storage and work sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate personnel, materials, and equipment involved in the Work, including temporary utility services and facilities required for environmental controls sufficient for personnel, materials, and equipment. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Install field offices, sheds, and related facilities in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Install materials and equipment, including prefabricated structures, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Maintenance: 1. Clean and maintain field offices and sheds as required. 2. Provide consumables as required. B. Removal: 1. Do not remove field offices and sheds until after Substantial Completion of the entire Work, unless otherwise approved by CITY. 2. Remove field offices and sheds and restore areas prior to final inspection. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01522 -2 Contractor's Field Office and Sheds SECTION 01570 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as required to control environmental conditions at the Site and adjacent areas. 2. Maintain controls until no longer required. 3. Temporary controls include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Erosion and sediment controls. b. Noise controls. c. Dust control. d. Pest and rodent control. e. Control of water, including storm water runnoff. f. Pollution control. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. Florida Department of Environmental Protection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Plan for construction staging and maintenance of the Site relative to erosion and sediment controls. Indicate on a Site plan approximate areas of planned disturbance of soils and soil cover over time during the Project. For areas not indicated in the Contract Documents as being disturbed and that CONTRACTOR proposes to disturb, Shop Drawing shall include proposed erosion and sediment control measures for the additional area. 2. Product Data: a. Silt fencing materials. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedural Submittals: a. Proposed dust control measures, when submittal is requested by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -1 Temporary Controls PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. General: 1. Materials utilized for erosion and sediment controls shall be in accordance with the applicable regulatory requirements indicated in Article 1.2 of this Section, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Silt Fencing: 1. Filter Cloth: a. Mirafi Envirofence, or equal. b. Height: Two feet, minimum. c. Securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh using ties spaced at maximum intervals of two feet on centers at top and mid - height of wire mesh. 2. Wire Mesh: Support filter cloth with wire mesh complying with the following: a. Woven wire mesh, 14 -gauge steel wire, maximum mesh size six -inch by six -inch. b. Height: To match filter cloth height. c. Fasten wire mesh to fence supports with wire ties or staples. 3. Fence Support Posts: a. Length: Three feet, minimum. b. Material: Metal or other acceptable material with "U" or "I" cross section, or minimum 1.25 -inch by 1.25 -inch hardwood. C. Straw Bale Dike. 1. Bales shall be firmly- packed, unrotted straw bound firmly with baling wire. Cross - sectional area on the small end of each bale shall be approximately 12 inches by 12 inches or larger. 2. Posts shall comply with requirements for silt fencing support posts, or may be suitable reinforcing steel. D. Mulch Materials and Soil Stabilization. 1. Mulch shall be unrotted straw or salt hay. 2. Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be an inert, eco- friendly chemical manufactured for the specific purpose of erosion control and soil stabilization, applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3. Wood -fiber or paper - fiber, when used, shall be 100 percent natural and biodegradable. 4. Erosion control mat or netting shall be biodegradable. Acceptable materials include jute, excelsior, straw or coconut fiber, and cotton. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -2 Temporary Controls E. Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Inlet Filter Bag: a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for each drainage inlet or catch basin to be protected: 1) Silt Sack, by Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental 2) Or equal. b. Inlet filter bag permeability shall be not less than 40 gallons per square foot of bag area exposed to the flow. Fabric shall be woven polypropylene with double stitching to prevent bursting. c. Inlet filter bags shall fit inside the drainage inlet or catch basin and shall be secured by the structure's grate or by other acceptable means. d. Inlet filter bags shall have means of removing inlet filter bag and the silt and sediment collected in the bag, without dumping filter bag's contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. F. Filter Bag on Dewatering Pump Discharge: 1. Provide filter bag on discharge of each dewatering pump drawing from an excavation. Filter bag is not required on pumps associated with dewatering wells. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. UltraTech Dewatering Bag, by Interstate Products. b. Filter Bag, by US Fabrics. c. Dewatering (Filter) Bag, Indian Valley Industries. d. DirtBag, by Atlantic Construction Fabrics (ACF) Environmental e. Or equal. 3. Size filter bags for maximum flow of the pump. Filter bags shall be specifically fabricated for use as a dewatering pump filter bag. 4. Provide sufficient spare filter bags for continuous dewatering operations. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 NOISE CONTROL A. Noise Control — General: 1. CONTRACTOR's vehicles and equipment shall minimize noise emissions to greatest degree practicable. Provide mufflers, silencers, and sound barriers when necessary. 2. Noise levels shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including OSHA requirements and Local ordinances. 3. Noise emissions shall not interfere with the work of CITY or others. 3.2 DUST CONTROL A. Dust Control — General: 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -3 Temporary Controls 1. Control objectionable dust caused by CONTRACTOR's operation of vehicles and equipment, clearing, and other actions. To minimize airborne dust, apply water or use other methods subject to acceptance of CITY and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. CONTRACTOR shall prevent blowing and movement of dust from exposed soil surfaces and access roads to reduce on- and off -Site damage, nuisances, and health hazards associated with dust emissions. Control may be achieved by irrigation in which the Site shall be sprinkled with water until the surface is moist. Apply dust controls as frequently as required without creating nuisances such as excessive mud and ponding of water at the Site. 3. Remove dust from roadways and access roads at maximum intervals of seven days by mechanical brooming or other method acceptable to CITY. 3.3 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Pest and Rodent Control — General: 1. Provide rodent and pest control as required to prevent infestation of the Site and storage areas. 2. Employ methods and use materials that do not adversely affect conditions at the Site or on adjoining properties. 3. In accordance with Laws and Regulations, promptly and properly dispose of pests and rodents trapped or otherwise controlled. 3.4 WATER CONTROL A. Water Control — General: 1. Provide methods to control surface water and water from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjoining properties. 2. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct water away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas and to direct drainage to proper runoff courses to prevent erosion, damage, or nuisance. B. Equipment and Facilities for Water Control: Provide, operate, and maintain equipment and facilities of adequate size to control surface water. C. Discharge and Disposal: Dispose of drainage water in manner to prevent flooding, erosion, and other damage to any and all parts of the Site and adjoining areas, and that complies with Laws and Regulations. 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Pollution Control — General: 1. Provide means, methods, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere caused by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 2. Equipment used during construction shall comply with Laws and Regulations. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -4 Temporary Controls B. Spills and Contamination: 1. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain spills and to remove contaminated soils and liquids. 2. Excavate contaminated material and properly dispose of off -Site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C. Protection of Surface Waters: Implement special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering surface waters. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, and other such substances in or adjacent to surface waters and open drainage routes, in sanitary sewers, or in storm sewers. D. Atmospheric Pollutants: 1. Provide systems for controlling atmospheric pollutants related to the Work. 2. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals and vapors. 3. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere. E. Solid Waste: 1. Provide systems for controlling and managing solid waste related to the Work. 2. Prevent solid waste from becoming airborne, and from discharging to surface waters and drainage routes. 3. Properly handle and dispose of solid waste. 3.6 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Installation and Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Controls — General: 1. General: a. Provide erosion and sediment controls as shown and indicated on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Provide erosion and sediment controls as the Work progresses into previously undisturbed areas. b. Installation of erosion and sediment controls shall be in accordance with the applicable regulatory requirements indicated in Article 1.2 of this Section, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. c. Use necessary methods to successfully control erosion and sedimentation, including ecology- oriented construction practices, vegetative measures, and mechanical controls. Use best management practices (BMP) in accordance with Laws and Regulations, and regulatory requirements indicated in Article 1.2 of this Section, to control erosion and sedimentation during the Project. d. Plan and execute construction, disturbances of soils and soil cover, and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. Provide temporary measures for controlling erosion and sedimentation, as indicated in the Contract Documents and as required for the Project. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -5 Temporary Controls e. Where areas must be cleared for storage of materials or equipment, or for temporary facilities, provisions shall be made for regulating drainage and controlling erosion and sedimentation, subject to the CITY'S approval. f. Provide erosion and sediment controls, including stabilization of soils, at the end of each workday. 2. Coordination: a. Coordinate temporary erosion and sediment controls with construction of permanent drainage facilities and other Work to the extent necessary for economical, effective, and continuous erosion and sediment control. 3. Before commencing activities that will disturb soil or soil cover at the Site, provide all erosion and sediment control measures required by the Contract Documents for the areas where soil or soil cover will be disturbed. 4. In general, implement construction procedures associated with, or that may affect, erosion and sediment control to ensure minimum damage to the environment during construction. CONTRACTOR shall implement any and all additional measures required to comply with Laws and Regulations. 5. Vegetation Removal: Remove only those shrubs, grasses, and other vegetation that must be removed for construction. Protect remaining vegetation. 6. Access Roads and Parking Areas: When possible, access roads and temporary roads shall be located and constructed to avoid adverse effects on the environment. Provisions shall be made to regulate drainage, avoid erosion and sedimentation, and minimize damage to vegetation. 7. Earthwork and Temporary Controls: a. Perform excavation, fill, and related operations in accordance with Section 02315. b. Control erosion to minimize transport of silt from the Site into existing waterways and surface waters. Such measures shall include, but are not limited to, using berms, silt fencing, baled straw silt barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulching and soil stabilization, slope drains, and other methods. Apply such temporary measures to erodible materials exposed by activities associated with the construction of the Project. c. Hold to a minimum the areas of bare soil exposed at one time. d. Construct fills and waste areas by selectively placing fill and waste materials to eliminate surface silts and clays that will erode. e. In performing earthwork, eliminate depressions that could serve as mosquito pools. f. CONTRACTOR shall provide special care in areas with steep slopes, where disturbance of vegetation shall be minimized to maintain soil stability. 8. Inspection and Maintenance: a. Periodically inspect areas of earthwork and areas where soil or soil cover are disturbed to detect evidence of the start of erosion and sedimentation; apply corrective measures as required to control erosion and sedimentation. Continue inspections and corrective measures until soils are permanently stabilized and permanent vegetation has been established 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -6 Temporary Controls 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Repair or replace damaged erosion and sediment controls within 24 hours of CONTRACTOR becoming aware of such damage. c. Periodically remove silt and sediment that has accumulated in or behind sediment and erosion controls. Properly dispose of silt and sediment. 9. Duration of Erosion and Sediment Controls: a. Maintain erosion and sediment controls in effective working condition until the associated drainage area has been permanently stabilized. b. Maintain erosion and sediment controls until the Site is restored and site improvements including landscaping, if any, are complete with underlying soils permanently stabilized. 10. Work Stoppage: If the Work is temporarily stopped or suspended for any reason, CON'T'RACTOR shall provide additional temporary controls necessary to prevent environmental damage to the Site and adjacent areas while the Work is stopped or suspended. 11. Failure to Provide Adequate Controls: In the event CON TRACTOR repeatedly fails to satisfactorily control erosion and siltation, CITY reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use CITY's own forces for erosion and sediment control. Cost of such work, plus engineering and inspection costs, will be deducted from monies due CONTRACTOR. B. Silt Fencing: 1. Install and maintain silt fencing in a vertical plane. 2. Locations of Silt Fencing: a. Where possible, install silt fencing along contour lines so that each given run fencing is at the same elevation. b. On slopes install silt fencing at intervals that do not exceed the maximum intervals indicated in the following table: 11- 0025 -UT Slope (percent) Maximum Length of Slope Above Each Silt Fence (feet) 2 and less 150 2.1 to 5 100 5.1 to 10 50 10.1 to 20 25 20.1 to 25 20 25.1 to 40 15 40.1 to 50 10 c. Provide silt fencing around perimeter of each stockpile of topsoil, general fill material, and excavated material. Install silt fencing before expected precipitation and maintain until stockpile is removed. d. Do not install silt fencing at the following types of locations: 1) Area of concentrated storm water flows such as ditches, swales, or channels. 2) Where rock or rocky soils prevent full and uniform anchoring of silt fencing. 01570 -7 Temporary Controls 3) Across upstream or discharge ends of storm water piping or culverts. 3. Installation: a. Securely fasten wire mesh to posts, and securely fasten filter cloth to wire mesh. b. When two sections of filter cloth abut each other, fold over edges and overlap by minimum of six inches and securely fasten to wire mesh. c. Embed posts in the ground to the depth necessary for proper controls; embed posts to at least 16 inches below ground. d. Filter cloth and wire mesh shall extend a minimum of eight inches below ground and a minimum of 16 inches above ground. e. Remove sediment accumulated at silt fencing as required. Repair and reinstall silt fencing as required. 4. Maintenance: a. Do not allow formation of concentrated storm water flows on slopes above silt fencing unless so shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. If unauthorized concentrated storm water flows occur, stabilize the slope via earthmoving and other stabilization measures as required to prevent flow of concentrated storm water flows toward silt fencing. C. Straw Bale Dike. 1. Install straw bale dikes where shown or indicated, including in swales, along contours, and along toe of slopes. 2. Install bales in shallow excavation as wide as the bale and approximately four to six inches below surrounding grade. 3. Ends of bale shall tightly abut ends of adjacent bales. 4. Securely install straw bales using two support posts per bale, driven into the ground a minimum of 1.5 to two feet below bottom of bale. Top of post shall be flush with top of bale. Angle first post for each bale toward the previously - installed bale. 5. Frequently inspect bales and repair or replace as required. Remove accumulated silt and debris from behind straw bales. D. Mulching and Soil Stabilization: 1. Use mulching to temporarily stabilize exposed soil and fill material. a. Immediately following final grading, provide mulch and stabilize with mats or netting, or sprayed soil stabilization emulsion with fiber additive. b. Application of mulching for soil stabilization shall be as follows. 1) Unrotted Straw or Salt Hay: 1.5 to two tons per acre. 2) Soil stabilization emulsions, when used, shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and shall be applied with mulch or stabilization fibers. 3) Wood -fiber or Paper -fiber Application: 1,500 lbs. per acre, installed by hydroseeding. c. Where mats or netting are used: 1) Cover entire area to be stabilized with mats or netting. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -8 Temporary Controls 2) Provide anchoring trenches at the top and bottom of slopes to receive mats or netting. Bury at least the top and bottom ends of mat or netting, four inches or more wide, at top and bottom of slope. Tamp trench full of soil. Four inches from trench, secure mat or netting with appropriate staples spaced at intervals of 10 inches. 3) Overlap adjacent strips of mat or netting by at least four inches. E. Protection of Storm Water Drainage Inlets and Catch Basins: 1. Protect each drainage inlet and catch basin that has the potential to receive storm water runoff from exposed soils, and does not discharge into a storm water settlement basin. 2. Install inlet filter bags inside of drainage inlet or catch basin in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Secure inlet filter bag with the structure's grate or by other acceptable means. 3. Inlet filter bags shall not pose any obstruction above the elevation of the drainage inlet or catch basin grate requiring barricades or flashers. 4. When removing silt and sediment from inlet filter bag, do not dumpi filter bag's contents into the drainage inlet or catch basin. 5. Remove silt and sediment from inlet filter bag, or replace inlet filter bag, when inlet filter bag is not more than half full. F. Filter Bag on Dewatering Pump Discharge: 1. Provide dewatering of excavations in compliance with Division 2 Sections on earthmoving, excavation, and fill. 2. Locate filter bags and temporary pump discharge lines to avoid interfering with the public, use of private property, and CITY's operations. Relocate filter bags and appurtenances when required. 3. Filter bag discharge shall be directed to appropriate storm water drainage route. Do not discharge into roadways, driveways, access roads, and overland. When temporary settlement basin is used, locate filter bags to discharge to temporary settlement basin when practicable. 4. Provide filter bag on discharge of each dewatering pump drawing from an excavation. 5. Securely attach filter bag to pump discharge pipe or hose. 6. Maintain, clean out, and replace filter bags as required. 11- 0025 -UT 01570 -9 Temporary Controls 3.7 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Removals — General: 1. Upon completion of the Work, remove temporary controls and restore Site to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore Site to pre - construction condition. 2. After soils are permanently stabilized, remove from the Site temporary erosion and sediment controls. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01570 -10 Temporary Controls SECTION 01651 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF PRODUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. This Section includes the general requirements for preparing for shipping, delivering, and handling materials and equipment. 2. CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work. 3. When required, move stored materials and equipment without additional compensation and without changes to the Contract Times. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivering and handling materials and equipment. 1.3 PREPARING FOR SHIPMENT A. When practical, factory- assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating. B. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, CITY's contract name and number, CONTRACTOR name, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment. C. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry and dust -free at all times. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not ship materials and equipment until: 1. Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or accepted (as applicable) by CITY, including, but not necessarily limited to, all Action Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 11- 0025 -UT 01651 -1 Transportation and Handling of Products 2. Manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by CITY in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been reviewed and accepted by CITY. 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions are in place and available. 5. Required storage facilities have been provided. 1.4 DELIVERY A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries: 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and to accommodate the following: a. Work of other contractors and CITY. b. Storage space limitations. c. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and equipment. d. CITY's use of premises. 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project, including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delaying the Work. B. Deliveries: 1. Shipments shall be delivered with CONTRACTOR's name, Subcontractor's name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract designation (example: "ABC Construction Co., City of Somewhere, Idaho, Wastewater Treatment Plant Primary Clarifier Improvements, Contract 25, General Construction ") clearly marked. 2. Site may be listed as the "ship to" or "delivery" address; but CITY shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by CITY. 3. Provide CONTRACTOR's telephone number to shipper; do not provide CITY's telephone number. 4. Arrange for deliveries while CONTRACTOR's personnel are at the Site. CONTRACTOR shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when CONTRACTOR is not present will be refused by CITY, and CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred. 11- 0025 -UT 01651 -2 Transportation and Handling of Products C. Containers and Marking: 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Deliveries: 1 Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Materials and equipment are undamaged. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. e. Materials and equipment are properly protected. 2. Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. 3. Advise CITY in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and equipment are delivered, and advise CITY of the associated impact on the Progress Schedule. 1.5 HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by CITY, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and equipment and packaging. B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E. Handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand -carry or use suitable handling equipment. 11- 0025 -UT 01651 -3 Transportation and Handling of Products PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01651 -4 Transportation and Handling of Products SECTION 01661 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF PRODUCTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes general requirements for storing and protecting materials and equipment. 1.2 STORAGE A. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents. B. CONTRACTOR shall make all arrangements and provisions necessary for, and pay all costs for, storing materials and equipment. Excavated materials, construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed to avoid injuring the Work and existing facilities and property, and so that free access is maintained at all times to all parts of the Work and to public utility installations in vicinity of the Work. Store materials and equipment neatly and compactly in locations that cause minimum inconvenience to CITY, other contractors, public travel, and owners, tenants, and occupants of adjoining property. Arrange storage in manner to allow easy access for inspection. C. Areas available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as approved by CITY. D. Store materials and equipment to become CITY's property to facilitate their inspection and ensure preservation of quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection against damage by freezing, moisture, and high temperatures with ambient temperatures as high as 100 degrees F. Store in indoor, climate - controlled storage areas all materials and equipment subject to damage by moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements, unless otherwise acceptable to CITY. When placing orders to Suppliers for equipment and controls containing computer chips, electronics, and solid -state devices, CONTRACTOR shall obtain, coordinate, and comply with specific temperature and humidity limitations on materials and equipment, because temperature inside cabinets and components stored in warm temperatures can approach 200 degrees F. E. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage (including theft) to stored materials and equipment. F. Do not open manufacturer's containers until time of installation, unless 11- 0025 -UT 01661 -1 Storage and Protection of Products recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. G Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by CITY in writing. H. Do not use lawns or other private property for storage without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. 1.3 PROTECTION A. Equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipping, handling, and storage, in accordance with Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Products. B. Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as skids or pallets. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted equipment surfaces that are damaged or marred shall be repainted in their entirety in accordance with equipment manufacturer and paint manufacturer requirements, to the satisfaction of CITY. D. Protect electrical equipment, controls, and instrumentation against moisture, water damage, heat, cold, and dust. Space heaters provided in equipment shall be connected and operating at all times until equipment is placed in operation and permanently connected. 1.4 UNCOVERED STORAGE A. The following types of materials may be stored outdoors without cover on supports so there is no contact with the ground: 1. Reinforcing steel. 2. Precast concrete materials. 3. Structural steel. 4. Metal stairs. 5. Handrails and railings. 6 Grating. 7. Checker plate. 8. Metal access hatches. 9. Castings. 10. Fiberglass products. 11. Rigid electrical conduit. 12. Piping, except polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated PVC (CPVC) pipe. 11- 0025 -UT 01661 -2 Storage and Protection of Products 1.5 COVERED STORAGE A. The following materials and equipment may be stored outdoors on supports and completely covered with covering impervious to water: 1. Grout and mortar materials. 2. Masonry units. 3. Rough lumber. 4. Soil materials and granular materials such as aggregate. 5. PVC and CPVC pipe. 6. Filter media. B. Tie down covers with rope, and slope covering to prevent accumulation of water. C. Store loose granular materials, with covering impervious to water, in well- drained area or on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 1.6 FULLY PROTECTED STORAGE A. Store all material and equipment not named in Articles 1.4 and 1.5 of this Section on supports in buildings or trailers that have concrete or wooden flooring, roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. Covering with visquine plastic sheeting or similar material in space without floor, roof, and walls is not acceptable. Comply with the following: 1. Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by low temperatures or freezing. 2. Provide air - conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by high temperatures. 3. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, and moisture. 4. Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturers for electrical and electronic equipment. 1.7 HAZARDOUS PRODUCTS A. Prevent contamination of personnel, storage area, and the Site. Comply with Laws and Regulations and manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. On scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and equipment to ensure that: 1. Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Materials and equipment exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 11- 0025 -UT 01661 -3 Storage and Protection of Products B. Mechanical and electrical equipment requiring long -term storage shall have complete manufacturer's instructions for servicing each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of container or package. 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions on scheduled basis. 2. Space heaters that are part of electrical equipment shall be connected and operated continuously until equipment is placed in service and permanently connected. 1.9 MICROPROCESSORS, PANELS, AND INSTRUMENTATION STORAGE A. Store panels, microprocessor -based equipment, electronics, and other devices subject to damage or decreased useful life because of temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F, relative humidity above 90 percent, or exposure to rain or exposure to blowing dust in climate - controlled storage space. B. Requirements: 1. Storage shall be coordinated with the CITY, to be located in an existing climate controlled location. 2. CITY has the right to inspect materials and equipment during normal working hours. 3. Placed inside each panel or device a desiccant, volatile corrosion inhibitor blocks (VCI), moisture indicator, and maximum - minimum indicating thermometer. 4. Check panels and equipment at least once per month. Replace desiccant, VCI, and moisture indicator as often as required, or every six months, whichever occurs first. 5. Certified record of daily maximum and minimum temperature and humidity in storage facility shall be available for inspection by CITY. Certified record of monthly inspection, noting maximum and minimum temperature for month, condition of desiccant, VCI, and moisture indicator, shall be available for inspection by CITY. C. Costs for storing climate- sensitive materials and equipment shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. Replace panels and devices damaged during storage, or for which storage temperatures or humidity range has been exceeded, at no additional cost to CITY. Delays resulting from such replacement are causes within CONTRACTOR's control. D. Do not ship panels and equipment to the Site until conditions at the Site are suitable for installation, including slabs and floors, walls, roofs, and environmental controls. Failure to have the Site ready for installation shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from complying with the Contract Documents. 1.10 RECORDS A. Keep up -to -date account of materials and equipment in storage to facilitate preparation of Applications for Payment, if the Contract Documents provide for 11- 0025 -UT 01661 -4 Storage and Protection of Products payment for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01661 -5 Storage and Protection of Products 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01661 -6 Storage and Protection of Products SECTION 01721 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage, as specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. 2. To prevent damage, injury, or loss, CONTRACTOR's actions shall include the following: a. Storing apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of other contractors or utility companies. b. Providing suitable storage facilities for materials and equipment subject to damage or degradation by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or other cause. c. Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction. d. Frequently removing and disposing of refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by CONTRACTOR's operations so that, at all times, the Site is safe, orderly, and workmanlike in appearance. e. Providing temporary barricades and guard rails around the following: openings, scaffolding, temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, for elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. 3. Do not, except after written consent from proper parties, enter or occupy privately -owned land with personnel, tools, materials or equipment, except on lands and easements provided by CITY. 4. CONTRACTOR has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities on and adjacent to the Site. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct by CONTRACTOR in executing the Work, shall be restored by CONTRACTOR, at his expense to condition equal to that existing before damage was done. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT 01721 -1 Protection of the Work and Property PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNALS A. Barricades and Warning Signals — General: 1. Where the Work is performed on or adjacent to roadway, access road, right - of -way, or public place: a. Provide barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, danger signals, watchmen, and take other precautionary measures for protecting persons, property, and the Work. b. Paint barricades to be visible at night. c. From sunset to sunrise, furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade. d. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles from being driven on or into Work under construction. e. Furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the Work. 2. Provide temporary barricades to protect personnel and property for Work not in or adjacent to vehicular travel areas, including indoor work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 3. CONTRACTOR's responsibility for maintaining temporary barricades, signs, lights, and for providing watchmen shall continue until the Work is accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Tree and Plant Protection — General: 1. Protect existing trees, shrubs, and plants on or adjacent to the Site, shown or designated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking, or skinning of trunk, branches, bark, and roots. 2. Do not store materials or equipment or park construction equipment and vehicles within the foliage drip line. 3. In areas subject to traffic, provide temporary fencing or barricades to protect trees and plants. 4. Fires are not allowed. 5. Within the limits of the Work, water trees and plants that are to remain to maintain their health during construction operations. 6. Cover exposed roots with burlap, which shall be kept continuously wet. Cover exposed roots with earth as soon as possible. Protect root systems from mechanical damage and damage by erosion, flooding, runoff, and noxious materials in solution. 7. If branches or trunks are damaged, prune branches immediately and protect cut or damaged areas with emulsified asphalt compounded specifically for horticultural use, in manner acceptable to CITY. 8. When directed by CITY, remove and dispose of at location away from the Site damaged trees and plants that die or suffer permanent injury, and replace damaged tree or plant with specimen of equal or better quality. 11- 0025 -UT 01721 -2 Protection of the Work and Property 3.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Underground Facilities: I. Underground Facilities and Structures known to CITY, except water, gas, sewer, electric, and communications services (Utilities) to individual buildings and properties, are shown on historical /record dwgs. Information shown for Underground Facilities and Structures is the best available to CITY but, in accordance with General Conditions, is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. 2. CONTRACTOR shall explore ahead of trenching and excavation Work and shall uncover obstructing Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures and to prevent process and service interruption to facilities, building or parcels served by Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures. If CONTRACTOR damages any Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures, CONTRACTOR shall restore it to original condition, in accordance with requirements of the owner of the damaged Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures and the General Conditions. 3. Necessary changes in the location of the Work may be directed by CITY to avoid Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures not shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. 4. If permanent relocation of existing Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures is required and is not otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR will be directed in writing to perform the Work. When the relocation Work results in a change in the Contract Price, Contract Time, contract modification procedures and payment for such Work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Permanent relocation shall not be interpreted as to apply to City approved demolition of abandoned Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures. Such demolition and removal of abandoned Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR without any additional cost to City. B. Surface Structures: 1. Surface structures are existing buildings, structures, and other facilities at or above ground surface, including their foundations or any extension below ground surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, exposed piping and utilities, poles, exposed wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, fencing, and other facilities visible at or above ground surface. 2. Existing surface facilities, including but not limited to guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, curbs, and fencing, that are temporarily removed to facilitate the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original condition at CONTRACTOR's expense. C. Protection of Underground Facilities and Surface Structures: 11- 0025 -UT 01721 -3 Protection of the Work and Property 1. CONTRACTOR shall sustain in their places and protect from direct or indirect injury all Underground Facilities and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure or facility. Before proceeding with the Work of sustaining and supporting such structure or facility, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy CITY that methods and procedures to be used have been approved by party owning same. 2. CONTRACTOR shall bear all risks attending the presence or proximity of all Underground Facilities and surface structures within or adjacent to limits of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his Work to structures and facilities. CONTRACTOR shall repair immediately damage caused by his Work, to the satisfaction of owner of damaged structure or facility. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FLOORS AND ROOFS A. Protection of Floors and Roofs — General: 1. Protect floors and roofs until acceptance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Use proper protective covering when moving heavy equipment, handling materials or other loads, when painting, handling mortar or grout, and when cleaning walls and ceilings. 3. Use metal pans to collect oil and cuttings from pipe, conduit, and rod threading machines, and under metal cutting machines. 4. Do not load concrete floors less than 28 days old without written permission of CITY. Do not load floors, roofs, or slabs in excess of design loading. 5. Do not load roofs without written permission of CITY. 6. Restrict access to roofs, and keep CONTRACTOR personnel off existing roofs, except as required for the Work. 7. If access to roofs is required, roofing, parapets, openings, and all other construction on or adjacent to roof shall be protected with suitable plywood or other acceptable means. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND LANDSCAPING A. Protect installed materials and equipment to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed prior to completion of the Work. B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. C. Coverings: 1. Provide coverings to protect materials and equipment from damage. 11- 0025 -UT 01721 -4 Protection of the Work and Property 2. Cover projections, wall corners and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of materials and equipment in subsequent work. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01721 -5 Protection of the Work and Property 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01721 -6 Protection of the Work and Property SECTION 01723 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall perform cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and openings in existing construction. 2. Provide cutting, coring, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to: a. uncover existing ductbanks or utilities in the areas of generator platform, relocated bulk fuel tanks, new manholes and new ductbanks. b. remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing; c. remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to existing work; d. uncover the Work for CITY's observation of covered Work or observation by authorities having jurisdiction; e. connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence; f. remove or relocate existing utilities and pipes that obstruct the Work in locations where connections must be made; g. make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities. h. remove and replace defective Work 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Cutting and Patching Request: a. Submit written request to CITY, well in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects one or more of the following: 1) Design function or intent of Project. 2) Work of CITY or other contractors. 3) Structural value or integrity of an element of the Project. 4) Integrity or effectiveness of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements or systems. 5) Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 6) Visual qualities of sight- exposed elements. b. Request shall include: 1) Identification of Project and contract name and number. 2) Description of affected Work of CONTRACTOR and work of others (if any). 3) Necessity for cutting. 11- 0025 -UT 01723 -1 Cutting and Patching 4) Effect on work of CITY, other contractors (if any), and on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5) Description of proposed Work, describing: scope of cutting and patching; trades who will be executing the Work; products proposed to be used; extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives to cutting and patching, if any. 6) Designation of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when applicable. 7) Written permission of other contractors (if any) whose work will be affected. 2. Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching: a. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate a change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to CITY including: 1) Conditions indicating change. 2) Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. 3) Items required with substitution request, in accordance with the substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Product Data: a. Submit manufacturer's product data for the protective compound to be applied to core - drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Submit written indication designating the day and time that the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered, to provide for observation. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted by CITY. 2. X -ray Investigations: a. Proposed method of investigation. Submit and obtain CITY's acceptance prior to performing X -ray inspections. b. Report of X -ray evaluation of slabs, floors, and walls to be cut or core - drilled. C. Comply with submittal requirements in the Division 02 through Division 16 Specifications for patching materials. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials - General: 1. Use materials in conformance with the Contract Documents. 2. If not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, use materials and products that are identical to existing materials and products affected by cutting and patching Work. 3. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or 11- 0025 -UT 01723 -2 Cutting and Patching cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. 4. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using materials that do not void required or existing warranties. B. Compound Applied to Core - Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces: 1. After core - drilling and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with solvent -free, two- component, epoxy protective coating. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Sikagard 62, by Sika Corporation. b. Or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Perform cutting and coring in such manner that limits extent of patching. B. Structural Elements: Do not cut or patch structural elements in manner that would change structural element's load - carrying capacity as load deflection ratio. C. Operating Elements: Do not cut or patch operating elements in manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut or patch operating elements or related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or decrease operational life or safety. D. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, using methods that do not void required or existing warranties. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut or patched and conditions under which cutting or patching are to be performed before starting cutting or patching work. B. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to CITY in writing. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Non - Destructive Investigation: 1. In advance of cutting or coring through existing slabs or walls, use X -ray or other non - destructive methods accepted by CITY to determine location of reinforcing steel, electrical conduits, and other items embedded in slabs or walls. 2. Submit to CITY written report of findings of evaluation. 11- 0025 -UT 01723 -3 Cutting and Patching 3. Perform X -ray investigation and submit results to CITY sufficiently in advance of cutting work to allow time to identify and implement alternatives if changes to the Work are necessary because of conduit or other features in floor or wall. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity of Project, to protect adjacent Work from damage during cutting, and to support the element(s) to be cut. B. Protection of Existing Construction During Cutting and Patching: 1. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that will be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 2. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3. Do not cut existing pipe, conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.4 CORING A. Core -drill holes to be cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, unless otherwise accepted by CITY in writing. B. Coring: 1. Perform coring with non - impact rotary tool using diamond core - drills. Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment or mechanical seals, as required, to be installed through the penetration. 2. Do not core -drill through electrical conduit or other utility lines embedded in walls or slabs without approval of CITY. To extent possible, avoid cutting reinforcing steel in slabs and walls. C. Protection: 1. Protect existing equipment, utilities, and adjacent areas from water and other damage covered by core - drilling operations. 2. After core - drilling and before installing the utility or equipment through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 11- 0025 -UT 01723 -4 Cutting and Patching D. Cleaning: 1. Vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area following core - drilling. 3.5 CUTTING A. Cutting — General: 1. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and that provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repair. 2. In general, use hand or small power tools suitable for sawing or grinding. Avoid using hammering and chopping when possible. 3. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to the size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 4. Provide adequate bracing of area to be cut prior to start of cutting. 5. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed side. 6. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel. 7. Provide temporary covering over cut openings where not in use. B. Cutting — Concrete and Masonry: 1. Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond saw blades. 2. On both the element being cut, provide for control of slurry generated during sawing. 3. After cutting concrete and before installing subsequent construction on or through the opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 PATCHING A. Patching — General: 1. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing -up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as inconspicuous as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Patch to provide airtight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. 4. Where feasible, test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of installation. B. Restoration: 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 11- 0025 -UT 01723 -5 Cutting and Patching 3. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit that was patched. 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Cleaning and Restoration: I. Clean areas and spaces where cutting, coring, or patching were performed. 2. Clean piping, conduit, and similar constructions before applying paint or other finishing materials. 3. Restore damaged coverings of pipe and other utilities to original condition. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01723 -6 Cutting and Patching SECTION 01724 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. This Section includes requirements for connections to existing facilities. Requirements for tie -ins and shutdowns necessary to complete the Work are in Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required for connections to existing facilities. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations. D. General: 1 Requirements for temporary electrical and pumping for connections to existing facilities are in Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations. 2. To extent possible, materials, equipment, systems, piping, and appurtenances that will be placed into service upon completion of connection to existing facilities shall be checked, successfully tested, and in condition for operation prior to making connections to existing facilities, if valves, gates, or similar watertight and gastight isolation devices are not provided at the connection point. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) ++ END OF SECTION ++ 11- 0025 -UT 01724 -1 Connections to Existing Facilities 1 1 -0025-UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01724 -2 Connections to Existing Facilities SECTION 01740 CLEANING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall execute cleaning during the Project, at completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions and this Section. 2. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations. 1.3 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by CONTRACTOR at least weekly. Dispose of materials in accordance with the General Conditions and the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold non - combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non - combustible materials within seven days of their generation. 3. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately. B. Site: 1. Keep outdoor, dust - generating areas wetted down or otherwise control dust emissions. 2. At least weekly, brush -sweep roadways and paved areas at the Site that are used by construction vehicles or otherwise affected by construction activities. C. Work Areas: 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly and immediately report spills to CITY and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum entire work area, as appropriate. 11- 0025 -UT 01740 -1 Cleaning 4. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. D. Installed Work: Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of material or equipment installed, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion. F. Cutting and Patching: 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 2. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. G. Waste Disposal: 1. Properly dispose of waste materials, surplus materials, debris, and rubbish off the Site. 2. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials at the Site. 3. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers or sanitary sewers. 4. Do not discharge wastes into surface waters or drainage routes. 5. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste. H. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply protective covering where required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. I. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. 1.4 CLOSEOUT CLEANING A. Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Clean and remove from the Site rubbish, waste material, debris, and other foreign substances. 2. Sweep paved areas broom - clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Hose -clean sidewalks and loading areas. 11- 0025 -UT 01740 -2 Cleaning 4. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. 5. Leave surface waterways, drainage routes, storm sewers, and gutters open and clean. 6. Repair pavement, roads, sod, and other areas affected by construction operations and restore to specified condition; if condition is not specified, restore to pre- construction condition. 7. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free of spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, films, and similar foreign substances. 8. Clean, wax, and polish wood, vinyl, and painted floors. 9. Remove debris and surface dust from limited - access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. 10. In unoccupied spaces, sweep concrete floors broom - clean. 11. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glazing in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 12. Remove non - permanent tags and labels. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore chipped, scratched, dented or otherwise marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. a. Do not paint over "UL" or similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 14. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint, and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 15. Clean plumbing fixtures to sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 16. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 17. Clean lighting fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace temporary lamps provided in permanent fixtures. Replace existing lighting fixture components that are burned out or noticeably dimmed from use during construction. Replace defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 18. Leave the Site clean, and in neat, orderly condition, satisfactory to CITY. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT 01740 -3 Cleaning PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01740 -4 Cleaning SECTION 01751 STARTING AND PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall initially start up and place equipment installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions and as instructed by Supplier at the Site. 2. Provide all material, labor, tools, and equipment required to complete equipment checkout and start-up. 3. Provide chemicals, lubricants, and other required operating fluids. 4. Provide fuel, electricity, water, filters, and other expendables required for start-up of equipment, unless otherwise specified. 5. General Activities Include: a. Cleaning, as required under other provisions of the Contract Documents. b. Removing temporary protective coatings. c. Flushing and replacing lubricants, where required by manufacturer. d. Lubrication. e. Checking shaft and coupling alignments and resetting where required. f. Checking and setting motor, pump, and other equipment rotation, safety interlocks, and belt tensions. g. Checking and correcting (if necessary) leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchorage devices, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits, and ducts that may place stress on the connected equipment. h. All adjustments required. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate checkout and start-up with other contractors, as necessary. 2. Do not start up system or subsystem for continuous operation until all components of that system or subsystem, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. CITY will provide sufficient personnel to assist CONTRACTOR in starting up equipment, but responsibility for proper operation is CONTRACTOR's. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, start-up, and initial operation, unless otherwise acceptable to CITY. 5. Start-up of heating and air conditioning equipment and systems is dependent upon the time of year. Return to the Site at beginning of next heating or air conditioning season (as applicable) to recheck and start the appropriate systems. 11- 0025 -UT 01751 -1 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation 6. Do not start up system, unit process, or equipment without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by CONTRAC -TOR, in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. C. CITY's Assumption of Responsibility for Equipment and Systems: 1. CITY will assume responsibility for the equipment upon Substantial Completion. 2. Prior to turning over to CITY responsibility for operating and maintaining system or equipment: a. Provide training of operations and maintenance personnel in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. b. Complete system field quality control testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Submit acceptable final operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. d. Obtain from CITY final certificate of Substantial Completion for either entire Work or the portion being turned over to CITY. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: a. Supplier's certification of installation in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.B of this Section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF SUPPLIER A. When specified, furnish services of competent, qualified representatives of material and equipment manufacturers as specified, including supervising installation, adjusting, checkout, start-up, and testing of materials and equipment. B. Certification: 1. When services by Supplier are required at the Site, within 14 days after first test operation of equipment, submit to CITY a letter from Supplier, on Supplier's letterhead, stating that materials and equipment are installed in accordance with Supplier's requirements and installation instructions, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. In lieu of Supplier letter, submit completed form attached to this Section. 11- 0025 -UT 01751 -2 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation 3. Include in the final operations and maintenance manual for the associated equipment a copy of the letter or completed form, as applicable. 3.2 MINIMUM START -UP REQUIREMENTS A. Bearings and Shafting: 1. Inspect for cleanliness, and clean and remove foreign matter. 2. Verify alignment. 3. Replace defective bearings and those that operate in a rough or noisy manner. 4. Grease as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drives: 1. Adjust tension in V -belt drives and adjust vari -pitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment speed. 2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V- belts. 3. Clean and remove foreign matter before starting operation. C. Motors: 1. Check each motor for comparison to amperage nameplate value. 2. Correct conditions that produce excessive current flow and conditions that exist due to equipment malfunction. D. Pumps: 1. Check glands and seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running pump. 2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring. 3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings, and replace if defective. 4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid through pump. E. Valves: 1. Inspect manual and automatic control valves, and clean bonnets and stems. 2. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage, but allow valve stems to operate without galling. 3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is determined to be complete. 4. Replace packing on valves that continue to leak. 5. Remove and repair bonnets that leak. 6. After cleaning, coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of "Molycote" or "Fel- Pro ". F. Verify that control valve seats are free of foreign matter and are properly positioned for intended service. G. Tighten flanges and other pipe joints after system has been placed in operation. Replace gaskets that show signs of leakage after tightening. 11- 0025 -UT 01751 -3 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation H. Inspect all joints for leakage: 1. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust other corrosion to form. 2. Clean threads on both parts, and apply compound and remake joints. I. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, drives, pockets, orifices, valve seats, and headers in fluid system to ensure freedom from foreign matter. J. Open steam traps and air vents, where used, and remove operating elements. Clean thoroughly, replace internal parts, and place back into operation. K. Remove rust, scale, and foreign matter from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. L. Set and calibrate draft gauges of air filters and other equipment. M. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance. Provide factory- authorized personnel for adjustment when needed. N. Check each electrical control circuit to verify that operation complies with the Contract Documents. O. Inspect each pressure gauge, thermometer, and other instruments for calibration. Replace items that are defaced, broken, or that read incorrectly. P. Repair damaged insulation. Q. Excess Gasses and Fluids: 1. Vent gasses trapped in systems. 2. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems. 3.3 ATTACHMENTS A. The attachment listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, is a part of this Specification Section. 1. Supplier's Installation Certification Form (one page). + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01751 -4 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation SUPPLIER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION Contract No. and Name: Equipment Specification Section: Equipment Name: Contractor: Manufacturer of Equipment: The undersigned Supplier of the equipment described above hereby certifies that Supplier has checked the equipment installation and that the equipment, as specified in the Contract Documents, has been provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, and that the trial operation of the equipment has been satisfactory. Comments: Date Supplier Name (print) Signature of Supplier Date Contractor Name (print) 11- 0025 -UT Signature of Contractor 01751 -5 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11- 0025 -UT 01751 -6 Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation SECTION 01772 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Scope: 1. Section Includes. a. Substantial Completion. b. Final inspection. c. Request for final payment. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Procedures for requesting and documenting Substantial Completion are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. Procedures for requesting and documenting the final inspection are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 1.4 REQUEST FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Procedure: 1. Submit request for final payment in accordance with the Agreement and General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, using procedure specified in Section 01297, Progress Payment Procedures. B. Request for final payment shall include: 1. Documents required for progress payments in Section 01297, Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Documents required in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Releases or Waivers of Lien Rights: a. When submitting releases or waivers of Lien rights, provide release or waiver by CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor and Supplier that provided CONTRACTOR with labor, material, or equipment totaling $1,000 or more. b. Provide list of Subcontractors and Suppliers for which release or waiver of Lien is required. c. Each release or waiver of Lien shall be signed by an authorized representative of the entity submitting release or waiver to 11- 0025 -UT 01772 -1 Closeout Requirements CONTRACTOR, and shall include Subcontractor's or Supplier's corporate seal, when applicable. d. Release or waiver of Lien may be conditional upon receipt of final payment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01772 -2 Closeout Requirements SECTION 01781 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Submit operation and maintenance data, in accordance with this Section and in accordance with requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference manuals by operations and maintenance personnel at the Site. 2. Required operation and maintenance data groupings are listed in table(s) in Article 1.2 of this Section. At minimum, submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems. b. Valves, gates, actuators, and related accessories. c. Instrumentation and control devices. d. Electrical gear. 3. For each operation and maintenance manual, submit the following: a. Preliminary Submittal: Printed and bound copy of entire operation and maintenance manual, except for test data, service reports by Supplier, and electronic copies. b. Final Submittal: Printed and bound copy of complete operations and maintenance manual, including test data and service reports by Supplier, with electronic copies. 4. The CITY will use the bound operating and maintenance manuals and reproductions thereof to train present and future CITY Waste Water Facilities Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Therefore the contents of the operating and maintenance manuals cannot be proprietary in nature. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for seeking a letter of "Fair Use Exemption" or "License for Reproduction" from the copyright holder for all documents in the operating and maintenance manual that are copyrighted. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and maintenance Data a. Submit the operations and maintenance data indicated in the Contract Documents, grouped into submittals as indicated in Table 01781 -A: 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -1 Operations and Maintenance Data TABLE 01781 -A - REQUIRED OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA Name of O &M Manual/Data For Materials or Equipment Specified in Section(s) Engine Generator System 16231 Automatic Transfer Switches 16412 Switchboard 16440 Uninterruptible Power Supply 16611 Day Tank Fuel System 16231 PLC and Remote I/O 13400 Electrically Operated Panelboard 16442 B. Quantity Required and Timing of Submittals: 1. Preliminary Submittal: a. Printed Copies: five copies, exclusive of copies required by CONTRACTOR. b. Electronic Copies: three copies. c. Submit to CITY by the earlier of: ninety days following approval of Shop Drawings and product data submittals, or ten days prior to starting training of operations and maintenance personnel, or ten days prior to field quality control testing at the Site. d. Furnish preliminary operation and maintenance data submittal in acceptable form and content, as determined by CITY, before associated materials and equipment will be eligible for payment. 2. Final Submittal: Provide final submittal prior to Substantial Completion, unless submittal is specified as required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Printed Copies: five copies. b. Electronic Copies: three copies. 1.3 FORMAT OF PRINTED COPIES A. Binding and Cover: 1. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff - cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy as required. Binders shall be minimum one -inch wide and maximum of two -inch wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be identical. 2. Binders shall be locking three - ring/ "D" -ring type, or three -post type. Three - ring binders shall be riveted to back cover and include plastic sheet lifter (page guard) at front of each volume. 3. Do not fill binders to more than 75% capacity. 4. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 5. Covers shall be oil -, moisture -, and wear - resistant, including identifying information on cover and spine of each volume. 6. Provide the following information on cover of each volume: a. Title: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ". b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as "Volume _ of ", with appropriate volume- designating numbers 1 1-0025-UT 01781 -2 Operations and Maintenance Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 filled in. d. Name of Project and, if applicable, Contract name and number. e. Name of building or structure, as applicable. 7. Provide the following information on spine of each volume: a. Title: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ". b. Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. c. Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as "Volume _ of ", with appropriate volume- designating numbers filled in. d. Project name and building or structure name. B. Pages: 1. Print pages in manual on 30 -pound (minimum) paper, 8.5 inches by 11 inches in size. 2. Reinforce binding holes in each individual sheet with plastic, cloth, or metal. When published, separately -bound booklets or pamphlets are part of the manual, reinforcing of pages within booklet or pamphlet is not required. 3. Provide each page with binding margin at least one inch wide. Punch each page with holes suitable for the associated binding. C. Drawings: 1. Bind into the manual drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11 inches by 17 inches in size, with reinforcing specified for pages. 11 inches by 17 inches drawings shall be folded to size of text pages and printed only on one side. 2. Documents larger than 11 inches by 17 inches shall be folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Mark pockets with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include no more than three drawing sheets per pocket. D. Copy Quality and Document Clarity: 1. Contents shall be original - quality copies. Documents in the manual shall be either original manufacturer - printed documents or first- generation photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. Manuals that contain copies that are unclear, not completely legible, off - center, skewed, or where text or drawings are cut by binding holes, are unacceptable. Pages that contain approval or date stamps, comments, or other markings that cover text or drawing are unacceptable. Faxed copies are unacceptable. 2. Clearly mark in ink to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre - printed documents, indicate options furnished or cross out inapplicable content. Using highlighters to so indicate options furnished is unacceptable. E. Organization: L Coordinate with CITY to develop comprehensive, practical, and consistent indexing system for operations and maintenance data. CITY will review indexing system before operations and maintenance data is submitted. 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -3 Operations and Maintenance Data 2. Table of Contents: a. Provide table of contents in each volume of each operations and maintenance manual. b. In table of contents and at least once in each chapter or section, identify materials and equipment by their functional names. Thereafter, abbreviations and acronyms may be used if their meaning is clearly indicated in a table bound at or near beginning of each volume. Using material or equipment model or catalog designations for identification is unacceptable. 3. Use dividers and indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. 4. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment within the tabs. 1.4 FORMAT OF ELECTRONIC COPIES A. Electronic Copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Each electronic copy shall include all information included in the corresponding printed copy. 2. Submit each electronic copy on a separate compact disc (CD), unless another electronic data transfer method or format is acceptable to CITY. 3. File Format: a. Files shall be in "portable document format" (PDF). Files shall be electronically searchable. b. Submit separate file for each separate document in the printed copy. c. Within each file, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection listed in the corresponding printed copy document's table of contents. 2) Each figure. 3) Each table. 4) Each appendix. 4. Also submit drawings and figures in one of the following formats: ".bmp ", ".tif', ".jpg ", or ".gift'. Submit files in a separate directory on the CD. B. Copies of Programming and Configuration Files: 1. Provide on CD copy of all software programming, such as programmable logic controller programs, prepared specifically for the Project. Third -party, licensed, commercially available software is excluded from requirements of this Article; submit copies of commercially - available, licensed, third -party software, where required, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Submit on CD copies of system configuration prepared specifically for the Project, such as plant monitoring system and SCADA display configurations. 3. Submit programming and configuration files together with electronic copies of operation and maintenance data. 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -4 Operations and Maintenance Data 1.5 CONTENT A. General: Prepare each operations and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as -built drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical bulletins, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Completeness and Accuracy: a. Operation and maintenance manuals that include language stating or implying that the manual's content may be insufficient or stating that the manual's content is not guaranteed to be complete and accurate are unacceptable. b. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be complete and accurate. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall indicate the specific alternatives and features furnished, and the specific operation and maintenance provisions for the material or equipment furnished. 3. Submit complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; operating instructions for start-up, normal and emergency condi- tions; regulation and control; operational troubleshooting; and shutdown. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions. B. Submit written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures. C. Submit complete, detailed, written preventive maintenance instructions including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: 1. Written explanations with illustrations for each preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, lubrication, calibration, and cleaning. Include pre - startup checklists for each equipment item and maintenance requirements for long -term shutdowns. 2. Recommended schedule for each preventive maintenance task. 3. Lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. 4. Table of alternative lubricants. 5. Troubleshooting instructions. 6. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -5 Operations and Maintenance Data D. Submit complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per- drawing or per - equipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: 1. Manufacturer's name, address, telephone number, fax number, and Internet website address. 2. Manufacturer's local service representative's or local parts supplier's name, address, telephone number, fax number, Internet website address, and e-mail addresses, when applicable. 3. Manufacturer's shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. 4. For each part or piece include the following information: a. Parts cross - reference number. Cross - reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. b. Part name or description. c. Manufacturer's part number. d. Quantity of each part used in each assembly. e. Current unit price of the part at the time the operations and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated. E. Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number) that will expedite the ordering process. F. Submit manufacturer's recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements. G. Submit manufacturer's installation and operation bulletins, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Avoid submitting catalog excerpts unless they are the only document available showing identification or description of particular component of the equipment. Where materials pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. H. Submit original - quality copies of each approved and accepted Shop Drawing, product data, and other submittal, updated to indicate as- installed condition. Reduced drawings are acceptable only if reduction is to not less than one -half original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -6 Operations and Maintenance Data I. Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point -to -point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points. J. Programmable Logic Controllers: If programmable logic controllers are furnished under the Contract: 1. Submit complete logic listings in function block diagram format. 2. Format Requirements: a. For function block diagram, label each function block with understandable tags or descriptive labels. Describe purpose and action of each function block. 3. Submit complete programmable logic controller listing of all input/output address assignments, tag assignments, and pre -set constant values, with functional point descriptions. 4. Submit complete manufacturer's programming manuals. K. Submit copy of warranty bond and service contract as applicable. L. When copyrighted material is used in operations and maintenance manuals, obtain copyright holder's written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01781 -7 Operations and Maintenance Data 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01781 -8 Operations and Maintenance Data SECTION 01782 RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain and submit to CITY with record documents in accordance with the Specifications, General Conditions, and Special Conditions. B. Maintenance of Record Documents: 1. Maintain in CONTRACTOR's field office, in clean, dry, legible condition, complete sets of the following record documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda; Shop Drawings, Samples, and other CONTRACTOR submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by CITY; Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, photographic documentation, survey data, and all other documents pertinent to the Work. 2. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to record documents. File record documents in accordance with the edition of the Construction Specification Institute's "MasterFormat" used for organizing the Project Manual, unless otherwise accepted by CITY. 3. Make record documents available for inspection upon request of CITY. 4. Do not use record documents for purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove record documents from CONTRACTOR's field office without CITY's approval. C. Submittal of Record Documents: 1. Submit to CITY the following record documents: a. Complete set of hardcopy and electronic (CADD & PDFs) record drawings. b. Project Manual including Specifications and Addenda (bound). 2. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to CITY one copy of final record documents. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial submittals. 3. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on CONTRACTOR letterhead complying with letter of transmittal requirements in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. 4. Record documents submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to execute legal agreements on behalf of CONTRACTOR, reading as follows: "[Insert Contractor's corporate name] has maintained and submitted record documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Special Conditions, Section 01782, Record Documents, and other elements of Contract Documents, for the City of Clearwater, Florida, East WRF and 11- 0025 -UT 01782 -1 Record Documents Marshall Street WRF Lab Generator Improvements. We certify that each record document submitted is complete, accurate, and legible relative to the Work performed under our Contract, and that the record documents comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. [Provide signature, print name, print signing party's corporate title, and date]" 1.2 RECORDING CHANGES A. General: 1. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, "PROJECT RECORD" using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. 2. Keep record documents current. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change. 3. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded. 4. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from CITY - accepted record documents. 5. Marking of Entries: a. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to record documents. b. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight -edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files. c. Date all entries on record documents. d. Call attention to changes by drawing a "cloud" around the change(s) indicated. e. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes. B. Drawings: 1. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of CONTRACTOR - originated or - produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on the Drawings is unacceptable. 2. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. 3. Record actual construction including: a. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum. b. Horizontal and vertical location of Underground Facilities referenced to permanent surface improvements. For each Underground Facility, including pipe fittings, provide dimensions to at Least two permanent, visible surface improvements. 11- 0025 -UT 01782 -2 Record Documents c. Location of exposed utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. d. Changes in structural and architectural elements of the Work, including changes in reinforcing. e. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. f. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. g. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by CONTRACTOR when required to document changes. 4. Recording Changes for Schematic Layouts: a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by CONTRACTOR subject to acceptance by CITY. b. Record on record documents all revisions to schematics on Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one -line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Contract. Record actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in -place grounding system, and other pertinent data. c. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1) Clearly identify the Work item by accurate notations such as "cast iron drain ", "rigid electrical conduit ", "copper waterline ", and similar descriptions. 2) Show by symbol or note the vertical location of Work item; for example, "embedded in slab ", "under slab ", "in ceiling plenum ", "exposed ", and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also provide elevation dimension relative to Project datum. 3) Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to Specifications. d. CITY may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans and sections when, in CITY's judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on waiver(s) being issued. 5. Supplemental Drawings: a. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by CITY or CONTRACTOR supplement the Drawings and shall be included with record documents submitted by CONTRACTOR. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings provided with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings due to space limitations. b. Supplemental drawings provided with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary cross - references 11- 0025 -UT 01782 -3 Record Documents between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. c. When supplemental drawings developed by CONTRACTOR using computer -aided drafting/design (CADD) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings in AutoCAD MEP 2011 as part of record drawing submittal. Submit electronic files on compact disc labeled, "Supplemental Record Drawings ", together with CONTRACTOR name, Project name, and Contract name and number. C. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually provided. b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 1.3 ELECTRONIC FILES FURNISHED BY CITY A. CADD files will be furnished by CITY upon the following conditions: 1. Layering system incorporated in CADD files shall be maintained as transmitted by CITY. CADD files transmitted by CITY containing cross - referenced files shall not be bound by CONTRACTOR. Drawing cross - references and paths shall be maintained. If CONTRACTOR alters layers or cross - reference files, CONTRACTOR shall restore all layers and cross - references prior to submitting record documents to CITY. 2. CONTRACTOR shall submit record drawings to CITY in same CADD format that files were furnished to CONTRACTOR. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01782 -4 Record Documents SECTION 01783 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish spare parts data and extra materials for materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. List of Spare Parts and Extra Materials: With the Shop Drawings and product data for each Specification Section, submit a complete list of spare parts, extra stock materials, maintenance supplies, and special tools required for maintenance ( "spare parts and extra materials ") for two years of operation, with unit prices in current United States funds, and source(s) of supply for each. C. Packaging and Labeling: Furnish spare parts and extra materials in manufacturer's unopened cartons, boxes, crates, or other original, protective covering suitable for preventing corrosion and deterioration for maximum length of storage normally anticipated by manufacturer. Packaging of spare parts and extra materials shall be clearly marked and identified with name of manufacturer, applicable equipment, part number, part description, and part location in the equipment. Protect and package spare parts and extra materials for maximum shelf life normally anticipated by manufacturer. D. Storage Prior to Delivery to CITY: Prior to furnishing spare parts and extra materials to CITY, store spare parts and extra materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturers' recommendations. E. Delivery Time and Eligibility for Payment: 1. Deliver to CITY spare parts and extra materials prior to date of Substantial Completion for equipment or system associated with the spare parts and extra materials. Do not deliver spare parts and extra materials before commencing start-up for associated equipment or system. 2. Spare parts and extra materials are not eligible for payment until delivered to CITY and CONTRACTOR's receipt of CITY'S countersignature on letter of transmittal. F. Procedure for Delivery to CITY: Deliver spare parts and extra materials to CITY's permanent storage rooms at the Site or area(s) at the Site designated by CITY. When spare parts and extra materials are delivered, CONTRACTOR and CITY will mutually inventory the spare parts and extra materials delivered to verify compliance with the Contract Documents regarding quantity and part numbers. Additional procedures for delivering spare parts and extra materials to 11- 0025 -UT 01783 -1 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials CITY, if required, will be developed by CITY and complied with by CONTRACTOR. G. Transfer Documentation: 1. Furnish on CONTRACTOR letterhead a letter of transmittal for spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. Letter of transmittal shall accompany spare parts and extra materials. Do not furnish letter of transmittal separate from associated spare parts and extra materials. 2. Furnish three original, identical, signed letters of transmittal for each Specification Section. Upon delivery of specified quantities and types of spare parts and extra materials to CITY, designated person from CITY will countersign each original letter of transmittal indicating CITY's receipt of spare parts and extra materials. CITY will retain one fully signed original, and CONTRACTOR shall retain one fully signed original for CONTRACTOR's file. 3. Letter of transmittal shall include the following: a. Information required for letters of transmittal in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. b. Transmittal shall list spare parts and extra materials furnished under each Specification Section. List each individual part or product and quantity furnished. e. Provide space for countersignature by CITY as follows: space for signature, space for printed name, and date. H. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to spare parts and extra materials until spare parts and extra materials are received by CITY. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) + + END OF SECTION + + 11- 0025 -UT 01783 -2 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials SECTION 01821 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish services of Supplier's operation and maintenance training specialists to instruct CITY's personnel in recommended operation and maintenance procedures for materials and equipment furnished, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Supplier shall provide a combination of classroom and field training at the Site, unless otherwise required elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Training materials to be used in the training sessions shall be submitted to the City for review and approval before they are used. 4. CONTRACTOR shall record training sessions on video for CITY's later use in instructing CITY's personnel. B. Scheduling of Training Sessions: 1. General: a. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate training services with start -up and initial operation of materials and equipment on days and times, and in manner, acceptable to CITY, in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Training may be required outside of normal business hours to accommodate schedules of operations and maintenance personnel. Furnish training services at the required days and times at no additional cost to CITY. 2. Prerequisites to Training: a. Training of CITY'S personnel shall commence after acceptable preliminary operation and maintenance data has been submitted and work required in Section 01751, Starting and Placing Equipment in Operation is complete. b. At option of CITY, training may be allowed to take place before, during, or after equipment start-up. 3. Training Schedule Submittal: a. Training Schedule Required: CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit proposed training schedule for review and acceptance by CITY. Proposed training schedule shall show all training required in the Contract Documents, and shall demonstrate compliance with specified training requirements relative to number of hours of training, number of training sessions, and scheduling. 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -1 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel b. Timing of Training Schedule Submittal: Submit initial training schedule at least sixty days before scheduled start of first training session. Submit final training schedule, incorporating revisions in accordance with CITY's comments, no later than thirty days prior to starting the first training session. c. CITY reserved the right to modify personnel availability for training in accordance with process or emergency needs at the Site. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's instructors shall be factory- trained by manufacturer of material or equipment. 2. Manufacturer's instructors shall be proficient and experienced in conducting training of type required. 3. Qualifications of instructors are subject to acceptance by CITY. If CITY does not accept qualifications of proposed instructor, furnish services of replacement instructor with acceptable qualifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Training Schedule: Detailed schedule of training sessions, demonstrating compliance with number of training sessions, hours required in the Contract Documents, and complying with the Contract Times. Submit training schedule submittals in accordance with time frames specified in this Section. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Lesson Plan: Acceptable lesson plan for training on each material or equipment item, in accordance with Table 01821 -A and the Contract Documents. Lesson plan shall comply with requirements of this Section. Include with lesson plan copy of handouts that will be used during training sessions. Provide lesson plan submittals in accordance with time frames specified in this Section. 2. Qualifications: Credentials of manufacturer's proposed operations and maintenance instructor(s). Credentials shall demonstrate compliance with requirements of this Section and shall include brief resume' and specific details of instructor's operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific material and equipment for which instructor will provide training. 3. Training Material: Training material to be used in the training shall be submitted to the city for review and approval before they are used. 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -2 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Trainee sign -in sheet for each training session. Submit to CITY's training coordinator. 1.4 LESSON PLAN A. Supplier's lesson plan shall describe specific instruction topics, system components for which training will be furnished, and training procedures. Handouts, if any, to be used in training shall be included with the lesson plan. Describe in lesson plan "hands -on" demonstrations planned for training sessions. B. Submit acceptable lesson plan fourteen days prior to starting associated training. C. Lesson plan shall include estimated duration of each training segment. D. Lesson plan shall include the following: 1. Equipment Overview (required for all types of operations and maintenance training): a. Describe equipment's operating (process) function and performance objectives. b. Describe equipment's fundamental operating principles and dynamics. c. Identify equipment's mechanical, electrical, and electronic components and features. Group related components into subsystems and describe function of subsystem and subsystem's interaction with other subsystems. d. Identify all support equipment associated with operation of subject equipment, such as air intake filters, valve actuators, motors, and other appurtenant items and equipment. e. Identify and describe safety precautions and potential hazards related to operation. f. Identify and describe in detail safety and control interlocks. 2. Operations Personnel Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section. b. Operation: 1) Describe operating principles and practices. 2) Describe routine operating, start-up, and shutdown procedures. 3) Describe abnormal or emergency start-up, operating, and shutdown procedures that may apply. 4) Describe alarm conditions and responses to alarms. 5) Describe routine monitoring and recordkeeping procedures. 6) Describe recommended housekeeping procedures. c. Troubleshooting: 1) Describe how to determine if corrective maintenance or an operating parameter adjustment is required. 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -3 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel 3. Mechanical Maintenance Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section. b. Equipment Preventive Maintenance: 1) Describe preventative maintenance inspection procedures required to: a) Inspect equipment in operation. b) Identify potential trouble symptoms and anticipate breakdowns. c) Forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance). 2) Define recommended preventative maintenance intervals for each component. 3) Describe lubricant and replacement part recommendations and limitations. 4) Describe appropriate cleaning practices and recommend intervals. 5) Identify and describe use of special tools required for maintenance of equipment. 6) Describe component removal, installation, and disassembly and assembly procedures. 7) Perform "hands -on" demonstrations of preventive maintenance procedures. 8) Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate. 9) Define recommended torquing, mounting, calibrating, and aligning procedures and settings, as appropriate. 10) Describe recommended procedures to check and test equipment following corrective maintenance. c. Equipment Troubleshooting: 1) Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures. 2) Provide component - specific troubleshooting checklists. 3) Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to facilitate troubleshooting. 4) Describe common corrective maintenance procedures with "hands on" demonstrations. 4. Instrumentation /Controls Maintenance Training: a. Equipment Overview: As described in Paragraph 1.4.D.1 of this Section. b. Preventative Maintenance and Troubleshooting: In accordance with Section 13401, Instrumentation and Controls. CITY may grant waiver(s) to allow all training for a given system to be at the location of OW WNER's training facility. 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -4 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel 1.5 TRAINING AIDS A. Manufacturer's instructor shall incorporate training aids as appropriate to assist in the instruction. Provide handouts of text, tables, graphs, and illustrations as required. Other appropriate training aids include: 1. Audio - visual aids, such as videos, Microsoft Powerpoint presentations, overhead transparencies, posters, drawings, diagrams, catalog sheets, or other items. 2. Equipment cutaways and samples, such as spare parts and damaged equipment. 3. Tools, such as repair tools, customized tools, and measuring and calibrating instruments. B. Handouts: 1. Manufacturer's instructor shall distribute and use descriptive handouts during training. Customized handouts developed especially for training for the Project are encouraged. 2. Photocopied handouts shall be good quality and completely legible. 3. Handouts should be coordinated with the instruction, with frequent references made to the handouts. 4. Provide at least fifteen copies of handouts for each training session. C. Audio - visual Equipment: Training provider shall provide audio - visual equipment required for training sessions. If suitable equipment is available at the Site, CITY may make available CITY's audio - visual equipment; however, do not count on CITY providing audio - visual equipment. Audio - visual equipment that training provider shall provide, as required, includes: 1. Laptop computer, presentation software, and suitable projector and projector screen. 2. As required, extension cords and spare bulb for projector. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 TRAINING DELIVERY A. General: 1. Instructors shall be fully prepared for the training sessions. Training delivery shall be communicative, clear, and proceed according to lesson plan accepted by CITY, with lesson content appropriate for trainees. If CITY deems that training delivery does not to comply with the Contract 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -5 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel Documents, training shall be postponed, rescheduled, and re- performed in acceptable manner at no additional cost to CITY. 2. Trainee Sign -in Sheets: In format acceptable to CITY, furnish sign -in sheet for trainees for each session. Sign -in sheets shall include the Project name, equipment or system for which training was provided, and type of training (e.g., operations, mechanical maintenance, instrumentation /controls maintenance, or other), and name of each trainee. Upon completion of training, submit copy of each sign -in sheet to CITY's training coordinator. B. "Hands -on" Demonstrations: 1. Manufacturer's instructor shall present "hands -on" demonstrations of operations and maintenance of equipment for each training session, in accordance with lesson plan accepted by CITY. 2. CONTRACTOR and manufacturer shall furnish tools necessary for demonstrations. 3.2 TRAINING SCHEDULE A. Manufacturer shall furnish, at minimum, hours of training and number of sessions indicated in Table 01821 -A. Travel time and expenses are responsibility of manufacturer and are excluded from required training time indicated in the Contract Documents. Training sessions noted with a "V" in the "Training Hours" column shall be videotaped by CONTRACTOR for CITY's benefit as specified in Article 1.1. CITY reserves the right to videotape additional sessions at his own expense. B. Shifts and Training Sessions Required: 1. CITY's operations at the Site take place 24 hours per day, divided into three shifts as follows: day, evening, and night shift. 2. Training Sessions per Shift: a. Operators: Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours shall be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. Provide identical training sessions as follows: 1) Two identical sessions during day shift, each session in a different week. 2) One session during evening shift. 3) One session during night shift. b. Mechanical Maintenance: Provide two identical training sessions during day shift, each session in a separate week, for indicated equipment. Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours shall be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. 11- 0025 -UT 01821 -6 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c. Instrument/Controls Maintenance: Provide two identical training sessions during day shift, each session in a separate week, for indicated equipment. Maximum training per day is four hours; sessions longer than four hours will be spread over multiple, preferably consecutive, days. TABLE 01821 -A. TRAINING SUMMARY TABLE Equipment Section Training Hours Engine Generator System (includes fuel system) 16231 4 (V) Automatic Transfer Switches 16412 2 (V) Switchboard 16440 1 (V) Panelboard Controller 16442 2 (V) Uninterruptible Power Supply 16611 1 (V) 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 01821 -7 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 01821 -8 Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel SECTION 02220 DEMOLITION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required for demolition, removal, and disposal Work. 2. The Work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Demolition and removal of existing materials and equipment as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work includes demolition of structural concrete, foundations, walls, structural steel, metals, masonry, attachments, appurtenances, piping, electrical and mechanical systems and equipment, paving, curbs, sidewalks and similar existing facilities. b. Demolition and removal of all Underground Facilities underneath, and above -grade piping and utilities in, the building(s) and structures shown or indicated for demolition, unless the Underground Facilities or above -grade facilities are shown or indicated as to remain. 3. Demolitions and removals specified under other Sections shall comply with requirements of this Section. 4. Perform demolition Work within areas shown or indicated. 5. Pay all costs associated with transporting and, as applicable, disposing of materials and equipment resulting from demolition. B. Coordination: 1. Comply with Section 01143, Coordination with OWNER's Operations. 2. Review procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the Work that will be performed with or before demolition and removals. C. Related Sections: 1. None 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Electrical Removals: Entity and personnel performing electrical removals shall be electrician legally qualified to perform electrical construction and electrical work in the jurisdiction where the Site is located. 2. Plumbing Removals: Entity and personnel performing plumbing removals shall be plumber legally qualified to perform plumbing construction and plumbing work in the jurisdiction where the Site is located. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -1 Demolition B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Demolition, removal, and disposal Work shall be in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.850 through 29 CFR 1926.860 (Subpart T - Demolition), and all other Laws and Regulations. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedure Submittals: a. Demolition and Removal Plan: Not less than ten days prior to starting demolition Work, submit acceptable plan for demolition and removal Work, including: 1) Plan for coordinating shut -offs, capping, temporary services, and continuing utility services. 2) Other proposed procedures as applicable. 3) Equipment proposed for use in demolition operations. 4) Recycling/disposal facility(ies) proposed, including facility owner, facility name, location, and processes. Include copy of appropriate permits and licenses, and compliance status. 5) Planned demolition operating sequences. 6) Detailed schedule of demolition Work in accordance with the accepted Process Schedule. 2. Notification of Intended Demolition Start: Submit in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.A of this Section. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Name and qualifications of entity performing electrical removals, including copy of licenses required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Name and qualifications of entity performing plumbing removals, including copy of licenses required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Notification: 1. At least 48 hours prior to commencing demolition or removal, notify CITY in writing of planned start of demolition Work. Do not start removals without permission of CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -2 Demolition B. Protection of Surrounding Areas and Facilities: 1. Perform demolition and removal Work in manner that prevents damage and injury to property, structures, occupants, the public, and facilities. Do not interfere with use of, and free and safe access to and from, structures and properties. 2. Closing or obstructing of roads, drives, sidewalks, and passageways adjacent to the Work is not allowed unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Conduct the Work with minimum interference to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 3. Provide temporary barriers, lighting, sidewalk sheds, and other necessary protection. 4. Repair damage to facilities that are to remain. C. Existing Utilities: In addition to requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Specifications, do the following: 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted Underground Facilities be encountered, CONTRACTOR responsibilities shall be in accordance with the General Conditions as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. Cooperate with utility owners in keeping adjacent services and facilities in operation. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap all sewer lines and service laterals discharging from the building or structure being demolished. 3. Storm Water: Existing storm water system shall remain in place until demolitions of existing building or structure is completed. Upon completing demolition, cut and cap storm sewer laterals at locations shown on the Drawings. Remove existing storm water piping and related structures between points of cutting, and backfill, restore to grade, and stabilize the area over the removed facilities. 4. Water Piping: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap all potable and non - potable waterlines and service laterals serving the building or structure being demolished. 5. Other Utilities: Before proceeding with demolition, locate and cap as required all other utilities, such as fuel and gas; heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; electric; and communications; and service laterals serving the building or structure being demolished. 6. Shutdown of utility services shall be coordinated by CONTRACTOR, assisted by CITY as required relative to contacting utility owners. 3.2 DEMOLITION — GENERAL A. Locate construction equipment used for demolition Work and remove demolished materials and equipment to avoid imposing excessive loading on supporting and adjacent walls, floors, framing, facilities, and Underground Facilities. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -3 Demolition B. Pollution Controls: 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit emissions of dust and dirt to lowest practical level. Comply with Section 01570, Temporary Controls, and Laws and Regulations. 2. Do not use water when water may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as icing, flooding, or pollution. 3. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, properties, and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition Work, in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01740, Cleaning. C. Comply with Section 01723, Cutting and Patching. D. Building or Structure Demolition: 1. Unless otherwise approved by CITY, proceed with demolition from top of building or structure to the ground. Complete demolition Work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members of lower levels. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 3. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground using hoists, cranes, or other suitable methods. Do not throw or drop to the ground. 4. Break up and remove foundations and slabs -on -grade unless otherwise shown or indicated as remaining in place. E. Demolition of Site Improvements: 1. Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters: Demolition of asphalt or concrete pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters, as applicable, shall terminate at cut edges. Edges shall be linear and have a vertical cut face. 2. Fencing, Guardrails, and Bollards: Remove to the limits shown or indicated on the Drawings. Completely remove below -grade posts and concrete. 3. Manholes, Vaults, Chambers, and Handholes: Remove to the limits shown or indicated on the Drawings. 4. Underground Facilities Other than Manholes, Vaults, Chambers, and Handholes: Remove to the extent shown or indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, cap ends of piping to remain in place in accordance with the "Mechanical Removals" Article in this Section. F. Salvage and Ownership: 1. Refer to Section 01110, Summary of Work, for requirements on salvage, ownership, and handling of equipment and materials removed during demolition and removal Work. 2. Materials and equipment to remain CITY's property shall be carefully removed and appropriately handled by CONTRACTOR to avoid damage and invalidation of warranties in effect, and shall be cleaned and stored at the Site (or other site specified in the Contract Documents) at place designated by CITY. G. Finishing of Surfaces Exposed by Removals: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, surfaces of walls, floors, ceilings, and other areas 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -4 Demolition exposed by removals, and that will remain as finished surfaces, shall be repaired and re- finished with materials that match existing adjacent surface, or as otherwise approved by CITY. 3.3 STRUCTURAL REMOVALS A. Remove structures to lines and grades shown or indicated, unless otherwise directed by CITY. Where limits are not shown or indicated, limits shall be four inches outside item to be installed. Removals beyond limits shown or indicated shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense and such excess removals shall be reconstructed to satisfaction of CITY without additional cost to CITY. B. Recycling and Reuse of Demolition Materials: 1. All concrete, brick, tile, masonry, roofing materials, reinforcing steel, structural metals, miscellaneous metals, plaster, wire mesh, and other items contained in or upon building or structure to be demolished shall be removed, transported, and disposed of away from the Site, unless otherwise approved by CITY. 2. Do not use demolished materials as fill or backfill adjacent to structures, in pipeline trenches, or as subbase under structures or pavement. C. After removing concrete and masonry walls or portions thereof, slabs, and similar construction that ties in to the Work or to existing construction, neatly repair the junction point to leave exposed only finished edges and finished surfaces. D. Where parts of existing structures are to remain in service following demolition, remove the portions shown or indicated for removal, repair damage, and leave the building or structure in proper condition for the intended use. 1. Remove concrete and masonry to the lines shown or indicated by sawing, drilling, chipping, and other suitable methods. Leave the resulting surfaces true and even, with sharp, straight corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be satisfactory for the purpose intended. 2. Do not damage reinforcing bars beyond the area of concrete and masonry removal. Do not saw -cut beyond the area to be removed. 3. Reinforcing bars that are exposed at surfaces of removed concrete and masonry that will not be covered with new concrete or masonry shall be removed to 1.5 inches below the final surface. Repair the resulting hole, with repair mortar for concrete and grout for masonry, to be flush with the surface. 4. Where existing reinforcing bars are shown or indicated to extend into new construction, remove existing concrete so that reinforcing bars are clean and undamaged. E. Where equipment or material anchored to concrete or masonry are removed and anchors are not to be re -used, remove the anchors to not less than 1.5 inches beneath surface of concrete or masonry member. Repair the resulting hole, using repair mortar for concrete and grout for masonry, to be flush with the surface. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -5 Demolition Alternately, when the anchor is stainless steel, the anchor may be cut flush with the surface of the concrete or masonry, when so approved by CITY. F. Jambs, sills and heads of windows, passageways, doors, or other openings (as applicable) cut -in to the Work or to existing construction shall be dressed with masonry, concrete, or metal to provide smooth, finished appearance. G. Where anchoring materials, including bolts, nuts, hangers, welds, and reinforcing steel, are required to attach the Work to existing construction, provide such materials under this Section, unless specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3.4 MECHANICAL REMOVALS A. Mechanical demolition and removal Work includes dismantling and removing existing piping, ductwork, pumps, equipment, tanks, and appurtenances as shown, indicated, and required for completion of the Work. Mechanical removals include cutting and capping as required, except that cutting of existing piping and ductwork to make connections is included under Section 01143, Coordination with CITY's Operations; Section 01723, Cutting and Patching; and applicable Sections of Division 13 and 15. B. Demolition and Removals of Piping, Ductwork, and Similar Items: 1. Purge piping and tanks (as applicable) of chemicals or fuel (as applicable) and make safe for removal and capping. Remove to the extent shown or indicated existing process, water, waste and vent, chemical, gas, fuel, and other piping. Remove piping to the nearest solid piping support, and provide caps on ends of remaining piping. Where piping to be demolished passes through existing walls to remain, cut off and cap pipe on each side of the wall. 2. Caps, Closures, Blind Flanges, and Plugs: a. Provide closure pieces, such as blind flanges and caps, where shown or required to complete the Work. b. Where used in this Section, the term "cap" means the appropriate type closure for the piping or ductwork being closed, including caps, blind flanges, and other closures. c. Caps shall be compatible with the piping or ductwork to which the cap is attached, fluid -tight and gastight, and appropriate for the fluid or gas conveyed in the pipe or duct. d. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, caps shall be mechanically fastened, fused, or welded to pipe or duct. Plug piping with means other than specified in this Section only when so shown or indicated in the Contractor Documents or when allowed by CITY. 3. When Underground Facilities are altered or removed, properly cut and cap piping left in place, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 4. Remove waste and vent piping, and ductwork to extent shown and cap as required. Where demolished vent piping, stacks, and ductwork passes 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -6 Demolition through existing roofing, patch the roof with the same or similar materials. Completed patch shall be watertight and comply with roofing manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Modifications to potable water piping and other plumbing and heating system work shall comply with Laws and Regulations. All portions of potable water system that have been modified or opened shall be hydrostatically tested and disinfected in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Laws and Regulations. Hydrostatically test other, normally- pressurized, plumbing piping and heating piping. C. Equipment Demolition and Removals: 1. To the extent shown or indicated, remove existing process equipment; pumps and other equipment. 2. Where required, disassemble equipment to avoid imposing excessive loading on supporting walls, floors, framing, facilities, and Underground Facilities. Disassemble equipment as required for access through and egress from building or structure. Disassembly shall comply with Laws and Regulations. Provide required means to remove equipment from building or structure. 3. Remove control panels, operator stations, and instruments associated with equipment being removed, unless shown or indicated otherwise. 4. Remove equipment supports as applicable, anchorages, base, grout, and piping. Remove anchorage systems in accordance with the "Structural Removals" Article in this Section. Remove small- diameter piping back to header unless otherwise indicated. 5. Remove access platforms, ladders, and stairs related to equipment being removed, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3.5 ELECTRICAL REMOVALS A. Electrical demolition Work includes removing existing transformers, distribution switchboards, control panels, motors, starters, conduit and raceways, cabling, poles and overhead cabling, panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, and miscellaneous electrical equipment, as shown, specified, or required. B. Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to avoid damaging systems to remain, to keep existing systems in operation, and to maintain integrity of grounding systems. C. Remove or modify motor control centers and switchgear as shown or indicated. Modified openings shall be cut square and dressed smooth to dimensions required for installation of equipment. D. Disconnect and remove motors, control panels, and other electrical gear where shown or indicated. Motors, microprocessors and electronics, other electrical gear to be reused shall be stored in accordance with Section 01661, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -7 Demolition E. Cables in conduits to be removed shall be removed back to the power source or control panel, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Verify the function of each cable before disconnecting and removing. F. Conduits, raceways, and cabling shall be removed where shown or indicated. Abandoned conduits concealed in floor, ceiling slabs, or in walls shall be cut flush with the slab or wall (as applicable) at point of entrance, suitably capped, and the area repaired in a flush, smooth manner acceptable to CITY. Exposed conduits, junction boxes, other electrical appurtenances, and their supports shall be disassembled and removed. Repair all areas of the Work to prevent rusting on exposed surfaces. G. Conduits in Underground Facilities not scheduled for reuse shall be suitably capped watertight where each enters building or structure to remain. H. Where shown or indicated, remove direct burial cable. Openings in buildings for entrance of direct burial cable shall be patched with repair mortar or other material approved by CITY for this purpose, and made watertight. I. Existing poles and overhead cables shall be removed or abandoned as shown and specified. Existing substation(s) and poles owned by electric utility will be removed by the electric utility. Completely remove from the Site poles not owned by electric utility and shown or indicated for removal. Make necessary arrangements with electric utility for removal of utility company's transformers and metering equipment after new electrical system has been installed and energized. J. Lighting fixtures, wall switches, receptacles, starters, and other miscellaneous electrical equipment, not designated as remaining as CITY's property, shall be removed and properly disposed off-Site as required. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION DEBRIS A. Remove from the Site all debris, waste, rubbish, and material resulting from demolition operations and equipment used in demolition Work. Comply with the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01740, Cleaning. B. Transportation and Disposal: 1. Non - hazardous Material: Properly transport and dispose of non - hazardous demolition debris at appropriate landfill or other suitable location, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Non - hazardous material does not contain Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, or other material designated as hazardous in Laws and Regulations. 11- 0025 -UT 02220 -8 Demolition 2. Hazardous Material: When handling and disposal of hazardous materials is included in the Work, properly transport and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. C. Submit to CITY information required in this Section on proposed facility(ies) where demolition material will be recycled. Upon request, CITY, shall be allowed to visit recycling facility(ies) to verify adequacy and compliance status. During such visits, recycling facility operator shall cooperate and assist CITY. 1 I - 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 02220 -9 Demolition 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 02220 -10 Demolition SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to perform all excavating, filling, and grading, and disposing of earth materials as shown, specified, and required for construction of structures, Underground Facilities, conduits, pipelines, roads, and other facilities required to complete the Work. 2. Preparation of subgrade for slabs and pavements is included under this Section. 3. No classification of excavated materials will be made. Excavation includes all materials regardless of type, character, composition, moisture, or condition thereof. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01452, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor. 2. Section 02742, Bituminous Paving. 3. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 522R, Pervious Concrete. 2. ANSI/AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings. 3. ASTM C29/C29M, Test Method for Bulk Density ( "Unit Weight ") and Voids in Aggregate. 4. ASTM C33/C33M, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 5. ASTM C94/C94M, Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C138/C138M, Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 7. ASTM C172, Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 8. ASTM C 150 /C 150M, Specification for Portland Cement. 9. ASTM C595/C595M, Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 10. ASTM C618, Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 11. ASTM C989, Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -1 Excavation and Backfill 12. ASTM D422, Test Method for Particle -Size Analysis of Soils. 13. ASTM D448, Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 14. ASTM D698, Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft -lbf /ft3 (600 kN- m /m3)). 15. ASTM D1556, Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. 16. ASTM D1557, Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft -lbf /ft3 (2,700 kN- m /m3)). 17. ASTM D2216, Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. 18. ASTM D4253, Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. 19. ASTM D4254, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. 20. ASTM D4318, Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. 21. ASTM D4832, Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders. 22. ASTM D6023, Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, Cement Content, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low - Strength Material (CLSM). 23. ASTM D6103, Test Method for Flow Consistency of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM). 24. ASTM D6938, Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 25. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and /or Testing. 1.3 TERMINOLOGY A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. "Subgrade" is the uppermost surface of native soil material unmoved from cuts; the bottom of excavation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Professional Engineer: a. Engage a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in the same jurisdiction as the Site and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -2 Excavation and Backfill b. Responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to: 1) Reviewing system performance and requirements shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance and requirements for submittal to CITY by CONTRACTOR. 3) Preparing or supervising the preparation of design calculations and related submittals verifying compliance of the system with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations, drawings, and submittals prepared by professional engineer. 5) Certifying that: a) It has performed the design of the system in accordance with the performance requirements stated in the Contract Documents, and b) The said design conforms to Laws and Regulations, and to the prevailing standards of practice. 2. CONTRACTOR's Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of the materials specified in this Section. b. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329 and requirements of Section 01451, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor. c. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. d. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to CITY's acceptance. B. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing is in addition to field quality control testing required under Part 3 of this Section. 2. Materials used in the Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by CITY, during the Project. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be performed at CITY's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed Work, shall be performed at CONTRACTOR's expense. 3. CONTRACTOR's Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Collect samples and perform testing of proposed fill materials in the laboratory and in the field to demonstrate compliance of the Work with the Contract Documents. b. Testing laboratory shall perform testing required to obtain data for selecting moisture content for placing and compacting fill materials. c. Design controlled low- strength material (CLSM) mixes in accordance with requirements of CLSM Article in Part 2 of this Section. Perform concrete materials evaluation tests and testing of CLSM mixes. d. Submit to CITY and CONTRACTOR written report results of each test. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -3 Excavation and Backfill 4. Required Quality Assurance Material Testing by CONTRACTOR's Testing Laboratory: a. Gradation in accordance with ASTM D422. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of each of the following types of material incorporated into the Work: select fill, general fill, subbase material, drainage fill, and pipe bedding material. b. Atterberg limits in accordance with ASTM D4318. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of the following types of materials incorporated into the Work: general fill, and pipe bedding material. c. Moisture /density relations in accordance with ASTM D698, ASTM D1557, ASTM D4253, or ASTM D4254, as applicable. Perform one test for every 5,000 cubic yards of the following types of materials incorporated into the Work: select fill, general fill, subbase material, drainage fill, and pipe bedding material. d. Moisture content of stockpiled or borrow material in accordance with ASTM D2216. Perform one test for every 1,000 cubic yards of the following types of material incorporated into the Work: select fill, general fill, subbase material, drainage fill, and pipe bedding material. e. CLSM Mix: Verify CLSM mix design by laboratory trial batch, unless indicated otherwise. Perform the following testing on each concrete mix trial batch: 1) Aggregate gradation. 2) Flowability, in accordance with ASTM D6103. 3) Air content, in accordance with ASTM D6023. 4) Unconfined compressive strength of CLSM mixes at 90 days, in accordance with ASTM D4832. 5) Submit for each concrete mix trial batch the following information: a) Project identification name and number (if applicable). b) Date of test report. c) Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. d) Tests of aggregates for compliance with the Contract Documents. e) Brand, type, and composition of cementitious materials. f) Brand, type, and quantity of each admixture. g) Quantity of water used in trial mixes. h) Proportions of each material per cubic yard. i) Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. j) Measured flowability. k) Measured air content. 1) Unconfined compressive strength. f. Requirement for trial batch may be waived by CITY if sufficient field test data documenting compliance with specified material properties and performance properties is submitted to and accepted by CITY. Tests shall have been made on concrete with identical mix design to mix design proposed for the Work, including sources of aggregate and manufacturers of cementitious materials and admixtures. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -4 Excavation and Backfill C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Perform excavation work in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and Laws and Regulations, including: a. OSHA, 29 CFR Part 1926, Section .650 (Subpart P — Excavations). 2. Obtain required permits and approvals for excavation and fill Work, including work permits from right -of -way owners and permits from environmental authorities having jurisdiction over discharge of water from excavations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Procedure Submittals: a. Excavation Plan: Prior to starting excavation operations, submit written plan to demonstrate compliance with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926.650. As a minimum, excavation plan shall include: 1) Name of CONTRACTOR's "competent person" in responsible charge of excavation and fill Work. 2) Excavation method(s) and additional items to be included in the Work, as listed in Paragraph 1.5.B.2.a of this Section. 3) Copies of "manufacturer's data" or other tabulated data if protective system(s) are designed on the basis of such data. 4) Copies of required permits and approvals, from authorities having jurisdiction and affected utility owners, for excavation methods proposed. 2. Excavation Support Plan and Related Information Prepared by CONTRACTOR's Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR's professional engineer shall prepare the following for submittal: 1) Sheeting and bracing, or other protective system(s) required. 2) Dewatering system. b. Drawings and calculations shall be prepared by professional engineer qualified in the specialty involved. CITY's review and acceptance of submittal does not imply approval by CITY of the associated Work. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for designing, installing, operating and maintaining the system(s) required to satisfactorily perform all necessary sheeting, bracing, protection, and dewatering. 3. Quality Assurance Test Results Submittals: a. Submit results of quality assurance testing performed by in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B of this Section, unless included as part of another submittal under this Section. Submit results for the following quality assurance testing: 1) Tests on borrow fill material. 2) Optimum moisture — maximum dry density curve for each type of fill material. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -5 Excavation and Backfill 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of testing and inspection performed in accordance with the field quality control Article in Part 3 of this Section, including: 1) Field density testing. 2) Tests of actual unconfined compressive strength or bearing tests of each stratum. 5. Qualifications Statements: a. Professional engineer. b. Quality Assurance Testing laboratory. Submit name and qualifications of testing laboratory to be employed, and qualifications of testing laboratory's personnel that will perform quality assurance testing required in this Section. c. Field Quality Control Testing Laboratory: Names and qualifications of testing laboratory employed, and qualifications of testing laboratory's personnel that will perform field quality control testing as required under this Section. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Subsurface Information: The Special Conditions indicate information available relative to subsurface conditions at the Site. Such information and data is not intended as a representation or warranty of continuity of conditions between soil borings or test pits, nor of groundwater levels at dates and times other than date and time when measured, nor that purpose of obtaining the information and data were appropriate for use by CONTRACTOR. CITY will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by CONTRACTOR. B. Soil borings and other exploratory operations may be made by CONTRACTOR, at no additional cost to CITY. Coordinate CONTRACTOR - performed test borings and other exploratory operations with CITY and utility owners as appropriate. Perform such explorations without disrupting or otherwise adversely affecting operations of CITY or utility owners. Comply with Laws and Regulations relative to required notifications. C. Existing Structures: 1. The Contract Documents show or indicate certain Underground Facilities and Structures in the area of Work. Such information was obtained from existing records and is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. CONTRACTOR shall explore ahead of the excavation to determine the exact location of all existing Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures. Existing Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures shall be supported and protected from damage by CONTRACTOR unless approved by the City as abandoned Underground Facilities, Utilities or Structures. Immediately repair and restore existing Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures damaged by CONTRACTOR without additional cost to CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -6 Excavation and Backfill 2. Movement or operation of construction equipment over Underground Facilities shall be at CONTRACTOR's sole risk and only after CONTRACTOR has prepared and submitted to CITY and utility owners (as applicable), and received acceptance therefrom, a plan describing CONTRACTOR's analysis of the Loads to be imparted and CONTRACTOR's proposed measures to protect structures and Underground Facilities during the Project. 3. Coordinate with utility owners for shut -off of services in active piping and conduits. When required by utility owner, CITY will assist CONTRACTOR with utility owner notifications. Completely remove buried piping and conduits indicated for removal and not otherwise indicated as being abandoned or to remain in place. 4. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by CITY or others, except when such interruption is indicated in the Contract Documents or when allowed in writing by CITY after acceptable temporary utility services are provided by CONTRACTOR for the affected structure or property. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Select Fill: 1. Material shall be well - graded, crushed aggregate, granular material of a classification that will completely pass a '/2 inch sieve for PVC piping and a one inch sieve for other piping materials, and compact readily when the usual methods of tamping are used. Material shall be free of organic material. B. General Fill: 1. Material shall be free of: rock and gravel larger than three inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, organic material, and other deleterious matter. 2. Fill shall have a liquid limit not greater than 45, and plasticity index not greater than 25. 3. Previously- excavated materials complying with the Contract Documents requirements for general fill may be used for general fill. 4. When on -Site materials are found unsuitable for use as general fill, provide select fill or approved off -Site general fill materials. Prior to using off-Site material as general fill, furnish submittal for and obtain CITY's approval of the material proposed for use. C. Subbase Material: 1. Material shall be naturally- or artificially- graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, or natural or crushed sand. Crushed slag is unacceptable. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -7 Excavation and Backfill 2. Crushed Recycled Concrete Subbase Material: a. CONTRACTOR may use crushed recycled concrete material as subbase material. b. Recycled concrete material shall be crushed and screened and shall comply with subbase gradation requirements of this Section. Before using in the Work, remove existing reinforcing steel from recycled concrete material. c. Crushed recycled concrete material shall not contain chloride ions or aggregates susceptible to alkali - silica reaction. d. The pH of recycled concrete material shall not exceed 11. D. Drainage Fill: 1. Material shall be washed, uniformly- graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing 1.5 -inch sieve and not more than five percent passing a No. 4 sieve. E. Pipe Bedding Material: 1. Aggregate material shall be crushed stone and gravel, free of: rock or gravel larger than 1/2 -inch in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, organic material and other deleterious matter. 2. Sand material, where required, shall consist of natural or manufactured granular material and shall contain no organic material. Sand shall be non - plastic, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318, 100 percent shall pass a 1/2 -inch screen and not more than five percent shall pass a No. 200 screen. F. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. CLSM shall be self - leveling and self - compacting cementitious material. a. Cement: Type I or Type II portland cement complying with ASTM C 1 50/C 150M. b. Fly Ash Mineral Admixture: Comply with ASTM C618, Class F. c. Water: Clean, potable. d. Admixtures: Provide admixtures in accordance with product manufacturer's published instructions. Admixtures shall be compatible with each other. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions. Use only admixtures that have been tested and approved in the mix designs. e. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 2. CLSM Mix: a. Cement Content: 50 pounds per cubic yard. b. Fly Ash Mineral Admixture: 250 pounds per cubic yard. c. Fine Aggregate Content: 2910 pounds per cubic yard. d. Water Content: 500 pounds per cubic yard. e. Admixtures shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations for use with CLSM. f. Unconfined compressive strength shall be not more than 100 psi. g. Adjustment of Mixes. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -8 Excavation and Backfill 1) Mix design adjustments may be requested by CONTRACTOR when warranted by characteristics of materials, Site conditions, weather, test results, or other, similar circumstances. 2) Submit for CITY's approval laboratory test data for adjusted mix designs, including compressive strength test results. 3) Implement adjusted mix designs only after CITY's approval. 4) Adjustments to mix designs shall not result in additional costs to CITY. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform quality assurance testing, and submit results to CITY, in accordance with the `Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Provide CITY with sufficient notice and with means to examine areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading will be performed. CITY will advise CONTRACTOR in writing when CITY is aware of conditions that may be detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 TEST PITS A. General: 1. In advance of the construction, excavate, make observations and measurements, and fill test pits to determine conditions or location of the existing Underground Facilities and structures. Perform all work required in connection with excavating, stockpiling, maintaining, sheeting, shoring, filling, and replacing pavement for test pits. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the definite location of each existing Underground Facility involved within the area of excavation for the Work. Exercise care during such location work to avoid damaging and disrupting the affected Underground Facility or structure. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repairing, at his expense, damage to Underground Facility or structure caused during the Work. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Burning is not allowed at the Site. B. Use of Explosives: 1. Use of explosives is not allowed. C. Dust Control: 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -9 Excavation and Backfill 1. Control objectionable dust caused by CONTRACTOR's operation of vehicles and equipment, clearing, and other actions. To minimize airborne dust, apply water or use other methods subject to CITY's acceptance and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Maintenance and Protection of Traffic: 1. Keep all streets and traffic ways open for passage of traffic and pedestrians during the Project, unless otherwise approved by owner of the street, traffic way, or right -of -way, as applicable. Construction traffic shall access the Site only via entrance(s) indicated in Section 01550, Access Roads and Parking Areas. 2. When required to cross, obstruct, or temporarily close a street or traffic way, provide and maintain suitable bridges, detours, and other acceptable temporary expedients to accommodate traffic. Closings of street or traffic way shall be for shortest time practical, and passage shall be restored immediately after completion of fill and temporary paving or bridging. 3. Give required advance notice to fire department, police department, and other emergency services as applicable of proposed construction operations. 4. Give reasonable notice to owners or tenants of private property who may be affected by construction operations. Give such notice not less than 10 days prior to construction that will affect the property. 5. Hydrants, valves, fire alarm boxes, postal boxes and delivery service boxes, and other facilities that may require access during construction shall be kept accessible for use. 6. Provide temporary signage, signals, barricades, flares, lights and other equipment, service, and personnel required to regulate and protect traffic and warn of hazards. Such Work shall comply with requirements of owner of right -of -way and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required, and restore grounds to original or to specified conditions, as applicable. 3.4 DEWATERING A. Dewatering — General: 1. Provide and maintain adequate drainage and dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface water and ground water entering excavations, or other parts of the Work and work areas. Keep each excavation dry during excavation, subgrade preparation, and continually thereafter until the structure to be built therein is acceptable to CITY and backfilling operations are completed and acceptable to CITY. 2. Keep all working areas at the Site free of surface water at all times. Provide temporary drainage ditches and temporary dikes, and provide required temporary pumping and other work necessary for diverting or removing rainfall and all other accumulations of surface water from excavations and fill areas. Perform diversion and removal of surface water in manner that prevents accumulation of water behind permanent or temporary structures 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -10 Excavation and Backfill and at any other locations in the construction area where such accumulations may be detrimental. 3. Water used for working or processing, resulting from dewatering operations, or containing oils or sediments that will reduce the quality of the surface water or groundwater downstream of the point of discharge, shall not be directly discharged. Divert such waters through temporary settling basin or filter before discharging to surface water, groundwater, or drainage routes. 4. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for condition of piping, conduits, and channels used for drainage and such piping, conduits, and channels shall be clean and free of sediment. 5. Remove water from excavations as fast as water collects. B. Temporary Dewatering System: 1. CONTRACTOR shall design, provide, and operate dewatering system to include sufficient trenches, sumps, pumps, hose, piping, well points, deep wells, and similar facilities, necessary to depress and maintain groundwater level at least one foot below the base of each excavation during all stages of construction operations. 2. Design and operate dewatering system to avoid settlement and damage to existing structures and Underground Facilities. 3. Groundwater table shall be lowered in advance of excavation for a sufficient period of time to allow dewatering of fine grain soils. 4. Maintain groundwater level at excavations two feet below lowest subgrade excavation until the structure has sufficient strength and weight to withstand horizontal and vertical soil and water pressures from natural groundwater. 5. Operate dewatering system continuously, 24 hours per day, seven days per week. Provide standby pumping facilities and personnel to maintain the continued effectiveness of the system. Do not discontinue dewatering operations without first obtaining CITY's acceptance for such discontinuation. 6. If, in CITY's opinion, the water levels are not being lowered or maintained as required, provide additional or alternate temporary dewatering devices as necessary, at no additional cost to CITY. 7. Locate elements of temporary dewatering system to allow continuous dewatering operation without interfering with the Work to the extent practicable. 8. Where portions of dewatering system are located in the area of permanent construction, submit to and obtain CITY's acceptance of details of proposed methods of constructing the Work at such location. Control of ground water shall continue until the permanent construction provides sufficient dead load to withstand hydrostatic uplift of the normal groundwater, until concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand earth and hydrostatic loads, and until waterproofing Work is completed. 9. Perform pumping of water from excavations in a manner that prevents carrying away of unsolidified concrete materials, and that avoids damaging the subgrade. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -11 Excavation and Backfill 10. Before discontinuing dewatering operations or permanently allowing rise of groundwater level, prepare computations to demonstrate that structures affected by the water level rise are protected by fill or other means to sustain uplift. Use a safety factor of 1.25 when preparing such calculations. C. Disposal of Water Removed by Dewatering System: 1. CONTRACTOR's dewatering system shall discharge to a suitable location acceptable to CITY, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Convey water from excavations in closed conduits. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3. Dispose of water removed from excavations in a manner that does not endanger health and safety, property, the Work, and other portions of the Project. 4. Dispose of water in manner that causes no inconvenience to CITY, others involved in the Project, and adjacent and downstream properties. 3.5 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation required to complete the Work as shown, specified, and required. Excavations shall include removing and handling of earth, sand, clay, gravel, hardpan, soft, weathered or decomposed rock, pavements, rubbish, and other materials within the excavation limits. B. Excavation Protection: 1. Provide excavation protection system(s) in accordance with Laws and Regulations to prevent injury to persons and property, including Underground Facilities. 2. Excavation Less Than Five Feet Deep: Excavations in stable rock or in soil conditions where there is no potential for a cave -in may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations shall be sloped and benched, shielded, or shored and braced. 3. Excavations Greater Than Five Feet Deep: Excavations in stable rock may be made with vertical sides. Under all other conditions, excavations shall be sloped and benched, shielded, or shored and braced. 4. Provide and maintain excavation protection system(s) in accordance with submittals accepted by CITY and required under Paragraph 1.5.B of this Section. C. Maintain excavations in dry condition in accordance with "Dewatering" Article in Part 3 of this Section. D. Elevation of bottom of footings shown is approximate. CITY may direct such minor changes in dimensions and elevations as may be required to secure a satisfactory footing. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -12 Excavation and Backfill E. When excavations are made below required grades without written order of CITY, fill such excavations with compacted select fill material, as directed by CITY, at CONTRACTOR's expense. F. Extend excavations sufficiently on each side of structures, footings, and similar construction to allow setting of forms, installation of shoring and bracing, and the safe sloping of banks, as necessary. G. Subgrades — General: 1. Subgrades shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud, muck, and other soft or unsuitable materials; and shall remain firm and intact under all construction operations. Subgrades that are otherwise solid but become soft or mucky on top due to construction operations shall be reinforced with material subject to approval by CITY. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade elevations shown. 2. If, in CITY's opinion, subgrade becomes softened or mucky because of construction delays, failure to dewater properly, or other cause within CONTRACTOR's control, subgrade shall be excavated to firm material, trimmed, and backfilled with select fill material at CONTRACTOR's expense. H. Proofrolling Subgrades: 1. Prior to placing fill or constructing pavements or slabs, proofroll the subgrade surface with sufficient proofrolling apparatus. Before starting proofrolling, submit to and obtain acceptance from CITY of proofrolling apparatus and procedure to be used. 2. Proofrolling operations shall be made in the presence of CITY. Notify CITY at least 24 hours in advance of start of proofrolling operations. 3. Subgrades displaying pronounced elasticity or deformation, deflection, cracking, or rutting shall be stabilized as directed by CITY. Unsuitable materials shall be undercut to the depth directed by CITY and replaced with select fill material. Other suitable stabilization methods may be directed by CITY. I. Pipe Trench Preparation: 1. Not more than 150 feet of trench may be opened in advance of installing pipe in trench. 2. Trench width shall be minimized to greatest extent practical, and shall comply with the following: a. Trench width shall be sufficient to provide space for installing, jointing and inspecting piping. Refer to Drawings for trench requirements. In no case should trench be wider at top of pipe than pipe barrel OD plus two feet, unless otherwise shown or indicated. b. Enlargement of trench width at pipe joints may be made when required and approved by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -13 Excavation and Backfill c. Trench width shall be sufficient for shoring and bracing, or shielding and dewatering. d. Trench width shall be sufficient to allow thorough compaction of fill adjacent to bottom half of pipe. e. Do not use excavating equipment that requires the trench to be excavated to excessive width. 3. Depth of trench shall be as shown or indicated. If required and approved by CITY in writing, depths may be revised. 4. Where CITY considers existing material beneath bedding material unsuitable, remove and replace such unsuitable material with select fill material. J. Excavated Materials to be Used as Fill: 1. Stockpile excavated materials that are acceptable for use as fill. 2. As excavation proceeds, keep stockpiles of excavated materials suitable for use as fill separate from unsuitable materials and waste materials. 3. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 4. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 5. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as specified in this Section. 6. Stockpiled excavated soils for use as select fill or general fill shall be tested and classified by laboratory as on -Site select fill or on -Site general fill. Perform required quality assurance testing for material verification on stockpiled materials as soon as possible to demonstrate compliance of excavated materials with the Contract Documents. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. All excavations outside lines and grades shown or indicated and that are not approved by CITY, together with removing and disposing of the associated material, shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. Fill unauthorized excavations with properly- compacted select fill material at CONTRACTOR's expense. 3.7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. Provide temporary erosion and sediment controls in accordance with Section 01570, Temporary Controls. When applicable, also comply with requirements of the erosion and sediment control plan approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.8 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING A. General: 1. Design and provide sheeting, shoring, bracing, cofferdams, and similar excavation supports as shown, specified, and required for the Work. 2. Clearances and types of temporary sheeting, shoring, bracing, and similar excavation supports, insofar as they may affect the finished character of the Work and the design of sheeting to be left in place, will be subject to the 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -14 Excavation and Backfill CITY's approval; but CONTRACTOR is responsible for adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, bracing, cofferdams, and similar excavation supports. 3. Materials: a. Previously -used materials shall be in good condition, and shall not be damaged or excessively pitted. All steel or wood sheeting designated to remain in place shall be new. New or used sheeting may be used for temporary sheeting, shoring, and bracing. b. All steel work for sheeting, shoring, bracing, cofferdams and other excavation supports, shall be in accordance with ANSUAISC 360, except that field welding will be allowed. c. Provide permanent steel sheet piling or pressure- creosoted timber sheet piling where subsequent removal of sheet piling might allow lateral movement of soil under adjacent structures 4. As excavation progresses, carry down shoring, bracing, cofferdams, and similar excavation supports to required elevation at bottom of excavation. 5. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding sheeting, shoring, bracing, cofferdams, and similar excavation supports. 6. Maintain sheeting, shoring, bracing, bracing, and other excavation supports in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. 7. Unless otherwise shown, specified, or directed, remove materials used for temporary construction when the Work is completed. Perform such removal in manner not injurious to the structures and Underground Facility, their appearance, and adjacent construction. B. Sheeting Left in Place: 1. Materials: Steel sheeting shown or indicated to be left in place shall consist of rolled sections of continuous interlocking type. Steel sheeting material designated to be left in place shall be new. Type and design of the sheeting and bracing shall comply with the above requirements for steel work for all sheeting and bracing. 2. Installation: a. Steel sheeting to be left in place shall be driven straight to lines and grades as shown, indicated, or directed. Piles shall penetrate into firm materials with secure interlocking throughout pile's entire length. Damaged piling having faulty alignment shall be pulled and replaced by new piling. b. Type of guide structure used and method of driving steel sheeting to be left in place shall be determined by CONTRACTOR's professional engineer. Jetting is not allowed. 3. Cut off at elevations shown, indicated, or directed by CITY sheeting left in place and remove cut off pilings from the Site. 4. Clean wales, braces, and all other items to be embedded in the permanent structure, and ensure that concrete surrounding the embedded element is sound and free of air pockets and harmful inclusions. Provisions shall include the cutting of holes in the webs and flanges of wale and bracing members, and welding of steel diaphragm waterstops perpendicular to the centerline of brace ends that are to be embedded. 1 1-0025-UT 02315 -15 Excavation and Backfill 5. Subsequent to removing the inside face forms, and when removal of bracing is allowed, cut back steel at least two inches inside the wall face and patch opening with concrete repair mortar in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. Concrete shall be thoroughly worked beneath wales and braces, around stiffeners, and at other place where voids may be formed. 6. Portions of sheeting or soldier piles and breast boards that are in contact with structure foundation concrete shall be left in place, together with wales and bracing members that are cast into foundation or superstructure concrete. C. Removal of Sheeting and Bracing: 1. Remove sheeting and bracing from excavations, unless otherwise directed by CITY in writing. Perform removal to avoid damaging the Work and adjacent construction. Removal shall be equal on both sides of excavation to ensure no unequal loads on structures and Underground Facilities. 2. Defer removal of sheeting and bracing, where removal may cause soil to come into contact with concrete, until the following conditions are satisfied: a. Concrete has cured for not less than seven days. b. Wall and floor framing, up to and including grade level floors, is in place. 3.9 TRENCH SHIELDS A. Excavation of earth material below bottom of trench shield shall not exceed the limits established in Laws and Regulations. B. When using a shield for installing piping: 1. Portions of trench shield extending below the mid - diameter of an installed, rigid pipe, such as prestressed concrete pipe and other types of rigid pipe, shall be raised above the pipe's mid - diameter elevation prior to moving the shield along the trench for further construction. 2. Bottom of shield shall not at any time extend below mid - diameter of installed pipe that is flexible or has flexing capability, such as steel, ductile iron, PVC, CPVC, polyethylene, and other pipe that has flexing capability. C. When using a shield for installing structures, bottom of the shield shall not extend below the top of the bedding for the structures. D. When removing the shield or moving the shield ahead, exercise extreme care to prevent moving piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities, and prevent disturbance of bedding material for piping, structures, and other Underground Facilities. When piping, structures, or Underground Facilities are disturbed, remove and reinstall the disturbed items in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -16 Excavation and Backfill 3.10 FILL AND COMPACTION — GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide and compact all fill required for the finished grades as shown and as specified in this Section. B. Place fill in excavations as promptly as progress of the Work allows, but not until completing the following: 1. CITY's authorization after observation of construction below finish grade, including dampproofing, waterproofing, perimeter insulation, and similar Work. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording of locations of Underground Facilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and filling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally - supported walls. 7. Field testing of tanks, Underground Facilities including piping and conduits, and water- retaining structures. 8. Placing of settlement plates. C. Fill that includes organic materials or other unacceptable material shall be removed and replaced with approved fill material in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Placement — General: 1. Place fill to the grades shown or indicated. Bring up evenly on all sides fill around structures and Underground Facilities. 2. Fill areas shall be undercut and proof - rolled as directed by CITY. 3. Place fill materials at optimum moisture content plus -or -minus three percent and density as specified in Table 02315 -A of this Section and this Article's requirements on compaction density. Furnish and use equipment capable of adding measured amounts of water to the fill materials to bring fill materials to a condition within required moisture content range. Furnish and use equipment capable of discing, aerating, and mixing the fill materials to ensure reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout the fill materials, and to reduce moisture content of borrow materials by air drying, when necessary. When subgrade or lift of fill materials requires moisture - conditioning before compaction, fill material shall be sufficiently mixed or worked on the subgrade to ensure uniform moisture content throughout the lift of material to be compacted. Materials at moisture content in excess of specified limit shall be dried by aeration or stockpiled for drying. 4. Perform compaction with equipment suitable for the type of fill material placed. Select and use equipment capable of providing the minimum density required in the Contract Documents. Use light compaction equipment, with equipment gross weight not exceeding 7,000 pounds within 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -17 Excavation and Backfill horizontal distance of ten feet from the wall of completed, below -grade structures. Furnish and use equipment capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping and Underground Facilities. Effectiveness of the equipment selected by CONTRACTOR shall be tested at start of compacted fill Work by constructing a small section of fill within the area where fill will be placed. If tests on the test section of fill indicate that required compaction is not obtained, do one or more of the following: increase the amount of coverages, decrease the lift thicknesses, or use different compactor equipment. 5. Place fill materials in horizontal, loose lifts, not exceeding specified uncompacted thickness. Place fill in a manner ensuring uniform lift thickness after placing. Mechanically compact each lift, by not less than two complete coverages of the compactor. One coverage is defined as the conditions reached when all portions of the fill lift have been subjected to the direct contact of compactor's compacting surface. Compaction of fill materials by inundation with water is unacceptable. 6. Do not place fill materials when standing water is present on surface of the area where fill will be placed. Do not compact fill when standing water is present on the fill to be compacted. Do not place or compact fill in a frozen condition or on top of frozen material. Fill containing organic materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced prior to compaction. 7. If required densities are not obtained because of improper control of placement or compaction procedures, or because of inadequate or improperly - functioning compaction equipment, CONTRACTOR shall perform all work required to provide the required densities. Such work shall include, at no additional cost to CITY, complete removal of unacceptable fill areas and replacement and re- compaction until acceptable fill is provided. 8. Repair, at CONTRACTOR's expense, observed or measured settlement. Make repairs and replacements as required within 30 days after being so advised by CITY. E. Fill Against Concrete: 1. Placing fill against concrete below finished grade is not allowed until the concrete has attained its specified strength, as determined by duration of concrete curing and testing of field -cured concrete cylinders. Requirements for strength and curing time are in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Elevation of fill placed against concrete walls shall not differ by more than two feet on each side of walls, unless walls are adequately braced or all floor framing is in place up to and including grade level slabs. 3. Backfill structural foundation units as soon as practicable, in accordance with this Section, after concrete has gained sufficient strength to avoid damage, to avoid ponding of surface water and accumulation of debris. 4. Where fill is placed against waterproofed surface, exercise care that waterproofing material is not damaged. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -18 Excavation and Backfill F. Fill in Electrical Ductbank Trenches: 1. Provide general fill for full depth of electrical ductbank trench, below and above electrical ductbank. Where one ductbank passes beneath another pipe or ductbank, provide select fill to the elevation of the bottom of upper ductbank or pipe, as applicable. 2. Placing and compacting fill in electrical ductbank trenches shall comply with requirements of Paragraph "G. Fill in Pipe Trenches ", of this Article. G. Fill in Pipe Trenches: 1. Place pipe bedding material in pipe trenches in horizontal layers, and thoroughly compact each layer before the next layer is placed. 2. Piping Installed in Fills Above Pre - construction Grade: a. Prior to installing piping, place the fill in accordance with the Contract Documents until the fill reaches a minimum elevation two feet higher than the top of piping to be installed. Excavate the trench; install the piping, and backfill. Subsequently provide the remainder of the fill required for the Work. 3. Piping trenches may be backfilled prior to testing of piping, unless nature of the test requires observation of pipe during testing. Do not construct building or structure over piping until piping has been successfully tested and passed. 4. Pipe Bedding: Pipe bettering material shall be as follows: a. Install PVC, CPVC, HDPE, and FRP piping on a layer of sand. Sand shall extend to 12 inches above top of pipe and to the trenchwalls on each side of the pipe. b. Unless otherwise shown, install other types of piping on not less than six -inch layer of aggregate pipe bedding material. Aggregate pipe bedding material shall extend 12 inches above top of the pipe. 5. Placing and Compacting Pipe Trench Fill: Unless otherwise shown, placement and compaction of pipe trench fill materials shall comply with the following: a. Pipe bedding material shall be spread and the surface graded to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath piping at all points between bell holes or pipe joints. Slight disturbance of installed pipe bedding material surface during withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle is acceptable. b. After each pipe's bedding material has been graded, and the piping has been aligned, joined in accordance with the Contract Documents, and placed in final position on bedding material, provide and compact sufficient pipe trench fill material under and around each side of the pipe and back of the bell or end thereof to hold piping in proper position and maintain alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and embedment operations. Deposit and compact pipe trench fill material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of piping to prevent lateral displacement of piping. Place and compact pipe trench fill material to an elevation 12 inches above top of pipe, unless otherwise shown or specified. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -19 Excavation and Backfill c. Each layer of pipe trench fill material shall be compacted by at least two complete coverages of all portions of surface of each lift using appropriate compaction equipment. d. Method of compaction and compaction equipment used shall be appropriate for material to be compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to the piping. H. Temporary Pavement: 1. Place 1.5 inches of temporary asphalt concrete pavement immediately after filling excavations in paved roadways and other paved areas that will remain for permanent use. 2. Maintain surface of paved area over the fill in good and safe condition during progress of the Work, and promptly fill depressions over and adjacent to the fill area caused by settlement of fill. 3. Permanent replacement pavement shall be equal to that of the existing roadways, unless otherwise shown or specified. I. Subbase Placement: 1. Provide subbase material where shown to the limits shown or indicated. 2. Place subbase material in compacted lifts not exceeding depth of six inches each. J. Drainage Fill Placement: 1. Provide drainage fill material where shown to the limits shown or indicated. 2. Place drainage fill material in compacted layers of uniform thickness not exceeding depth of six inches each. Compact lifts of drainage fill using suitable compaction equipment. K. Compaction Density Requirements: 1. Compaction required for all types of fills shall be in accordance with Table 02315 -A of this Section. Moisten material or aerate the material as necessary to provide the moisture content that will facilitate obtaining the required compaction. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -20 Excavation and Backfill 1 1 1 1 t r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 TABLE 02315 -A REQUIRED MINIMUM DENSITY Material Percent Compaction (ASTM D698) Uncompacted Lift (inches) General Fill More than five feet below final grade 100 8 Less than five feet below final grade 95 8 Select Fill Below concrete slabs or mats 100 8 Below pavement and sidewalks 100 12 Behind concrete walls 95 8 Subbase Material Below pavement and sidewalks 100 12 All other locations 100 8 Pipe Bedding Material Below structures or pavement 100 8 All other locations 95 6 Drainage Fill N/A 6 2. Fill shall be wetted and thoroughly mixed to achieve optimum moisture content plus -or -minus three percent, with the following exceptions: a. On -site clayey soils: Optimum to plus three percent. 3. Replace natural, undisturbed soils or compacted soil subsequently disturbed or removed by construction operations with materials compacted as indicated in Table 02315 -A of this Section. 4. Field quality control testing for density; to verify that specified density was obtained, will be performed during each day of compaction Work. Responsibility for field quality control testing is specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. 5. When field quality control testing indicates unsatisfactory compaction, provide additional compaction necessary to obtain the specified compaction. Perform additional compaction Work at no additional cost to CITY until specified compaction is obtained. Such work includes complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by CITY) fill areas and replacement and re- compaction until acceptable fill is provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. L. Replacement of Unacceptable Excavated Materials: In cases where over - excavation to replace unacceptable soil materials is required, backfill the excavation to required subgrade with select fill material and thoroughly compact in accordance with Table 02315 -A and the associated "Compaction Density Requirements" in this Article. Slope the sides of excavation in accordance with the maximum inclinations specified for each structure location. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -21 Excavation and Backfill 3.11 GRADING A. General: 1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth subgrade surfaces within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free of irregular surface changes, and shall comply with the following: 1. Grassed Areas or Areas Covered with Gravel, Stone, Wood Chips, or Other Special Cover: Finish areas to receive topsoil or special cover to within not more than one inch above or below the required subgrade elevations. 2. Sidewalks: Shape surface of areas under sidewalks to line, grade, and cross section, with finish surface not more than one inch above or below the required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 -inch above or below the required subgrade elevation. C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Concrete Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 -inch when tested with a ten foot straight edge. D. Compaction: 1. After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.12 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM) A. Controlled Low Strength Materials Placement: 1. Discharge CLSM from the mixer by reasonable means into the space to be filled. 2. Bring the fill material uniformly up to the fill line shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Placement of fill over the CLSM may proceed after a curing period of not less than three days. 3.13 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE A. General: 1. Place subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over ground surface to support pavement base course. 2. After completing filling and grading, shape and compact pavement subgrade to an even, firm foundation in accordance with this Section. Remove 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -22 Excavation and Backfill unsuitable subgrade materials, including soft materials, boulders, vegetation, and loose stones, and replace with compacted fill material as directed by CITY. B. Grade Control: 1. During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross - slope of subbase course. C. Placing of Pavement Subbase Course: 1. Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, in accordance with indicated cross - section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placing operations. 2. Compaction and Grade Control: Comply with compaction requirements for excavation and fill in this Section, and the following requirements: a. Compaction with roller shall begin at the sides of the area to be paved and continue toward the center. Continue compaction until there is no movement of the course ahead of the roller. b. After compaction of top lift of pavement subbase, provide and uniformly spread pipe bedding material and screenings compacted, on the surface, and sweep using gang- dragged broom, followed by compaction. c. After rolling, check for grade with a line not less than 40 feet in length; depression over 1/2 -inch deep shall be filled to satisfaction of CITY. 3. After completing compaction, other than that necessary for bringing material for the next course, do not haul or drive over the compacted subbase. 4. Do not install pavement subbase in excess of 500 feet in length without compacting to prevent softening of the subgrade. 5. If subgrade material becomes churned up into or mixed with the subbase material, remove the mixed material and replace with clean, compacted subbase material. D. Shoulders: 1. Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each lift of subbase material. 2. Compact and roll not less than 12 -inch width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each lift of subbase material. 3.14 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. General: 1. CONTRACTOR shall haul away material removed from excavations that does not comply with requirements for fill, or is in excess of the quantity required for fill 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -23 Excavation and Backfill 2. Disposal of materials shall be in compliance with Laws and Regulations, at no additional cost to CITY. 3.15 PRECONSOLIDATION A. Where shown or indicated, preconsolidate soils prior to construction. Areas to be preconsolidated shall be brought to finished grade not less than three months prior to starting construction of the structures to be situated thereon. If settlement occurs during the preconsolidation period, promptly bring the settled area up to grade by providing additional fill. B. After topsoil has been stripped, provide settlement plates where shown or specified. C. Fill material to be provided over preconsolidation areas and the method of placing shall be in accordance with the "Fill and Compaction — General Provisions" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Should removal of six inches of topsoil result in subgrade elevation below the base slab elevation of proposed structures, remove the remaining topsoil and unacceptable material until suitable subgrade materials are exposed. Subgrade shall then be brought up to proposed base slab elevation with compacted select fill. D. Settlement Plates: 1. Provide settlement plates for observation of subsoil consolidation under fill loads at locations shown, furnished in accordance with the details shown. 2. Level the areas occupied by settlement plates so that the base of each settlement plate will be at an elevation approximately equivalent to the average ground surface within a radius of five feet from the plate location. 3. Fill with sand all small depressions in the ground surface at the plate location before seating the settlement plate. 4. Markings: a. Installed settlement plate shall include the first five -foot pipe section tightly seated in the base coupling with the pipe marked at one -foot intervals measured from the base of the settlement plate. Paint all marks on this and subsequent sections with high - visibility paint. b. Uppermost mark shall be permanently recorded by cutting a horizontal slot into the pipe with a hacksaw exactly five feet above the base of the settlement plate. 5. Installation of settlement plates and markings shall be satisfactory to CITY before placing the six -inch sand cover to anchor the plate, as shown. 6. Measurements and Extensions: a. Establish the elevation of base of settlement plate by determining elevation of the uppermost mark on the pipe section. b. During filling operations, add five -foot sections of pipe to settlement plates as required to maintain the top of each pipe above the fill surface at all times. When adding pipe sections, pipe sections shall be tightly joined and the additional section marked by painting at one -foot 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -24 Excavation and Backfill intervals, and provide a hacksaw slot exactly five feet above the hacksaw slot made in the previous pipe section. c. Addition of all settlement plate extensions shall be satisfactory to CITY before fill placement resumes in the area. d. After settlement plates are installed, measure and record elevation of the settlement plate and elevation of the fill surface at the plate location once per week, and submit settlement plate measurement data to CITY. 7. Provide barricades around settlement plate extensions to protect settlement plate extensions from damage during construction. If a settlement plate is damaged by construction operations, replace or repair settlement plate in a manner satisfactory to CITY. E. Do not start construction of structures situated on areas to be preconsolidated until sufficient settlement has occurred. Degree of settlement considered sufficient will be determined by CITY from settlement plate measurement data. F. Prior to placing topsoil and seeding, cut back and grade the filled area to the proper subgrade, as required. 3.16 TEMPORARY BARRIERS A. Provide temporary barrier surrounding excavations and excavation work areas to provide temporary protection to persons and property. Barrier shall have openings only at vehicular, equipment, and worker access points. B. Minimum Material Requirements for Temporary Barriers: 1. Temporary barrier shall not be less snow fence -type fencing, four feet high. 2. Fence shall be constructed of vertical hardwood slats measuring not less than 1.5 inches by 1/4 -inch interwoven with strands of horizontal wire, or shall be of equivalent plastic construction. 3. Posts: a. Posts shall be steel, either "U " -, "Y " -, "T "- shaped, or channel section. b. Posts shall have a nominal weight of not less than 1/3 -pound per linear foot, exclusive of the anchor. c. Posts shall have tapered anchors weighing not less than 0.67 pounds, each firmly attached by means of welding, riveting or clamping. d. Posts shall have corrugations, knobs, notches, or studs placed and constructed to engage a substantial number of fence line wire in the proper position. e. Provide each post with sufficient quantity of galvanized wire fasteners or clamps, of not less than 0.120 -inch diameter, for attaching fence wire to post. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -25 Excavation and Backfill 1. Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Perform field moisture content and density tests to ensure that the specified compaction of fill materials has been obtained. b. Tests of actual unconfined compressive strength or bearing tests on each stratum. c. Report results of each test to CITY and CONTRACTOR. 2. Required Material Tests: a. Compaction: Comply with ASTM D1556 and ASTM D6938, as applicable. 3. Authority and Duties of Testing Laboratory: a. Technicians representing the testing laboratory shall inspect the materials in the field, perform testing, and report findings to CITY and CONTRACTOR. When materials furnished or the Work performed does not comply with the Contract Documents, technician will direct attention of CITY and CONTRACTOR to such failure. b. Technician will not act as foreman or perform other duties for CONTRACTOR. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect defective Work or non - complying materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate CITY for Substantial Completion or final acceptance. Technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release requirements of the Contract Documents, or to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 4. Responsibilities and Duties of CONTRACTOR: a. Use of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR of the responsibility to provide materials and Work in full compliance with the Contract Documents. b. To facilitate testing laboratory, CONTRACTOR shall advise testing laboratory at least two days in advance of filling operations to allow for completion of field quality control testing and for assignment of personnel. c. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to accomplish the specified compaction for fill and other earthwork. CONTRACTOR shall control construction operations by confirmation tests to verify and confirm that CONTRACTOR has complied, and is complying at all times, with the Contract Documents relative to compaction, control. d. CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding one or more of the following quantities of earthwork. Each test location shall include tests for each layer, type, or class of fill to finish grade. 1) 200 linear feet of trench fill. 2) 10 cubic yards of select fill. 3) 100 cubic yards of general fill. 4) 50 cubic yards of subbase material. 5. Testing laboratory will inspect and indicate acceptable subgrades and fill layers before construction work is performed thereon. Testing of subgrades and fill layers shall be taken as follows: 11- 0025 -UT 02315 -26 Excavation and Backfill a. Trenches for Structures, and Underground Facilities (including buried ductbanks): 1) In Open Fields: Two locations every 1,000 linear feet. 2 Along Dirt or Gravel Roads or Off Traveled Right -of -Way: Two locations every 500 linear feet. 3) Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each crossing. 4) Under Pavement Cuts or Within Two Feet of Pavement Edges: One location every 400 linear feet. b. Footing Subgrade: For each stratum of soil on which footings will be placed, perform not less than one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to CITY. c. For Select Fill: On 30 -foot intervals on all sides of the structure for every compacted lift, but not less than one per lift on each side of the structure for structures less than 60 feet long on a side. d. For General Fill: One per 1,000 square feet on every compacted lift. e. Subbase Material: One per 1,000 square feet on every compacted lift. 6. Periodic compliance tests will be made by CITY to verify that compaction is complying with the requirements specified, at no cost to CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall remove the overburden above the level at which CITY wishes to test and shall fill and re- compact the excavation after testing is complete. 7. If testing laboratory reports or inspections indicate subgrade, fills, or bedding compaction below specified density, CONTRACTOR shall remove unacceptable materials as necessary and replace with specified materials and provide additional compaction at CONTRACTOR's expense until subgrades, bedding, and fill are acceptable. Costs for retesting of subgrade, fills, or bedding materials that did not originally comply with specified density shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 02315 -27 Excavation and Backfill 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 02315 -28 Excavation and Backfill SECTION 02380 DRILLED PIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials for and install cast -in -place reinforced drilled piers for permanent structures as shown on the Drawings, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and standard drilling and concreting practices. This shall include all drilling, reinforcing steel, steel casing, concrete, dewatering and other appurtenances necessary to make a complete installation. B. Subsurface Conditions 1. A geotechnical report has been performed for the site. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall visit the site and shall satisfy itself as to all existing surface and subsurface conditions affecting its work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ACI 336.1, Standard Specification for the Construction of End Bearing Drilled Piers. 2. ADSC, Industry Guidelines for Specification and Inspection of Drilled Shafts. 3. ADSC, Standards and Specifications of the Foundation Drilling Industry. 4. ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM D6760, Standard Test Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete Deep Foundations by Ultrasonic Crosshole Testing. 6. ASTM E329, Stand Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction 7. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code. 8. AWS Standard Qualification Procedure. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -1 Drilled Piers 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drilled Pier Installer Qualifications: Not less than three successfully completed contracts with similar soil conditions, shaft sizes, depths, and volumes of work contained in this project. B. Survey Work: Engage a registered surveyor to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled pier work. Conduct layout work for each drilled pier to lines and levels required before excavation, and actual measurements of each drilled pier location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other data as required. C. All drilling operations must be performed in the presence of the CITY. D. Concrete tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. E. Trial Pier: CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate adequacy of construction methods, techniques, and equipment by installing unreinforced concrete trial pier. Pier shall be positioned away from production piers as directed by CITY. The trial pier shall be drilled to the maximum depth of production drilled piers. The trial pier shall be cut off 2 feet below finished grade and left in place following CITY's inspection. F. Non - Destructive Testing Service: CONTRACTOR shall employ, at his own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in non - destructive crosshole sonic logging and testing of concrete drilled piers to perform non - destructive pier evaluation tests. 1. Testing agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329. 2. Selection of a testing laboratory is subject to CITY'S approval. 3. Submit a written description of the proposed testing laboratory giving qualifications of personnel, facilities, equipment, and other information, which may be requested by CITY. G. Materials and installed Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by CITY, at any time during the progress of the Work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be done at CITY'S expense, including the retesting of rejected materials and installed Work, shall be done at CONT'RACTOR'S expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings for all items needed to install the drilled piers in accordance with these Specifications, including, but not limited to, concrete mix design, reinforcing steel, and casings. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -2 Drilled Piers B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit an installation plan no later than one month prior to construction of drilled piers. Plan shall include the following information: 1. Name and experience record of the drilled shaft superintendent who will be in charge of drilled shaft operations. 2. List of proposed equipment to be used, including cranes, drills, augers, bailing buckets, cleaning equipment, desanding equipment, core sampling equipment, tremies or concrete pumps, casing, etc. 3. Details of overall construction operation sequence and the sequence of shaft construction. 4. Details of shaft excavation methods including details of dewatering (ifneeded). 5. Details of methods to clean the shaft excavation. 6. Details of reinforcement placement, including support and centralization methods. 7. Details of casing installation and removal methods. C. If welding of steel casings is needed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit welding procedures and qualifications of welders in accordance with AWS D1.1. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written notification to the CITY of its scheduled date for commencing of drilled piers installation at the site at least one week in advance of that date. E. Non - destructive Test Reports: Within one week of completing test, submit test report for each pier test, in accordance with ASTM D6760 and Article 3.6.M of this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Concrete and all related materials shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. Concrete shall be Class A with a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 psi at 28 days. B. Reinforcement Steel: All reinforcement steel shall be as specified in Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Structural Steel Casing: Structural steel casing shall be a minimum of 3/16 -inch thick, ASTM A 252, Grade 2, or A36 steel, or stronger. Casings shall be smooth. D. CSL Access Tubes: Access tubes shall be water tight, free from corrosion, and free of deleterious material that may prevent bonding with concrete. Access tubes shall be fitted with watertight caps on bottom and top. Tubes shall conform to the following: 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -3 Drilled Piers 1. ASTM A 53, Grade A or B, Type E, F, or S 2. Inside Diameter: 1.50 inches (minimum). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the ground surface and conditions under which drilling piers is to be accomplished. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been appropriately corrected. 3.2 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the drilling, casing if necessary, placement and inspection of reinforcement steel, and placement of concrete so that concrete is placed in each excavated shaft in a continuous, rapid manner to reduce the time the excavations remain open. Drilled pier excavations should not be left open overnight. B. Concrete for the drilled piers shall be placed using a tremie pipe, as required. C. Excessive wheel loads and surface vibration shall not be allowed within the immediate vicinity of any drilled hole or freshly placed concrete. D. Drilled holes shall be protected against any entrance of water or other debris by sandbagging, covering, or other means proposed by the CONTRACTOR. E. The term "final grade" shall be defined as the subgrade elevation adjacent to the drilled pier in question. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. All holes shall be drilled dry to the diameter shown on the Drawings. Cased drilling techniques shall be used in the upper fill soils down to the top of the very stiffto hard clay layer. B. The depth of the drilled holes from final grade shall be as shown on the Drawings or as determined by the CITY C. Tolerances: 1. The maximum variation in the center of any drilled pier from plumb shall be one inch in 10 feet, not to exceed a total of 4 inches. 2. The maximum variation in plan location of any drilled pier at the final grade elevation shall be 3 inches. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -4 Drilled Piers 3. Concrete cutoff elevation shall have a tolerance of plus 1 inch and minus 3 inches. 4. Excavation equipment and methods shall be designed so that the completed shaft excavation will have a planar bottom. Cutting edges of excavation equipment shall be normal to the vertical axis of the equipment within a tolerance of 3/8" per foot of diameter. 5. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction to compensate for excessive eccentricity. Submit proposed corrective construction methods to CITY for approval before proceeding. D. Prior to drilling, the design center of each drilled pier shall be located by survey, by the use of off-set stakes and intersecting string lines. Stake locations shall be preserved until drilled pier construction has been inspected and completed. E. Casings may be delivered in sections of any convenient length. Connect sections by continuous full penetration welds during placement into shaft excavation. F. Dewatering: Where approved by the CITY, provide dewatering to keep excavations free of water before placing concrete. Discharge water to general site runoff ditches and disposal areas as approved by the CITY. G. Material excavated from shafts shall be disposed of in accordance with 02315, Excavation and Backfill. H. Remove boulders during drilling of piers. Boulders less than 8 inches in depth along drilling path are considered incidental. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT STEEL ASSEMBLY AND PLACEMENT A. Reinforcement steel cages may be shop or field assembled. If not shop assembled, the cages shall be fully assembled at grade prior to placement. Care shall be taken in placing the reinforcement cage not to disturb the sides of the excavation. B. Prior to installation of the reinforcement, the drilled shaft shall be inspected by the CITY. C. Each reinforcement steel cage shall be secured in place symmetrically about the centerline axis of the pier and blocked to stay clear of the walls of the excavation. Cages shall be securely held in position during concrete placement. D. If the shaft is lengthened, the longitudinal bars and lateral reinforcement required shall be extended to the bottom. Splices needed to extend the bars shall be located in the lower portion of the shaft. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -5 Drilled Piers E. The elevation of the top of the steel cage shall be checked before and after the concrete is placed by the CITY. If the upward displacement of the steel cage exceeds 2 inches or if the downward displacement exceeds 6 inches, the drilled pier will be considered defective. At no additional cost to the CITY, CONTRACTOR shall correct deficient work prior to proceeding with construction of additional drilled piers. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Concrete shall not be placed until the reinforcing steel has been inspected by the CITY. B. The steel casing shall be removed from the hole as concrete is placed therein. The bottom of the casing shall be maintained not more than 8 feet nor less than 5 feet below the top of the concrete during withdrawal and placing operations, unless otherwise permitted by the CITY. Damage to the concrete during withdrawal operations shall be avoided by hammering or otherwise vibrating the casing. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction in diameter of the shaft by earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete. C. Temporary casings which become bound or fouled during shaft construction and cannot be practically removed shall constitute a defect in the drilled pier. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to improve defective shafts to the satisfaction of the CITY. Improvements may consist of, but not be limited to, removing the shaft concrete and extending the shaft deeper to compensate for loss of frictional capacity in the cased zone, providing straddle shafts to compensate for capacity loss, or providing a replacement shaft. All corrective measures shall be done to the satisfaction of the CITY at no additional costs to the CITY. D. If more than one foot of water is present at the base of the drilled pier, concrete placement shall be performed using a tremie pipe. Concrete shall be placed through the tremie pipe such that the discharge end of the tube is at least 12 inches below the surface of the placed concrete at all times. Concrete shall be placed in the shaft in one continuous operation. E. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the concrete in the hole is dense and homogeneous by providing proper vibration. F. Stop concrete at the cutoff elevation shown, screed level, and apply a scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. G. Curing shall be in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -6 Drilled Piers 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR to check dimensions and alignment of the shafts. B. Concrete testing shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete except that at least one set of four compression test cylinders shall be taken for every three drilled piers or at least once per day regardless of concrete volume placed. C. CONTRACTOR shall verify the bearing capacity at the bottom of the pier prior to concrete placement. D. Corrective Action: 1. CITY may survey the piers at any time. If any discrepancy is detected, CONTRACTOR shall replace the pier or piers, at no additional cost to the CITY. 2. As soon as possible, after completion of installation of piers, CONTRACTOR shall prepare an accurate survey made by a licensed surveyor and furnish CITY with a record showing the final position of the top of each pier and location of unacceptable piers. 3. CITY will check the piers and determine acceptability. If not acceptable, the CITY will advise CONTRACTOR what additional piers must be furnished or other corrective measures to be taken. 4. CITY will provide redesign, as required, because of piers installed out of location. All corrective measures, including cost of CITY'S redesign, shall be at CONTRACTOR'S expense. 5. Partial surveys of piers at cutoff elevation may be submitted, as driving proceeds, in order to expedite the Work. E. Damaged Piers or Piers Out of Tolerance: 1. Damaged piers, and piers installed outside the required installation tolerances, will not be accepted. 2. Cut -off and abandon piers rejected after installation, and replace with new piers. 3. Install additional piers where the centerline deviation exceeds 3- inches and a redesign indicates a load on any pier exceeding 110 percent of the design load. Should it be impractical to install additional piers in particular situations, provide reinforced concrete straps or other measures as directed by CITY for redistributing the design loading, at no additional cost to the CITY. F. Trial Pier: Failure by the CONTRACTOR to demonstrate to the CITY the adequacy of methods and equipment including the results of the CSL testing, shall be reason for the CITY to require alterations in equipment and construction methods to eliminate unsatisfactory results. Once approval has been given to construct production piers, no changes will be permitted in the methods or equipment used to construct the trial pier without written approval of CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 02380 -7 Drilled Piers G. Install and load test piers. Pier load tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1143 and as modified herein. Provide complete testing materials and equipment as required, and perform testing only in the presence of CITY. Test piers shall be installed and loaded from the excavation subgrade level. H. Pier Design Load: 1. The required safe working capacity for piers shall be 13 tons downward for drilled piers at 9 foot on- center. 2. The required safe working capacity for piers shall be 5 tons laterally for drilled piers at 9 foot on- center. 3. Perform CSL testing per ASTM 6760 on each test pier. Present a summary of testing results and analysis to the CITY for each pier. Report to include the following: a. Date of installation b. Date of testing c. Test pier location d. Ground elevation e. Dimensions of pier f. CSL logs and Z banded plots of each pier 4. Following completion of CSL, cut access tubes flush with top of shaft and grout tubes solid with non - shrink grout. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 02380 -8 Drilled Piers SECTION 02742 BITUMINOUS PAVING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install flexible, hot -mix, hot -laid, asphalt concrete pavement. 2. The Work includes: a. Preparation such as sawcutting, milling where shown or indicated, cleaning, and other preparation for installing flexible pavements. b. Providing asphalt concrete paving materials. c. Providing tack coat material. d. Providing pavement markings where shown or indicated. e. Providing quality controls and testing. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before flexible paving Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315, Excavation and Fill. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AASHTO M320, Specification for Performance- Graded Asphalt Binder. 2. AASHTO MPIa, Specification for Performance- Graded Asphalt Binder. 3. AI MS -2, Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types. 4. ASTM C1371, Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers. 5. ASTM C1549, Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 6. ASTM D242/D242M, Specification for Mineral Filler For Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 7. ASTM D692/D692M, Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 8. ASTM D946/D946M, Specification for Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 9. ASTM D977, Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -1 Bituminous Paving 10. ASTM D1073, Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 11. ASTM D1188, Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples. 12. ASTM D2726, Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non - Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. 13. ASTM D2950, Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods. 14. ASTM D3549, Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens. 15. ASTM D6690, Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 16. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 17. ASTM E408, Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection -Meter Techniques. 18. ASTM E1918, Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low - Sloped Surfaces in the Field. 19. ASTM E1980, Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low - Sloped Opaque Surfaces 20. FS TT -P -115, Paint, Traffic, Highway, White and Yellow. 21. USGBC LEED -NC, Reference Guide, For New Construction and Major Renovation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Asphalt Concrete Production Facility: a. Production facility for asphalt concrete, tack coat materials, and other bitumastic materials shall be certified by the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) for furnishing such materials for FDOT highways. 2. CONTRACTOR's Testing Laboratory: a. Retain the services of independent testing laboratory to perform testing and determine compliance with the Contract Documents of the materials provided under this Section. b. Testing laboratory shall comply with ASTM E329 and requirements of Section 01451, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor. c. Testing laboratory shall be experienced in the types of testing required. d. Selection of testing laboratory is subject to CITY's acceptance. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Reference Specifications and Details: a. Comply with applicable requirements of FDOT Standard Specifications. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -2 Bituminous Paving C. Quality Assurance Testing: 1. Quality assurance testing is in addition to source quality control testing, when required, and field quality control testing required under Article 3.4 of this Section. 2. Materials used in the Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by CITY, during the Project. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests not specifically indicated to be performed at COUNTY's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed Work, shall be performed at CONTRACTOR's expense. 3. CONTRACTOR's Quality Assurance Testing Laboratory Scope: a. Use of testing laboratory shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for providing materials and the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Quality assurance testing laboratory shall perform the following, unless evidence of material compliance with reference specifications indicated in Paragraph 1.3.B of this Section, is submitted to CITY by CONTRACTOR and asphalt concrete production facility: 1) Test in accordance with reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section. In lieu of quality assurance testing, submit evidence and certification of material compliance with reference specifications. When evidence of conformance submitted is not acceptable to CITY, perform quality assurance testing. c. To facilitate testing services, CONTRACTOR shall: 1) Secure and deliver to testing laboratory and CITY (when requested by CITY) representative Samples of materials that CONTRACTOR proposes to furnish and that are required to be tested. 2) Furnish such labor as is necessary to obtain and handle Samples at the Site or at asphalt concrete production facility and other material sources. 3) Advise testing laboratory and CITY sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completion of quality assurance tests and for the assignment of personnel. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit the proposed asphalt concrete mix design for each asphalt concrete material, and other bituminous materials, required under this Section, providing complete data on materials, including location in the Work, source, material content and percentages, temperatures and all other pertinent data. Indicate proportion of bituminous material from reclaimed asphalt pavement. b. Proposed gradation for each aggregate to be used in flexible paving. Submit gradation test results for the same material furnished on a previous project. Indicate the proportion of reclaimed asphalt pavement. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -3 Bituminous Paving 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's complete product data on all pavement marking materials proposed for use, including product literature, specifications, and recommended application techniques and other installation data. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Quality Assurance Test Data Submittals and Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit for quality assurance tests and source quality control tests required. 2. Delivery Tickets: a. Submit copy of delivery ticket for each load of asphalt concrete, tack coat materials, and other materials obtained from asphalt concrete production facility, signed by CONTRACTOR 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of required field quality control testing. 4. Qualifications: a. Asphalt concrete production facility, when required by CITY. b. CONTRACTOR's testing laboratory, when required by CITY. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: 1. Temperature: a. For base course and binder course paving lifts equal to or greater than two inches thickness, atmospheric temperature shall be 40 degrees F and rising. b. For surface course paving or other pavement courses in lifts less than two inches thick, temperature of surface on which pavement is to be placed shall be 50 degrees F or greater. 2. Prohibitions: a. Do not place flexible paving materials when weather is foggy or during precipitation. b. Do not place flexible paving materials when the base on which the material will be placed contains moisture in excess of optimum. c. Place flexible paving materials only when CITY concurs that weather conditions are suitable. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: 1. Provide subbase course of the thickness shown or indicated, in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Fill. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -4 Bituminous Paving 2.2 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIXES A. Asphalt Concrete Mixtures: Provide materials designed and manufactured in accordance with reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section and as shown. 2.3 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Materials for Asphalt Concrete: 1. Bituminous materials for asphalt concrete shall comply with the reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section, for the asphalt concrete mixes specified. 2. Bituminous Materials from Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): When use of RAP in bituminous materials is acceptable, comply with requirements for RAP in Article 2.4 of this Section. B. Tack Coat: 1. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt. 2. Provide in accordance with reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section. C. Crack Sealant: 1. Provide in accordance with reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section. 2.4 AGGREGATES IN FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS A. Aggregates for Asphalt Concrete — General: 1. Aggregate materials used in flexible pavement shall be in accordance with the reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section, for the asphalt concrete mix designs indicated. B. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): 1. Processed material obtained by milling or full depth removal of existing asphalt concrete pavement may be used as aggregate in asphalt concrete base course and binder course. 2. Maximum proportion of RAP in the asphalt concrete provided shall comply with requirements of the reference specifications indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section. 3. When RAP is used, comply with Contract Documents requirements for the applicable asphalt concrete course mix design, bituminous materials, and aggregates. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -5 Bituminous Paving PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the subbase and base on which flexible paving will be installed. Notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Do not place materials on subgrades, or subbase that is muddy or has water thereon. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparation: Before starting installation of flexible paving, perform the following: 1 Grade Control: Establish and maintain throughout flexible paving installation the required lines and grades, including crown and cross -slope for each asphalt concrete course during construction operations. 2. Prepare subgrade and provide subbase for flexible pavement in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Fill. Before installing flexible pavement, obtain CITY's concurrence that subgrade and subbase are suitable for installing flexible pavement. 3. Coordinate placement of flexible pavement with the Work included under Section 02771, Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks, and Work including drainage structures, manholes, valve boxes, and similar items. 4. Provide appropriate maintenance and protection of traffic measures during placement of pavement. B. Milling: 1 Perform milling of existing pavement where shown or indicated. 2. "Milling" consists of the milling, shaping, and removing portions of existing surfaces by cold milling process and subsequent cleaning. 3. Milling Equipment: a. Milling machines shall be power- operated, self - propelled machines capable of removing the desired thickness of existing surfaces. Machines shall have sufficient power, traction, and stability to accurately maintain depth of cut and slope. Machines shall produce a finished profile and cross slope to within 1/4 inch of that required and shall produce uniform surface texture free of gouges and ridges greater than 3/8 -inch deep. b. Machines shall be equipped with a means to control dust and other particulate matter created by the cutting action. c. Provide equipment that removes milled material as quickly as the rate of milling. d. Use vacuum trucks, street sweepers or power brooms to clean milled surfaces. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -6 Bituminous Paving 4. Milling Operations: a. Perform milling to so that, when final course of pavement is placed, required elevations and grades are provided. Where required, establish a taut reference string line to control line and grade of milling. b. Minimize the time between milling and placement of pavement over milled surface. c. Areas not accessible to the milling machine, such as around or adjacent to drainage structures, manholes, curbs, and transverse joints on structures, may be removed by a small milling machine, handwork or other method acceptable to CITY. d. Remove milled material as soon as it is milled. Remove fines and other material prior to opening milled area to traffic. Control objectionable dust emissions. When traffic has been allowed into milled area or when more than 48 hours have elapsed since milling, clean the milled area again prior to applying tack coat. e. Maintain drainage to drainage inlets and other drainage structures in a manner acceptable to CITY. f. Properly dispose of milled material at a location away from the Site. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Repair surface defects in existing pavement to provide uniform surface to receive new pavement. 2. Provide crack sealant to completely fill cracks more than 1/16 -inch wide in areas shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Clean existing surfaces over which asphalt concrete pavement will be installed, by removing from the surface foreign material, excess asphalt concrete, excess joint sealant, and crack filler, and other undesirable matter. 4. Provide tack coat as indicated in Article 3.3 of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE PAVING A. General: 1. Provide final pavement surfaces of uniform texture, at required grades and cross - sections. 2. Construct roadways to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown or indicated. B. Installation of Asphalt Concrete: 1. Asphalt concrete mixture shall be transported to the site of paving and placed as soon as possible after mixing. 2. Placement of each asphalt concrete course shall be completed over the full width of the section under construction during each day's paving operations. 3. Spread and finish asphalt concrete courses by means of self - propelled mechanical spreading and finishing equipment. Compacted thickness of layers placed shall not exceed 150 percent of specified thickness unless approved in writing by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -7 Bituminous Paving 4. Compaction: a. Rollers: 1) Use sufficient rolling equipment to satisfactorily compact and finish the quantity of asphalt concrete placed. There shall be not less than two rollers on the Project at all times. When acceptable to CITY, one of the rollers may be a pneumatic -tire roller. 2) During rolling operations, roller speed shall not exceed three miles per hour. When sufficient number of rollers is not available, reduce the quantity of asphalt concrete placed to accommodate the available rollers' speed. 3) Required rollers shall be at the Site, in acceptable operating condition, prior to placing of asphalt concrete. 4) Use of vibratory rollers in lieu of steel - wheeled rollers is acceptable, however when thickness of asphalt concrete is one -inch or less, rolling shall be in the static mode. b. Rolling of initially - placed asphalt concrete material, or breakdown rolling, shall begin as soon as the asphalt concrete mixture will bear the roller without undue displacement. c. Rolling shall be longitudinal, overlapping on successive trips by not less than one -half roller rear wheel width, and not more than three - quarters of roller rear wheel width. Alternate trips of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths. d. At all times, roller motion shall be slow enough to avoid displacing the asphalt concrete. e. Operate rollers continuously from breakdown of laid asphalt concrete through finish rolling. f. Perform finish rolling using a steel - wheeled roller or a vibratory steel - wheel roller operating in the static mode. g. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks. h. At each location not accessible to roller, thoroughly compact asphalt concrete with tampers and finish, where necessary, with a hot smoothing iron to provide uniform, smooth layer over the entire area so compacted. 5. Each compacted asphalt concrete course shall be within plus or minus 1/4- inch of the indicated thickness. 6. Placement of Adjacent Strips of New Asphalt Concrete: a. When more than one width of asphalt concrete material will be placed, a six -inch wide strip of asphalt concrete adjacent to the area on which the future material is to be placed shall not be rolled until such future material is placed. b. Do not leave the unrolled strip unrolled for more than two hours after placement, unless the six -inch unrolled strip is first heated with a joint heater. c. After the first strip or width of asphalt concrete is compacted, place, finish, and compact the second width or strip as required for the first 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -8 Bituminous Paving width, except that rolling shall be extended to include the six -inch strip of the first width not previously compacted. C. Construction Joints: 1. Construction joints shall be made in such a manner as to ensure a neat junction, thorough compaction, and bond throughout. 2. Provide a transverse joint extending over the full width of the strip being laid and at right angles to its centerline at end of each workday and at other times when the placement of hot -mix asphalt concrete will be suspended for a period of time that will allow asphalt concrete mixture to chill. 3. Thoroughly compact by rolling the forward end of a freshly laid strip of asphalt concrete before the asphalt concrete mixture becomes chilled. When the Work is resumed, the end shall be cut vertically for the full depth of the layer. D. Joining of Pavements: 1. When pavement is to join existing or previously -laid pavement, the existing or previously -laid pavement shall be neatly and carefully edged to allow for overlapping and feathering of the subsequent course of asphalt concrete material. 2. Where new pavement is to meet existing pavement, the existing pavement shall be sawcut and notched. 3. Where new pavement will meet existing asphalt pavement, remove existing pavement 12 inches onto undisturbed existing pavement course at edges where new pavement will meet existing pavement. 4. Tack Coat: a. Provide tack coat material at the following locations: 1) At edges where new pavement will connect to existing or previously - installed pavement. 2) On surface of existing or previously - installed pavement course over which new pavement will be installed, prior to placement of the subsequent pavement course. Tack coat may be deleted when a succeeding layer of asphalt pavement is being applied over a freshly - placed asphalt pavement course that has been subjected to very little or no traffic, with approval of CITY 3) Where new pavement will abut curbing, concrete gutters, drainage structures and frames, manhole cover frames, valve boxes, and similar items. b. Tack Coat Installation: Install tack coat immediately prior to installing pavement. Place pavement while tack coat is wet. Apply tack coat in accordance with reference specification indicated in Article 1.3 of this Section. E. Curing: 1. Do not allow traffic onto pavement until directed by CITY. Traffic will not be allowed on new asphalt concrete pavement until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -9 Bituminous Paving 2. Hold construction traffic on new pavement to a minimum as acceptable to CITY. F. Asphalt Concrete Curbs: Provide extruded asphalt curbs of the height and profile indicated on the Drawings. G. Defective Pavement Work: 1. When directed by CITY, remove and replace defective flexible paving Work. Cut out such areas of defective pavement and fill with fresh asphalt concrete materials, compacted to required density. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Responsibility: a. Field quality control testing laboratory will: 1) Perform field density tests to verify that required compaction of asphalt materials has been obtained. 2) Test the proposed materials for compliance with the Contract Documents, as directed by CITY. 3) Submit reports of all test results to CITY and CONTRACTOR. b. Authority Field Quality Control Testing Laboratory: 1) Technicians representing the testing laboratory will inspect materials at the Site and perform required testing. When the materials furnished or Work performed do not comply with the Contract Documents, field quality control testing laboratory technician shall direct the attention of CITY and CONTRACTOR to such non - compliance. 2) Testing laboratory personnel shall not act as foreman or perform other duties for CONTRACTOR. The Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect defective Work shall not in any way prevent the later rejection of such defective Work when defect is discovered. Failure to detect defective Work as it occurs does not obligate CITY to final acceptance. Testing laboratory personnel are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release requirements of the Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 2. Asphalt Concrete Mix Temperature: Measure temperature at time of placement, record, and submit to CITY. 3. Surface Smoothness: a. Test finished surface of each flexible paving course for smoothness, using a ten -foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas. b. Check surfaced areas at intervals as directed by CITY. c. Surfaces will be acceptable relative to smoothness when measurements are equal to or less than the following: 1) Base Course: 3/8 -inch vertical in ten feet horizontal. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -10 Bituminous Paving 2) Binder Course: 3/8 -inch vertical in ten feet horizontal. 3) Surface Course (Wearing Course): 1/4 -inch vertical in ten feet horizontal. 4) Crowned Surfaces: 5) Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right angles to the crown. 6) Surfaces will be acceptable when variance is equal to or less than 1/4 -inch from the template. d. Elevation: Finished surface of pavement shall be within plus or minus 1/2 -inch of elevations shown or indicated. 4. Density: a. Test Method: ASTM D2950; test one sample every 1,000 square yards of pavement. Test for each asphalt concrete course installed. b. In addition, when directed by CITY, compare density of in -place flexible paving materials against laboratory specimen or certificates on same asphalt pavement mixture, using nuclear density device. c. Criteria for Acceptance: Density of in -place asphalt pavement material shall be not less than 90 percent of the recorded laboratory specimen or certificate density. Density shall be not greater than 98 percent. 5. Repair holes from test specimens in accordance with this Section's requirements for repairing defective Work. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Frames and Covers: 1. Set frames of drainage structures, manholes, valve boxes, and similar items to final grade. Adjust frames of existing structures and frames furnished under other Sections. Frames shall be substantially similar elevation to finished surface course of pavement. 2. Replace covers and gratings of existing structures immediately following adjusting associated frames. Install covers and gratings of structures provided under the Project as quickly as possible. 3. Where there is a delay between adjusting of frames and installation of surface course, provide temporary bituminous material around perimeter of each frame to smooth vehicle access over the frame. Maintain and repair temporary bituminous material as required until placement of surface course. Remove temporary bituminous material before installing surface course. B. Pavement Adjustment: 1. Repair or replace in manner acceptable to CITY areas of pavement that are observed to pond or collect water. 3.6 CLEANING A. Cleaning: After completing the paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled bituminous materials, excess asphalt concrete, and foreign matter. 11- 0025 -UT 02742 -11 Bituminous Paving 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finished pavement until pavement has become properly hardened and cool. B. Cover openings of drainage structures, manholes, valve boxes, and similar items in the paved area until permanent coverings are provided. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 02742 -12 Bituminous Paving SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install concrete forming. The Work also includes: a. Designing forming systems in accordance with requirements of ACI 347 and the Contract Documents. b. Providing forming to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into forming items such as sleeves, anchorage devices, inserts, pipe embedments, reinforcing, and all other items to be embedded in concrete for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before concrete forming Work. 2. Coordinate forming Specifications with requirements for finished surfaces specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03251, Concrete Joints. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement 3. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 4. ASTM C805/C805M, Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. 5. ASTM C 1074, Practice for Estimating Concrete Strength by the Maturity Method. 6. NIST PS 1, Structural Plywood. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -1 Concrete Formwork 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: I. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or formwork Supplier shall retain a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in same state as the Site. Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing formwork and falsework of the type required. b. Responsibilities include: 1) Reviewing formwork and falsework performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to CITY by CONTRACTOR. 3) Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of formwork and falsework with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations. 5) Certifying that: a) Design of formwork and falsework was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and b) Design conforms to all Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. c) In place falsework, prior to concrete placement, complies with the intent of the forming design and complies with the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: a. Plywood form material used for smooth form finish, four inches square minimum. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: When requested by CITY, submit Shop Drawings showing and indicating general construction of individual forms, including: a. Jointing. b. Special formed joints or reveals. c. Location, pattern, and details of form tie placement, removal, and repair procedures. d. Location and details for temporary openings. e. Other items that would visually affect the finished concrete. 2. Design of Temporary Measures: Design of formwork and falsework is CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Submit the following: 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -2 Concrete Formwork a. Falsework layout drawings with the seal and signature of CONTRACTOR's or Supplier's professional engineer. Layout drawings shall show bracing details, waler arrangements, location of shores, joint forming details, and details at connections to previously placed concrete. CITY's review will be for general conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and ACI 347, as indicated for delegated design in the General Conditions. b. Design calculations for formwork and falsework, when requested by CITY. c. Certification letter from CONTRACTOR's or Supplier's professional engineer stating that in -place falsework was inspected and complies with the intent of the falsework design. 3. Product Data: Manufacturer's data for proprietary materials, including form coatings, manufactured form systems, ties and accessories. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Installation instructions for proprietary materials, including form coatings, manufactured form systems, ties and accessories. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: 1. Upon delivery to the Site, place materials in area protected from weather. 2. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Store materials above ground on framework or blocking. Cover wood for forms and other accessory materials with protective, waterproof covering. Provide for adequate air circulation or ventilation under cover. B. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. Do not damage materials during handling. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain forming in accordance with ACI 347 so that forming safely supports vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by forming system or in -place construction that has attained adequate strength for the purpose. Construct forming so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. 2. Design forms and falsework to include values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on forming, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -3 Concrete Formwork stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction. 3. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up forming settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks, or a combination thereof. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured. 4. Support form facing materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent beyond tolerance deflection, in accordance with ACI 117. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities and within allowable tolerances. For long -span members without intermediate supports, provide camber in forming as required for anticipated deflections resulting from weight and pressure of fresh concrete and construction loads. 5. Design and construct forming to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. 6. Provide forming sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placing. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. 2.2 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, construct forming for smooth concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood- faced, or other panel type materials acceptable to CITY, to provide continuous, straight, smooth as -cast surfaces with no wood grain or other surface texture imparted by forming. Provide in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown or specified in the Contract Documents. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Forms for Standard Finish Concrete: 1. Form concrete surfaces designated to have standard formed finish with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two edges and one side. C. Form Ties: 1. Provide factory- fabricated metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling of concrete surfaces upon removal. 2. Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, provide ties so that portion of tie remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts of tie is at least 1.5 inches from the outer concrete surface. Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, provide form ties that will leave a hole no larger than one -inch diameter in concrete surface. 3. Ties shall have waterstops on all exterior, below -grade walls, and walls subject to hydrostatic pressure. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -4 Concrete Formwork 4. Ties shall leave a uniform, circular hole when forms are removed. 5. Do not use removable ties unless accepted by CITY. Removable ties are not allowed on exterior below -grade walls or walls subject to hydrostatic pressure. If removable ties are accepted, CONTRACTOR shall submit hole repair details for CITY approval. 6. Wire ties are not allowed. 7. Do not use reinforcing bars shown by the Drawings as part of the form tie system unless approved by CITY. D. Form Coatings: 1. Provide commercial formulation form- coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. For concrete surfaces that will be in contact with potable water or water that will be treated to become potable, form coating shall be a mineral oil base coating. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Construct forms in accordance with ACI 347; to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown; as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, and grades; to tolerances specified; and to obtain level and plumb work in finish structures. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Finish shall be in accordance with approved mock -up or sample panel, when specified. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Construct forming to provide completed concrete surfaces complying with tolerances specified in ACI 117, ACI 301, and ACI 347. a. Architectural finish forming, and where shown or indicated on the Drawings, shall be Class A surface, 1/8 -inch offset. b. Other surfaces exposed to view shall be Class B surface, 1/4 -inch offset. c. Other surfaces shall be Class C surface, 1/2 -inch offset. 2. Tolerances apply to form offsets and to irregularities within the formed surface when measured with a straightedge over a five -foot distance. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -5 Concrete Formwork C. Install forming and accessories for facilities in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Laws and Regulations, and the Contract Documents. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without damaging concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of forming is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placing concrete. Brace temporary closures and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of cement paste. Locate temporary openings on forms in locations as inconspicuous as possible, consistent with requirements of the Work. Form intersecting planes of openings to provide true, clean -cut corners, with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete. F. Falsework: 1. Erect falsework and support, brace, and maintain falsework to safely support vertical, lateral, and asymmetrical loads applied until such Loads can be supported by in -place concrete structures. Construct falsework so that adjustments can be made for take -up and settlement. 2. Provide wedges, jacks or camber strips to facilitate vertical adjustments. Carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement operations to determine abnormal deflection or signs of failure; make necessary adjustments to produce finished Work of required dimensions. G. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Do not use metal cover plates for patching holes or defects in forms. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Use extra studs, walers, and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material that will produce bow. 4. Assemble forms so they may be readily removed without damage to exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Form molding shapes, recesses, rustication joints and projections with smooth - finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. H. Corner Treatment: 1. Form exposed corners of beams, walls, foundations, bases and columns to produce smooth, solid, unbroken lines, except as otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. Chamfer exposed comers. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -6 Concrete Formwork 2. Form chamfers with 3/4 -inch by 3/4 -inch strips, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edge joints. Use rigid PVC chamfers for architecturally formed concrete. Extend terminal edges to required limit and miter chamfer strips at changes,in direction. 3. Reentrant or internal and unexposed corners may be formed either square or chamfered. I. Joints: 1. For joint treatment, comply with Section 03251 Concrete Joints . Locate joints as shown and specified. J. Openings and Built -In Work: 1. Provide openings in concrete forming shown or required under other Sections. Refer to Paragraph 1.1.B of this Section for coordination requirements. 2. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into forms. K. Sealing Forming: 1. Forming joints shall be tight - fitting or otherwise sealed to prevent loss of cement paste. 2. Provide forming resting against concrete surfaces with compressible gasket material between the concrete and edge of form, to fill irregularities and create tight seal. L. Cleaning and Tightening: 1. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms immediately after placing concrete, as required to eliminate cement paste leaks. M. Tie Hole Repair: 1. Repair tie holes in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3.3 FORM COATINGS A. Coat form contact surfaces with non - staining form- coating compound before installing reinforcing materials. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with surfaces that will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coat steel forms with non - staining, rust - preventative form oil, or otherwise protect against rusting. Do not use rust - stained steel forming. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -7 Concrete Formwork 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Set and build into forming anchorage devices and other embedded items, shown, specified, or required under other Sections. Refer to Paragraph 1.1.B of this Section for coordination requirements. Use necessary setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions. B. Edge Forms and Screeds Strips for Slabs: 1. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units to support screeds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Before placing concrete, check ties, tie cones, tie waterstops, embedded items, form coatings, forming stability, alignment, and tolerances. Make corrections and adjustments to ensure forming complies with intent of the forming design, proper stability of forming systems, and accurate size and location of concrete members. 2. During concrete placing, check forming and related supports to ensure that forms are not displaced and that completed Work will be within specified tolerances. 3. If forms are unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during concrete placing, stop or postpone placing of concrete until defects are corrected as required by CONTRACTOR's or Supplier's professional engineer and accepted by CITY. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Determination of time between placing concrete and removing forms is CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Requirements specified in this Section are minimum times and requirements intended to ensure that concrete will support its own weight, and do not consider additional effects of the construction. Additional effects of the construction shall be accounted for by CONTRACTOR when determining time for removing forming. Time for removing of forms is subject to CITY' s acceptance. B. Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 347, except as indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Removal of Forms for Walls, Columns, Sides of Beams and Girders, and Slab and Foundation Edges: 1. Comply with requirements of Table 03100 -A of this Section: 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -8 Concrete Formwork 1 1 1 t 1 TABLE 03100 -A, REMOVAL OF FORMS Component Average Daily Ambient Air Temperature (deg F) Min. Concrete Compressive Strength for Form Removal Over 70 F 60 F to 70 F 50 F to 60 F Below 50 F Walls One day Two days Three days See Para- 3.8.C.2 of this Section 750 psi Columns Two days Three days Four days 1000 psi Side of beams and girders One day One day Two days 500 500 psi Slab and foundation edges One day One day Two days 500 psi 2. When average daily ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees F, do not remove forms until concrete attains minimum compressive strength indicated in Table 03100 -A for form removal, and comply with Paragraph 3.8.C.3.b of this Section. 3. Concrete Strength Requirements for Form Removal: a. For other than beams and elevated slabs, do not remove forms until concrete attains minimum concrete compressive strength indicated in Table 03100 -A for form removal. b. For beams and elevated slabs, do not remove supporting forms or shoring until concrete attains minimum of 90 percent of its specified compressive strength. D. Alternative Criteria for Removing Forms for Walls, Columns, Sides of Beams and Girders, and Slab and Foundation Edges: CONTRACTOR has the option of submitting an alternative removal of forms table, together with supporting data, for CITY's acceptance. Supporting data shall include representative field data for each different placement ambient temperature condition and minimum of three tests per temperature condition to ensure that accurate correlation between concrete strength and placement temperature is obtained. E. Determination of In -place Concrete Strength: 1. Determine compressive strength of in -place concrete by compression test specimens cured at the Site under the same conditions of temperature and moisture as the concrete member under consideration. 2. Alternately, determine compressive strength of in -place concrete by maturity factor procedure in accordance with ASTM C 1074 and approved by CITY. Location of embedded thermistors or thermocouples shall be as approved by CITY. F. When high -early strength concrete is used, time for removing the forms will be developed at the Site from the age /strength relationships established for the materials and proportions used by tests in accordance with ACI 301. G. Continue curing, including bottom surfaces of slabs and beams, after form removal in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 11- 0025 -UT 03100 -9 Concrete Formwork 3.7 PERMANENT SHORES A. Provide permanent shores in accordance with ACI 347. B. Reshores are not allowed. 3.8 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the construction. Do not use split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material. Apply form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for forming. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces. Form surfaces are subject to CITY's approval. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 03100 -10 Concrete Formwork SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install concrete reinforcing. 2. Extent of concrete reinforcing is shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Work includes fabrication and placement of reinforcing including bars, ties, and supports, and welded wire fabric for concrete, encasements, and fireproofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03251, Concrete Joints. 2. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 4. ANSI/AWS D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 5. ASTM A82, Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A185, Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 7. ASTM A615, Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A706, Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and /or Testing. 10. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), CRSI 1 MSP, Manual of Standard Practice. 11. ICC Evaluation Service (ES) AC 308, Acceptance Criteria for Post - Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements. 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -1 Concrete Reinforcement 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory: Shall meet requirements of ASTM E329 and shall have experience in the testing welded splices of reinforcing steel and tension testing of reinforcing bars set in adhesive in hardened concrete. 2. Installer of Adhesive Dowels: Shall be experienced and certified by manufacturer of adhesive as possessing necessary training for installing manufacturer's products. Distributors or manufacturer's representatives shall not provide product training unless qualified as certified trainers by anchor manufacturer. B. Certifications: 1. Weld Procedures: For types of splices and grades of reinforcing used in the Work, weld procedures for welded reinforcing steel splices shall be certified in accordance with ANSI /AWS D1.4. 2. Welders: For types of splices and grades of reinforcing used in the Work, welders shall be certified for welding reinforcing steel splices in accordance with ANSI /AWS D1.4. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings for fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcing. Comply with ACI 315, Parts A and B. b. For walls, show elevations at minimum scale of 1/4 -inch to one foot. 1) Elevations shall show all openings and reference details that identify additional reinforcing required around each opening. 2) Elevations shall denote each wall intersection and reference a detail that identifies additional reinforcing required at wall intersection. As an alternate to providing separate details for each wall intersection, provide overall plan detailing only the additional wall intersection reinforcing for each wall intersection. c. For slabs and mats, show top and bottom reinforcing on separate plan views. 1) Plans shall show all openings and shall reference details that identify additional reinforcing around each opening. d. Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, location of bar splices, length of lap splices, arrangements, and assemblies, as required for fabricating and placing concrete reinforcing unless otherwise noted. e. Provide plans and elevations detailing location, spacing, and lengths of masonry wall dowels, where masonry is required. Coordinate location of dowels with masonry openings and with standard modular spacing. Submit masonry wall dowels with reinforcing submittal for element 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -2 Concrete Reinforcement into which masonry dowel will be embedded. Coordinate with Section 04005, Masonry. f. Splices shall be kept to a minimum. Avoid, when possible, splices in regions of maximum tensile stresses. g. Drawings detailing location of all construction and expansion joints, as required under Section 03251, Concrete Joints, shall be submitted and approved before Shop Drawings for reinforcing are submitted. h. Drawings detailing location, spacing, edge distance, and embedment depth of adhesive dowels. Adhesive system shall be submitted and approved before Shop Drawings with adhesive dowels are submitted. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's product data for adhesive, if not submitted under other Sections. b. Adhesive manufacturer's test data and ICC ES report to verify specified capacity of adhesive dowels. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Steel manufacturer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile, and bend tests for reinforcing steel. b. Certification of welders and weld procedures for splices. c. Adhesive manufacturer's certification verifying that installer is qualified and using proper installation procedures. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Installation instructions for adhesive systems. 3. Special Procedure Submittals; Description of reinforcing weld locations and weld procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Deliver concrete reinforcing products to Site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings on approved Shop Drawings. B. Store concrete reinforcing products to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. Store on heavy wood blocking so that reinforcing does not come into contact with the ground. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Shall be deformed in accordance with ASTM A615, and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60 for all bars, unless indicated otherwise. 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -3 Concrete Reinforcement 2. At beams and columns forming frames and wall boundary elements, where shown on the Drawings, provide ASTM A706 or ASTM A615, Grade 60, with tested actual maximum yield stress of 78,000 psi and ratio of actual tested tensile strength to tested yield strength not less than 1.25. B. Steel Wire: Shall be in accordance with ASTM A82. C. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Shall be in accordance with ASTM A185. 1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls. D. Column Spirals: Hot - rolled rods for spirals, conforming to ASTM A615. E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI 1 MSP recommendations, except as specified in this Section. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials. 2. For slabs on grade, use precast concrete blocks, four inches square in plan, with embedded tie wire as specified by CRSI 1 MSP. Precast concrete blocks shall have same or higher compressive strength as specified for concrete in which they are located. 3. For concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports complying with CRSI 1 MSP as follows: a. At formed surfaces in contact with soil, weather, or liquid, or located above liquid, supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection. Plastic coating on legs shall extend at least 0.5 -inch upward from form surface. b. At interior dry surfaces (not located above liquid), supports shall be either Class I or Class 2 for moderate protection. 4. Over waterproof membranes, use precast concrete chairs. F. Adhesive Dowels: 1. Dowels: a. Dowel reinforcing bars shall be deformed in accordance with ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Adhesive: a. Requirements for adhesive are specified under requirements for concrete adhesive anchors in Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI 1 MSP. In case of fabricating errors, do not re -bend or straighten reinforcing in manner that injures or weakens material. 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -4 Concrete Reinforcement B. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcing with one or more of the following defects is not allowed: 1. Bar lengths, bends, and other dimensions exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not shown on approved Shop Drawings. 3. Bars that do not meet or exceed their ASTM specification requirements when hand - wire - brushed, with respect to cross section, nominal weight, or average height of deformations. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which concrete reinforcing is to be placed and notify CITY in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable recommendations of Laws and Regulations, applicable standards, and CRSI 1 MSP for details and methods of reinforcing placement and supports. B. Clean reinforcing to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displacement during formwork construction and concrete placing. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. 1. Place reinforcing to obtain minimum concrete coverages specified in ACI 318, AC I 350, and the Contract Documents. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with 16 -gage wire to hold reinforcing accurately in position during concrete placing. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 2. Prior to placing concrete, using surveyor's level or string line, demonstrate to CITY that specified cover of reinforcing has been attained. 3. Do not secure reinforcing steel to forms with wire, nails, or other ferrous metal. Metal supports subject to corrosion shall not touch formed or exposed concrete surfaces. D. Allowable Placing Tolerances: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 - Details of Reinforcement, and ACI 350, Chapter 7 - Details of Reinforcement, except as specified in this Section: 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -5 Concrete Reinforcement 1. Concrete surfaces in contact with liquid shall have minimum of two inches of concrete over reinforcing steel. E. Provide sufficient number of supports of strength required to carry reinforcing. Do not place reinforcing bars more than two inches beyond last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Lap Splices: 1. Provide standard reinforcing splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tying tightly with wire. Comply with requirements shown for minimum lap of spliced bars as shown on the Drawings. G. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practical. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with 16 -gage wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. H. Adhesive Dowels: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements of this Section. 2. Drill holes to adhesive system manufacturer's recommended drill bit diameter and to specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide- tipped drill bits complying with tolerances indicated in ANSI B212.15. Core - drilled holes shall not be permitted. 3. Before setting adhesive dowel, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by adhesive system manufacturer. Brush the hole with adhesive system manufacturer - approved brush and blow hole clean with clean, dry, oil -free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. Hole shall be dry as defined by adhesive system manufacturer. 4. Before injecting adhesive, obtain CITY's concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 5. Prior to injecting adhesive into the drilled hole, dispense to an appropriate location for waste an initial amount of adhesive from the mixing nozzle until adhesive is a uniform color, indicating that product is properly mixed. 6. Inject adhesive into hole through injection system- mixing nozzle and extension tubes (as required) placed to bottom of hole. Withdraw nozzle's discharge end as adhesive is placed while keeping nozzle immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. Fill hole to depth that ensures that excess material is expelled from hole during dowel placing. 7. Twist dowel during insertion into partially - filled hole to ensure full wetting of rod surface with adhesive. Insert rod slowly to avoid developing air pockets. 8. Provide adequate curing in accordance to adhesive system manufacturer's requirements prior to continuing with adjoining or adjacent Work that could 11- 0025 -UT 03200 -6 Concrete Reinforcement impose or impart load on the dowels. Do not begin adjoining or adjacent Work until dowels are successfully tested or when approved by CITY. 9. Limitations: a. Installation Temperature: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation temperature requirements. Provide temporary protection and other measures, such as heated enclosures, necessary to ensure that base material temperature complies with requirements of adhesive systems manufacturer during installation and adhesive system curing. b. Oversized Holes: Advise CITY immediately if size of drilled hole is larger than recommended by adhesive system manufacturer. Cost of corrective measures, including but not limited to redesign of dowels due to decreased capacities, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Inspections and Tests: 1. General: a. Do not place concrete until reinforcing is inspected, and permission for placing concrete is granted by CITY. Concrete placed in violation of this provision will be rejected. b. Do not close up formwork for walls and other vertical members until reinforcing is inspected, and permission for placing concrete is granted by CITY. Concrete placed in violation of this provision will be rejected. c. Correct defective Work by removing and replacing or correcting, as required by CITY. d. CONTRACTOR shall pay cost of corrections and subsequent testing required to confirm integrity of post - installed anchors. e. Testing laboratory shall submit test results to CONTRACTOR and CITY within 24 hours of completion of test. 2. Site Tests: a. CONTRACTOR shall employ independent testing laboratory to perform field quality testing of adhesive dowels at the Site. 1) Testing shall comply with ASTM E488. 2) Test at least ten percent of each type of adhesive dowel. If one or more dowels fail the test, CONTRACTOR shall pay cost to test all dowels of same diameter and type installed on the same day as the failed dowel. 3) Test dowels to 60 percent of specified yield strength. CITY will direct which dowels are to be tested. 4) Apply test loads with hydraulic ram. 5) Displacement of dowels shall not exceed D /10, where D is nominal diameter of dowel. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 03200 -7 Concrete Reinforcement 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 03200 -8 Concrete Reinforcement SECTION 03251 CONCRETE JOINTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install concrete accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 301, Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM D1752, Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 3. CRD -0572, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinyl - Chloride Waterstop. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Layout of construction and expansion joint locations. Submit and obtain approval prior to submitting concrete reinforcement Shop Drawings. b. For construction and expansion joints that require waterstops, submit layout of locations showing waterstop details. Indicate waterstop type, waterstop joint conditions, and details on how joint conditions will be handled. c. Detail for joining PVC to steel waterstops. d. Layout of all control joint locations. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials required. 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -1 Concrete Joints 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transportation and Handling of Products: 1. Deliver materials to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Comply with Section 01651, Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store concrete joint materials on platforms or in enclosures or covered to prevent contact with ground and exposure to weather and direct sunlight. Comply with manufacturer's storage and protection requirements. 2. Comply with Section 01661, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. Provide preformed expansion joint filler complying with ASTM DI752, Type I (sponge rubber) or Type II (cork). 2.2 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINT ROUGHENER A. Provide water - soluble non - flammable, surface - retardant roughener. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for the types of joints specified: 1. Rugasol -S, by Sika Corporation for horizontal joints only. 2. Concrete Surface Retarder - Formula S, by Euclid Chemical Company, for horizontal joints only. 3. Concrete Surface Retarder - Formula F, by Euclid Chemical Company, for vertical joints only. 4. TK -6100 Concrete Form Surface Retarder, by TK Products. 5. Or equal. 2.3 EPDXY BONDING AGENT A. Provide a two - component epoxy -resin bonding agent. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod LPL, by Sika Corporation. 2. Eucopoxy LPL, by the Euclid Chemical Company. 3. Resi -Bond J -58, by Dayton Superior. 4. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -2 Concrete Joints 2.4 EPDXY - CEMENT BONDING AGENT A. Provide three component epoxy resin - cement blended formulated as bonding agent. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2. Duralprep A.C., as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. 3. Emaco P24, as manufactured by MBT /ChemRex. 4. Or equal. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT AND ACCESSORIES A. Exterior and Interior Vertical Joints; non - submerged: 1. Two - Component Urethane Sealant: a. Urethane - based, two -part elastomeric sealant complying with the following: 1) FS TT- S- 00227E: Type II (non -sag) Class A. 2) Adhesion -in -Peel, FS TT -S- 00227E and ASTM C 794: (Minimum 5 lbs. /linear inch with no adhesion failure): 28 lbs. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C 661: 15 to 50 (Shore A). 4) Stain and color change, FS TT -S- 00227E and ASTM C 510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C 793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6) Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 °F, FS TT- S- 00227E: No sag. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sonolastic NP 2 Sealant by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of Chemrex, Inc. 2) Dymeric by Tremco. 3) Or equal. B. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Joints; non - submerged: I. Two - Component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Polyurethane- based, two -part elastomeric sealant complying with the following: 1) FS TT- S- 00227E, Type I (self - leveling) Class A. 2) Water Immersion Bond, FS TT- S- 00227E: Elongation of 25 percent with no adhesive failure. 3) Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C 661: 35 to 45. 4) Stain and Color Change, FS TT -S- 00227E and ASTM C 510: No discoloration or stain. 5) Accelerated Aging, ASTM C 793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -3 Concrete Joints b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Sonolastic SL2 Sealant by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of Chemrex, Inc. 2) THC /900 by Tremco. 3) Or equal. C. Provide colors selected by CITY from calking and sealant manufacturer's standard and custom color charts. "Or equal" manufacturers shall provide the same generic products and colors as available from manufacturers specified. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by the calking and sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint Primer and Sealer: As recommended by the calking and sealant manufacturer. 3. Bond Breaker Type: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the calking and sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant - contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of calking and sealant. Provide self - adhesive tape, wherever applicable. 2.6 CONCRETE BOND BREAKERS A. Provide asphalt- saturated rag felt building paper, not less in weight than commercially known as 15 pound felt building paper, which weighs 15 pounds per 100 square feet. B. Chemical Bond Breaker: 1. Provide medium solids resin solution chemical concrete bond breaker complying with ASTM C309, Type I, Class B. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and installing Subcontractor, if any, shall examine substrate and conditions under which the Work is to be performed and notify CITY in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and the Contract Documents. B. Locate and install construction joints as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Where not shown or indicated, locate joints to not impair strength of the structure; position joints at points of minimum shear. Location of joints shall be approved 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -4 Concrete Joints by CITY. In addition to joints shown or indicated on the Drawings, locate construction joints as follows: 1. In foundation mats, locate joints at spacing of approximately 40 feet. Joints shall be located within middle third of element span, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. Element span shall be considered distance between piles or, as determined by CITY, distance between bearing elements, such as columns, exterior walls and interior walls. Place concrete in strip pattern, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. In walls, locate joints at a maximum spacing of 40 feet. Locate joints away from wall intersections a minimum of one - quarter of the clear span distance between wall intersections measured horizontally. 3. In structural slabs and beams, joints shall be located within middle third of element span and shall be located in compliance with ACI 301, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 4. In slabs on grade, locate joints at spacing of approximately 40 feet. Place concrete in strip pattern, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. C. Horizontal Joints: 1. Roughen concrete at interface of construction joints by abrasive blasting, hydroblasting, or using surface retardants and water jets to expose aggregate and remove accumulated concrete on projecting rebar immediately subsequent to form stripping, unless otherwise approved by CITY. Immediately before placing fresh concrete, thoroughly clean existing contact surface using stiff brush or other tools and stream of pressurized water. Surface shall be clean and wet, and free from pools of water at time of placing fresh concrete. 2. Remove laitance, waste mortar, and other substances that may prevent complete adhesion. Where joint roughening was performed more than seven days prior to concrete placing or where dirt or other bond reducing contaminants are on surface, perform additional light abrasive blasting or hydroblasting to remove laitance and all bond - reducing materials just prior to concrete placement. 3. Provide over contact surface of concrete a six -inch layer of Construction Joint Grout as specified in Section 03600, Grouting. Place fresh concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Placement of grout may be omitted if concrete mix has slump increased to at least six inches by addition of high range water reducer. D. Vertical Joints: 1. Apply roughener to the form in thin, even film by brush, spray, or roller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After roughener is dry, concrete may be placed. 2. When concrete has been placed, remove joint surface forms as early as necessary to allow for removal of surface retarded concrete. Forms covering member surfaces shall remain in place as required under Section 03100, Concrete Forming. Wash loosened material off with high- pressure 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -5 Concrete Joints water spray to obtain roughened surface subject to approval by CITY. Alternately, surface shall be roughened by abrasive blasting or hydroblasting to expose aggregate. Outer one -inch of each side of joint face shall be masked and protected from blasting to avoid damaging member surface. 3.3 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints in non -water bearing slabs on grade as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Where control joints are not shown or indicated on the Drawings, space control joints at 24 to 36 times thickness of slab in both directions. Locate control joints only at places approved by CITY. B. A groove, with depth of at least 25 percent of the member thickness, shall be tooled, formed, or saw -cut in concrete. Groove shall be filled with joint sealant material in accordance with this Section. C. Where control joint is formed by sawcutting, make sawcut in presence of CITY immediately after concrete has set sufficiently to support the saw and be cut without damage to concrete. Keep concrete continually moist during cutting. Joints shall be approximately 1/8 -inch wide. D. Control joints may be formed with tool or by inserting joint forming strip. After concrete has achieved design strength, remove upper portion of joint forming strip and fill void with sealant. 3.4 ISOLATION JOINTS A. Provide isolation joint where sidewalk or other slab on grade abuts a concrete structure and slab on grade is not shown doweled into that structure. Form isolation joint by 1/2 -inch joint filler with upper 1/2 -inch of joint filled with sealant. 3.5 BONDING AGENT A. Use epoxy bonding agent for bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has been in place for at least 60 days, and for bonding to existing concrete. B. Use epoxy- cement bonding agent for the following: 1. Bonding toppings and concrete fill to concrete that has been in place for at least 60 days, and for bonding to existing concrete. 2. For locations where bonding agent is required and concrete cannot be placed within open time period of epoxy bonding agent. C. Use cement -water slurry as bonding agent for toppings and concrete fill to new concrete. Cement water slurry shall be worked into surface with stiff bristle broom and place the concrete before cement -water slurry dries. 11- 0025 -UT 03251 -6 Concrete Joints D. Handle and store bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and safety precautions. E. Mix bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Before placing fresh concrete, thoroughly roughen and clean hardened concrete surfaces and coat with bonding agent not less than 1/16 -inch thick. Place fresh concrete while bonding agent is still tacky (within its open time), without removing in -place bonding agent coat, and as directed by manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 03251 -7 Concrete Joints 11 -0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 03251 -8 Concrete Joints SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install cast -in -place concrete. 2. The Work includes providing concrete consisting of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregate, water, and approved admixtures; combined, mixed, transported, placed, finished, and cured. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in concrete to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections, and building into the concrete all items such as sleeves, frames, anchorage devices, inserts, and all other items to be embedded in concrete Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed in the concrete Work. C. Classifications of Concrete: 1. Class "A" concrete shall be steel- reinforced and includes the following: a. All concrete, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Class "B" concrete shall be placed without forms or with simple forms, with little or no reinforcing, and includes the following, unless otherwise shown or indicated: a. Duct banks. b. Unreinforced encasements. c. Curbs and gutters. d. Sidewalks. e. Thrust blocks. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 03251, Concrete Joints 2. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 3. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AASHTO M 182, Specification for Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Materials. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -1 Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. AASHTO TP23, Test Method for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying. 3. ACI 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary. 4. ACI 214R, Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 5. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. 6. ACI 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 7. ACI 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 8. ACI 305R, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 9. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. 10. ACI 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 11. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 12. ACI 350/350R, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 13. ASTM C31 /C31M, Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 14. ASTM C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 15. ASTM C39/C39M, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Con -crete Specimens. 16. ASTM C42/C42M, Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 17. ASTM C94/C94M, Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 18. ASTM C109/C109M, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or [50 -mm] Cube Specimens). 19. ASTM C138/C138M, Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 20. ASTM C 143/C 143M, Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 21. ASTM C150, Specification for Portland Cement. 22. ASTM C 157/C 157M, Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic- Cement Mortar and Concrete. 23. ASTM C171, Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 24. ASTM C172, Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 25. ASTM C231, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 26. ASTM C260, Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 27. ASTM C309, Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 28. ASTM C330, Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 29. ASTM C494/C494M, Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 30. ASTM C618, Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 31. ASTM C882/C882M, Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -2 Cast -in -Place Concrete 32. ASTM C989, Specification for Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 33. ASTM C 1064/C 1064M, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 34. ASTM C1077, Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 35. ASTM C1240, Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. 36. ASTM D1042, Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Plastics Under Accelerated Service Conditions. 37. ASTM D3574, Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials — Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams. 38. ASTM E96/E96M, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 39. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 40. ASTM E1643, Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 41. ASTM E1745, Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 42. NSF /ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Concrete Testing Laboratory: a. Employ independent testing laboratory experienced in design and testing of concrete materials and mixes to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. Employ different laboratories for design of concrete mixes and field testing. 1) Testing agency shall be in accordance with ASTM E329 and ASTM C1077. 2) Testing laboratory shall have been inspected and passed within previous two years by Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) of NIST for: testing concrete aggregates, and for preparing and testing concrete trial batches with or without admixtures. Testing laboratory shall provide documentation indicating how deficiencies, if any, in most recent CCRL inspection report were corrected. 3) Selection of testing laboratory is subject to COUNTY's acceptance. 4) Submit written description of proposed concrete testing laboratory giving qualifications of personnel, laboratory facilities, and equipment, and other information requested by CITY. 2. Water Reducing Admixture Manufacturer: a. Water- reducing admixtures shall be manufactured under strict quality control in facilities operated under a quality assurance program. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -3 Cast -in -Place Concrete Submit copy of manufacturer's quality assurance handbook to document program existence. b. Manufacturer shall maintain a concrete testing laboratory approved by CCRL at NIST. c. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing services of qualified field service representatives at the Site. B. Laboratory Trial Batch: 1. Each concrete mix design specified shall be verified by laboratory trial batch, unless indicated otherwise. 2. For classes of concrete that require air - entrainment, test the trial batch at highest percentage of air allowed for that class of concrete. 3. Perform the following testing on each trial batch: a. Aggregate gradation for fine and coarse aggregates. b. Fly ash testing to verify meeting specified properties, unless fly ash Supplier submits certification by an independent testing laboratory. c. Slump. d. Air content. e. Compressive strength based on three cylinders each tested at seven days and at 28 days. f. Shrinkage test in accordance with this Section, for Class "A" concrete. 4. Submit for each trial batch the following information: a. Project identification name and number (if applicable). b. Date of test report. c. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. d. Tests of aggregates for compliance with the Contract Documents. e. Scale weight of each aggregate. f. Absorbed water in each aggregate. g. Brand, type, and composition of cementitious materials. h. Brand, type, and amount of each admixture. i. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. j. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. k. Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures. 1. Measured slump. m. Measured air content. n. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days, from not less than three test cylinders cast for each seven day and 28 day test, and for each design mix. o. Shrinkage test results where required and as specified in this Section. Report results and averages for original length and at zero, seven, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying. C. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide all admixture materials from a single manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -4 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. List of concrete materials and proportions for the proposed concrete mix designs. Include data sheets, test results, certifications, and mill reports to qualify the materials proposed for use in the mix designs. Do not start laboratory trial batch testing until this submittal is approved by CITY. b. Laboratory Trial Batch Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete cylinders, materials, and mix design tests. c. Ready -mixed Concrete: Submit the following information. 1) Physical capacity of mixing plant. 2) Trucking facilities available. 3) Estimated average amount of the specified concrete that can be produced and delivered to the Site during a normal, eight -hour day, excluding output to other customers. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturers' specifications with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures and bonding agents. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: a. Notarized certification of conformance to reference standards used in this Section, when required by CITY. 2. Delivery Tickets: Copies of all delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to or mixed at the Site. Each delivery tickets shall contain the information in accordance with ASTM C94 along with project identification name and number (if any), date, mix type, mix time, quantity and amount of water introduced. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transportation, Delivery, and Handling: 1. Materials used for concrete shall be clean and free from foreign matter during transportation and handling, and kept separate until measured and placed into concrete mixer. 2. Implement suitable measures during hauling, piling, and handling to ensure that segregation of coarse and fine aggregate particles does not occur and grading is not affected. B. Storage: 1. For storage, provide bins or platforms with hard, clean surfaces. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -5 Cast -in -Place Concrete PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Portland cement shall be Type I ASTM C 150. 2. Portland cement shall be produced by one facility. Alternate cement sources may be used provided that mix design has been approved and acceptable trial batch verifying performance has been made. 3. Do not use cement that has deteriorated because of improper storage or handling. B. Fly Ash Mineral Admixture: 1. Mineral admixtures, when used, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618 Class F, except as follows: a. The loss on ignition shall be a maximum of four percent. b. The maximum percent of sulfur trioxide (SO3) shall be 4.0. 2. Fly ash shall be considered to be a cementitious material. 3. Laboratory trial batches shall be tested to determine compliance with strength requirements, times of setting, slump, slump loss, and shrinkage characteristics. 2.2 AGGREGATES A. General: 1. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33, Class Designation 4S, and as specified in this Section. 2. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances, such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials, that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Provide clean, sharp, natural silica sand free of loam, clay, lumps, and other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank run sand, and manufactured sand are unacceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: 1. Provide clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Slag, pit gravel, and bank run gravel are unacceptable. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -6 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.3 WATER A. Water used in producing and curing concrete shall be clean and free of injurious quantities of oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials, and other substances that may be deleterious to concrete and steel. 2.4 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES A. Provide admixtures in accordance with product manufacturer's published instructions. Admixtures shall be compatible with each other. Admixtures shall not contain thiocyanates, shall not contain more than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non -toxic in the concrete mix after 30 days. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless otherwise approved by CITY. B. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 1. Air entraining admixture shall be vinsol resin or vinsol rosin - based. C. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. 1. Proportion Class "A ", Class "AF ", , and Class "B" concrete with non -air entraining, normal setting, water - reducing, aqueous solution of modified organic polymer. Admixture shall not contain lignin, nitrates, or chlorides added during manufacturing. D. High Range Water- Reducing Admixture (HRWR): ASTM C494, Type F /G. 1. Use high range water - reducing admixture in the concrete classifications so specified or indicated. Use of HRWR admixture is allowed at CONTRACTOR's option in all other classifications of concrete. When used, HRWR admixture shall be added to concrete in accordance with admixture manufacturer's published instructions. Specific admixture formulation shall be as recommended by admixture manufacturer for Project conditions. E. Set Control Admixtures: In accordance with ASTM C494. Use the following as required: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water reducing and Accelerating. 5. Type F, Water- reducing, high range admixtures. 6. Type G, Water- reducing, high range, and retarding admixtures. F. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride. G. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: 1. Shrinkage reducing admixture may be used in mix design when necessary to conform to specified shrinkage limitations, provided that specified strength 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -7 Cast -in -Place Concrete requirements are complied with and there is no reduction in sulfate resistance in the concrete and no increase in concrete permeability. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare concrete design mixes in accordance with Table 03300 -A: TABLE 03300 -A CONCRETE DESIGN MIX CRITERIA Concrete Class Coarse Aggregate) Minimum Max. W /CM(4) Slump(2) Air ( %) Min. Comp Strength(3) (psi) Size A Size B Cementitious (lbs /cu yd) Class "A" No. 57 No. 8 564 0.45 4" max. 6 +/- 1 4,000 Class "B" No. 57 or No. 67 517 0.50 4" max. 6 +/- 1 3,000 Notes Applicable to Table 03300 -A: 1. Coarse aggregate size numbers refer to ASTM C33. Where Size A and B are designated in Table 03300 -A, it is intended that the smaller Size B aggregate is to be added, replacing a portion of the coarse or fine aggregate, in the minimum amount necessary to make a workable and pumpable mix with sand content not exceeding 41 percent of total aggregate. 2. Slumps indicated are prior to addition of high range water reducer (super plasticizer). 3. Quantity of water to be used in the determination of water - cementitious materials (W /CM) ratio shall include free water on aggregates in excess of SSD and water portion of admixtures. B. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by CONTRACTOR when characteristics of materials, Site conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to COUNTY and as approved by CITY. Before using adjusted concrete mixes, laboratory test data and strength results shall be submitted to and approved by CITY. C. Admixtures: 1. Use air - entraining admixture in concrete, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at admixture manufacturer's prescribed rate to produce concrete at point of placement having air content within prescribed limits. 2. Use water - reducing or high -range water - reducing admixtures in all Class "A" concrete. 3. Use amounts of admixtures recommended by admixture manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the Site at time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -8 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 D. Slump Limits with High -Range Water Reducer: 1 Slump shall not exceed four inches prior to adding high -range water reducer and shall not exceed eight inches, measured at point of placement, after adding high -range water reducer. 2.6 BONDING AGENT A. Provide epoxy and epoxy- cement bonding agents in accordance with Section 03251, Concrete Joints. 2.7 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 10 ounces per square yard and complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 3. B. Curing Mats: Shall be heavy carpets or cotton mats, quilted at four inches on centers, and weighing minimum of 12 ounces per square yard when dry. C. Moisture - Retaining Cover: Provide one of the following, complying with ASTM C171: 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap polyethylene sheet. D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1 -D (water retention requirements): 1. Provide fugitive dye. 2. Curing compound shall be applied by roller or power sprayer. 2.8 FINISHING AIDS A. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Confilm, by Master Builders. b. Eucobar, by Euclid Chemical Company. c. SikaFilm, by Sika Corporation. d. Or equal. 2.9 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS A. Structural Crack Repair System: 1. Epoxy for Injection: Low- viscosity, high - modulus moisture insensitive type. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel, by Sika Corporation. b. Eucopoxy Injection Resin, by Euclid Chemical Company. c. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -9 Cast -in -Place Concrete 2.10 CONCRETE REPAIR MATERIALS A. Concrete repair mortar shall be pre - packaged, polymer - modified cementitious repair mortar with the following minimum properties: 1. Compressive Strength at One Day: 2,000 psi (ASTM C109). 2. Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 6,000 psi (ASTM C109). 3. Bond Strength at 28 Days: 1,800 psi (ASTM C882 modified). B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Five Star Structural Concrete, by Five Star Products, Inc. Use formulation recommended by manufacturer for the specific application conditions. 2. SikaTop 122 Plus, SikaTop 123 Plus, SikaTop 111 Plus, or Sikacem 133, by Sika Corporation. Use formulation from among those listed in this paragraph recommended by manufacturer for specific application conditions. 3. Emaco S88 -CA or S66 -CR, by Master Builders Inc. Use formulation from among those listed in this paragraph recommended by manufacturer for specific application conditions. 4. Verticoat, Verticoat Supreme, or Euco SR -VO, by Euclid Chemical Company. Use formulation from among those listed in this paragraph recommended by manufacturer for specific application conditions. 5. Or equal C. Cement Mortar: Shall consist of mix of one part cement to 1.5 parts sand with sufficient water to form trowelable consistency. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4,000 psi. Where required to match the color of adjacent concrete surfaces, blend white portland cement with standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches the color of surrounding concrete. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete materials may require testing, as directed by CITY, at any time during the Work if concrete quality is in question. Provide access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests shall be done at no expense to COUNTY. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -10 Cast -in -Place Concrete 3.2 CONCRETE MIXING A. General: 1. Concrete may be produced at batch plants or by the ready -mixed process. Batch plants shall comply with recommendations of ACI 304R and have sufficient capacity to produce concrete of qualities required and in quantities required to comply with the accepted Progress Schedule. All plant facilities are subject to acceptance of CITY. 2. Mixing: a. Mix concrete with a rotating type batch machine, except where hand mixing of very small quantities is approved by CITY. b. Remove hardened accumulations of cement and concrete from drum and blades to ensure proper mixing action. c. Replace mixer blades upon loss of ten percent of mixer blades' original height. B. Ready -Mix Concrete: 1. Comply with ASTM C94 and the Contract Documents. a. Plant Equipment and Facilities: Conform to requirements of NRMCA certification. b. Mix concrete in revolving -type truck mixers that are in good condition and produce thoroughly -mixed concrete conforming to the Contract Documents. c. Do not exceed rated capacity of mixer. d. Mix concrete for minimum of two minutes after arrival at the Site, or as recommended by mixer manufacturer. e. Do not allow drum to mix while in transit. f. Mix at proper speed until concrete is discharged from mixer. g. Maintain adequate facilities at the Site for continuous delivery of concrete at required rates. h. Provide access to mixing plant for CITY upon request. C. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before charging each batch. Schedule rates of delivery to prevent delay of placing concrete after mixing, or holding dry-mixed materials too long in mixer before the adding water and admixtures. 3.3 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE A. Transport and place concrete not more than 90 minutes after water has been added to the dry ingredients. B. Avoid spilling and separation of concrete mixture during transportation. C. Do not place concrete in which the ingredients have separated. D. Do not retemper partially set concrete. 11- 0025 -UT 1 03300 -11 Cast -in -Place Concrete E. Use suitable equipment for transporting concrete from mixer to forms. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETING A. Submit to CITY laboratory trial batch test results for proposed mixes at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until associated laboratory trial batch test result submittal has been approved by CITY. B. Notify CITY a minimum of 24 hours in advance of placing concrete to allow for inspection of form work, joints, waterstops, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarders. The section to be placed shall be fully prepared for concrete placement at the time of notice. Confirm inspection status with CITY a minimum of 4 hours prior to concrete placement. Do not begin placing concrete until Work is in conformance with the Contract Documents. C. Subgrade surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling, prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete. D. Reinforcing steel and embedded items shall be completely cleaned of mortar, loose rust, form release compounds, dirt, or any other substance which would interfere with proper bonding with concrete. Protective coatings on embedded aluminum items shall continuously cover the surface to be in contact with concrete. Any defects in the coating shall be repaired. E. Do not place concrete until flow of water entering space to be filled with concrete has been properly stopped or has been diverted by pipes, or other means, and carried out of the forms, clear of the Work. Do not deposit concrete underwater, and do not allow water to rise on concrete surfaces until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over concrete surface in manner and or velocity that will injure concrete surface finish. Provide temporary pumping or other dewatering operations for removing water as required. F. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with Section 03251, Concrete Accessories. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Place concrete continuously, so that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints in accordance with Section 03251, Concrete Accessories. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -12 Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to action that may cause segregation. 3. Screed concrete that is to receive other construction to proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting. 4. Do not use concrete that becomes non - plastic and unworkable, or does not conform to required quality limits, or that has been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the Site and dispose of it in conformance with Laws and Regulations. 5. Do not place concrete until forms, bracing, reinforcing, and embedded items are each in final position and secure. 6. Do not place footings in freezing weather unless adequate precautions are taken against frost action. 7. Do not place footings, piers or pile caps on frozen soil. 8. Unless otherwise instructed, place concrete only when CITY is present. 9. Allow minimum of three days between adjoining concrete placements. B. Bonding for Next Concrete Pour: 1. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has set but is not fully cured, as follows: a. Thoroughly wet the surface, but allow no free - standing water. b. For horizontal surfaces place a six -inch layer of Construction Joint Grout, as specified in Section 03600, Grouting, over the hardened concrete surface. c. Place fresh concrete before the grout has attained its initial set. 2. Accomplish bonding of fresh concrete to fully cured, hardened, existing concrete by using a bonding agent as specified in Section 03251, Concrete Accessories. C. Concrete Conveying: 1. Handle concrete from point of delivery at the Site, transfer to concrete conveying equipment, and transfer to locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods that prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials. 2. Provide mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end of conveyor. Provide runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from concrete delivery point to locations of final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water, snow, ice, and other deleterious materials. 3. Do not use chutes for distributing concrete, unless accepted by CITY. 4. Pumping concrete is allowed, however do not use aluminum pipe for conveying concrete. D. Placing Concrete into Forms: 1. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18 inches each and in manner that avoids inclined construction joints. Where 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -13 Cast -in -Place Concrete placement consists of several layers, place concrete at such rate that concrete being integrated with fresh concrete while still plastic. 2. Do not allow concrete to free -fall within the form from height exceeding four feet. Where high -range water reducer is used to extend slump to at least six inches, maximum allowable free -fall of concrete is six feet. Use "elephant trunks" to prevent free -fall and excessive splashing of concrete on forms and reinforcing. Discontinue free -falls in excess of four feet if there is evidence of segregation. 3. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached elevation of such spreaders. 4. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete in accordance with applicable recommended practices in ACI 309. Vibration of forms and reinforcing is not allowed unless otherwise accepted by CITY. 5. Where height of concrete placement in walls exceeds 14 feet, provide temporary windows in formwork to facilitate vibration. Properly close temporary windows when height of concrete approaches windows. Determine location, size, and spacing of temporary windows to suit equipment used. 6. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly- spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least six inches into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcing and other embedded items without causing segregation of concrete mix. 7. Do not place concrete in beam and slab forms until concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic. 8. Prevent voids in the concrete. Force concrete under pipes, sleeves, openings, and inserts from one side until visible from the other side. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placing of a slab panel or section is completed. 2. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating equipment, so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcing and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and against bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified in this Article for formed concrete structures. 4. Bring slab surfaces to correct elevation and level. Smooth the surface, leaving surface free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on surface while concrete is plastic. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to commencing concrete finishing. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -14 Cast -in -Place Concrete 5. Where slabs are placed in conditions of high temperature or wind that could lead to formation of plastic shrinkage cracks, provide evaporation retardant applied in accordance with retardant manufacturer's recommendations, when required by CITY. F. Quality of Concrete Work: 1. Concrete shall be solid, compact, and smooth, and free of laitance, cracks, and cold joints. 2. Concrete for liquid- retaining structures, and concrete in contact with earth, water, or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight. 3. Cut out and properly replace to extent directed by CITY, or repair to satisfaction of CITY, surfaces with cracks or voids, that are unduly rough, or are defective in any other way. Thin patches or plastering are unacceptable. 4. Leaks through concrete that exhibit flowing water, and cracks, holes, or other defective concrete in areas of potential leakage, shall be repaired and made watertight. 5. Repair, removal, and replacement of defective concrete as directed by CITY shall be at no additional cost to COUNTY. G. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete Work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and the Contract Documents. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or may be expected to fall below 40 degrees F, provide adequate means to maintain temperature in area where concrete is being placed between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for at least seven days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or plastic film. Maintain temporary heating and protection as necessary so that ambient temperature does not fall more than 30 degrees F in the 24 hours following the seven -day period. Avoid rapid dry -out of concrete due to overheating, and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating. 3. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing for concrete as required to obtain concrete mixture temperature not less than 55 degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F at point of placement. 4. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Before placing concrete, verify that forms, reinforcing, and adjacent concrete surfaces are entirely free of frost, snow, and ice. 5. Do not use salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents. Do not use chemical accelerators or set - control admixtures unless approved by CITY and tested in mix design proposed for use. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -15 Cast -in -Place Concrete H. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that would impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and the Contract Documents. 2. When ambient air temperature is at or above 90 degrees F and rising, cool ingredients before mixing concrete to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 80 degrees F. When ambient air temperature is at or above 90 degrees F and falling, cool the ingredients before mixing concrete to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 85 degrees F. In no case shall the concrete temperature at time of placement exceed 90 degrees F. 3. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. If required, reduce the time from addition of mix water to placement, or use set - retarding admixture. 4. Cover reinforcing materials with water- soaked burlap if ambient air temperature becomes too hot, so that reinforcing material temperature does not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedment of reinforcing in concrete. 5. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete. 6. Do not place concrete at temperature that causes difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints. 7. Do not use set - control admixtures unless approved by CITY in mix design. 8. Obtain CITY's approval of substitute methods and materials proposed for use. 3.6 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Form Finish: 1. Standard form finish shall be basically smooth and even, but is allowed to have texture imparted by the form material used. Repair defects in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Use standard form finish for the following: a. Exterior vertical surfaces from foundation up to one foot below grade. b. Vertical surfaces not exposed to view. c. Other areas shown or indicated. B. Smooth Rubbed Finish: 1. Provide smooth rubbed finish to concrete surfaces that have received smooth form finish and where defects have been repaired, as follows: a. Rubbing of concrete surfaces not later than the day after form removal. b. Moistening of concrete surfaces and rubbing with carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Use smooth rubbed finish for the following: a. Interior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces. b. Exterior exposed walls and other vertical surfaces 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -16 Cast -in -Place Concrete c. Interior and exterior horizontal surfaces, except exterior exposed slabs and steps. d. Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid- containing structures down to one foot below normal operating liquid level. e. Other areas shown or indicated. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3.7 SLAB FINISHES A. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming in direction perpendicular to main traffic route. Use fine fiber- bristle broom, unless otherwise directed by CITY. Coordinate required final finish with CITY before applying finish. 2. Use non -slip broom finish for the following: a. Exterior exposed horizontal surfaces subject to lightweight foot traffic. b. Interior and exterior concrete steps and ramps. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1 Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying, excessive cold or hot temperatures, and maintain without drying at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete. 2. Start curing after placing and finishing concrete, as soon as free moisture has disappeared from concrete surface. Keep surface continuously moist during entire curing period. Cure for a minimum of 10 days and in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. For concrete sections over 30- inches thick, the curing period shall be for a minimum of 14 days. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 3. For curing, use water that is free of impurities that could etch or discolor exposed concrete surfaces. 4. Confine water for curing to area being cured. B. Curing Methods: Curing methods are specified below. Curing methods to be used on each type of concrete surface are specified elsewhere in this Article. 1. Water Curing. Cure by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet. b. Ponding or immersion. c. Continuous water -fog spray. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -17 Cast -in -Place Concrete d. Covering concrete surface with curing mats, thoroughly saturating mats with water, and keeping mats continuously wet with sprinklers or porous hoses. Place curing mats to cover concrete surfaces and edges with four -inch horizontal lap over adjacent mats; provide eight -inch lap over adjacent mats at vertical surfaces. If necessary, weigh down curing cover to maintain contact with concrete surface. 2. Form Curing. Cure by one of the following methods: a. Forms shall be maintained and loosened during curing period. b. Immediately after forms are loosened or removed, continue with the required curing method as applicable, for remainder of curing period. c. Where wood forms are kept in place, apply water to keep forms wet. 3. Moisture Retaining Cover Curing. Cure as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with the required moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practical width with sides and ends lapped at least three inches and sealed using waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 4. Liquid Compound Curing. Cure as follows: a. Unless otherwise approved by CITY, provide water curing or form curing. Request to use liquid curing compound will be considered by CITY on case -by -case basis. Construction joints, formed surfaces prior to receiving specified form finish, and concrete to receive surface treatment where surface treatment will be bonded to concrete surface (such as, but not limited to grout fill, hardener, coatings, lining, water repellent, painting, resilient flooring, terrazzo flooring, ceramic tile, quarry tile, chemical resistant coatings, or other applications) shall be water -cured or form- cured. b. In liquid- retaining structures, provide water curing or form curing, unless other curing method is approved by CITY. Requests to use liquid curing compound will be considered by CITY on case -by -case basis. Request shall provide valid construction reason or safety reason for using liquid compound curing including reason why other curing methods are not viable. c. Apply curing compounds immediately after final finishing or after terminating water curing. Apply curing compound in continuous operation by power spray equipment in accordance with curing compound manufacturer's directions. If areas are subjected to rainfall within three hours after completing curing compound application, area shall be recoated. Maintain coating continuity and repair areas damaged during curing period. d. When liquid curing compound is used, apply first coat of liquid curing compound at compound manufacturer's recommended coverage rate, and subsequently apply second coat at identical rate, thus providing twice the curing compound manufacturer's recommended coverage. e. At end of curing period, remove liquid curing compound where required. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -18 Cast -in -Place Concrete C. Formed Surfaces: Use the following curing methods: 1. Walls That Will Retain Liquid or That are Under Ground Surface: a. If forms are wood, form curing is allowed for entire curing period. If forms are steel, form curing is allowed for maximum of three days after which forms shall be removed so that concrete is free of the forms for remainder of the curing process. b. Immediately after the forms are loosened or removed, continue with water curing for remainder of curing period. c. When wall surface will not receive surface treatment and when allowed by CITY, use of liquid curing compound is allowed. Before using liquid compound curing, use water curing or form curing for at least the first three days of curing. 2. Formed Slab Underside and Beam Surfaces Where Will Retain Liquid: a. Form curing is allowed for the full curing period. b. Immediately after forms are loosened or removed, continue with water curing for remainder of curing period. c. When slab surface will not receive surface treatment and when allowed by CITY, use of liquid curing compound is allowed. 3. Vertical Joint Surfaces and Surfaces to Receive Surface Treatment: a. Form curing is allowed for entire curing period. b. Immediately after forms are loosened or removed, continue with water curing for remainder of curing period. 4. Cure other formed surfaces using an appropriate curing method specified in the Contract Documents. D. Unformed Surfaces: Treat with one of the following curing methods: 1. Slabs and Mats That Will Retain Liquid or are Below Ground Surface: a. Water curing. b. Moisture- retaining cover curing when allowed by CITY. c. When slab or mat surface will not receive surface treatment and when allowed by CITY, use of liquid curing compound is allowed. Before using liquid compound curing, use water curing or form curing for at least the first three days of curing. 2. Construction Joint Surfaces and Slab and Mat Surfaces to Receive Surface Treatment. a. Water curing. b. Moisture - retaining cover curing. 3. Cure other formed surfaces using an appropriate curing method specified in the Contract Documents. E. Temperature of Concrete During Curing: 1. When ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or less, continuously maintain concrete temperature between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F throughout curing period. When necessary, before concrete placing provide for temporary heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to continuously maintain specified temperatures and moisture conditions 11-0025-UT 03300 -19 Cast -in -Place Concrete throughout concrete curing period. Provide cold weather protection in accordance with ACI 306. 2. When the ambient temperature is 80 degrees F and above, or during other climatic conditions that would cause too -rapid drying of concrete, before starting concrete placing, provide wind breaks and shading as required, and fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or moisture retaining coverings as required. Continuously protect concrete throughout concrete curing period. Provide hot weather protection in accordance with ACI 305, unless otherwise specified. 3. Maintain concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, and protect from rapid ambient temperature changes. Avoid concrete temperature changes that exceed five degrees F in one hour and 50 degrees F in 24 -hour period. F. Protection: 1. During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive vibration, and damage by rain and flowing water. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations. 3.9 CONCRETE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: 1. Concrete placement tolerances, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 2. Notify CITY in writing when concrete placement does not conform with required tolerances, as soon as the condition is known to CONTRACTOR. 3. When concrete installation does not conform to required tolerances, do not repair or correct by grinding unless specified in the Contract Documents or approved by CITY in writing. 4. Verification Measurements: a. If surfaces where tolerances are in question, obtain measurements to verify conformance with tolerances in manner acceptable to CITY. b. If surfaces tolerances are in question, cost of obtaining measurements shall be at no additional cost to the COUNTY. c. Before obtaining measurements, obtain CITY's acceptance of method proposed for obtaining measurements. d. After obtaining measurements, submit measurements to CITY. 5. Submit with verification measurements submittal proposed method to rectify out -of- tolerance concrete. Do not start repair Work without obtaining CITY's approval. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing Services: 1. CONTRACTOR shall employ an independent testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing for concrete. CITY will direct where samples are to be obtained. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -20 Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Testing laboratory shall make standard compression test cylinders and entrained air tests as specified in this Article, under direct observation by CITY or Resident Project Representative. 3. Testing laboratory will provide all labor, material, and equipment required for sampling and testing concrete, including: scale, glass tray, cones, rods, molds, air tester, thermometer, and other incidentals required. 4. Provide all curing and necessary cylinder storage. 5. Refer to Article 1.3 of this Section for required testing laboratory qualifications. B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during placement of concrete, as follows: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172. b. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge. c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one for every two concrete loads at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. Test each load when time from batching to placement exceeds 75 minutes. d. Air Content: ASTM C231; one for every two concrete load at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. e. Unit Weight: ASTM C138; one for every two concrete loads at point of discharge, and when a change in the concrete is observed. f. Compression Test Specimens: 1) In accordance with ASTM C31; make one set of compression cylinders for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed each day. Each set shall be four standard cylinders, unless otherwise directed by CITY. 2) Cast, store, and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31. 3) Test and record the following when cylinders are cast: slump, concrete temperature, air content, and unit weight. g. Compressive Strength Tests: 1) In accordance with ASTM C39; one specimen tested at seven days, and three specimens tested at 28 days. 2) Adjust mix design if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for approval. 3) Concrete that does not comply with strength requirements will be considered as defective Work. h. Water /Cementitious Materials Ratio: Perform test when required by CITY in accordance with AASHTO TP23. i. Submit test results, certified by testing laboratory, to CITY within 24 hours of completion of test. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -21 Cast -in -Place Concrete C. Evaluation of Field Quality Control Tests: 1. Do not use concrete delivered to final point of placement having slump, concrete temperature, total air content or unit weight outside specified values. 2. Water /Cementitious Materials Ratio: a. When water content testing indicates water /cementitious materials ratio to exceed specified requirements by greater than 0.02, remaining batches required to complete concrete placement shall have water content decreased in the mix and water reducing admixture dosage increased as required to bring subsequently- batched concrete within specified water /cementitious materials ratio. b. Perform additional testing to verify compliance with specified water /cementitious materials ratio. c. Do not resume concrete production for further concrete placement until CONTRACTOR has identified cause of excess water in the mix and revised batching procedures, or adjusted the mix design (and obtained CITY' s associated approval) to bring water /cementitious materials ratio into conformance with the Contract Documents. 3. Compressive Strength: a. Compressive strength tests for laboratory -cured cylinders will be acceptable if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed specified 28 -day design compressive strength of the associated type or class of concrete, and no individual strength test falls below required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. b. Questionable Field Conditions During Concrete Placement: 1) Where questionable field conditions exist during concrete placement or immediately thereafter, strength tests of specimens cured under field conditions will be required by CITY to check adequacy of curing and protecting of concrete placed. Specimens shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples as laboratory-cured specimens. 2) Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete when 28 -day compressive strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory cured cylinders. 3) When laboratory-cured cylinder strengths are appreciably higher than minimum required compressive strength, field -cured cylinder strengths need not exceed minimum required compressive strength by greater than 500 psi even though the 85 percent criterion may not be met. 4) If individual tests of laboratory-cured specimens produce strengths more than 500 psi below the required minimum compressive strength, or if tests of field -cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, provide additional measures to ensure that load- bearing capacity of the structure is not jeopardized or impaired. If likelihood of low- strength concrete is confirmed and evaluations indicate load- bearing capacity may have been reduced, 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -22 Cast -in -Place Concrete perform tests of cores from the concrete in question at CONTRACTOR's expense. c. If compressive strength tests fail to indicate compliance with minimum requirements of the Contract Documents, concrete represented by such tests will be considered defective. D. Testing Concrete Structure for Strength: 1. When there is evidence that strength of in -place concrete does not comply with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall employ the services of concrete testing laboratory to obtain cores from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination. Cores and tests shall comply with ASTM C42 and the following: a. Obtain at least three representative cores from each concrete member or suspect area of concrete at locations directed by CITY. b. Strength of concrete for each series of cores will be acceptable if average compressive strength is at least 85 percent of specified compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of required 28 -day required concrete compressive strength. c. Testing laboratory shall submit test results to CITY on same day that tests are completed. Include in test reports Project name and number (if any), date of sampling and testing, CONTRACTOR name, name of concrete testing laboratory, exact location of test core in the Work, type or class of concrete represented by core sample, nominal maximum size aggregate, design compressive strength, compression breaking strength, and type of break (corrected for length- diameter ratio), direction of applied load to core with respect to horizontal plane of concrete as placed, and moisture condition of the core at time of testing. 2. Fill core holes solid with non -shrink grout, and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces. 3. If results of core tests are unacceptable or if it is impractical to obtain cores, perform static load test and evaluations complying with ACI 318, as directed by CITY. E. Concrete Tolerance Verification Measurements: Refer to Article 3.9 of this Section. F. Supplier's Services: 1. Water- Reducing Admixture Manufacturer: Furnish services of qualified concrete technician employed by admixture manufacturer to assist in proportioning concrete for optimum use of admixture. Concrete technician shall advise on proper addition of admixture to concrete and on adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet changing conditions at the Site. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Temporary Openings: 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -23 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1. Openings in concrete walls and slabs required for passage of Work are allowed only upon approval of CITY. 2. Temporary openings made in concrete shall be provided with waterstop in below - ground or liquid- retaining members and structures. Reinforcement going through and around the opening shall be made continuous to provide continuity and shall be approved by the CITY. 3. Temporary openings that remain in concrete structures shall be filled with the same class of concrete as the adjoining construction, after the Work causing need for temporary opening is complete, unless otherwise shown or directed by CITY. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified in this Section to blend with in -place construction. Provide miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the Work. B. Bases or Pads for Piping, Panels, and Equipment: 1. Unless specifically shown or indicated otherwise, provide concrete bases or pads for equipment, floor- mounted panels, and floor- mounted supports for piping and similar construction. Provide all concrete pad and base Work not specifically included under other . 2. Dimensions and Elevations: a. Coordinate and construct bases and pads to dimensions shown or indicated, or as required to comply with equipment, panel, or piping manufacturer's requirements and elevations indicated on the Drawing. b. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, place concrete bases for equipment up to one -inch below the equipment manufacturer's base or mounting plate. c. Where specific dimensions or elevations are not shown or indicated, bases and pads shall be six inches thick and extend three inches outside dimensions of the equipment, panel, or supports. 3. Finish: Bases and pads outside of areas to receive non - shrink grout shall have smooth trowel finish, unless special finish such as terrazzo, ceramic tile, quarry tile, or heavy -duty concrete topping is required. In such cases, provide appropriate concrete finish. Surfaces of bases and pads to receive non - shrink grout shall have broom finish. C. Curbs: 1. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green followed by steel - troweling surfaces to hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 2. Exterior curbs shall have rubbed finish for vertical surfaces and broomed finish for top surfaces. 3.12 REPAIR OF CONCRETE PLACED UNDER THIS CONTRACT A. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Repair the following defects in all formed finishes: a. Spalls, air bubbles, rock pockets, form depressions, and other defects that are more than 1/4 -inch in depth. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete b. Holes from tie rods and other form tie systems. c. Fins, offsets, and other projections that extend more than 1/4 -inch beyond designated concrete member surface. d. Structural cracks, as defined by CITY. 2. Where smooth rubbed or grout cleaned finish is specified, minor surface defects repairable by the finishing process need not be repaired prior to finish application, when approved by CITY. B. Method of Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Immediately after removing forms, repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar or concrete repair mortar as directed by CITY. Make repairs made to liquid- retaining structures and below -grade surfaces with repair mortar only. Repair form tie holes in liquid- retaining or below -grade surfaces with non - shrink grout in accordance with Section 03600, Grouting. 2. Honeycombs, Rock Pockets, and Holes Left by Tie Rods and Bolts: a. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case, to depth Less than one - inch for cement mortar and 1/2 -inch for repair mortar. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. b. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean and brush -coat area to be patched with specified bonding agent. c. When using concrete repair mortar, use of bonding agent is optional; prepare the surface and place mortar in accordance with mortar manufacturer's recommendations. d. Repairs at exposed -to -view surfaces shall match the color of surrounding concrete, except color matching is not required for interior surfaces of liquid- retaining surfaces up to one foot below typical minimum liquid level. Impart texture to repaired surfaces to match texture of existing adjacent surfaces. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture, texture, and color match before proceeding with patching. e. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding surface. 3. Structural Cracks: Pressure -grout structural cracks using injectable epoxy installed using pressurized system. Apply in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 4. Non - structural Cracks: Shall be pressure - grouted using hydrophobic or hydrophilic resin. Install in accordance with resin manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 5. Determination of the crack type shall be made by the CITY. 6. Holes Through Concrete: a. Using plunger -type gun or other suitable device, fill holes extending through concrete from least- exposed face, using flush stop held at exposed face; completely fill the hole with specified repair material. b. At below -grade and liquid- containing members, fill holes with concrete repair mortar and use color- matched cement mortar for outer two inches at exposed -to -view surfaces. 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -25 Cast -in -Place Concrete 7. Where powerwashing or scrubbing is not adequate, abrasive blast exposed - to -view surfaces that require removal of stains, grout accumulations, sealing compounds, and other substances marring the surfaces. Use sand finer than No. 30 and air pressure from 15 to 25 psi. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to specified tolerances for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas in accordance with this Section. 2. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using template having the required slope. Correct high and low areas in accordance with this Section. 3. Repair finish of unformed surfaces containing defects that adversely affect concrete durability. Surface defects include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 -inch wide, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 4. Repair structural cracks in all structures and non - structural cracks in liquid - retaining structures. In liquid- retaining structures, where dry face of concrete member can be observed, repair all cracks evidencing any rate of water flow through crack. Where dry face of member cannot be observed, repair all cracks. D. Methods of Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas. 2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces, during or immediately after completion of surface finishing, by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Where repairs are required and concrete has already set, sawcut around perimeter of area to be repaired to depth of 1/2 -inch and remove concrete so that minimum thickness of repair is 1/2 -inch. Apply specified concrete repair mortar in accordance with repair mortar manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding one -inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Minimum thickness of repair shall be 1.5 inches. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with specified bonding agent. Place patching concrete while bonding agent is tacky. Mix patching concrete of same materials and proportions to provide concrete of same classification as original, adjacent concrete. Place, compact, and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 4. Repair isolated, random, non - structural cracks (in members that are not below grade or liquid- retaining), and single holes not greater than one -inch 11- 0025 -UT 03300 -26 Cast -in -Place Concrete diameter, by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean repair area of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place dry-pack before cement grout takes its initial set. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2.5 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched areas continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 5. Structural cracks shall be pressure - grouted using injectable epoxy. Apply in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 6. Determination of crack type will be by CITY. E. Other Methods of Repair: 1. Repair methods not specified in this Section may be used when approved by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 03300 -27 Cast -in -Place Concrete 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 03300 -28 Cast -in -Place Concrete SECTION 05051 ANCHOR BOLTS, TOGGLE BOLTS, AND CONCRETE INSERTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install anchor systems. 2. This Section includes all anchor systems required for the Work, but not specified under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before anchor systems Work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 3. ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post - Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. 4. ANSI B212.15, Cutting Tools - Carbide - tipped Masonry Drills And Blanks For Carbide - tipped Masonry Drills. 5. ANSI/MSS SP -58, Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. 6. ASTM A 194/A 194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 7. ASTM A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 8. ASTM A493, Specification for Stainless Steel Wire and Wire Rods for Cold Heading and Cold Forging. 9. ASTM A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 10. ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy, High - Strength Low - Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. 11. ASTM B633, Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 12. ASTM C307, Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 13. ASTM C579, Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -1 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 14. ASTM C881/C881M, Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 15. ASTM D695, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 16. ASTM D790, Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 17. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. 18. ASTM E488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 19. ASTM F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 20. ASTM F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 21. ASTM F1554, Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105 -ksi Yield Strength. 22. FS A- A- 1922A, Shield, Expansion (Caulking Anchors, Single Lead). 23. FS A- A- 1923A, Concrete Expansion Anchors. 24. FS A- A- 1925A, Shield, Expansion (Nail Anchors). 25. FS A- A- 55614, Shield, Expansion (non - drilling expansion anchors). 26. ICC -ES AC01, Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. 27. ICC -ES AC58, Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements. 28. ICC -ES AC 193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 29. ICC -ES AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post - Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. 30. ISO 3506 -1, Mechanical Properties of Corrosion- Resistant Stainless Steel Fasteners -- Part 1: Bolts, Screws and Studs. 31. NSF /ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory: Shall comply with ASTM E329 and shall be experienced in tension testing of post- installed anchoring systems. 2. Post - installed Anchor Installer: Shall be experienced and trained by post - installed anchor system manufacturer in proper installation of manufacturer's products. Product installation training by distributors or manufacturer's representatives is unacceptable unless the person furnishing the training is qualified as a trainer by the anchor manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -2 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Listing of all anchor systems products intended for use in the Work including product type, intended location in the Project, and embedded lengths. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, acceptable base material conditions, acceptable drilling methods, and acceptable bored hole conditions. b. When required by CITY, copies of valid ICC ES reports that presents load - carrying capacities and installation requirements for anchor systems. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. For each type of anchor bolt or threaded rod, submit copies of laboratory test reports and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Post - installed anchor system manufacturer's certification that installer received training in the proper installation of manufacturer's products required for the Work. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Installation instructions for each anchor system product proposed for use, including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive injection, cure and gel time tables, and temperature ranges (storage, installation and in- service). 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of field quality control testing and inspections performed by testing laboratory. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Store adhesive materials within manufacturer's recommended storage temperature range. 3. Protect anchor systems from damage at the Site. Protect products from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. General: 1. At locations where conditions dictate that Work specified in other Sections is to be of corrosion resistant materials, provide associated anchor systems of stainless steel materials, unless other corrosion- resistant anchor system 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -3 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts material is specified. Provide anchor systems of stainless steel materials where stainless steel materials are required in the Contract Documents. 2. Stainless Steel Nuts: a. For anchor bolts and adhesive anchors, provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts for stainless steel anchors used for anchoring equipment, gates, and weirs, and other locations, if any, where the attachment will require future removal for operation or maintenance. Provide lock washer or double nuts on each anchorage device provided for equipment, as required by equipment manufacturer. b. For other locations, provide for each anchorage device a nut as specified or as required by anchor manufacturer. When ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) nuts are not required for anchor bolts and adhesive anchors as specified in this Section, provide anti - seizing compound where stainless steel rods are used with stainless steel nuts of the same type. 3. Materials that can contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be listed in NSF /ANSI 61. B. Design Criteria 1. Size, Length, and Load - carrying Capacity: Comply with the Contract Documents. When size, length or load - carrying capacity of anchor system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following: a. Anchor Bolts: Provide size, length, and capacity required to carry design load based on values and requirements of Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section. For conditions outside limits of critical edge distance and spacing in Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section, minimum anchor bolt embedment as shown or indicated in Paragraph 3.2.A of this Section apply and capacity shall be based on requirements of Laws and Regulations, including applicable building codes. b. Adhesive Anchors, Expansion Anchors, or Concrete Inserts: Provide size, length, type, and capacity required to carry design load. Anchor capacity shall be based on the procedures required by the building code in effect at the Site. Where Evaluation Service Reports issued by the ICC Evaluation Service are required in this Section, anchor capacities shall be based on design procedure required in the applicable ICC Evaluation Service Report. 1) General: Determine capacity considering reductions due to installation and inspection procedures, embedment length, strength of base fastening materials, spacing, and edge distance, as indicated in the manufacturer's design guidelines. For capacity determination, concrete shall be assumed to be in the cracked condition, unless calculations demonstrate that the anchor system will be installed in an area that is not expected to crack under any and all conditions of design loading. 2) Concrete Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by CITY, provide 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -4 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts minimum embedment depth of the greater of the following: required to develop tensile strength of anchor, or a minimum embedment of 10 anchor diameters; and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of 12 anchor diameters. 3) Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by CITY, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. 4) Concrete Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by CITY, provide minimum embedment depth of six anchor diameters, and minimum anchor spacing and edge distance of seven anchor diameters. 5) Concrete Masonry Expansion Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by CITY, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as indicated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. 6) Concrete Undercut Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or approved by CITY, provide minimum anchor spacing and edge distance as tabulated in anchor manufacturer's instructions. 2. Design Loads. Comply with the Contract Documents. When design load of supported material, equipment, or system is not otherwise shown or indicated, provide the following: a. Equipment Anchors: Use design load recommended by equipment manufacturer. When equipment can be filled with fluid, use loads that incorporate equipment load and load imposed by fluid. b. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Use full weight of pipe, and fluid contained in pipe that are tributary to the support plus the full weight of valves and accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. c. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems, and HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Suppression Systems and Piping: Use the full weight of supported system that is tributary to the support plus the full weight of accessories located between the hanger or support being anchored and the next hanger or support. When piping or equipment is to be filled with fluid, anchor systems shall be sized to support such loads in addition to the weight of the equipment, piping, or system, as applicable. d. Delegated Design: When anchor systems are used for supporting materials, equipment, or systems delegated to a design professional retained by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or Supplier, provide anchor system suitable for loads indicated in delegated design documents and consistent with the design intent expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Application: 1. Anchor Bolts: 1 I - 0025 -UT 05051 -5 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts a. Where anchor bolt is shown or indicated, use cast -in -place anchor bolt unless another anchor type is approved by CITY. b. Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated, or as required to secure structural element to appropriate anchor surface. 2. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. c. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Suitable for use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Do not use in overhead applications, unless otherwise shown or approved by CITY. f. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by CITY. 3. Grout - filled Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in grout - filled concrete masonry units. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. c. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by CITY. 4. Hollow Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: a. Use where adhesive anchors are shown or indicated for installation in hollow concrete unit masonry. b. Suitable for use where subject to vibration. c. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by CITY. 5. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in concrete. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. c. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. d. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Suitable for use in overhead applications. 6. Grout - filled Concrete Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation on the interior face of grout - filled unit masonry. b. Do not use where subject to vibration. c. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. 7. Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: a. Use where expansion anchors are shown or indicated for installation in hollow concrete unit masonry or solid brick. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -6 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts b. Do not use for attaching safety- related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. 8. Drop -in Expansion Anchors: a. Use drop -in expansion anchors installed in concrete where light -duty anchors are required to support piping or conduit two -inch diameter or smaller. b. Do not use for attaching safety- related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use where subject to vibration. d. Do not use at submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. e. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subject to freezing. f. Suitable for use in overhead applications. 9. Concrete Inserts: a. Use only where shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. b. Allowed for use to support pipe hangers and pipe supports for pipe size and loading recommended by the concrete insert manufacturer. 10. Drive -In Expansion Anchors: a. Use drive -in expansion anchors installed in concrete, precast concrete, grouted masonry units, or brick, where light -duty anchors are required to support piping or conduit one -inch diameter and smaller. b. Do not use for attaching safety - related systems, such as piping conveying hazardous or potentially hazardous materials, or fire suppression systems. c. Do not use in overhead applications. 11. For Use in Precast Concrete Planks: a. To support piping or conduit six -inch diameter and smaller, use low - profile drop -in anchors, hollow concrete masonry adhesive anchors, or through - bolts. b. For piping greater than six -inch diameter, or to support safety - related systems, use through - bolts. Each through -bolt shall consist of threaded rod, nuts, washers, and bearing plate. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Anchor Bolts: 1. Interior Dry Non - corrosive Locations: Provide straight threaded carbon steel rods complying with ASTM F1554, Grade 55, with heavy hex nuts complying with ASTM A563 Grade A, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. Hooked anchor bolts are unacceptable. 2. Exterior, Buried, Submerged Locations, or When Exposed to Wastewater: Provide stainless steel straight threaded rods complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition A, with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316, stainless 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -7 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. Other AISI types may be used when approved by CITY. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. 3. Equipment: Provide anchor bolts complying with material requirements of this Section and equipment manufacturer's requirements relative to size, embedment length, and anchor bolt projection. Anchor bolts shall be straight threaded rods with washers and nuts as specified in this Section. Hooked bolts are unacceptable. 4. Anchoring of Structural Elements: Provide anchor bolts of size, material, and strength shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Concrete Adhesive Anchors: 1. General: a. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into hardened concrete using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT -RE 500 -SD Injection Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. SET -XP Epoxy -Tie Adhesive, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two- component adhesive mix. b. Epoxy adhesives shall comply with physical requirements of ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 2 and 3, Class A, B, and C, except gel times. c. Adhesives shall have a current evaluation report by ICC Evaluation Service for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition for SDC A through F as tested and assessed in accordance with ICC -ES AC308. d. Adhesives shall have minimum bond strength and minimum design bond strength (bond strength multiplied by strength reduction factor) in accordance with Table 05051 -A: 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -8 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE 05051 -A: ADHESIVE BOND STRENGTH 1'2 Anchor Uncracked Concrete Cracked Concrete Rod Diameter / Dowel Size Bond Strength (psi) Design Bond Strength (psi) Bond Strength (psi) Design Bond Strength (psi) 3/8 -inch / #3 2040 1300 1090 700 1/2 -inch / #4 1920 1200 920 560 5/8 -inch / #5 1830 1150 710 390 3/4 -inch / #6 1760 1050 710 460 7 /8inch / #7 1670 900 610 340 1 -inch / #8 1650 1050 850 460 -/ #9 1900 1000 800 400 1.25 -inch/ #10 1580 1000 730 400 Table Notes: 1. Bond strengths listed for hammer - drilled, dry hole. 2. Bond strengths listed for maximum short term concrete temperature of 110 degrees F and maximum long term concrete temperature of 75 degrees F. 4. Anchor: a. Provide continuously- threaded, AISI Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchor rod. Threaded rods shall comply with the concrete adhesive anchor manufacturer's specifications as included in the ICC Service Evaluation Report for the anchor submitted. Nuts shall have specified proof load stresses equal to or greater than the minimum tensile strength of the stainless steel threaded rod used. Provide ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. C. Grout - filled Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: 1. General: a. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods anchored into grout - filled concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT -HY 150 Max Adhesive Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Acrylic -Tie Adhesive, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two- component adhesive mix. b. Acrylate hybrid adhesives shall comply with the following: 1) ASTM C579 compressive strength greater than 7,252 psi, or ASTM D695 compressive yield strength greater than or equal to 10,210 psi. 2) ASTM C307 modulus of elasticity greater than 507,000 psi or ASTM D695 compressive modulus of elasticity greater than 660,800 psi. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -9 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts c. Adhesives shall have current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in grout - filled concrete masonry, tested and assessed in accordance with ICC -ES AC 58. 4. Anchor: a. Provide stainless steel adhesive anchor rod complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316 stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. D. Hollow Concrete Masonry Adhesive Anchors: 1. General: a. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods with a cylindrical mesh steel or plastic screen tube anchored into hollow concrete block masonry using an adhesive system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HIT -HY 20 for Masonry Anchoring System, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Acrylic -Tie Anchoring Adhesive, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Adhesive: a. Adhesive system shall use two- component adhesive mix. b. Hybrid adhesives shall comply with the following: 1) ASTM D695 compressive strength, greater than 7,410 psi. 2) ASTM D790 modulus of elasticity: 0.33 x 106 psi or ASTM D695 compressive modulus of elasticity greater than 0.668 x106 psi. c. Adhesives shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in hollow concrete masonry as tested and assessed in accordance with ICC -ES AC58. 4. Anchor: a. Provide stainless steel adhesive anchor rod complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, with ASTM F594, AISI Type 316, stainless steel nuts. Provide ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8S (Nitronic 60) stainless steel nuts where required. 5. Mesh Screen Tube: a. Provide with mesh size, length, and diameter as specified by adhesive anchor manufacturer. b. Mesh shall be AISI 304 stainless steel. E. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik Bolt TZ Wedge Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -10 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A- A- 1923A, Type 4. Provide concrete wedge expansion anchors suitable for use in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. Demonstrate suitability of cracked concrete wedge anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 prequalification tests. 4. Interior Dry Non - corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers, AISI Type 304 stainless steel anchor body, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. 6. Concrete wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service Report for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete with seismic recognition in seismic design Categories A through F when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC -ES AC 193. F. Grout - filled Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Grout - filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall each consist of stud, wedge, nut, and washer. 2. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Kwik -Bolt 3 Expansion Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Wedge -All Wedge Anchors, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A- A- 1923A, Type 4. Anchors shall be non -bottom bearing type with single -piece steel expansion clip providing 360 - degree contact with base material and shall not require oversized holes for installation. 4. Interior Dry Non - corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Other Locations: Provide AISI Type 316 stainless steel anchor, complete with nut and washer, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. 6. Grout - filled masonry wedge expansion anchors shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report for use in fully- grouted concrete masonry construction when tested and assessed in accordance with ICC -ES AC01. G. Hollow Concrete Masonry Sleeve Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Sleeve expansion anchors shall each consist of an externally threaded stud with full length expanding sleeve. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HLC Sleeve Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Dynabolt Sleeve Anchors, by ITW Red Head. c. Or equal. 3. Anchors shall comply with physical requirements of FS A- A- 1922A. Anchors shall be non - bottom bearing type with single -piece steel expansion 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -11 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts sleeve providing 360 - degree contact with base material, and shall not require oversized holes for installation. 4. Interior Dry Non - corrosive Locations: Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633. 5. Other Locations: Provide expansion anchors complete with nuts and washers, Type 304 stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A493. H. Drop -in Expansion Anchors: 1. General: a. Drop -in expansion anchors shall each consist of an internally threaded, deformation- controlled expansion anchor with pre - assembled expander plug. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. HDI Drop -In Anchors, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Drop -In Anchor, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Provide carbon steel anchors complete with nuts and washers, zinc plated, in accordance with ASTM B633, complying with physical requirements of FS A- A- 55614, Type I. Anchors shall be flush or shell type. Provide low - profile anchors for use in precast concrete planks. I. Concrete Inserts: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Unistrut Corporation. b. Cooper B -Line, Inc. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Spot Concrete Inserts: a. Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall comply with ANSI /MSS SP -58, malleable iron, Type 18. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Provide nuts compatible with insert and to suit threaded hanger rod sizes. 3. Continuous Concrete Inserts: a. Provide inserts recommended by insert manufacturer for required loading. Inserts shall be continuous type and shall be manufactured from minimum 12 -gage cold - formed channel sections, complying with ASTM A1011 /A101IM, stainless steel, Grade 33, complete with styrofoam inserts, end caps, and means for attaching to forms. Provide channel nuts compatible with insert suitable for threaded hanger rod sizes. 4. Provide inserts with plain finish. J. Drive -In Expansion Anchors: 1. General: 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -12 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts a. Drive -In expansion anchors shall each consist of stainless steel drive pin and expanding alloy body. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Metal HIT Anchor, by Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc. b. Zinc Nailon Anchor, by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Provide Type 304 stainless steel drive pin with zinc alloy body. Anchor shall comply with physical requirements of FS A- A- 1925A, Type 1. K. Unless approved by CITY, do not use power - actuated fasteners or other types of bolts and fasteners not specified in this Section. L. Anti - Seizing Compound: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Pure Nickel Never -Seez, by Bostik. b. Nickel -Graf, by Anti -Seize Technology. c. Or equal. 2. Provide pure nickel anti - seizing compound. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials will be installed and advise CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide anchor bolts as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as required to secure structural element to the appropriate anchor surface. 2. Locate and accurately set anchor bolts using templates or other devices as required, prior to placing concrete. Wet setting of anchor bolts is unacceptable. 3. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation and subsequent construction operations. 4. Unless otherwise shown or approved by CITY anchor bolts shall comply with Table 05051 -B: 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -13 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts TABLE 05051 -B: SINGLE ANCHOR ALLOWABLE LOADS ON ANCHOR BOLTS t Bolt Diameter (inch) F1554 Grade 36 F1554 F593 Type 316, Condition A Grade 55 Minimum Embedment (inch) Minimum Edge Distance and Spacing2 (inch) Shear3'4 (lb) Tension3 (lb) Minimum Embedment (inch) Minimum Edge Distance and Spacing2 (inch) Shear3 (lb) Tension3 (lb) 1/2 6 9 1,262 2,420 8.5 12.75 1,660 3,190 5/8 7.5 11.25 2,010 3,860 10.5 15.75 2,640 5,080 3/4 9 13.5 2,974 5,720 13 19.5 3,910 7,520 7/8 10.5 15.75 4,106 7,890 15 22.5 5,400 10,390 1 12 18 5,386 10,360 17 25.5 7,090 13,450 11/8 13.5 20.25 6,787 13,052 19 28.5 8,930 16,580 11/4 15 22.5 8,617 16,572 21 31.5 11,340 20,040 Table Notes: 1. Table is based on ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D, le = 4000 psi. Table 05 05 33 -B is not applicable to anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry. 2. Critical edge distance and spacing are indicated in the table. Capacity of anchor bolts for other combination of edge distances and spacing shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. 3. Values for shear and tension listed are not considered to act concurrently. Interaction of tension and shear will be evaluated by CITY in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Appendix D. B. Adhesive Anchors, Undercut Anchors, and Expansion Anchors — General: 1. Prior to drilling, locate existing reinforcing steel in vicinity of proposed holes. If reinforcing conflicts with proposed hole location, obtain CITY's approval of alternate hole locations to avoid drilling through or damaging existing reinforcing bars. C. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following. 2. Drill holes to adhesive system manufacturer's recommended drill bit diameter to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide - tipped drill bits that comply with the tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core - drilled holes are unacceptable. 3. Before setting adhesive anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by adhesive anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with adhesive system manufacturer - approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oil -free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. Hole shall be dry as defined by adhesive system manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -14 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4. Before injecting adhesive, obtain CITY's concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 5. Prior to injecting adhesive into the drilled hole, dispense, to a location appropriate for such waste, an initial amount of adhesive from the mixing nozzle, until adhesive is uniform color. 6. Inject adhesive into hole through injection system- mixing nozzle and necessary extension tubes, placed to bottom of hole. Discharge end shall be withdrawn as adhesive is placed but kept immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. Fill hole to depth that ensures that excess material is expelled from hole during anchor placement. 7. Twist anchors during insertion into partially - filled hole to guarantee full wetting of rod surface with adhesive. Insert rod slowly to avoid developing air pockets. 8. Provide adequate curing in accordance to adhesive system manufacturer's requirements prior to continuing with adjoining Work that could place load on installed adhesive anchors. Do not begin adjoining Work until adhesive anchors are successfully tested or when allowed by CITY. 9. Limitations: a. Installation Temperature: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation temperature requirements. Provide temporary protection and other measures, such as heated enclosures, necessary to ensure that base material temperature complies with anchor systems manufacturer's requirements during installation and curing of adhesive anchor system. b. Oversized Holes: Advise CITY immediately if size of drilled hole is larger than recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Cost of corrective measures, including but not limited to redesign of anchors due to decreased anchor capacities, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. c. Embedment depths shall be based on installation in normal- weight concrete with compressive strength of 2,500 psi when embedded in existing concrete, and 4,000 psi when embedded in new concrete. D. Expansion Anchors: 1. Comply with expansion anchor manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following: 2. Drill holes using anchor system manufacturer's recommended drill bit diameter and to the specified depth. Drill holes in hammering and rotation mode with carbide - tipped drill bits complying with tolerances of ANSI B212.15. Core drilled holes are unacceptable. 3. Before installing anchor, hole shall be made free of dust and debris by method recommended by anchor system manufacturer. Hole shall be brushed with anchor system manufacturer - approved brush and blown clean with clean, dry, oil -free compressed air to remove all dust and loose particles. 4. Before installing anchor, obtain CITY's concurrence that hole is dry and free of oil and other contaminants. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -15 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 5. Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Drive anchors not less than four threads below surface of the attachment. Set anchors to anchor manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench. E. Concrete Inserts: 1. Comply with concrete insert manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Inserts shall be flush with slab bottom surface. 3. Protect embedded items from damage during concrete placing. Ensure that embedded items are securely fastened to prevent movement during concrete placing, and ensure that embedded items do fill with concrete during concrete placing. 4. Inserts intended for piping greater than four -inch diameter shall be provided with hooked rods attached to concrete reinforcing. F. Anti - Seizing Compound: 1. Provide anti - seizing compound in accordance with anti - seizing compound manufacturer's installation instructions, at locations indicated in Paragraph 2.1.B of this Section. 2. Do not use anti - seizing compound at locations where anchor bolt or adhesive anchor will contact potable water or water that will be treated to become potable. 3.3 CLEANING A. After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and inserts. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Furnish services of independent testing laboratory to perform field quality tensile testing of production adhesive anchors at the Site, unless otherwise specified. a. Testing shall comply with ASTM E488. b. Test at least ten percent of all types of adhesive anchors. If one or more adhesive anchors fail the test, CONTRACTOR shall pay cost of testing, or at CITY's option CONTRACTOR may arrange for testing paid by CONTRACTOR, for all adhesive anchors of same diameter and type installed on the same day as the failed anchor. If anchors installed on the same day as the failed anchor also fail the test, CITY may require retesting of all anchors of the same diameter and type installed in the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for retesting costs. c. CITY will direct which adhesive anchors are to be tested and indicate test load to be used d. Apply test loads with hydraulic ram. 11- 0025 -UT 05051 -16 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete lnserts 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 e. Displacement of post - installed anchors shall not exceed D /10, where D is nominal diameter of anchor being tested. 2. Correct defective Work by removing and replacing or correcting, as directed by CITY. 3. CONTRACTOR shall pay for all corrections and subsequent testing required to confirm competence in the installation of post - installed mechanical anchors. 4. Testing agency shall submit test results to CONTRACTOR and CITY within 24 hours of completion of test. B. Manufacturer's Services: 1. Provide at the Site services of qualified adhesive manufacturer's representative during initial installation of adhesive anchor systems to train CONTRACTOR's personnel in proper installation procedures. Manufacturer's representative shall observe to confirm that installer demonstrates proper installation procedures for adhesive anchors and adhesive material. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 05051 -17 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 05051 -18 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete lnserts SECTION 05501 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish miscellaneous metal fabrications including surface preparation and shop priming. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in miscellaneous metal fabrications to accom- modate the Work under this and other Sections, and attaching to miscellaneous metal fabrications all items such as sleeves, bands, studs, fasteners, and all items required for which provision is not specifically included under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the Work to be installed with, or attached to miscellaneous metal fabrications Work. 2. Hot -dip Galvanizing: Coordinate with steel fabricator detailing for and fabrication of assemblies to be hot -dip galvanized, to minimize distortion during galvanizing process. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 2. Section 05522, Aluminum Handrails and Railings. 3. Section 09900, Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1 ANSI A14.3, Ladders — Fixed — Safety Requirements. 2. ANSI Z359.1, Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems, and Components. 3. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 11- 0025 -UT 05501 -1 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 7. ASTM A240/A240M, Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 8. ASTM A320/A320M, Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low - Temperature Service. 9. ASTM A384/A384M -02 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot -Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. 10. ASTM A500, Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 11. ASTM A572/A572M, Specification for High- Strength Low -Alloy Columbium - Vanadium Structural Steel. 12. ASTM A793, Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel. 13. ASTM A992/A992M, Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 14. ASTM B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 15. ASTM B211, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. 16. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 17. ASTM B308/B308M, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061 -T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 18. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 19. ASTM B632/B632M, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. 20. AWS DI .1 /D 1.1 M, Structural Welding Code — Steel. 21. AWS D1.2 /D1.2M, Structural Welding Code — Aluminum. 22. AWS DI.6, Structural Welding Code — Stainless Steel. 23. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Welding: a. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 /Dl.IM, D1.2/D1.2M, or D1.6, as applicable. b. When requested by CITY, provide certification that each welder employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the following: 1. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Health and Safety Standards. C. Field Measurements: 1. Take field measurements where required prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the Work. 11- 0025 -UT 05501 -2 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications D. Shop Assembly: 1. Pre - assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field- splicing and field- assembly of units at the Site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Fabrication and erection details for assemblies of miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings and templates for locating and installing miscellaneous metal items and anchorage devices. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for products to be used in miscellaneous metal Work. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Mill test report that indicate chemical and physical properties of each type of material, when requested by CITY. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Copies of welder's certifications, when requested by CITY. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage materials to be embedded in other construction in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. W- Shapes and WT- Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. 2. S- Shapes and Channels: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50. 3. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. 4. Angles, Plates, Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. 11- 0025 -UT 05501 -3 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications B. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B308/B308M, Alloy 6061 -T6, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061 -T6. 2. Aluminum Tubes and Pipes: ASTM B429, Alloy 6061 -T6. 3. Aluminum Bars and Rod: ASTM B211, Alloy 6061 -T6. 4. Aluminum Plates: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 -T6. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Plates and Sheets: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304L or Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Submerged or Intermittently Submerged: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Non - submerged: Type 304L stainless steel. D. Stainless Steel Fasteners and Fittings: ASTM A 320/A 320M, Type 304L or Type 316 Stainless Steel. E. Zinc - coated Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Bollards: 1. Provide Schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe filled with concrete as shown on the Drawings. Paint as required in accordance with Section 09900, Painting. Unless otherwise shown or specified, finish -paint bollard "Safety Yellow." B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous metal framing and supports that are not part of structural steel framework and are required to complete the Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes, and profiles shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates, tanks, doors, and other work to be retained by the framing. 3. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars, of all- welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets, and splice plates and minimum number of joints for field connection. 4. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. 5. Furnish units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units are to be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors, 2.0 feet on centers, and provide units the equivalent of 1.25 -inch by 1/4-inch by eight -inch strips. b. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports. c. Where shown or indicated, galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports that are not to be installed outdoors. 6. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports shall be hot -dip galvanized and finish- painted, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 11- 0025 -UT 05501 -4 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 7. For railings, refer to Section 05522, Aluminum Handrails and Railing. 8. For grating requirements refer to Section 05532, Aluminum Grating and Checker Plate. 9. Surface preparation and painting of galvanized surface shall conform to Section 09900, Painting C. Fasteners and Hardware: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for aluminum fabrications and zinc - coated hardware for galvanized fabrications, unless otherwise shown or specified. D. Anchors and Expansion Anchors: Refer to Section 05051, Anchor Systems. 2.3 FINISHING A. Surface Preparation and Shop Priming: Perform surface preparation and apply primer coat to miscellaneous metal fabrications in the shop. Conform to surface preparation and shop priming requirements in Section 09900, Painting. B. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanizing of fabricated steel items shall comply with ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Details of fabrication of steel items and assemblies to be hot -dip galvanized shall conform to recommendations of ASTM A384/A384M to minimize the potential for distortion. C. Aluminum Finish: Provide an Architectural Class 1 anodized finish, AA- M32C22-A41, clear, as specified in NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures shall be subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures complying with the Contract Documents. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 11- 0025 -UT 05501 -5 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Brace temporarily or anchor temporarily in formwork where fabrications are to be built into concrete, masonry, or other construction. B. Anchor securely as shown and as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors where possible. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Field - weld steel connections that are not to be exposed joints and cannot be shop - welded because of shipping size limitations. Comply with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, D1.2/D1.2M and D1.6, as applicable to the material being welded. Grind steel joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat surfaces of aluminum that will contact dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel, in accordance with Section 09900, Painting. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 05501 -6 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications SECTION 05511 PRE - ENGINEERED ALUMINUM STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to design, furnish and install aluminum stairs including surface preparation and shop priming. 2. The extent of aluminum stairs shall be as shown. 3. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in and attachments to aluminum stairs to accommo- date the Work under this and other Sections and providing for the aluminum stairs all items such as anchor bolts, studs and all items required for which provision is not specifically included under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the aluminum stairs Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 2. Section 05522, Aluminum Handrails and Railings. 3. Section 09900, Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. Aluminum Association (AA), Specification for Aluminum Structures. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. ASTM B 211, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. c. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. d. ASTM B 308/B 308M, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061 -T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 11- 0025 -UT 05511 -1 Pre - Engineered Aluminum Stairs e. ASTM B 429, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. f. ASTM F 593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. g. ASTM F 594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 3. American Welding Society, (AWS). a. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). a. NAAMM, Metal Stairs Manual and Metal Finishes Manual. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar equipment and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single pre- engineered aluminum stair manufacturer. 2. The pre- engineered aluminum stair manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the pre - engineered aluminum stair manufacturer. C. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of2010 Florida Building Code and local building regulations. D. Source Quality Control: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for entire design, fabrication and installation of pre- engineered aluminum stair Work. E. The Shop Drawings and calculations shall be prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida and is a recognized expert in the type of Work shown and specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: a. Representative samples of materials including nosings, tread material, and others items as requested by the CITY. Review will be for type only. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 11- 0025 -UT 05511 -2 Pre - Engineered Aluminum Stairs 2. Shop Drawings: a. Erection and detailed Shop Drawings, which show the plan location, elevation and details for the fabrication and erection of the aluminum stair Work. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include details of all connections between all materials. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Provide signed and sealed Shop Drawings and calculations, which are prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast - in -place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Pre - engineered aluminum stairs shall comply with the requirements ofthe NAAMM, "Metal Stairs Manual ". B. Sizes of miscellaneous items such as carrier angles and platform stiffeners, and design stresses shall be as recommended in Section 4 of the "Metal Stairs Manual ", unless otherwise shown. C. All required stair loadings and other stair related requirements shall comply with the 2010 Florida Building Code. 11- 0025 -UT 05511 -3 Pre- Engineered Aluminum Stairs 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Use welding for joining pieces together, unless otherwise shown or specified. Welding to comply with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.2/D1.2M. Fabricate units so that bolts and other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Make joints true and tight, and make connections between parts light -proof tight. Provide continuous welds, ground smooth where exposed. 2. Construct stair units to conform to sizes and arrangements as shown. Provide pre- engineered aluminum framing, hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components for the support of pre- engineered aluminum stairs and platforms. Erect pre- engineered aluminum stair Work to line, plumb, square, and true with runs registering level with floor and platform levels. 3. Provide brackets and bearing surfaces as detailed and as required to anchor and contain the pre- engineered aluminum stairs on the supporting structure. 4. Finish: Provide Architectural mill finish as specified in the NAAMM Manual. 5. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: Coat all surfaces of aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials, such as concrete, masonry and steel as specified in Section 09900, Painting B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of structural aluminum channels, or plates, or a combination thereof, as shown. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. 2. Construct platforms of structural aluminum channel headers and miscellaneous framing members, as shown. Bolt or weld headers to stringers. Bolt or weld framing members to strings and headers. C. Aluminum Grating Treads and Platforms: 1. Stair Tread Design Loads: Concentrated live load shall be follows: a. 300 pound on front 5 -inch of tread at center of tread span up to 5 feet -6 inches. b. 300 pound on front 5 -inch of tread at 1/3 points of tread span greater than 5 feet -6 inches. 2. Maximum Clear Span Deflection for Concentrated Live Loads: 1/240 of span, but not more than 1/4 -inch. 3. Maximum Fiber Stress: 12,000 psi. 4. Minimum Size of Members: a. Minimum size of bearing bars shall be within standard mill tolerance of that shown on the Load Tables in the NAAMM MBG 531 Manual for applicable loading and deflection requirements. b. Minimum dimensions of cross bars shall be as shown on the tables of Minimum Standard Cross Bars and Connecting Bars in the NAAMM MBG 531 Manual. 11- 0025 -UT 05511 -4 Pre- Engineered Aluminum Stairs 5. Banding bar thickness shall be the same as the bearing bar to which it is attached. 6. Fabricate grating treads with abrasive nosing on one edge and with aluminum angle or aluminum plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. D. Stair Aluminum Railing: 1. Aluminum railings shall conform to the requirements of Section 05522, Aluminum Handrails and Railings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify the CITY, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing pre - engineered aluminum stairs to in -place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts and other connectors as required. The anchorage devices and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for the installation of the pre - engineered aluminum stairs. Set the pre- engineered aluminum stairs accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 11- 0025 -UT 05511 -5 Pre- Engineered Aluminum Stairs 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 05511 -6 Pre - Engineered Aluminum Stairs SECTION 05522 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install aluminum handrail and railing systems. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in, and attachments to, aluminum handrail and railing systems to accommodate the Work under this and other Specification Sections. Provide all items for aluminum handrails and railings, including anchorages, fasteners, studs, and other items required for which provision for is not specifically included under other Sections. 2. Aluminum handrails and railings Work shall include components and features shown and specified, and all components and features available from specified manufacturers required for providing complete aluminum handrail and railing system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before aluminum handrails and railings Work. 2. Aluminum handrail and railing locations shall comply with Laws and Regulations. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 2. Section 09900, Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AA, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. ASTM B26/B26M, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings. 3. ASTM B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 4. ASTM B136, Standard Method for Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum. 5. ASTM B137, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass per Unit Area on Anodically Coated Aluminum. 6. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -1 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 7. ASTM B241/B241M, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 8. ASTM B244, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy - Current Instruments. 9. ASTM B247, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and rolled Ring Forgings. 10. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 11. ASTM E 935, Standard Test Methods for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 12. NAAMM/Architectural Metal Products Division (AMP), Pipe Railing Manual. 13. NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 Finishes for Aluminum. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Upon request manufacturer shall submit document at least five years successful experience in fabricating aluminum handrail and railing systems of scope and type similar to that required. 2. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or handrail and railing manufacturer shall retain a Registered Professional Engineer legally qualified to practice in the State of Florida . Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing aluminum handrails and railings. b. Responsibilities include: 1) Reviewing aluminum handrail and railing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2) Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to CITY by CONTRACTOR. 3) Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of aluminum handrail and railing system with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4) Signing and sealing all calculations. 5) Certifying that: a) Design of aluminum handrail and railing system was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and b) Design conforms to all applicable local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -2 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 3. Installer: a. Retain a single installer trained and with record of successful experience in installing aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Installer shall have record of successfully installing aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer, or shall provide evidence of being acceptable to the manufacturer. c. Installer shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. d. Submit name and qualifications of installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects: 1) Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. 2) Approximate contract cost of the aluminum handrail and railing systems for which installer was responsible. 3) Amount (linear feet) of aluminum handrail and railing installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all materials furnished under this Section regardless of component manufacturer, from a single aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer. 2. Aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals (except for delegated design submittals, when professional engineer is retained by other than handrail and railing manufacturer) for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be specifically constructed for specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by aluminum handrails and railings manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Laws and Regulations including: 1. OSHA Part 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes. 2. Codes: a. Comply with the applicable requirements of OSHA and 2010 edition of the Florida Building Code. b. If there is a conflict between the OSHA requirements and the 2010 edition of the Florida Building Code, comply with whichever requirement is more stringent. D. Certifications: 1. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of manufacturer and notarized, stating that handrail and railing systems comply with the design prepared by the Registered Professional Engineer. 2. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of CONTRACTOR and notarized, stating that all components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer. 1 1- 0025 -UT 05522 -3 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum handrail and railing systems with sizes of members, pipe wall thickness, information on components, and anchorage devices. Show all anchorages. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5 -inch equal to one foot. b. Indicate required location of posts. c. Indicate locations and details of all expansion joints, if any. d. Indicate locations and details of gaps across seismic joints, if any. e. Profile drawings of aluminum handrail and railing system components. f. Custom detail drawings. Details of forming, jointing, sections, connections, internal supports, trim and accessories. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5 -inch equal to one foot. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, standard detail drawings, and installation instructions for aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Manufacturer's catalogs showing complete selection of standard and custom components and miscellaneous accessories for selection by CITY. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Design Data: 1) Design computations or complete structural analysis of handrail and railing systems, signed and sealed by Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida. Professional Engineer's seal shall be clearly legible, including state of registration, registration number, and name on seal. 2) Certification by Registered Professional Engineer that they have performed design of aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and that design conforms to all local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. 4. Test Procedure: Submit detailed description of proposed shop testing procedures. Do not perform shop testing until CITY approves shop test procedure: B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification on source of supply, as specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. b. Manufacturer certification specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer's load testing report in accordance with ASTM E935 for completed aluminum handrail and railing systems, demonstrating 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -4 Aluminum Handrails and Railings compliance with applicable requirements of building codes, safety codes, and other Laws and Regulations. 3. Qualifications Statements: Submit qualifications for the following: a. Manufacturer, when requested by CITY. b. Professional engineer. c. Installer, when requested by CITY. Qualifications statement shall include record of experience with references specified. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish detailed maintenance manuals that include the following: a. Product name and number. b. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning, including cleaning materials, application methods and precautions in use of products that may be detrimental to finish when improperly applied. c. Handrail and railings systems manufacturer's current catalog including individual parts. d. Maintenance manuals shall be in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. 2. Guarantee: Provide in maintenance manual the guarantee specified. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. After completing installation, deliver to CITY five percent of actual quantity of each handrail and railing system component used in the Work. b. Label each piece or sealed container with name and product number. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep products off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect products from corrosion and deterioration. B. Handling of Products: 1. Do not subject handrail and railing products to bending or stress. 2. Do not damage edges or handle products in a manner that will cause scratches, warping, or dents. 3. Protect handrails and railings by paper or coating as acceptable to handrail and railing manufacturer, against scratching, splashes of mortar, paint, and other marring during transportation, handling, and erection. Protect until completion of adjacent work. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -5 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee: Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of availability of replacement parts and components for period of at least five years after completion of the Project. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: Aluminum handrail and railing system shall consist of equally spaced horizontal rails with totally concealed mechanical fasteners, internally threaded tubular rivets and components fastened to posts spaced no more than five feet on centers and system of handrails supported from adjacent construction by mounting brackets spaced at no more than five feet on centers. B. Design Criteria and Performance Criteria: 1. Design, fabricate, and install aluminum handrail and railing systems to withstand the most critical effects resulting from the following loads (loads listed below do not act concurrently): a. Uniform Load: 50 pounds per foot, applied at top in any direction. b. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds single load, applied at any point along the top in any direction. c. Components: Intermediate rails (all rails except the handrail), balusters, and panel fillers, if any, shall withstand horizontally - applied normal load of 50 pounds on an area equal to one square foot, including openings and space between rails. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed to loading specified for main supporting members of handrails and railings. d. Comply with AA Aluminum Design Manual for determining allowable stresses and safety factors for aluminum structural components. e. Limit deflection in each single span of railing and handrail to 1.5 -inch maximum, and to 1/4 -inch maximum on railing posts. Applied loads shall not produce permanent deflection in the completed Work when loads are removed. 2. Thermal Control: Provide adequate expansion within fabricated systems that allows for thermal expansion and contraction caused by material temperature change of 140 T to -20 °F without warp or bow of system components. Distance between expansion joints shall be based on providing 1/4 -inch wide joint at 70 °F, which accommodates movement of 150 percent of calculated amount of movement for specified temperature range. 3. Where handrail and railing systems cross expansion joints in the building or structure, provide expansion joints in handrail and railings systems. 4. For posts located at or near end of runs as shown, uniformly space intermediate posts as required to conform to loading and deflection criteria 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -6 Aluminum Handrails and Railings specified, at intervals no greater than maximum post spacing specified. Where posts are shown for handrails along both sides of walkways and other similar locations, locate posts opposite each other; do not stagger post locations. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Wesrail, by Moultrie Manufacturing Company. 2. Alumaguard, by Alumaguard — A division of Bettinger West, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum Architectural and Ornamental Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063 -T52. B. Aluminum Forgings: ASTM B247. C. Extruded or Drawn Aluminum Pipe and Tube: 1. ASTM B429 or ASTM B241/B241M, Alloy 6063 -T5, 6063 -T52, or 6063 - T832 as required by loadings, deflections, and post spacing specified. 2. Provide Schedule 40 pipe, minimum, unless conditions of detail and fabrication require extra -heavy pipe to comply with Specifications. Rails and posts shall have minimum outside diameter of 1.90 inches. D. Reinforcing Bars: Urethane foam - filled, Schedule 80, 23 inches long 6061 -T6 aluminum reinforcing bars or tubes with outside diameter same as inside diameter of post. E. Anchors and Fastenings: 1. For anchors and fasteners, use Type 316 stainless steel; minimum 3/8 -inch diameter. 2. Provide minimum of four bolt fasteners per post where surface - mounted posts are shown. Components shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved or accepted (as applicable) by CITY on submittals. 3. Anchors: In accordance with Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts. F. Castings: 1. Provide high- strength aluminum alloy brackets, flanges, and fittings suitable for anodizing as specified. 2. Aluminum alloy sand castings: ASTM B26/B26M. G. Connector Sleeves: Schedule 40, five -inch long by 1.610 -inch diameter. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -7 Aluminum Handrails and Railings H. Sockets: Provide six -inch deep by 2.5 -inch outside diameter aluminum sockets with 3.5 -inch wide socket cover on bottom of each socket and on top and bottom of removable post sockets. I. Chain, Snaps, and Eye Bolts: Provide oblong 1/4 -inch welded link, Type 316 stainless steel chain weighing 57 pounds per cubic foot, each link 1.25 -inch by 7/16 -inch. Provide Type 316 stainless steel eyebolts, 1/4 -inch stainless steel threaded quick links and heavy -duty swivel snaps with spring loaded latch. J. Custom Cover Flanges: 1/4 -inch high by four -inch diameter, aluminum. K. Non -shrink Grout: Comply with ASTM C1 107 /C 1107M, Grade C and B. L. Toeboards: 1. Provide extruded Alloy 6063 -T5 or T52 aluminum alloy toeboards, unless railing is mounted on curbs or other construction of sufficient height and type to comply with OSHA 1910.23. Bars or plates are not acceptable. 2. Unless otherwise specified, toeboards shall comply with OSHA 1910.23, Section (e). M. System Components and Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide complete selection of manufacturer's standard and custom aluminum handrail and railing systems components and miscellaneous accessories required. Show type and location of all such items on Shop Drawings and other submittals as applicable. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide typical non - welded construction details and fabrication techniques recommended in NAAMM /AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. B. Fabricate handrail and railing systems true to line and level, with accurate angles surfaces and straight edges. Fabricate corners without using fittings. Provide bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. Form elbow bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists, with smooth finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends. Provide not less than four -inch outside radius. C. Provide chains across openings in railings where shown. Attach one end of each chain to an eyebolt in post and other end attached by means of swivel eye snap hook to similar eyebolt in opposite post. D. Remove burrs from exposed edges. E. Close aluminum pipe ends by using prefabricated fittings. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -8 Aluminum Handrails and Railings F. Weep Holes: 1. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather to exclude water. 2. Provide 15/64 -inch diameter weep holes at lowest possible point on each post in handrail and railing systems. 3. Provide pressure relief holes at closed ends of handrail and railing systems. G. Toeboards: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard toeboard, that accommodates movement caused by thermal change specified without warping or bowing toeboards. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard toeboard, which accommodates storage for removable socket covers. 3. Coordinate and cope toeboard as required to accommodate cover flanges at posts. 4. Toeboards shall follow curvature of railing. Where railing is shown to have curved contours at corners, or other locations, toeboard shall likewise be curved to follow line of railing system. H. Reinforcing Bars: Provide reinforcing bar friction - fitted at each post in railing system. Extend reinforcing bars of tubes six inches into cast -in -place sleeves or other types of supporting brackets. I. Mechanically Fitted Component Pipe Handrail and Railing System: 1. Use non - welded pipe handrail and railing system with posts, top and intermediate rail(s), and flush joints. 2. Provide top and two intermediate horizontal rail(s), equally spaced. 3. Use Type 304/305 stainless steel blind rivets and Type 304/305 stainless steel self - tapping screws in assembling components of the Work. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendation of aluminum producer and the aluminum finisher or processor. 2. Adjust and control direction of mechanical finishes specified to achieve best overall visual effect in the Work. 3. Color and Texture Tolerance: Provide uniform color and continuous mechanical texture for aluminum components. CITY reserves the right to reject aluminum materials because of color or texture variations that are visually objectionable, but only where variation exceed range of variations established by manufacturer prior to fabrication, by means of range of Samples approved by CITY. 4. Anodize aluminum components. B. Finish: 1. Mechanically finish aluminum by wheel or belt polishing with aluminum oxide grit of 180 to 220 size, using peripheral wheel speed of 6,000 feet per minute; AA Designation - M32 Medium Satin Directional Texture. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -9 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 2. Hand - Rubbed Finish: Where required to complete the Work and provide uniform, continuous texture, provide hand - rubbed finish to match medium satin directional texture specified to even out and blend satin finishes produced by other means. C. Cleaning: 1. Provide non - etching chemical cleaning by immersing aluminum in inhibited chemical solution, as recommended by coating applicator, to remove lard oil, fats, mineral grease, and other contamination detrimental to providing specified finishes. 2. Clean and rinse with water between steps as recommended by aluminum manufacturer. D. Exposed Aluminum Anodic Coating: Provide anodic coatings as specified that do not depend on dyes, organic or inorganic pigments, or impregnation processes to obtain color. Apply coatings using only the alloy, temperature, current density, and acid electrolytes to obtain specified colors in compliance with designation system and requirements of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. Comply with the following: 1. Provide Architectural Class I high density anodic treatment by immersing the components in tank containing solution of 15 percent sulfuric acid at 70 degrees F with 12 amperes per square foot of direct current for minimum of sixty minutes; AA Designation A41 Clear. 2. Physical Properties: a. Anodic Coating Thickness, ASTM B244: Minimum of 0.7 -mils thick. b. Anodic Coating Weight, ASTM B137: Minimum of 32 mg/sq. in. c. Resistance to Staining, ASTM B136: No stain after five minutes dye solution exposure. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B117: 30,000 hours exposure with no corrosion or shade change. 3. Seal finished anodized coatings using deionized boiling water to seal pores and prevent further absorption. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Alumilite 215 Clear by Aluminum Company of America, Inc. b. Or equal. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Limit variation of cast -in -place inserts, sleeves and field- drilled anchor and fastener holes to the following: a. Spacing: Plus -or -minus 3/8 -inch. b. Alignment: Plus -or -minus 1/4 -inch. c. Plumbness: Plus -or -minus 1/8-inch. 2. Minimum Handrails and Railings Systems Plumb Criteria: a. Limit variation of completed handrail and railing system alignment to 1/4 -inch in 12 feet with posts set plumb to within 1/16 -inch in 3.0 feet. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -10 Aluminum Handrails and Railings b. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of stairs and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 -inch in 12.0 feet. 3. Provide "pencil -line" thin butt joints. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine conditions under which Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify to CITY the gage of aluminum pipe railing posts and rails brought to the Site by actual measurement of on -Site material in presence of CITY. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not erect components that are scarred, dented, chipped, discolored, otherwise damaged, or defaced. Remove from Site railing and handrail system components that have holes, cuts, gouges, deep scratches, or dents of any kind. Repairs to correct such Work will not be accepted. Remove and replace with new material. 2. Comply with installation and anchorage recommendations of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 in addition to requirements specified and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: 1. Remove protective plastic immediately before installing. 2. Adjust handrails and railings prior to securing in place, to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building or structure as follows: a. Anchor posts in concrete by providing sockets set and anchored into concrete floor slab. Provide closure secured to bottom of sleeve. Before installing posts, remove debris and water from sleeves. Verify that reinforcing bars or tubes have been inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. For all non - removable handrail and railing systems sections, after posts have been inserted into sockets, fill annular space between posts and sockets solid with grout as specified in Section 03600, Grout. Crown the grout and slope grout to drain away from posts. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -11 Aluminum Handrails and Railings b. Anchor posts to stair stringers with stringer or support flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, shop- connected to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. Flanges shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that reinforcing bars are inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. c. Side -mount posts by fastening them securely in brackets attached to steel or concrete fascia as shown and in accordance with approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. d. Provide removable railing sections where shown. Provide removable railing system posts with friction -fitted reinforcing bar in each post. Provide sockets with socket covers stored in extruded toeboard. Provide aluminum pipe collars for all removable posts. Accurately locate sleeves to match post spacing. e. Provide posts set in concrete with an aluminum floor cover flange. 3. Use devices and fasteners recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set the Work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Do not cut or abrade surfaces of units that have been finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connections. 3. Make permanent field splice connections using stainless steel blind rivets and five -inch minimum length connector sleeves. Tight press -fit field splice connectors and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction. Install two blind rivets per joint on 180- degree centers. 4. Make splices as near as possible to posts, but not exceeding 12 inches from nearest post. 5. Field welding is not allowed. Make splices using pipe splice lock employing a single alien screw to lock joint. 6. Provide hinged gates as shown. 7. Provide chain sections as shown. Provide one chain length with fastening accessories for top and each intermediate rail. 8. Secure handrails to walls with wall brackets and end fittings as shown. Drill wall plate portion of the bracket to receive one bolt, unless otherwise shown for concealed anchorage. Locate brackets as shown or, if not shown, at not more than five feet on centers. Provide flush type wall return fittings with same projection shown for wall brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building or structure. Refer to Section 05051, Anchor Systems. 9. Securely fasten toeboards in place with not more than 1/4 -inch clearance above floor level. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -12 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 10. Drill one 15/64 -inch diameter weep hole not more than 1/4 -inch above top of location of solid reinforcing bar or tube in each post. D. Fastening to Existing Construction: 1. Provide heavy -duty floor flange and anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrail and railing systems components to existing construction; including stainless steel threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through- bolts, lag bolts and other connectors as required. Refer to Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 2. Use devices and fasteners recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. E. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending not less than two inches beyond joint on each side. 2. Construct expansion joints as for field splices, except fasten internal sleeve securely to one side of rail only. 3. Locate joints within six inches of posts. F. Protection from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel, in accordance with Section 09900, Painting. 2. Do not extend coating beyond contact surfaces. Remove coating where exposed -to -view in the finished Work. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of handrail and railing systems after completion of installation. Comply with recommendations of both handrail and railing system manufacturer and finish manufacturer. Do not use abrasives or unacceptable solvent cleaners. Test cleaning techniques on an unused section of railing before employing cleaning technique. 2. Remove stains, dirt, grease, and other substances by washing handrails and railings systems thoroughly using clean water and soap; rinse with clean water. 3. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives. 4. If stain remains after washing, remove defective sections and replace with new material complying with this Section. B. Handrails and railings shall be free of dents, burrs, scratches, holes, and other blemishes. Replace damaged or otherwise defective Work with new material that complies with this Section at no additional cost to CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 05522 -13 Aluminum Handrails and Railings C. Prior to Substantial Completion, replace adjacent work marred by the Work of this Section. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 05522 -14 Aluminum Handrails and Railings SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and apply paint systems. a. CONTRACTOR is responsible for surface preparation and painting of all new and existing interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the Project areas included under this and other Sections. 2. Extent of painting includes the Work specified below. Painting shown in schedules may not provide CONTRACTOR with complete indication of all painting Work. Refer to Article 2.2 of this Section where all surfaces of generic types specified are specified for preparation and painting according to their status, intended function, and location, using the painting system for that surface, function, and location as specified, unless specifically identified on the Drawings as a surface not to receive specified painting system. a. All new items except where natural finish of material is specified as a corrosion- resistant material not requiring paint; or is specifically shown as indicated by written note, or specified as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint them the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. b. Surface preparation and painting of all new items, both interior and exterior, and other surfaces, are included in the Work, except as otherwise shown or specified. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation, removal, and demolition procedures under other Sections and coordinate them with the Work specified in this Section. 2. Coordinate painting of areas that will become inaccessible once equipment and similar fixed items have been installed. 3. Furnish information to CITY on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use and ensure compatibility with prime coats used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and repaint as required. Notify CITY in writing of anticipated problems using specified painting systems with surfaces primed by others. Reprime equipment primed in factory and other factory - primed items that are damaged or scratched. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -1 Painting C. Work Not Included: The following Work is not included as painting Work, or are included under other Sections or in other contracts: 1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of structural metal, miscellaneous metal fabrications, other metal items and fabricated components such as shop - fabricated or factory- painted process equipment, plumbing equipment, heating and ventilating equipment, electrical equipment, and accessories shall conform to applicable requirements of this Section but are included under other Sections. 2. Pre - finished Items: a. Items furnished with such finishes as baked -on enamel, porcelain, and polyvinylidene fluoride shall only be touched up at Site by CONTRACTOR using manufacturer's recommended compatible field - applied touchup paint. b. Items furnished with finishes such as chrome plating or anodizing. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Non - metallic wall or ceiling surfaces in areas not exposed to view, and generally inaccessible areas, such as furred spaces, pipe chases, and duct shafts. 4. Concrete surfaces below elevation 50.50, unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Concrete floors, unless specifically shown as a surface to be painted. 6. Face brick, glazed structural tile, and prefaced, ground -faced or split -faced concrete unit masonry. 7. Exterior face of architectural precast concrete. 8. Collector bearings, shafts and chains, wood flights, wood stop logs, and wood or fiberglass baffles. 9. Corrosion- Resistant Metal Surfaces: Where the natural oxide of item forms a barrier to corrosion, whether factory- or Site - formed, including such materials as copper, bronze, muntz metal, terne metal, and stainless steel. 10. Operating Parts and Labels: a. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, interior of motors, and fan shafts. b. Do not paint over labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at Site, or equipment identification, performance rating, nameplates, and nomenclature plates. c. Cover moving parts and labels during the painting with protective masking. Remove all protective masking upon completion of Work. Remove all paint, coatings, and splatter that comes in contact with such labels. 11. Structural and miscellaneous metals covered with concrete need not receive primers, intermediate, or finish coats of paint. D. Description of Colors and Finishes: 1. Color Selection: a. CITY reserves the right to select non - standard colors for paint systems specified within ability of paint manufacturer to produce such non- 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -2 Painting standard colors. Provide such colors at no additional expense to the CITY. 2. Color Coding of Pipelines, Valves, Equipment, and Ducts: a. Color- coding of pipelines, valves, equipment and ducts shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1, CFR 1910.144, Recommended Standards for Water Works, and Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities. For piping and equipment not covered by the above standards, conform to the CITY's color standards. b. For equipment located on roofs and equipment that is exposed -to- view, color will be selected by CITY. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ANSI Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 3. ASTM D16, Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications. 4. ASTM D2200, Pictoral Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces. 5. ASTM D4262, Testing Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 6. ASTM D4263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 7. ASTM D4541, Test Methods for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion - Testers. 8. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 9. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of Public Health and Environmental Managers (GLUMRB) Recommended Standards for Water Works. 10. GLUMRB, Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities. 11. Ozone Transport Commission, (OTC), OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 12. SSPC PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 13. SSPC VIS 1, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 14. SSPC VIS 2, Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting/Painted Steel Surfaces. 15. SSPC Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -3 Painting 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Engage a single applicator regularly performing installation of painting systems, with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of products required and agrees to employ only tradesmen trained, skilled, and with successful experience in installing types of products specified. B. Testing Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct testing specified in accordance with ASTM E329. Testing shall be carried out by manufacturer and paid for by CONTRACTOR. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Submit "or equal" products, when proposed, with direct comparison to products specified, including information on durability, adhesion, color and gloss retention, percent solids, VOC's grams per liter, and recoatability after curing. 2. "Or equal" manufacturers shall furnish same color selection as manufacturers specified, including intense chroma and custom pigmented colors in painting systems. 3. Color Pigments: Provide pure, non- fading, applicable types to suit surfaces and services indicated. Comply with the following: a. Lead and Chromate: Lead and chromate content shall not exceed amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Through CONTRACTOR, paint manufacturer shall notify CITY of colors that are not suitable for long -term color retention in areas subject to hydrogen sulfide fume exposure. c. Comply with paint manufacturers' recommendations on preventing coating contact with levels of carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide that may cause yellowing during application and initial stages of curing of paint coatings. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with VOC content limits of Ozone Transport Commission (OTC), Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. E. Pre - Painting Conference: 1. Conduct a pre - painting conference at the Site to review specified requirements. Meeting attendees shall include painting applicator and its foreman, paint manufacturer's technical representative, CITY, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of painting Work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -4 Painting a. Copies of manufacturer's technical data sheets, including surface preparation, number of coats, dry film thickness, test performance data including paint analysis, VOC and chemical component content in comparison to maximum allowed by the Contact Documents, and application instructions for each product proposed for use. b. Copies of CONTRACTOR's proposed protection procedures in each area of the Work explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption, and for maintaining acceptable application, curing, and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. c. List each material and cross - reference to the specific painting system and application, including a list of site - specific surfaces to which painting system will be applied. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. State number of gallons of each product being purchased for delivery to Site and square foot area calculated to be covered by each painting system specified based on theoretical loss of 20 percent. Where actual area to be covered by paint system exceeds area submitted to CITY for that system, proof of additional material purchase shall be provided to CITY. Calculated coverage shall be as specified for each component of each painting system specified. This requirement does not take precedence over CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide dry film thickness required for each component of each painting system. d. Identify maximum exposure times allowable for each paint system component before next coat of paint can be applied. Submit proposed methods for preparing surfaces for subsequent coats if maximum exposure times are exceeded. e. Information on curing times and environmental conditions that affect curing time of each paint system component and proposed methods for accommodating variations in curing time. Identify this information for each painting system in the Work. f. Specification for spray equipment with cross - reference to paint manufacturer's recommended equipment requirements. 2. Samples: a. Copies of manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: I. Certificates: a. Certificate from paint manufacturer stating that materials meet or exceed Contract Documents requirements. b. All painting systems components shall be reviewed by an authorized technical representative of paint manufacturer for use as a compatible system. Verify that all painting systems are acceptable for exposures specified and that paint manufacturer is in agreement that selected 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -5 Painting systems are proper, compatible, and are not in conflict with paint manufacturer's recommended specifications. 2. Test Reports: a. Test reports for required performance and analysis testing in compliance with ASTM E329. b. Adhesion testing plan and procedures. c. Results of adhesion testing on existing surfaces containing paints or other coatings to be topcoated with paint systems specified. Prior to adhesion testing, submit a testing plan establishing methods, procedures and number of tests in each area where existing coatings are to remain and become substrate for painting Work. Based on results of adhesion testing, recommend methods, procedures, and painting system modifications, if necessary, for proceeding with Work. d. Proposed methods for testing, handling, and disposal of waste generated during Work. e. Results of alkalinity and moisture content tests performed per ASTM D4262 and ASTM D4263. f. Results of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections tests. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide paint manufacturer's storage, handling, and application instructions prior to commencing painting Work at Site. 4. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Proposed protection procedures for each area of Work, explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption. b. Health and safety plan. c. Procedures for maintaining acceptable application, curing and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. Procedures for providing adequate lighting, ventilation, and personal protection equipment relative to painting Work. 5. Qualifications: a. Applicator. b. Testing laboratory. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the painting Work, furnish CITY five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Complete and updated product catalog of paint manufacturer's currently available products including complete technical information on each product. Identify product names and numbers of each product used in the painting Work. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer, local distributor, applicator and technical representative. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -6 Painting d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 2. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the painting Work, submit a statement to CITY signed by CONTRACTOR and painting applicator stating that Work complies with requirements of the Contract Documents and that application methods, equipment, and environmental conditions were proper and adequate for conditions of installation and use. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery Requirements: Deliver products to Site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers, accurately and legibly and accurately labeled with the following: 1. Container contents, including name and generic description of product. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Grams per liter of volatile organic compounds. 6. Thinning instructions, where recommended. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Product Storage Requirements: 1. Store acceptable materials at Site. 2. Store in an environmentally controlled location as recommended in paint manufacturer's written product information. Keep area clean and accessible. Prevent freezing of products. 3. Store products that are not in actual use in tightly covered containers. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. C. Product Handling Requirements: 1. Handle products in a manner that minimizes the potential for contamination, or incorrect product catalyzation. 2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory work has been completed and approved by CITY and painting Work will start immediately. 3. Maintain containers used in storing, mixing, and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Facilities: 1. Supplemental heat sources, as required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within range recommended by paint manufacturer for paint system applications, are not available at the Site. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -7 Painting 2. Provision of supplemental heat energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance, and temperature- monitoring personnel is CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 3. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas being painted. Properly locate and vent heat sources to exterior so that paint systems and personnel are unaffected by exhaust products. B. Existing Conditions: 1. For existing surfaces to receive painting Work, provide abrasive blasting, scraping, or other abrading or surface film removal, or preparatory techniques, per paint system manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Before commencing painting in an area, surfaces to be painted and floors shall be cleaned of dust using commercial vacuum cleaning equipment equipped with high - efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters and dust containment systems. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's published requirements. D. Protection: 1. Cover or otherwise protect finished Work of other trades and those surfaces not being painted concurrently and not to be painted. 2. During surface preparation and painting, facility shall remain in operation. Use procedures that prevent contamination of process or cause or require facility shutdown. 3. Coordinate and schedule surface preparation and painting to avoid exposing personnel to hazards associated with painting Work. Provide required personnel safety equipment per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 4. When working with flammable materials, provide fire extinguishers and post temporary signs warning against smoking and open flame. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Where referenced under painting systems, provide painting systems manufactured by the following: 1. ITW Futura Coatings (FUT). 2. Tnemec Company, Incorporated (TCI). 3. The Carboline Company, part of StonCor Group, an RMP Company (TCC). 4. Sherwin- Williams Company (SWC). 5. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -8 Painting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.2 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. New and Existing Exterior Cast -In -Place Concrete, Including Concrete Unit Masonry, Smooth Finish; Above - Grade, Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for products and surface condition. 2. Cast -In -Place Concrete and Unit Masonry Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 49 percent volume solids, flexible, high- build, single - component, modified waterborne acrylate coating that can fill and bridge minor hairline cracks; 96 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 156 Enviro -Crete (TCI); Sanitile 100 (TCC); PrepRite Block Filler (SWC): One coat, 6.0 to 8.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Matt: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 36 percent volume solids, flexible, high- build, single component, modified waterborne acrylate, acrylic epoxy, or waterborne acrylic coating that can fill and bridge minor hairline cracks; 138 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 156 Enviro -Crete (TCI); Carbocrylic 3359 (TCC); Epo -Plex Multi -Mil Low - Luster (SWC): One coat, 6.0 to 8.0 dry mils. B. New and Existing Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: 1. Surface Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for products and surface condition. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high- build, two - component, polyamido -amine or polyamine epoxy; 49 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Dura -Plate UHS (SWC): Two coats, 8.0 to 15.0 dry mils, per coat. C. New and Existing PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass Insulation Covering; Non - submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for products and surface condition. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids single- component, self -cross linking acrylic primer- sealer; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 115 Uni -Bond DF (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -9 Painting 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids, single component, self -cross linking acrylic; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 116 Uni -Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 2.3 INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments: 1. Use a dry -film thickness gauge for checking film thickness, a holiday detector to detect holidays or holes in the coating, and a set of visual standards to check surface preparation. Calibrate dry film thickness gauge at Site using Bureau of Standards standard shim blocks. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Use the following: a. Film Thickness Testers: Model FM -III manufactured by Mikrotest, or equal. b. Holiday detector shall be Model M -1 as manufactured by Tinker & Rasor, or equal. c. Visual Standards: ASTM D2200, Swedish Standards, SSPC VIS 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting Work is to be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to CITY. B. Do not paint over existing paint where there is no assurance that existing paint will provide an acceptable surface for long -term adherence and durability of painting systems specified, or where paint manufacturer requires removal of all existing paint to recommend use of specified painting system. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Comply with paint manufacturer's published recommendations for products, surface condition, and surface preparation. 3.3 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND STRUCTURES A. Protect property and structures adjacent to the Work from waste residues resulting from cleaning, surface preparation, and painting Work. 11 -0025 -UT 09900 -10 Painting B. Use shrouding, vacuum blasting, or other acceptable methods for cleaning and surface preparation of exterior surfaces. C. During blast cleaning and surface preparation of interior and exterior surfaces, control exhausting of dust and grit using shrouding, negative - pressure containment /dust collection systems, or other means to protect adjacent property and structures and prevent dust and grit from escaping. Similarly, control removal and temporarily store residues to protect adjacent property and structures. D. For painting of exterior surfaces, use rollers, shrouding, or other acceptable methods as required to protect adjacent property and structures from wind -blown paint residues. E. Submit proposed procedures for cleaning, surface preparation, and paint application that describe in detail methods to be used to protect adjacent property and structures from residues. 3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General: Mix and prepare painting products in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's product data sheets. 3.5 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint systems by brush, roller, or airless spray per paint manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with Paint Application Specifications No. 1 in SSPC Volume 2, where applicable, and in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's product data sheets. 2. Except for pipelines, surfaces of items not normally exposed -to -view do not require the same color as other components of the system of which they are a part, but require.the same painting system specified for exposed surfaces of system. Color -coded piping systems are required to meet color - coding standards. 3. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non - specular black paint before final installation of registers or grilles. 4. Paint backs of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Omit field- applied primer on metal surfaces that have been primed in the shop. Touch -up paint to shop - primed coats and pre - finished items only when approved by CITY using compatible primers and paint manufacturer's recommended compatible field - applied finishes. 6. Welds shall be stripe- coated with intermediate or finish coat of paint after application of prime coat. 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -11 Painting B. Minimum/Maximum Paint Film Thickness: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for coating type and surface. C. Scheduling Surface Preparation and Painting: Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for coating type and surface. D. Prime Coats: Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to result in a finish coat with no burn- through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. F. Brush Application: 1. Brush -out and work all brush coats onto the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections are unacceptable. Neatly draw all glass and color break lines. 2. Brush -apply all primer or first coats, unless otherwise allowed to use mechanical applicators. G. Mechanical Applicators: 1. Use mechanical methods for applying paint when allowed by applicable ordinances, paint manufacturer, and approved by CITY. 2. Limit roller applications, if approved by CITY, to interior wall finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide equivalent hiding as brush- applied coats. 3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush - applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not in compliance with specified requirements as required by CITY. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections, and after acceptance by CITY, proceed with succeeding coat. Perform testing using testing instruments specified in Article 2.4 of this Section. 1. CITY will witness all testing and shall be notified of scheduled testing at least twenty -four hours in advance. 2. Apply additional coats, if required, to produce specified film thickness and to correct holidays and to completely fill all surface air holes. B. For magnetic substrates, measure thickness of dry film nonmagnetic coatings following recommendations of SSPC PA -2. These procedures supplement 11- 0025 -UT 09900 -12 Painting 1 manufacturers' approved instructions for manual operation of measurement gauges and do not replace such instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting Work, remove temporary protective wrappings provided for protection of the Work. 3.8 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEAN -UP A. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to CITY. B. During progress of the Work, remove from Site all discarded paint products, rubbish, cans, and rags at end of each workday. C. Upon completion of painting, clean paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. D. At completion of Work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces as determined by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 1 + + END OF SECTION + + 09900 -13 Painting 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 09900 -14 Painting SECTION 13400 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up, and place in satisfactory operation a complete and operating instrumentation and control system. 2. The scope of work is for systems at two different locations: Marshall Street Laboratory and the East Wastewater Plant. a. The Marshall Street Lab work will require a PLC with load shedding scheme. This PLC will read the generator load and shed equipment by controlling electrically operated breakers connected to a Sub -net Bus controller. (Example: Powerlink 2000G3). PLC shall have Operator b. At the East Plant, Interface Terminal (OIT) to implement load shed screen control. A remote panel with OIT screen located in the electrical room shall communicate to an Allen Bradley Control Logics SCADA network using Ethernet IP. Signals from Generator, ATS and fuel system will be connected for monitoring and control. 3. The Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Panels and panel mounted instruments. b. Programmable logic controllers (PLC) and software. c. Programming of load shed scheme and creation of OIT screens. d. Programming of Alarms and creation of OIT and Trending screens. e. OIT software. f. Field instruments network communication hardware and software required for interfacing various systems to provide one fully integrated system. B. Coordination: 1. Instrumentation and Controls: a. Providing PLC w/ OIT, instruments, and controls are part of the Work by the instrumentation and controls (I &C) Subcontractor. Programming of control logic and configuration of OIT software is part of the Work. CONTRACTOR's configuration Subcontractor shall program and configure the software. Functional description of process system and associated equipment is included in Article 2.9 of this Section. b. Some panels and equipment are furnished under other Specification Sections under this Contract. Coordinate with Suppliers of these panels 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -1 Instrumentation and Control Equipment and equipment to provide fully functional system in accordance with the Contract Documents and that interfaces with central computer system. c. PLC input/output list identifies inputs and outputs required and are part of this Section. Input/output list is for coordinating signals between equipment provided by other Suppliers and computer system Supplier, and identifying signals to be programmed by CONTRACTOR's configuration Subcontractor. Include Work for CONTRACTOR - furnished control options not on the input /output list at no additional cost to CITY. C. Related Sections: 1 Section 09900, Painting. 2. Section 16442, Panelboards 3. Section 16231, Engine Generator System 4. Section 16412, Automatic Transfer Switch 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/ASQ Z1.4, Sampling Procedures and Tables For Inspection By Attributes. 2. ASTM A269, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 3. ASTM A312, Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 4. ASTM A403, Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. 5. ASTM B88, Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. IEEE 802.1 LAN/MAN Bridging & Management 7. IEEE 802.1X, Port Based Network Access Control. 8. IEEE 802.3, Standards Defining Physical Layer and Data Link Layer Media Access Control (MAC) Sub -layer of Wired Ethernet 9. ISA 5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 10. ISA 5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams. 11. ISA 20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement & Control Instruments, Primary Elements & Control Valves. 12. ISO 8802 -3, Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA /CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. 13. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 14. NFPA 70 (NEC), Article 770, Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways. 15. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. 16. UL 50, Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non - Environmental Considerations. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -2 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 17. UL 508A, Industrial Control Panels. 18. UL 698A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 19. UL 2062, Enclosures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Supplier: a. Shall be financially sound with at least 15 years continuous experience in designing, implementing, supplying, and supporting instrumentation and control systems for load management systems comparable to the instrumentation and control systems required for the Project, relative to hardware, software, cost, and complexity. b. Shall have record of successful instrumentation and control system equipment installations. Upon CITY's request, submit record of experience listing for each project: project name, owner name and contact information, name and contact information for contractor, name and contact information for engineer or architect, approximate contract value of instrumentation and controls Work for which Supplier was responsible, c. Shall have at time of Bid experienced engineering and technical staff capable of designing, supplying, implementing, and supporting the instrument and control system and complying with submittal and training requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Shall be capable of training operations and maintenance personnel in instrumentation and control applications, and in operating, programming, and maintaining the control system and equipment. e. Shall have UL- approved panel shop. f. Must be factory authorized Allen Bradley and Schneider Electric service representative 2. Manufacturer: Manufacturers of instrumentation and control equipment furnished under this Section shall be experienced producing similar equipment and shall have the following qualifications: a. Shall manufacture instrumentation and control system components that are fully - developed, field- proven, and of standardized designs. b. Shall have system of traceability of manufactured unit through production and testing in accordance with ANSUASQ Z1.4. c. Shall have guaranteed availability clause (99.99 percent, minimum for one year) for microprocessor -based components and appurtenances. d. Shall have documented product safety policy relevant to products proposed for the Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -3 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 11- 0025 -UT a. Field Instruments: 1) Manufacturer's product name and complete model number of devices proposed for use, including manufacturer's name and address. 2) Instrument tag number in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3) Data sheets and manufacturer's catalog literature. Provide data sheets in accordance with ISA 20 and annotated for features proposed for use. For instruments not included in ISA 20, submit data sheets using a format similar to ISA 20. 4) Description of construction features. 5) Performance and operation data. 6) Installation, mounting, and calibration details; instructions and recommendations. 7) Service requirements. 8) Dimensions of instruments and details of mating flanges and locations of closed tanks, pipe sizes for insertion instruments, and upstream /downstream straight run pipe lengths required. 9) Range of each device and calibration information 10) Descriptions of materials of construction and listing of NEMA ratings for equipment b. Panels, Consoles, and Cabinets: 1) Layout drawings that include: a) Front, rear, and internal panel views to scale. b) Tag number and functional name of components mounted in and on panel, console, or cabinet, as applicable. c) Product information on panel components. d) Nameplate location and legend including text, letter size and colors to be used. e) Location of anchorage connections. f) Location of external wiring and piping connections. g) Mounting and installation details, coordinated with actual application. h) Proposed layouts and sizes of operator interface graphic display panels and alarm annunciator panels. i) Calculations for heating and cooling of panels j) Subpanel layouts and mounting details for items located inside control panels. 2) Product information on panel components including: a) Manufacturer's product name and complete model number of devices being provided, including manufacturer's name and address. b) Instrument tag number in accordance with the Contract Documents. c) Data sheets and catalog literature. Submit data sheets as shown in ISA 20 and annotated for features proposed for use. For instruments not included in ISA 20, submit data sheets with format similar to ISA 20. 13400 -4 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 1 1 11- 0025 -UT 1 d) Description of construction features. e) Performance and operation data. f) Installation, mounting, and calibration details; instructions and recommendations. g) Service requirements 3) Wiring and piping diagrams, including the following: a) Name of each panel, console, or cabinet. b) Wire sizes and types. c) Pipe sizes and types. d) Terminal strip and terminal numbers. e) Wire color coding. f) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for g) Lightning and surge protection grounding. 4) Electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79. Drawings shall be in accordance with convention indicated in Annex D of the NFPA 79. Typical wiring diagrams that do not accurately reflect actual wiring to be furnished are unacceptable. Tables or charts for describing wire numbers are unacceptable. 5) Stock list or bill of materials for each panel including tag number, functional name, manufacturer's name, model number and quantity for components mounted in or on the panel or enclosure. 6) Detail showing anchorage plan of wire bundles between subpanels and front panel mounted devices. c. Field wiring and piping diagrams, include the following: 1) Wire and pipe sizes and types. 2) Terminal numbers at field devices and in panels. 3) Fiber optic termination designations in the field and in panels. 4) Color coding. 5) Conduit numbers in which wiring will be located. 6) Locations, functional names, and manufacturer's designations of items to which wiring or piping are connected. d. Proposed operator interface graphics layouts. Each graphic display and process report layout will be subject to modification from CONTRACTOR's submitted format within limits of software package used for development. Implement such modifications in accordance with CITY's comments. 1) Hardware: a) Layout drawings showing front, rear, end and plan views to scale of equipment, I/O components, power supplies, and peripheral devices. b) Equipment ventilation requirements. c) Interconnection diagrams, including termination details, cable identification list, and cable length. d) Drawings showing equipment layout. e) Installation requirements, instructions, and recommendations. 2) Software: 13400 -5 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 1 1- 0025 -UT a) Licensing agreement with name of licensee, renewal requirements, release and versions, expiration dates (if any) and upcoming releases scheduled before Project completion. When upcoming releases are expected, provide descriptions, when available, of features that differ from the proposed release. b) Standard technical and instructional documentation covering software for utility, system support, system documentation, display, communications, data logging and storage and diagnos- tic functions. Submit this information on electronic media. c) Standard technical documentation covering all aspects of the computer system software functions and capabilities, including instruction set description and programming procedures related to monitoring, display, logging, reporting and alarming func- tions. d) Detailed functional descriptions of application programs explaining control, display, logging and alarming features to be provided and functions to be performed. 3) Documentation describing memory type, size and structure and listing size of system memory, I/O and Data Table memory and size of memory available for control programs. 4) System I/O Loop Wiring Diagrams: (a) Prepare Shop Drawings on module -by- module basis and include the following information; (b) Prepare Shop Drawings on a module -by- module basis based on I/O address list developed by Others: a) Rack numbers, module type and slot number, and module terminal point numbers. Include location and identification of intermediate panel and field terminal blocks and terminal numbers to which I/O wiring and power supply wiring is connected. Identify power supply circuits with designation numbers and ratings. b) Wiring types, wire numbers, and color coding. c) Designation of conduits in which field I/O wiring will be installed. d) Location, functional name, tag numbers and manufacturer's module numbers of panel and field devices and instruments to which I/O wiring will be connected. e) Prepare loop wiring diagrams in accordance with ISA 5.4. e. Complete point -to -point interconnection wiring diagrams of field wiring associated with the system. Diagrams shall include the following: 1) Field wiring between each equipment item, panel, instruments, and other devices, and wiring to control stations, panelboards, and motor starters. Some of this equipment may be specified in other Divisions, CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing complete point -to -point interconnection wiring diagrams for control and monitoring of that equipment. 13400 -6 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 2) Numbered terminal block and terminal identification for each wire termination. 3) Identification of assigned wire numbers for interconnections. Assign each wire a unique number. 4) Schedule showing the wiring numbers and the conduit number in which the numbered wire is installed. 5) Junction and pull boxes through which wiring will be routed. 6) Identification of equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Product data for field instruments in accordance with requirements for Shop Drawings in this Section. b. Product data for panels, consoles, and cabinets in accordance with requirements for Shop Drawings in this Section. c. Product data for field wiring and piping provided for instrumentation and control service and not included under other Sections or contracts. d. Product data for SCADA system, including software and hardware. Requirements for software product data are included in requirements for Shop Drawings under this Section. 3. Samples: a. Color charts for finish paint for panels. Provide full range of paint manufacturer's standard and custom colors. Color selection will be by CITY. b. Color charts for FRP panels. Provide full range of panel manufacturer's standard and custom colors. Color selection will be by CITY. 4. Factory Acceptance Test Procedure: Submit factory testing procedures that will be performed to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. Test procedure shall include the following: a. Visual inspection of components and assembly. b. Description of hardware operational testing. c. Description of software demonstration. d. Description of testing equipment to be used. e. Sign -off sheets to be used at time of testing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Documents to be submitted prior to pre - submittal conference, in accordance with Article 1.3 of this specification. 2. System Software Documentation: Submit preliminary software documentation not later than four weeks prior to scheduled start of factory testing. Software documentation shall include the following: a. Complete printed copies of all programming. b. Complete listing of external and internal I/O address assignments, register assignments and preset constant values with function point descriptions. List unused /undefined I/O and data table registers available. c. Copies of all configured HMI /OIT screens. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -7 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Shipping, handling, storage, installation, and start-up instructions. 4. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Factory test reports and results. 5. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Submit notification to CITY at least 14 days before readiness to begin system checkout. Schedule system checkout on dates agreed to by CITY. b. Submit written procedure for system checkout to CITY three months prior to starting system checkout. Three months prior to starting system checkout submit written procedure for start-up to CITY. 6. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit the following prior to commencing system checkout and start- up. 1) Completed calibration sheets for each installed instrument showing five -point calibration (0, 25, 50, 75, 100 percent of span), signed by factory- authorized serviceman. b. Field calibration reports c. Field testing reports. 7. Supplier's Reports: a. Installation inspection and check -out report. b. Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier's service technician, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 8. Qualifications Statements: a. Supplier. b. Manufacturer, when required by CITY. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Include complete up -to -date system software documentation. Provide hardcopy and electronic copies. c. Include acceptable test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, wiring diagrams, and list of spare parts recommended for one year of operation with current price list. 2. Record Documentation: a. Prepare and submit record documents in accordance with Section 01782, Record Documents. b. Revise all system Shop Drawing submittals to reflect as -built conditions in accordance with the following. 1) Two copies of each revised Shop Drawings and documentation to replace out -dated drawings and documentation contained in operation and maintenance manuals. Submit half -size black line drawings for each drawing larger than 11 inches by 17 inches. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -8 Instrumentation and Control Equipment Include specific instructions for out -dated drawing removal and replacement with record documents submittal. 2) Half -size black line prints of wiring diagrams applicable to each control panel shall be placed in clear plastic envelopes and stored in a suitable print pocket or container inside each control panel. 3) Submit CADD drawings of the point -to -point interconnection wiring diagrams updated to reflect final as -built equipment information and as- installed field installation information. D. Maintenance Materials Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Spare Parts and Test Equipment a. General 1) Furnish the spare parts and test equipment as indicated below, identical to and interchangeable with similar equipment provided under this Section. 2) Provide source quality control for spare parts as part of factory testing prior to shipment of instrumentation and control equipment. 3) For process sensors and other analog instruments, Supplier shall submit a separate quotation for recommended list of spare parts and test equipment. Separately list and price each item recommended. Spare parts quotation shall include a statement that prices quoted are valid for a period of one year from date of equipment installation and that Supplier understands that OWNER reserves the right to purchase none, any, or all parts quoted. Upon request, Supplier shall submit documentation that stock of spare parts and test equipment is obtainable within 48 hours of receipt of OWNER's order. b. Furnish the following spare parts: 1) Five of each type of input /output relay for each quantity of forty or fraction thereof provided under the Contract. 2) One of each type of PLC input/output module or card used. 3) One replacement power supply for each type and size provided under the Contract. 4) One per quantity of ten of fraction thereof provided, per range of field instruments including insertion type instruments. No spares are required for inline instruments such as magnetic flow meters and flumes or venturi that include flow tubes through which flow is conveyed. 5) Twelve of each type and size of fuse used in instruments. c. Furnish the following test equipment: 1) One Fluke, Hewlett- Packard, or equal (latest in series) digital multimeter plus amprobe, high - voltage probe, test leads, case, and other recommended spares and accessories. 2) Tooling required to insert, extract, and connect internal or external connectors, including edge connectors. 3) Special calibration equipment required for system calibration. 4) One thermocouple calibrator, including case. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -9 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 5) Two signal simulators (4 to 20 mA DC; one to five VDC), including case. One simulator shall be battery - powered and shall include charger. 2. Software: a. Submit copies of programming and configuration files developed specifically for the Project in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to packaging, each manufacturer or Supplier shall securely attach tag number and instructions for proper field handling and installation to each instrument. B. Comply with Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Products, and Section 01661, Storage and Protection of Products. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Power Supplies: 1. Electrically powered equipment and devices shall be suitable for operation on 115 -volt plus -or -minus 10 percent, single - phase, 60 Hertz plus -or -minus two Hertz, power supply. If different voltage or closer regulation is required, provide suitable regulator or transformer at no additional cost to CITY. 2. Provide appropriate power supplies for field instruments requiring power source less than 115 volts. Power supplies shall be mounted in control panels or enclosures installed near associated instrument or in field panels. 3. Power supplies shall be capable of minimum of 130 percent of maximum simultaneous current draw. 4. Provide power on -off switch or air circuit breaker for each item provided under this Section that requires electric power. B. Signal Requirements: 1. Control system shall use 4 to 20 mA DC analog signals, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Provide signal converters and repeaters where required. Adequately size power supplies for signal converters and repeater loads. 3. Isolate signals from ground. 4. Signals transient DC voltage shall not exceed 300 volts over one millisecond, and shall not have a DC component over 300 volts. 5. Discrete signals shall use 24Vdc 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -10 Instrumentation and Control Equipment C. Surge Protection Requirements: 1. Provide surge protection to protect electronic instrumentation and control systems from surges propagating along both analog and discrete signals and power supply cabling. Protection systems shall be such that the protection level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance -free and self - restoring. 2. Provide instruments in suitable metallic cases, properly grounded. Ground wires for surge protectors shall be connected to good earth ground and, where practical, run each ground wire individually and insulated from other wires. Mount protectors within instrument enclosure or in separate junction box compatible with the area designation coupled to the enclosure. 3. Manufacturer: a. Dehn Surge Protectors. b. Or approved equal. D. Miscellaneous: 1. General: a. Instrumentation components shall be heavy -duty types, constructed for continuous service. b. System shall consist of equipment models currently in production. c. Materials and equipment, including cabling and interconnections, shall be in accordance with Division 16, Electrical, and manufacturer's recommendations, unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. d. Materials and equipment shall, where applicable, be in accordance with UL standards and be so marked and labeled. 2. Logic and control loops shall be fail -safe. Instrumentation components shall return automatically to accurate measurement within 15 seconds upon restoration of power after power failure and when transferred to standby power supply. 3. Provide surge protection for instruments and other control system components that could be damaged by electrical surges. Provide lightning arresters on both ends of communication lines, except for fiber optic cabling, external to buildings or structures, including leased telephone lines and similar communication lines. 4. Field- mounted instruments and system components shall be constructed for use in dry conditions. Field- mounted instrument enclosures, junction boxes and appurtenances shall have NEMA rating appropriate for indoor rating requirements shown or indicated on electrical Drawings, instrument data sheets, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5. Miscellaneous hardware such as fittings, fasteners, and screws, be Type 316 stainless steel or other appropriate material to prevent galvanic reactions, and shall be suitable for service intended. Piping stands shall be provided for fastening instruments as required. Provide threaded pipe stands with flange bolted to slab. Use carbon steel piping and flanges painted in accordance with Section 09900, Painting. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -11 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 6. Data processing equipment and relays with interconnections to field devices shall be wired through field wiring terminal blocks in the panel. Terminals as part of relay base are unacceptable. 7. Arrange panel- mounted instruments, switches, and other devices ergonomically for functional use and ease of maintenance. Similar types of panel- mounted devices shall be by one same manufacturer and of the same model line. 8. Equipment furnished shall be of modular construction and be capable of field expansion through installation of plug -in circuit cards and additional cabinets as necessary. 9. Field- and panel- mounted instruments shall be tagged with equipment number and nomenclature indicated in the Contract Documents; if not so indicated, tag in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 10. Coordinate ranges and scales specified in the Contract Documents with manufacturer of the equipment actually furnished for operability over the intended range. Complete the coordination prior to submitting Shop Drawings to CITY. 11. Treat field- mounted devices with anti - fungus spray. 12. Protect field- mounted devices from exposure to high and freezing temperatures to provide complete operability under the environmental conditions indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Environmental Conditions: 1. Provide control system suitable for continuous operation under the following conditions: a. Indoor Instruments: 1) Ambient Temperature: Zero degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2) Relative Humidity: 100 percent, maximum. b. Outdoor Instruments 1) Ambient Temperature: -15 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2) Relative Humidity: 100 percent, maximum. 2.2 PANELS A. General Provisions: 1. Provide electrical components and devices, support hardware, fasteners, and interconnecting wiring and piping required to provide control panels complete and operational. 2. Locate and provide hardware so that connections can be easily made and there is ample room for servicing each item. 3. Prevent movement by adequately supporting and restraining devices and components mounted on or within panel. 4. Provide panels with sub - panels for installation of all internally mounted hardware. 5. Provide numbered terminal strips for terminating field wiring and wiring from other panels, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 6. Provide copper grounding studs for hardware requiring grounding. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -12 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 7. Control of Environment (Except NEMA 7 Panels): a. Provide controlled environment for equipment or have ratings of equipment that can operate in temperatures between -5° C to 40 °C ambient. b. If needed for thermal control, provide 120 vac thermostatically - controlled fan -driven heater units to maintain stable temperature within enclosure to protect equipment from harmful effects of condensation, corrosion, and low temperatures inside panels. c. Submit supporting calculations as part of panel Shop Drawing submittal showing if panel equipment that is to comply with specified environmental requirements is proposed to be deleted as unnecessary. 8. Panels to be located in non - hazardous (non - classified) environments shall comply with UL 50 and UL 508A. 9. Provide panels under this Section with 10 percent additional space requirements for future use. Install nothing in space reserved for future use. 10. CONTRACTOR is responsible for detailed layout and design of panels, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Base cutouts and design on instrument manufacturers' requirements. 11. Lower 12 inches of free standing panels shall be free of devices, including panduits and terminal strips, for ease of installation and maintenance. 12. For front - opening panels, install no device less than three feet above operating floor level, unless otherwise shown or indicated. For rear - opening panels, install no devices on the door. 13. Wire bundles between subpanels and front panel- mounted devices shall be anchored and protected from damage by opening and closing of panel door. 14. Do not locate front panel- mounted devices requiring manipulation by operating personnel, such as pushbuttons, hand switches, controllers, and similar devices, higher than 5.5 feet above finished floor. 15. Panduits located on either side of terminal strips shall have minimum clearance of 1.5 inches between panduit and terminal strip. 16. Provide three -inch high channel base assembly, drilled to mate panel to floor pad. 17. Provide easily - accessible pocket built into panel door to enclose "as built" panel wiring diagrams. 18. Panels shall be UL- listed. B. Identification: 1. Provide laminated plastic nameplate for identification of panels. Use self - tapping stainless steel screws for fastening nameplates to panels. When self - tapping screws may degrade panel's NEMA rating, retain NEMA rating intact by using gaskets on each side of panel surface and use retaining plate on the panel back that is same size as nameplate. When gaskets and retaining plate are used, use full- penetration screws with nuts. 2. Panel identification nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high engraved letters. 3. Identify front panel- mounted devices with nameplates engraved with functional description of the device. Nameplate engraving shall be in accordance with the identification provided in the Drawings. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -13 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 4. Tag electric components and devices mounted within panels with high adhesive labels. 5. Identify terminal strips with nameplate engraved as "TB -XX" where "XX' is the numerical identification of terminal strip. 6. Identify terminals within each terminal strip with sequential numbers and wire numbers. 7. Internal panel wiring shall be color -coded and numerically identified with unique wire numbers affixed at each end of each wire. Color coding shall be in accordance with panel wiring color code table, below: Panel Wiring Color Code Table Description Color 110 vac panel power before fuses or breakers Black Controlled 110 vac power (e.g., after relay contacts, selector switch contacts, and similar equipment.) Red 110 vac power source from devices external to panel Yellow 110 vac neutral White 24 vdc positive power from power supplies Brown 24 vdc negative power from power supplies Controlled 24 vdc power (e.g., after PLC output contacts, relay contacts, and similar) Blue 24 vdc positive power from devices external to panel Orange 24 vdc negative power from devices external to panel 24 vdc 4 to 20 mA DC signal cable Grey with red positive, clear negative Grounding wire Green C. Panel Construction Features: 1. Panels located inside control or electric room areas shall be rated NEMA 12 with the following features: a. Fabricate enclosures using minimum 14 -gage steel for wall- or frame - mounted enclosures and minimum 12 -gage for free standing enclosures. Steel shall be free of pitting and surface blemishes. b. Continuously weld exterior seams and grind smooth. Surface grind panel to completely remove corrosion, burrs, sharp edges, and mill scale. c. Reinforce sheet steel with steel angles where required to adequately support devices and equipment and ensure rigidity and to preclude resonant vibrations. d. Panel shall be flat within tolerance of 1/16 -inch over two -foot by two - foot area, or flat within tolerance of 1/8 -inch for larger surface area. Acceptable out -of- flatness shall be gradual, in one direction only, and shall not consist of obvious depressions or a series of wavy sections. e. Use pan type construction for doors. Door widths shall not exceed three feet. f. Mount doors with full- length heavy -duty piano hinge with stainless steel hinge pins. g. Provide oil resistant gasket completely around each door or opening. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -14 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 h. Provide handle- operated, oil - tight, key - lockable three -point stainless steel latching system with rollers on latch -rods for easy door closing. i. Use stainless steel fasteners throughout. j. Provide interior mounting panels and shelves constructed of minimum 12 -gage steel with white enamel finish. k. For prints, provide steel pocket with white enamel finish. 1. Provide enclosure mounting supports as required for floor, frame, or wall mounting as required. m. Completely clean interior and exterior surfaces so surfaces are free of corrosive residue, oil, grease, and dirt. Zinc phosphatize for corrosion protection. n. Provide one coat of primer paint to interior and exterior surfaces immediately after applying corrosion protection, in accordance with coating manufacturers' instructions. Provide surface preparation in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements. o. Paint interior surfaces with two coats of semi -gloss white polyurethane enamel. p. Paint exterior surfaces with minimum of three finish coats of polyurethane enamel to produce a finish that is smooth and free of imperfections. Color shall be selected by CITY from complete selection of standard and custom color charts furnished by manufacturer. q. Primer and finish paint shall be compatible and shall be low -VOC, high - solids polyurethane enamel.. 2. Wall- Mounted Panels: a. General: Wall- mounted panels shall comply with applicable features and standards specified in this Section for the associated NEMA -rated panel. b. Unless otherwise indicated or approved by CITY, depth of wall - mounted panels shall not exceed 18 inches. c. Panels may be all stainless steel, fiberglass, polycarbonate, or acrylonitrile butadiene and styrene (ABS). d. Provide appropriate size and number of external mounting feet. e. Drilled holes or knockouts in back of wall- mounted panels are not allowed. f. Provide corrosion- resistant polyester quick release latches (for non - stainless steel panels) or stainless steel screw clamp assemblies (for stainless steel panels). D. Electrical Systems: 1. Power Source and Internal Power Distribution: a. Provide in the panel, near where incoming power is terminated, nameplate with panel power supply source, type, voltage, and circuit number. b. Protect incoming 120 vac power feeds to power the panel by providing lightning and surge arrestors, properly connected to grounds. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -15 Instrumentation and Control Equipment c. Provide panels with internal 120 vac power distribution system with properly -sized and -rated circuit breakers to distribute power. Power not more than six devices from a single breaker. When power supplies are included in the panel, not more than two power supplies shall be powered from a single breaker. Convenience receptacles and interior panel lights shall have their own breakers. When one or more field instruments require 120 vac power from the panel for instrument power, power not more than three instruments from a given breaker. d. Provide space for a minimum of two spare breakers in each panel. 2. Electrical Systems: a. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW and THW stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation rated for 600 volts at 75 degrees C for single conductors, color -coded and labeled with wire identification. b. For DC signal wiring, use shielded cable with 18 -gage conductors. DC field signal wiring terminal strips shall be capable of handling wires up and including No. 12 size. c. For AC power wiring, use No. 12 minimum AWG. For AC signal and control wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more than 15 amps, use sizes required by the NEC (NFPA 70) . d. Inside of panels, route DC signal wiring separately from power wiring with minimum separation distance of six inches. e. Use covered panduits to route internal panel cables and wiring. Panduits in each section of panel shall be appropriately sized to accommodate the quantity of wires to be routed with a spare capacity of 40 percent. f. Install wire troughs inside panels along horizontal or vertical routes to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are unacceptable. g. Wiring that is routed without panduits shall be adequately supported and restrained to prevent sagging or other movement. Use of adhesive anchors to support or restrain wiring is unacceptable. h. Terminate internal panel wiring using forked, insulated, crimp -on connectors; soldered connectors are unacceptable. Provide panels with 600 -volt rated barrier type terminal strips mounted on Din rails. Identify terminal strips as indicated in this Section. Identification devices shall be self - stick, plastic tape strips with permanent, machine - printed numbers. . i. Wiring in panels shall be installed such that, if wires are removed from any one device, power will not be disrupted to other devices. j. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of terminals used for each type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power). k. Provide ground terminals to terminate the shield wire of shielded cables. Termination of more than two shielded wires on a single ground terminal is unacceptable. 1. Provide a single copper bus bar with 5/16 -inch diameter copper grounding stud to connect the panel to external ground. Panel's internal grounds shall be terminated to the bus bar. m. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or abrading of insulation. 11 -0025 -UT 13400 -16 Instrumentation and Control Equipment n. When DC power or low voltage AC power is required, furnish and install in the panel required power supplies and transformers. o. Provide complete wiring diagram of "as- built" circuitry enclosed in transparent plastic. p. Provide interposing relays as required with circuit breaker distribution for relay(s). Provide relays to interpose from 24VDC to 120V for contactors or other required equipment that the PLC controls. 2.3 STAND ALONE EQUIPMENT OR PROCESS UNITS A. The PLC configuration indicated is diagrammatic. The PLC system shall include as a minimum power supply, Ethernet network connections, I/O cards, CPU and an OIT as required achieving the specified functionality. B. The final system configuration shall utilize the System Manufacturer's standard hardware and software to meet the functional requirements of these Specifications. C. All equipment furnished under this Contract shall be provided to meet the functional requirements of these Specifications plus a 10 percent growth in project, (e.g., graphic displays, alarms, additional instrumentation and equipment). All equipment shall be provided under this Contract, such that the entire 10 percent project growth can be implemented into the PLC, without any additional hardware cost to the CITY. D. The PLC system shall be capable of being integrated into a larger plant wide PLC system, or SCADA system using non - proprietary network communication protocol. E. The PLC system should have as a minimum the following features and capabilities: 1. The CPU shall be a 32 -bit microprocessor with onboard dynamic random access memory (DRAM) and flash memory for read /write functions and storage of configured data without battery backup. The microprocessor shall operate: a. With a minimum clock speed of 25 MHZ. b. With a minimum of 4MB user memory. c. Diagnostic LED's or indicating lights that, at a minimum, identifies processor status as (e.g., running, faulted or forced), communication status, and power on. d. Internal Clock. e. Include Arithmetic and PID function blocks. f. Ladder logic programming features. g. Online and offline programming capabilities. h. Accept DC and AC analog, RTD, and digital input and output signals. i. Provide timer, counter, shift register, and move control functionality. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -17 Instrumentation and Control Equipment j. Programming of PLC will be done using a personal computer attached to the front of the PLC or through an Ethernet network port. 2. I/O Modules: a. All UO modules shall meet Surge Withstand Capability Standard ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 -1989. All I/O modules shall be Radio Frequency Protected, providing 140 dB common mode and 80 dB, 60 Hz normal mode noise rejection, and conform to SAMA -PMC 33.1. Analog cards shall have individual A/D and D/A converters on a per point basis with all inputs and outputs being optically or galvanic ally isolated. Input /Output module performance specifications are specified below: b. Current Inputs (4 to 20 mADC): 1) Input Range: 0 to 20.4 mADC. 2) Rated Mean Accuracy: +0.05 percent of span. 3) Isolation: 600 VAC. 4) Transmitter Power: 24 volts at 20 mA. 5) Resistance: 390 ohm, maximum. 6) Conversion Time: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0 seconds (software configurable). 7) Linearity Error: Between 0.0125 and 0.005 percent of range time conversion dependent. 8) Resolution: 12, 13, 14, and 15 bits, time conversion dependent. 9) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, maximum. c. Current Outputs: 1) Output Range: 0 to 20.4 mADC. 2) Output Load: 735 ohms. 3) Compliance Voltage: 18.6 volts nominal at 20 mA at field terminals. 4) Rate Mean Accuracy: +0.05 percent span. 5) Linearity Error: +0.025 percent of span. 6) Resolution: 12 bits. 7) Isolation: 600 VAC. 8) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, maximum. 9) Bypass Jack: Built into the termination connector. 10) Accepts external 20 mA source. d. Contact Input (Voltage Monitor 120 VAC). All contact input cards shall contain filtering to eliminate contact bounce. The filters shall reject input signal levels, which are not stable over a configurable time period. 1) Input ON -state Voltage: 79 to 132 VAC. 2) Input OFF -state Voltage: 0 to 20 VAC. 3) Input Current: 2.2 mA at 20 to 132 VAC. 4) Isolation: 600 VAC. 5) Filter Time: Configurable (4, 6, 16 or 32 Ms). 6) Source Resistance Limits: a) ON- state: 1K ohm (max) at 79 VAC. b) OFF - state: 100K ohm (min) at 132 VAC. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -18 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 7) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, minimum. e. Contact Output (Switch): 1) Voltage: 79 to 132 VAC, field furnished. 2) Current: Two amps, maximum. 3) Off -State Leakage: Five mA, maximum. 4) Isolation: 600 VAC. 5) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, maximum. f. Pulse Input: 1) Input: Four isolated and independent channels. 2) Input Range Configurable: a) 1250 Hz. b) 2500 Hz. c) 6250 Hz. d) 12500 Hz. 3) Isolation: 600 VAC. 4) Resolution: 12 bits. 5) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, maximum. g. Contact DC Input/Output: 1) Input ON -state Voltage: 15 to 130 VDC. 2) Input OFF -state Voltage: 0 to 5 VDC. 3) Input Short- Circuit Current: 2.5 mA, maximum. 4) Input Isolation to Earth: 600 VAC. 5) Output Switch (with internal source). 6) Output Voltage (no load): 11 VDC + 2 VDC. 7) Source Resistance: 660 ohm, nominal. 8) Off -state Leakage Current: 0.5 mA, maximum. 9) Filter Time: Configurable (4, 8, 16, or 32 Ms). 10) Resistance Limits: a) ON- state: 1 K ohm, maximum. b) OFF - state: 100 K ohm, minimum. 11) Field Termination: No. 12 AWG, maximum. 3. Manufacturer: a. Schneider Electric M340. (Marshall Street Lab only) b. Allen Bradley CompactLogixs (East Wastewater Plant only) c. No equal. 2.4 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE A. Software shall support the development of the PLC ladder logic derived from process control strategies as specified in Section 2.9 Process Control Descriptions. Software shall utilize traditional relay logic as well as modular, function block type of control elements, which are familiar to control engineers, instrumentation technicians and electricians. The function blocks shall be; computational blocks for performing arithmetic, operational blocks for performing such functions as move and convert values, file to file operations, communication blocks for communicating with other PLC's and system resources, special algorithm blocks for advanced control procedures such as shift register, and PID functions. The 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -19 Instrumentation and Control Equipment PID shall use traditional strategies such as proportional, integral derivative (PID) controllers, feed forward, cascaded controllers, etc. shall be provided. Tuning constants shall be easily set from operator consoles. For each analog loop, software to allow provision of status of the manual backup control to be monitored and an alarm generated when switch is not in automatic mode. B. For each sequence or logic control loop, a disagreement alarm shall be triggered when a command (start-stop, etc.) is initiated and confirmation is not received. C. Supplier shall provide and configure internal diagnostics alarms for the PLC hardware. Alarms shall be suitable to verify proper and to alert operators when alarm conditions occurs. This includes, but is not limited to annunciation blown fuse indication for all I/O, watchdogs for communications failure with any system processor or I/O address, and communications failure with existing third party equipment. D. PLC software shall allow for editing of comments and other PLC documentation using traditional editors such as Notepad. E. PLC software shall include as easy to use file and printing management module. F. The PLC software shall include a report generation module for system information use. The reporting module should allow for user - configured reports. G. The PLC software shall use intuitive, menu -driver environment and base package platform. These easy -to -use Graphical User Interface (GUI) packages shall perform configuration and maintenance operations. H. The PLC software shall be compatible with Windows 2000 or latest version, Windows XP, operating systems. I. Manufacturer: 1. Allen Bradley RSLogix 5000 and (For East Wastewater Plant only) 2. Schneider Electric Unity Pro S 3. No approved equal. 2.5 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS A. General: 1. Operator Interface Terminals (OIT's) shall be utilized as the human - machine interface in the field as shown. All stations shall be functionally similar as to display arrangements, menu selections, command terminology, and data access methods. 2. All OIT's shall be functionally interchangeable differing only in the software installed on each type. All OIT's shall be capable of accessing typical operator process control functions. Each station's functional 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -20 Instrumentation and Control Equipment environment shall be password protected for system security and user identification. Required number of OIT's shall be provided as shown. 3. Provide all OIT software to integrate and display PLC programmed functions. B. The Operator Interface Terminals shall be a flat panel, They shall be rated NEMA 4X panel mountable. Each station shall be constructed of identical parts and components and shall be provided with the following minimum features and functions: 1. a. Sealed front, 15- inches TFT active matrix touch screen backlit color LCD screen. (For East Plant) b. Sealed front, 10- inches TFT active matrix touch screen backlit color LCD screen. (For Marshall Street) 2. Minimum 266 MHz RISC CPU, 512 Kbytes SRAM with application EPROM 32MB. 3. 1 slot for compact flash card (128MB to 1GB). 4. 24Vdc External Supply. 5. 100 BaseT Fast Ethernet adapter card(s) and network software as required by network topology. 6. RS485 Connection. 7. 2 USB type A ports. 8. Modibus TCP /IP capable. C. The units shall be designed for and capable of functioning in the indicated modes, without external auxiliary equipment, with no detrimental effects under the following environmental conditions. 1. Temperature: a. Operating: 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F). b. Non - operating: -20 to 60 °C (4 to 140 °F). 2. Humidity: a. Operating/Non- Operating: 20 to 80 percent RH, non- condensing. 3. Altitude: a. Operating: Sea level to 10,000 feet (3048 m). b. Non - operating: Sea level to 40,000 feet (12,192 m). D. Manufacturer: 1. Schneider Electric Magelis XBT GT 2. Allen Bradley Panel View Plus 3. Or approved equal. 2.6 CT Transducer A. General: 1. 4 -20mA, 0- 300amperage range, field adjustable, split core current transformer. a. 2 sec. Response time b. 600Vac RMS Insulation Class 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -21 Instrumentation and Control Equipment c. Frequency Range: 60Hz d. Temperature Range -15 to 60 degrees Celsuis. e. Accuracy: +2% full scalable from 10% to 100% of selected current range. f. UL508, CE Approved 2. Manufactuer: Veris Industries or approved equal. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Instrument Tagging 1. Headings on the instrument index in the Contract Documents have the following meaning: a. "TAG" is divided into two sections. The first seven to nine alphanumeric characters represent the CITY's equipment number and the remaining characters comply with ISA Standard S5.1. b. "DESCRIPTION /LOCATION" is an explanation of instrument function and location. c. "RANGE /SET POINT" is the limit for the specified units of the instrument and set point is the precise value within the instrument's range. d. "SPEC REF" is the paragraph reference in the Specifications where the instrument's requirements are specified. e. "DRAWING NO." indicates the Drawing where the device is shown or indicated. f. "REMARKS" contains specific notes relative to the instrument. B. Input /Output List Identification 1. I/O point list contains information required to configure PLC I/O interface hardware, and to indicate range conversion or signal functions. 2. "POINT NUMBER" is an alphanumeric character string. For example, for the point "MP -FI- 806 - 0123" the following apply: a. The first two characters (MP) refer to the specific plant area (MP = Main Pump, for example). b. The third character is the functional identifier and conforms with ANSI/ISA S5.1. In the example, "F" represents flow. c. The fourth (and sometimes fourth and fifth) alphabetical character (I) is the function identifier. In the example, the "I" represent indication input. d. The first three -digit number (806) identifies the P &ID number. e. The next four -digit number (0123) identifies the loop or field device. f. Suffix, where required, is used for distinguishing between similar variables. 3. "DESCRIPTION" is an alphanumeric character string up to 40 characters in length. Points described as "SPARE" indicate pre -wired I /O. 4. "SIGNAL TYPE" is one of the following: a. AI indicates analog input. b. DI indicates discrete input. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -22 Instrumentation and Control Equipment c. PI indicates pulse input. d. AO indicates analog output. e. DO indicates momentary, maintained or latched discrete output. f. FB indicates foundation field bus. g. PB indicates profi bus. h. MB indicates Modbus. i. DN indicates device net. C. ISA Identification 1. A = Analytical. 2. B = Burner, Combustion. 3. C = Cooling (Cooling Condenser). 4. D = Dissolved. 5. E = Voltage. 6. F = Flow. 7. G = Intrusion. 8. H = Hand. 9. I = Current. 10. J = Power. 11. K = Time. 12. L = Level. 13. M = Manual. 14. N = UNDEFINED. 15. O = Overload. 16. P = Pressure. 17. Q = Communication. 18. R = Reverse. 19. S = Speed, Frequency. 20. T = Temperature. 21. U = Universal (Common). 22. V = Vibration. 23. W = Torque (Weight or Force). 24. X = Critical (Emergency). 25. Y = Event, State or Presence. 26. Z = Position, Dimension. D. Function Identifier: 1. A =Alarm 2. B = UNDEFINED. 3. C = Control. 4. D = Differential. 5. E = Element. 6. F = Failure. 7. G = UNDEFINED. 8. H = High. 9. I = Indication. 10. J = UNDEFINED. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -23 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 11. K = Factor. 12. L = Low. 13. M = Mode. 14. N = Normal. 15. O = Oxygen. 16. P = UNDEFINED. 17. Q = Quantity. 18. R = Rotation. 19. S = Switch. 20. T = Timer 21. U = UNDEFINED. 22. V = Slow (output) 23. W = Slow (input) 24. X = Selector Switch (input) 2.8 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION (Marshall Street Lab) A. Load Management Control Description 1. Load Shed Priority Levels a. 1st level of load shedding (3) b. 2nd level of load shedding (2) c. 3rd level of load shedding (1) 2. Load Shed Equipment a. Autoclave (3) b. Air Compressor (2) c. Deionized Water (2) d. 3 Ovens (1) e. Uninterruptible Power Supply (1) 3. Load Shed Procedure — All setpoint amperages shall be operator adjustable with time delays at each loading step (0- 60sec) a. Upon power loss, Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) will initiate startup of generator and transfer connection from utility to standby generator. b. Load Management PLC will detect a greater than 0 amps of current from the current transducer and initiate the monitoring of loads. c. If the generator's current reaches >139amps, then the load management software will remove the Autoclave (1st level of load shedding) from Panelboard ELI . d. Upon generator's current reaching >199amps, the load management software will remove the Air Compressor and De- ionized Water load (2nd level of load shedding) from Panelboard ELI. e. Upon generator's current reaching >204amps, the load management software will remove the UPS3 and 3 Ovens from Panelboard ELI (3`d level of load shedding) from Panelboard EL1. f. After load shedding priority level 1 has occurred and the generator's current falls below 183 amps, plus a 15 second delay has expired the 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -24 Instrumentation and Control Equipment load management software will reinstate the UPS3 and 3 ovens load to Panelboard ELI. g. After load shedding priority level 2 has occurred and generator's current falls below 153 amps, plus a 15 second delay has expired, the load management software will reinstate Air compressor and De- ionized water load. h. After load shedding priority level 1 has occurred and the generator's current falls below 125 amps plus a 15 second delay has expired, the load management software will reinstate the Autoclave load to Panelboard ELI. i. The load management software will log by time date stamp, and length the initiation of load shedding as power loss, and each load shed priority level incidents. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Factory Test: a. CONTRACTOR shall perform factory testing with results submitted to ENGINEER for approval. B. Factory Inspection: Submit results to ENGINEER for approval. I. Inspect each panel, console, device, and cabinet before testing and before shipping. Inspection shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Verify all "Approved as Corrected" comments on Shop Drawings were implemented. b. Verify presence of and accuracy of nameplates and tags. c. Verify that wire sizes and color - coding comply with the Contract Documents. d. Verify presence of terminal blocks, terminal block numbers, and required quantity of spares. e. Verify annunciator window engravings and quantity of spare windows comply with the Contract Documents. f. Verify proper wiring practices and grounding. g. Verify enclosure flatness, finish, and color. h. Verify anchoring of wire bundles between subpanels and front panel - mounted devices. i. Verify presence of applicable items specified in this Section. j. Check and verify software licenses for latest release and license types. C. Panel Operational Testing: ON SITE 1. Test all input /output components to verify that internal panel wiring is properly terminated at correct locations. Verify initial ranges and settings. 2. Test all system hardware and software to verify proper operation as stand- alone units. Test shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Power distribution and breaker ratings to match approved Shop Drawings. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -25 Instrumentation and Control Equipment b. Power fail /restart tests. c. Diagnostics checks. d. Demonstrate that all specified equipment functional capabilities are working properly. 3. Test components and devices requiring data transmission to verify that communication between such components is working properly. Verify communication by using the same media required for the completed system at the Site as indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Perform integrated system test with all system equipment and simulated inputs /outputs connected to verify that equipment is performing properly as an integrated system. 5. Simulation devices shall be of suitable quality to not mask control panel defects. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install instruments in areas where construction may cause instrument to be damaged, without providing adequate protection for said instrument. B. Installation of Instrumentation: 1. Secure field- mounted instruments to stands or brackets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals, and the Contract Documents. 2. Locate sensors where shown on the Drawings. Confirm exact locations in the field with CITY. 3. Install all devices so that devices are readily accessible for service and do not cause potential hazards. C. Services and Operator Instructions: 1. Provide repairs or replacement of defective materials, equipment or workmanship, including with respect to equipment, the services of factory - trained servicemen. 2. In addition to the calibration required for check -out, provide two additional calibrations on all instruments. The first re- calibration shall be approximately six months after acceptance of the system, and the second shall be approximately eleven months after acceptance. As part of each calibration, provide two copies of the calibration sheets, a detailed list of 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -26 Instrumentation and Control Equipment deficiencies (should any be found), and a statement that the entire system is in proper operation and condition (except for the deficiencies noted) and shall be turned over to the CITY. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Field- verify calibration and performance of each instrument prior to start-up of the associated equipment, and document on a separate sheet for each. 1. For each calibration certification sheet, include the following information: a. Project name. b. Tag number and description. c. Manufacturer. d. Model and serial number. e. Date, time and person who performed calibration. f. Calibration data to include. 1) Input, output, and error at 0, 25, 75, and 100 percent of span for analog instruments. 2) Switch setting, contact action and deadband, if applicable, for discrete elements. g. Space for comments. h. Signature and date. 2. System Check -Out and Start-Up Responsibilities: a. CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of the System Supplier to supervise and /or perform check -out and start-up of all system components. As part of these services, the System Supplier shall include for those equipment items not manufactured by him the services of an authorized manufacturer's representative to check the equipment installation and place the equipment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall be thoroughly knowledgeable about the installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment. b. Check and approve the installation of all instrumentation and control system components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. c. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. When there are future operational functions included in the Work, they should be included in the system checkout. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in start-up of the various unit processes. d. CONTRACTOR shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the testing during system checkout and start-up. e. CONTRACTOR and System Supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of monitoring and control system and shall make any required changes, adjustments or replacements for operation, monitoring and 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -27 Instrumentation and Control Equipment control of the various processes and equipment necessary to perform the functions intended at no additional cost to the CITY. These changes or adjustments shall be documented by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the CITY as part of the Installation Inspection Report described in Paragraph g. below. f. CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the CITY certified calibration reports for field instruments and panel mounted devices specified in this Section as soon as calibration is completed. g. CONTRACTOR shall furnish CITY an Installation Inspection Report certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both CONTRACTOR and the System Supplier. h. Instrumentation and Control System Field Test: 1) Following the instrumentation and control system checkout and initial operation, CONTRACTOR, under the supervision of the System Supplier, shall perform a complete system test to verify that all equipment and programmed software is operating properly as a fully integrated system, and that the intended instrumentation and control functions are fully implemented and operational. Any defects or problems found during the test shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR and then retested to demonstrate proper operation. 2) Following demonstration of all system functions, the instrumentation and control system, including field sensors /transducers shall be running and fully operational for a continuous 48 hour period. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. General: 1. CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of the System Supplier to provide operation and maintenance training for all instrumentation and control system equipment as specified herein. 2. For equipment items not manufactured by the System Supplier, he shall provide for on -Site training by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer as part of his services. The manufacturer's representative shall be fully knowledgeable in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs associated with training and shall provide all required materials, texts and required supplies. 4. Training shall conform to the requirements of Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. B. On -Site Training: 1. General: a. Provide on -Site operation and maintenance training by System Supplier and the equipment manufacturer representatives prior to placing the equipment in continuous operation. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -28 Instrumentation and Control Equipment b. Training courses shall include time for students to develop and demonstrate understanding of training concepts. Testing shall include hands on training with equipment. c. At the conclusion of each course students shall be tested on course material. Testing shall include exercises where students must demonstrate proper response to normal operational needs, emergencies and maintenance tasks. Every student shall be tested individually. d. Training shall accomplish the following: 1) Provide instruction covering use and operation of the equipment to perform the intended functions. 2) Provide instruction covering procedures for routine, preventive and troubleshooting maintenance, including equipment calibration. 3) Explain procedures for placing the equipment in and out of operation and explain necessary actions and precautions to be taken regarding the overall plant monitoring and control system. 4) Provide classes and field training as to how to change process control and alarm set points in all microprocessor based controllers and transmitters. Maintenance personnel shall be trained to enter passwords, programming or configuration data, etc. 2. Primary Sensors /Transducers a. The services of equipment manufacturer's representatives shall be provided for a minimum of 2 hours for each type of instrument. b. Training shall include: 1) Basic repair and maintenance capabilities of installed equipment. 2) Procedures for placing the equipment in and out of operation. 3) Use of any special repair equipment or software packages that are used for repair or maintenance. 4) Procedures for testing any repair before placing equipment back in service. 3. PLC and OIT Training a. Training shall include 1) Hardware and software configuration of PLC and OIT programs. 2) Perform a walk through with students identifying system components. Instructor shall test each student's knowledge of system components during walk through. 3) Identify key operating and alarm features of the project specific PLC and OIT programs. 4) Test students' knowledge of proper response to alarms, capabilities to replace hardware components, switch hardware and software between online and offline, add new components, know when to call for assistance, demonstrate understanding of hardware and safety requirements, understand impact of changes made to rest of the control system. 5) Provide instruction covering basic editing of PLC programs and OIT screens. Instruction shall include testing students programming capabilities by having students make minor changes to programs and test changes online. 11- 0025 -UT 13400 -29 Instrumentation and Control Equipment 3.5 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, are part of this Specification section. B. Data Sheets — Panel Instruments and Devices Parag. Description Page 3.5.B.27 Transducer - Current Type 82 C. Data Sheets — Primary Sensors and Field Instruments Parag. Description Page None None None D. Instrument Index E. Input /Output List 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 13400 -30 Instrumentation and Control Equipment SECTION 15055 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to design, furnish, and install all hangers, supports and appurtenances necessary to complete the Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the pipe hangers and supports Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 09900, Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 575, Specification for Steel Bars Carbon, Merchant Quality, M- Grades. b. ASTM E 84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. Federal Specification, (FS). a. FS A -A -1192, Hangers, Pipe. 3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, (MSS). a. MSS SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design and Manufacture. b. MSS SP 69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 203, Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each type of pipe hanger or support shall be the product of one manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -1 Pipe Hangers and Supports B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single pipe hangers and supports manufacturer. 2. The pipe hangers and supports equipment manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the pipe hangers and supports equipment manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Detailed drawings showing all hangers and supports for each piping system specified. Shop Drawings shall show location, installation, material, loads or forces, and deflection of all hangers and supports. b. Submit and coordinate these with Shop Drawings required for all piping systems. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store materials in covered storage off the ground and prevent condensation. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -2 Pipe Hangers and Supports 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Hangers and supports shall meet with the following requirements: 1. Standard and fabricated hangers and supports shall be furnished complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories. 2. Generally, run piping in groups where practicable and parallel to building wall. Provide minimum clearance of 1 -inch between pipe and other work. 3. Install hangers or supports at all locations where pipe changes direction. 4. All hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after placement of piping. 5. Different types of hangers or supports shall be kept to a minimum. 6. Support vertical piping at each floor and between floors by stays or braces to prevent rattling and vibration. 7. Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap or perforated bar hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from piping. 8. Maximum support spacing unless otherwise shown or approved for standard weight steel pipe shall be as follows: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Pipe Span 1 (feet) Steel Copper Plastic Cast/Ductile Iron 4 3/8 to 3/4 5 6 Cont. 3 - 1 6 6 5 - 1 -1/4 6 6 5 - 1 -1/2 6 6 5 - 2 10 10 5 - 2 -1 /2 10 10 5 - 3 10 10 5 - 'Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings. 2Span shown is for Schedule 80 CPVC pipe at 100°F. Spans for other plastics, other CPVC pipe Schedules and pipes at higher temperatures shall be shortened in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 3Continuous means pipe shall be in unistrut or similar channel. 4 Pipe hanger and support selection shall be as shown and in this Section. 9. Where proper hanger or support spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, structural steel channels may be attached to joists or ribs and pipes suspended there from. 10. Supports and hangers shall be of a material that is compatible with the fluid being conveyed in such pipe being supported. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -3 Pipe Hangers and Supports 11. Anchors for pipe support systems shall be compatible or protected by a coating system which is compatible with the fluid being conveyed in such pipe being supported. B. Expansion compensation shall be designed for individual exposed piping systems with the following Design Criteria: 1. AL= LxATxa a. Where AL = pipe length change (inches). b. L = pipe length between anchors (inches). c. AT = 100 (F). d. a = coefficient of thermal expansion (inches /inches/F). 2. Expansion compensation shall be designed as an integral part of the piping hanger, support and anchorage system. 3. Expansion compensation shall be achieved via expansion joints specified in Section 40 05 06, Couplers, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers and supports where shown shall be in accordance with detail drawings. Hangers and supports not shown shall be in accordance with MSS SP 58. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: MSS Type 1. SP -69, Type 1 2. N/A 3. SP -69 Type 31 4. SP -69, Type 39 5. SP -69, Type 38 2.3 ACCESSORIES Description Clevis Hanger Offset Pipe Clamp Light Welded Bracket Pipe Covering Protection Saddle Riser Clamp Typical Manufacturers All Tolco, Anvil All All All A. Hanger rods shall be made from ASTM A 575, with square head nut on top and running thread on bottom end. B. Concrete Inserts: 1. Concrete inserts shall be MSS SP 58 malleable Type 18. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Unistrut Corporation, Wayne, Michigan. b. Elcan Metal Products, Company, Franklin Park, Illinois. c. B -Line. d. Anvil International, Inc. e. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -4 Pipe Hangers and Supports C. Brackets: 1. Brackets for wall mounting shall conform to MSS SP 58 Type 32 D. Fabricated Pipe Rack: 1. Pipes shall be supported and anchored to the fabricated pipe rack as shown. Clamps, rollers, and supports for piping shall conform to the general requirements of MSS SP 69. 2.4 PAINTING A. Clean and prime ferrous metal surfaces in the shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900, Painting. B. Field painting shall conform to the requirements of Section 09900, Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate hangers, supports, and accessories to support piping, valves, and at all concentrated loads. B. Locate hangers, supports, and accessories within maximum span lengths specified to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loadings. C. Locate hanger, supports to prevent vibration or swaying and to provide for expansion and contraction. 1. Temperature differential specified in this Section. 2. Support piping independently so that equipment is not stressed by piping weight or expansion. 3. Uncoated Hangers, Rods and Supports: Dip in zinc chromate primer before installation. 4. Maximum spacing for horizontal piping: a. Steel 1 -Inch and Smaller: Seven feet. b. Steel 1 -1/2 -Inch and Larger: Ten feet. c. Additional supports at: 1) Change in direction. 2) Branch piping and runouts over five feet. 3) Concentrated loads due to valves, strainers or other similar items. 5. Hanger types for horizontal piping, except as noted and shown: a. Forged steel adjustable clevis type, rod support for all services. b. Slide Bases: 1) Pipe stand, brackets, trapeze or other equivalent structural support. 2) For piping 2- inches or larger. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -5 Pipe Hangers and Supports c. For pipe and covering provide: 1) Saddles for rollers or slide bases. 2) Protective shields or saddles for all other types of supports. d. Threaded Steel Rods: 1) Two inch vertical adjustment with two nuts each end for positioning and locking. 2) Size hanger rods according to the schedule below, unless otherwise noted: Nominal Pipe Rod Diameter (Inches) (Inches) 2 and less 3/8 2 -1/2 to 3 -1/2 1/2 4 5/8 6 3/4 8 through 12 7/8 14 through 18 1 20 through 30 1 -1/4 3) For Double Rod Hangers: One size smaller than above. 4) Connection to Structure for Piping to 2- Inches: Concrete inserts, or expansion shields in shear into sides of beams. 5) Connection to Structure for Piping 2 -1/2 -Inch or Larger: Concrete inserts, beam clamps or suitable bridging. 6. Vertical Piping: a. Base Support: Base elbow or welded equivalent. 1) Bearing plate on structural support. b. Guides not to exceed: 1) 25 feet for piping to 2- inches. 2) 36 feet for piping 2 -1/2- inches or larger. c. Top Support: 1) Special hanger or saddle in horizontal connection. 2) Provisions for expansion. d. Intermediate Supports: Steel pipe clamp at floor. 1) Bolted and welded to pipe. 2) Extension ends bearing on structural steel or bearing plates. e. For Multiple Pipes: Coordinate guides, bearing plates and accessory steel. D. Install items to be embedded before concrete placement. E. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement during concrete placement. F. Install hangers and support units on piping systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 11- 0025 -UT 15055 -6 Pipe Hangers and Supports G. Adjust hangers and supports and place grout for concrete supports to bring pipelines to specified elevations. H. Bring all pipe systems up to operating pressures and temperatures. Cycle systems to duplicate operating conditions. Correct all support malfunctions. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 15055 -7 Pipe Hangers and Supports 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 15055 -8 Pipe Hangers and Supports 1 1 r SECTION 16050 GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to complete the electrical Work. 2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all electrical Work as defined in Section 01110, Summary of Work and drawings. 3. Temporary Utilities: CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary power and lighting in accordance with Section 01510, Temporary Utilities, Section 01511, Temporary Electricity, including what is shown in on the staging drawings and Section 01512, Temporary Lighting. 4. Demolition: Electrical demolition shall be in accordance with Section 02220, Demolition. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures and schedules under other Specification Sections and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that will be installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings, and panels. 2. Coordination and Intent of Electrical Drawings: a. Dimensions on Drawings related to equipment are based on equipment of certain manufacturers. Verify the dimensions of equipment furnished to space available at the Site and allocated to the equipment. b. Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical Work, and are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work. Drawings supplement and complement the Specifications and other Contract Documents relative to principal features of electrical systems. c. Equipment and devices provided under this Contract shall be properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices for successful operation of complete systems, whether or not all connections and interconnections are specifically mentioned or shown in the Contract Documents. d. Drawings are provided for CONTRACTOR's guidance in fulfilling the intent of the Contract Documents CONTRACTOR shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including safety and electrical codes, and provide materials, equipment, appurtenances, and specialty items necessary for complete and operable systems. 3. Obtain from CITY record drawings required to execute the Work. (Brilley & Wild 1988) 11- 0025 -UT 16050 -1 General Provisions 4. Field Coordination: a. Provide materials, equipment, and services to interface with existing circuits. Field - verify system and equipment requirements prior to modifying existing systems. b. Coordinate the interface of equipment with CITY's personnel and field conditions. c. Field - compare existing starter and panel control circuit terminations from record documents with existing circuits. d. Field -trace existing circuits as required to interface the equipment provided. e. Field- identify terminations for starters and panel controls for follow function for re- connection. f. Field- verify all existing utilities in the areas of construction identifying conflicts and proposed mitigation. This includes piping, ductbanks, conduit and structures. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01110, Summary of Work. 2. Section 02220, Demolition. 3. Section 03300, Cast -in- Place. 4. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts. 5. Section 09900, Painting. 6. Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill D. Area Classifications: 1. Materials, equipment, and incidentals shall be suitable for the area classification(s) shown, specified, or required by code. 2. Wet Locations: Comply with NEC and NEMA requirements for wet locations. Enclosures in wet locations shall comply with NEMA 4 unless specified otherwise. 3. Corrosive Locations: Comply with NEC and NEMA requirements for corrosive locations. Enclosures in corrosive locations shall conform to NEMA 4X requirements unless specified otherwise. 4. Hazardous Locations: Comply with NEC requirements for the Class and Division designated. 5. Dusty Locations: Indoor areas not designated as hazardous, corrosive, or wet are dusty locations. Comply with NEC and NEMA 12 requirements unless specified otherwise. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Electrical Contractor: a. Electrical Contractor shall have not less than ten years experience installing electrical systems of this size and types required for the Project. 11- 0025 -UT 16050 -2 General Provisions b. Electrical Contractor shall possess a valid electricians', electrical and general contractors' license in the jurisdiction where the Site is located. c. Submit the following information for not less than three successful, completed electrical prime projects: project name and location; year completed; name and contact information as: electrical prime contractor, project owner, and project engineer or architect, including addresses and telephone numbers. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Materials and equipment similar to each other shall be from the same manufacturer for uniformity. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Permits: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other parts of the Contract Documents for responsibilities relative to obtaining and paying for permits, licenses, and inspection fees. 2. Codes: Refer to Section 01420, References, for indication of applicable codes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. To the extent practical, submit Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals for each Specification Section into the smallest number of submittals possible. Do not furnish partial submittals. 2. Review of equipment submittals does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for providing complete and successfully operating systems. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to components and numbered terminals for external connections. b. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations, and panel layouts showing means for mounting, conduit connection, and grounding. c. List of components including manufacturer's name and catalog number (or part number) for each. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number. b. Electrical ratings. c. Manufacturer's technical data and specifications. d. Manufacturer's indication of compliance with applicable reference standards. e. Painting and coating systems proposed. 3. Test Procedures: Proposed testing procedures and testing limitations for source quality control testing and field quality control testing. C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 11- 0025 -UT 16050 -3 General Provisions 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Installation data and instructions. b. Instructions for handling, starting -up, and troubleshooting. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: Results for required shop testing. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals: Results for required field testing. 4. Qualifications: a. Electrical Subcontractor. b. Wiring coordinator, including information required of wiring coordinator in Paragraph 1.2.A of this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. System Record Drawings: Include the following: 1) One -line wiring diagram of the electrical distribution system. 2) Actual, in -place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of conduit sizes and number, and size of conductors. 3) Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the grounding system. 4) Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and control devices identified, for all equipment. b. Point -to -Point Interconnection Wiring Diagram Drawings: Include the following: 1) External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument, and other devices and wiring to control stations, lighting panels, and motor controllers. 2) Numbered terminal block identification for each wire termination. 3) Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all interconnections. 4) Identification of wiring by the conduit tag in which the wire is installed. 5) Terminal, junction, and pull boxes through which wiring is routed. 6) Identification of equipment and the submittal transmittal number for equipment from which wiring requirements and termination information was obtained. c. Record documents shall indicate final equipment and field installation information. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Products. B. Section 01661, Storage and Protection of Products. PART 2 — PRODUCTS A. Performance Criteria: 11- 0025 -UT 16050 -4 General Provisions 1. Electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, with ambient outside air temperature of 0 degrees F to 100 degrees F and an elevation of 500 feet above mean sea level. 2. Unless specified otherwise, electrical equipment shall have ratings based on 75 degrees C terminations. B. Testing Laboratory Labels: Electrical material and equipment shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory, where standards have been established and label service applies. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, Laws and Regulations, approved (and accepted, as applicable) Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals, and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide tools and equipment required to trace circuits necessary for proper execution of the Work. 3. Define and identify all wiring, circuit terminations, and equipment to be modified to ensure proper interface of components. The Contract Price includes all costs associated with field services specified for a complete and functional system. B. Staging, Sequencing, and Coordination with Existing Facilities: 1. Schedule, sequence, and install materials and equipment in accordance with Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations 2. Perform the Work in a manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment and facilities or cause interruption of the functions of the Site, unless specified otherwise or otherwise allowed by CITY. 3. When operation of existing facilities and Site is disrupted due to CONTRACTOR's operations, comply with Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations, unless otherwise allowed by CITY. 4. Where the Work ties in with existing installations, take precautions and provide safeguards in connecting the Work to existing operating circuits to prevent interruption to existing circuits. Connection of Work to existing circuits shall be performed in the presence of CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 16050 -5 General Provisions 5. Interruptions of existing circuits, not addressed in Section 01143, Coordination with Owner's Operations, shall be coordinated with the CITY who will determine the length of time a circuit may be de- energized to maintain the CITY's processes in dependable and safe operation. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Quality Control — General: 1. Perform field quality control for electrical Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Site Tests: 1. Prior to requesting certificate of Substantial Completion, demonstrate to CITY that electrical systems and electrically- operated equipment installed or modified under the Contract operates in accordance with the Contract Documents and operates as required 2. Perform the following operational tests on electrical systems: a. Operate power circuits to verify proper operation and connection to electrical systems materials and equipment, including mechanical key - interlocks for circuit breakers. b. Remove and re -apply power supply to automatic transfer equipment to verify operation. Activate standby power systems to verify their automatic start-up, proper de- energization, and cool down upon resumption of normal power supply. c. Operate control circuits, including pushbuttons, indicating lights, and similar devices, to verify proper connection and function. Operate all devices, such as pressure switches, flow switches, and similar devices, to verify that shutdowns and control sequences operate as required. d. Operate lighting systems and receptacle devices to verify proper operation and connections. 3. Prepare and submit report on the equipment demonstration and operating field quality control tests. Report shall include complete information on the tests performed and results. C. Manufacturer's Services: 1. Furnish at the Site qualified, factory- trained representative(s) of equipment manufacturers for the services indicated in the Contract Documents. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16050 -6 General Provisions SECTION 16061 GROUNDING SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install complete grounding for electrical systems, structures, and equipment of the following equipment and structures: a. East WRF generator, generator structure, generator fuel system and power distribution system. b. Marshall Street Lab Panel EL 1, UPS3, UPP1 and associated reconnected electrical equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16061, Lightning Protection Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/NETA ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems. 2. ASTM B8, Specification for Concentric - Lay- Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard or Soft. 3. UL 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. National Electrical Code, (NEC). a. NEC Article 250, Grounding and Bonding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of grounding connector types identifying where each will be used. b. Layouts of each structure's ground grid. c. Test point construction details. 2. Product Data: 11- 0025 -UT 16061 -1 Grounding Systems a. Manufacturer's technical information for grounding materials proposed for use. 3. Testing Plans: a. Ground resistance test procedure. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals a. Results of ground resistance tests at each test point. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bare Ground Cable: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Cablec Corporation. b. General Cable Corporation. c. Southwire Cable Company. d. Or equal. 2. Material: Soft - drawn, bare copper stranded cable complying with ASTM B8. No. 4/0 AWG minimum size unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. B. Ground Rods: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Copperweld, Bimetallics Division. b. ITT Blackburn Company. c. Or equal. 2. Material: Copper -clad rigid steel rods, 3/4 -inch diameter, ten feet long. C. Grounding Connectors: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Pressure Connectors: 1) O.Z. /Gedney, Division of General Signal Corporation. 2) Burndy Corporation. 3) Or equal. b. Welded Connections: 1) Cadweld by Erico Products, Incorporated. 2) Therm -O -Weld by Burndy Corporation. 3) Or equal. 2. Material: Pressure connectors shall be copper alloy castings, designed and fabricated specifically for items to be connected and assembled with Durium or silicone bronze bolts, nuts, and washers. Welded connections shall be by exothermic process utilizing molds, cartridges, and hardware designed specifically for connection to be made. 11- 0025 -UT 16061 -2 Grounding Systems D. Ground Test Well 1. Provide heavy -duty test well suitable for heavy -duty traffic. 2. Manufacturer a. Advanced Lightning Technology b. Or equal. 3. Diameter and Material: 12.75 -inch outside diameter, Schedule 80 PVC. 4. Depth: Two feet. 5. Cover: Provide test well with cast iron cover marked, "Ground" with cast iron ring to support lid. E. Ground system components shall comply with UL 467. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions for the Work and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 STRUCTURE GROUND SYSTEM A. Provide ground grids as shown and indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide No. 4/0 bare copper cable around exterior perimeter of structures at not less than 2.5 feet below grade, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. C. For structures with steel columns, provide No. 4/0 ground cable from grid to each column around perimeter of structure. Connect cable to steel with exothermic welds. D. Connect grids to continuous underground water pipe system, when practical. E. For new structures with concrete foundation or footings, connect structure's reinforcing steel or other concrete - encased electrode to grounding grid. F. Provide accessible test points for measuring the ground resistance of each grid. G. Weld all buried connections except for test points. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Ground electrical equipment in compliance with Laws and Regulations and the Contract Documents. 11- 0025 -UT 16061 -3 Grounding Systems B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper cable of adequate size installed in metal conduit where required for mechanical protection. Ground conductors, pulled into conduits with non - grounded conductors, shall be insulated. Insulation shall be green. C. Control panels grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper cable of adequate size to ground grid from AC ground bus, and an insulated stranded copper cable of adequate size to ground grid from DC ground bus. D. Connect ground conductors to conduit with copper clamps, straps, or with grounding bushings. E. Connect to piping by welding or brazing. Use copper bonding jumpers on gasketed joints. F. Connect to equipment by means of lug compressed on cable end. Bolt lug to equipment frame using holes or terminals provided on equipment specifically for grounding. Do not use hold -down bolts. Where grounding provisions are not included, drill suitable holes in locations recommended by equipment manufacturer or designated by CITY. G. Connect to motors by bolting directly to motor frames, not to soleplates or supporting structures. H. Connect to service water piping by means of copper clamps. Use copper bonding jumpers on gasketed joints. I. Scrape bolted surfaces clean and coat with conductive oxide - resistant compound. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Test completed grounding systems for resistance to ground using an electrical three - terminal ground resistance tester. Test all grounded cables and metal parts for continuity of connection. CITY will witness the testing. 2. Grounding system maximum resistance shall not exceed five ohms under normally dry conditions when measured by resistance tester. Resistance values above five ohms shall be brought to CITY's attention. Provide additional ground rods as required to attain a resistance to ground of less than five ohms for each ground grid. Add grounding additive installing additional ground rods to increase their effectiveness. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16061 -4 Grounding Systems SECTION 16062 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install lightning protection systems for: a. Clearwater East Plant Engine Generator Enclosure, and Bulk Storage Tanks. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures included under other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before lightning protection systems. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 16061, Grounding Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI), LPI 175, Standard of Practice. 2. LPI 176, Standard of Materials. 3. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. 5. UL 96A, Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. 6. UL 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Lightning Protection System Subcontractor: a. Retain services of lightning protection Subcontractor regularly engaged in providing Master Labeled lightning protection systems. 2. Subcontractor shall be LPI - certified Master Installer or Inspector. 3. Subcontractor shall be listed with UL. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all materials equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single lightning protection system manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT 16062 -1 Lightning Protection System 2. Lightning protection system manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall system by lighting protection system manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Complete scaled drawings showing proposed routing and layout of lightning protection system with installation details. Drawings shall include equipment connection details and downlead details. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and technical information. b. Technical specifications. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificates of LPI code compliance provided by manufacturer, together with UL Master Label certificate or letter of finding. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Master Installer or Inspector's final inspection report following installation. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Lightning protection system Subcontractor. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee: 1. Lightning protection system shall be guaranteed by lightning protection system manufacturer against defective parts and installation for one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: 1. Each lightning protection system shall consist of a complete cable network on the roof or top of structure involving all air terminals, splices, and bonds with cable downleads routed concealed either directly in the building construction or in conduit to ground, and ground rods all connected together in an 11- 0025 -UT 16062 -2 Lightning Protection System appropriate manner and certified by LPI to provide a zone of protection to entire building against lightning strikes, in accordance with NFPA 780. 2. Provide complete, certified lightning protection system. Provide bonding connections and miscellaneous items for complete system. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Company. 2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.3 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Size materials in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and LPI 176. 2. Materials and equipment shall be labeled or listed by UL for use in Master Labeled lightning protection systems. Completed system shall conform to NFPA 70, NFPA 780, LPI 175, LPI 176, and UL96A. 3. Materials shall comply in weight, size, and composition for class of structure to be protected in accordance with the following: a. Use Class I materials for systems on structures not exceeding 75 feet in height. b. Use Class II materials for systems on structures exceeding 75 feet above grade. 4. Materials shall be corrosion- resistant, heavy -duty type. Unless otherwise specified, materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel, copper, or high copper - content bronze castings. Bolts, screws, and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Use aluminum materials in locations where system components are mounted on aluminum surfaces to avoid electrolytic corrosion of dissimilar metals. 6. Provide fittings, mounting bases, couplings, connectors, fasteners, and other system devices required for complete system. B. Ground Rods: Comply with Section 16061, Grounding Systems. C. Ground Cables: 1. Ground cables shall be copper, except in connections to aluminum surfaces as required to prevent dissimilar metals reaction. 2. Ground cable stranding, number and size shall be suitable for classification of structure to be protected. 3. Exposed ground cable shall be corrosion resistant. 11- 0025 -UT 16062 -3 Lightning Protection System D. Air Terminals: 1. Air terminals shall be stainless steel 5/8 -inch diameter and minimum of 18 inches long. 2. Air terminals shall include a cast bronze point protector, stainless steel adapter, and copper base. E. Non - Metallic Conduit and Fittings: 1. Non - metallic conduit shall be Schedule 80 PVC plastic, rated for 90 degrees C, conforming to UL 651. 2. Non - metallic fittings shall be of same material and manufacturer as base conduit. Provide cement for joining fittings to conduit. Fittings shall be by same manufacturer as base conduit. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install main conductors to provide two -way path from each air terminal horizontally or downward to connections with ground terminals. B. Install conductors free of excessive splices and sharp bends. Conductor bends shall form an included angle of not less than 90 degrees and shall not have bend radius less than eight inches. Secure conductors to structure at intervals not exceeding three feet. C. Conceal down conductors where possible in exterior wall construction. Space down conductors at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around perimeter of structure. Provide at least two down conductors for each protected structure. D. For structural steel frame construction, down conductors at upper and lower extremities and at intervals not exceeding 200 feet shall be connected to structural steel. Make connections to steel frame with bonding plates having eight square inches of contact, or by exothermic weld connections. E. Provide air terminals at intervals not exceeding 20 feet along ridges and around perimeter of flat or gently - sloping roofs. Air terminals shall project a minimum of 10 inches above the area protected. F. Protect flat or gently - sloping roofs exceeding 50 feet in width, by providing additional air terminals at intervals not exceeding 50 feet on flat or gently - sloping 11- 0025 -UT 16062 -4 Lightning Protection System area. Locate air terminals within two feet of roof edges and outside corners of protected areas. Air terminal spacing exceeding these dimensions will be allowed if the area protected is within a "zone of protection" from lightning strikes. G. Provide air terminals for stacks, flues, mechanical equipment, and other objects, having metal thickness less than 3/16 -inch and not located within a "zone of protection ". Connect objects having metal thickness 3/16 -inch or greater to lightning protection system. H. Do not connect copper equipment to aluminum surfaces, except using bimetal transition fitting. Lead coating is unacceptable for bimetal transition. I. Install roof penetrations using through -roof assemblies with solid bars and appropriate roof flashing. Conductors shall not pass directly through roof. J. Grounded metal bodies shall be bonded to the system using bonding connections and fittings. When ground conductors are installed in conduit, conduit shall be non- metallic. K. Bond building ground systems including electrical, communication, and telephone services and arresters. L. Bond metal pipes and roof mounted metal structure to the roof ground loop or to downlead cables. M. Provide ground electrodes for each down conductor dedicated for lightning protection system and bond electrodes to building or structure grounding system. Connect down conductor to ground rod using high- strength, removable ground clamp. Provide bronze ground rod clamp having at least I.5 inches of contact between rod and conductor, measured parallel to the axis of the rod, at ground test wells. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. During installation, lightning protection system shall be inspected by Master Installer or Inspector at several stages during installation in accordance with LPI requirements. 2. Do not conceal system components until inspection has been completed and successfully inspected, and observed by CITY. 11- 0025 -UT 16062 -5 Lightning Protection System 3. Upon completion of lightning protection system, arrange for final lightning system inspection and submit final inspection report to CITY. Final lightning system inspection shall be performed by Master Installer or Inspector in accordance with LPI requirements. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16062 -6 Lightning Protection System 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16070 SUPPORTS SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install hangers and supports for electrical systemns. 2. Area Classifications: Materials shall by suitable for the area classification(s) shown or indicated on the Drawings, and specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts. 2. Section 16050, General Provisions. 3. Section 16131, Rigid Conduits. 4. Section 13400, Instrumentation and Control Equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this section are: 1. ASTM A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low- Alloy, High- Strength Low - Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. 3. ASTM E84, Test Method For Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Detailed installation drawings showing dimensions and compatibility with proposed layout. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's name, product designation, and catalog number of each material item proposed for use. 11- 0025 -UT 16070 -1 Supports Systems b. Manufacturer's specifications including material, dimensional and weight data, and load capacity for each supporting system component proposed for use. c. Pictorial views and corresponding identifying text of each component proposed for installation. d. Documentation that confirms product compatibility with Laws and Regulations. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: a. Submit certifications required under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including recommended tightening torque values for all nuts and bolts. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. B -Line. 2. Kindorf. 3. Unistrut 4. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Strut, Fittings, and Accessories: 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, strut shall be 1 -5/8 inches by 1- 5/8 inches. Double struts shall be two pieces of the same strut, welded back -to -back at the factory. b. Attachment holes, when required, shall be factory- punched on hole centers approximately equal to the cross - sectional width and shall be 9/16 -inch diameter. c. Fittings, braces, brackets, hardware, and accessories shall be Type 316 stainless steel. d. Strut nuts shall be spring captured Type 316 stainless steel. e. Square and round washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Strut materials shall be suitable for area classifications indicated in Section 16050, General Provisions, and shown or indicated on the Drawings. a. Dusty Locations: 1) Strut shall be 12 -gage carbon steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A123/A123M. b. Wet Locations: 1) Strut shall be 12 -gage aluminum (Alloy 6063 -T6). 11- 0025 -UT 16070 -2 Supports Systems c. Corrosive Locations: 1) Strut shall be 12 -gage Type 316 stainless steel. B. Hanger Rods: 1. Material: a. Dry Locations: All- thread, zinc - coated b. Wet, Corrosive, or Hazardous Areas: Stainless steel. 2. Size: Not less than 3/8 -inch diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. C. Beam Clamps for Attaching Threaded Rods or Bolts to Beam Flanges for Hanging Struts or Conduit Hangers: 1. Beam clamps shall be stainless steel equipped with stainless steel square - head set screw, and shall include threaded hole sized for attaching the all - thread rod or threaded bolt. D. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1. Bolts, screws, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2. Hex Nuts: Shall be stainless steel and include nylon inserts. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide hangers and supports for electrical systems with necessary channels, fittings, brackets, and related hardware for mounting and supporting materials and equipment. Provide anchor systems, concrete inserts, and associated hardware for proper support of electrical systems. B. Install equipment and devices on hangers and supports as shown on the Drawings, as specified, and as required. C. Install hangers and supports level, true, free of rack, and parallel and perpendicular to building walls and floors, so that the hangers and supports are installed in a neat, professional, workmanlike manner. D. Holes in suspended ceilings for rods for hangers and supports and other equipment shall be provided adjacent to bars, where possible, to facilitate removal of ceiling panels. 11- 0025 -UT 16070 -3 Supports Systems E. Coordinate installation of hangers and supports with equipment, cabinets, consoles, panels, enclosures, boxes, conduit, cable tray, wireway, busway, cablebus, piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, and other systems and equipment. Locate hangers and supports clear of interferences and access ways. F. Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors, and Concrete Inserts: Shall be in accordance with Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts and requirements of this Section. G. Mounting of Conduit: 1. Provide space of not less than 1/4 -inch between conduit surfaces and abutting or near surfaces except struts, cable trays, steel beams, and columns. 2. Fasten conduit to struts, cable trays, steel beams, and columns using specified clamps and straps as shown, specified, and required. 3. Devices shall be compatible with size of conduit and type of support. Following installation, size identification shall be visible and legible. 4. Install conduit supports and fasteners in accordance with Section, 16131, Rigid Conduits. H. Supports for Cabinets, Consoles, Panels, Enclosures, and Boxes: 1. Freestanding: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, provide supports for floor - mounted equipment, cabinets, consoles, panels, enclosures, and boxes. Such supports shall be 3.5 -inch high concrete equipment base with a 45 degree chamfered edge. Base shall extend two inches beyond outside dimensions of equipment on all sides. 2. Wall- Mounted: a. Provide space not less than 1/4 -inch between cabinets, consoles, panels, enclosures, and boxes and the surface on which each is mounted. Provide non - metallic or stainless steel spacers as required. b. Do not mount equipment, enclosures, panels, and boxes directly to beams or columns. Mount struts to beams or columns using beam clamps, and mount equipment, enclosures, panels, and boxes to the struts. 3. Floor Stand Rack: a. Where equipment, cabinets, consoles, panels, enclosures, and boxes cannot be wall- mounted, provide an independent floor stand rack. b. Floor stand rack shall consist of struts, plates, brackets, connection fittings, braces, accessories, and hardware assembled in a rigid framework suitable for mounting of intended materials and equipment. c. Equip floor stand racks with brackets and bases for rigidly- mounting the framework to the ceiling or floor, as applicable; or equip floor stand racks with beam clamps, angle plates, washers, and bolts for fastening to beam flanges, as applicable. d. When equipment, cabinets, consoles, panels, enclosures, and boxes weigh more than 100 pounds: 11- 0025 -UT 16070 -4 Supports Systems 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) Main vertical supports of floor stand rack assemblies shall be back - to -back struts. 2) Bracing, clamping and anchoring of each floor stand rack shall be sufficient to ensure rigidity of the floor stand rack with the intended equipment, enclosures, conduit, cable tray, busway, cablebus, and wireway installed. Floor stand racks shall not be deflected more than 1/8 -inch by a 100 -pound force applied at any point on the floor stand rack in any direction. I. Drilling into beams or columns is not allowed unless authorized by CITY. J. Tighten nuts and bolts to the manufacturer's recommended torque values. K. Field Cutting: 1. Cut edges of strut and hanger rod shall have rounded corners, edges beveled, and burrs removed. If field cutting the strut is required, use clean, sharp, dedicated tools. Remove oil, shavings, and other residue of cuttings prior to installation. 2. Coatings: To prevent corrosion: a. Coat cut edges with epoxy -base touchup paint. b. Coat cut edges with zinc -rich paint. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16070 -5 Supports Systems 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16070 -6 Supports Systems SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install identification for electrical apparatus and electrical Work. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable. 2. Section 16121, Instrumentation and Communication Cable. 3. Section 16131, Rigid Conduit. 4. Section 16135, Pull Junction and Terminal Boxes. 5. Section 16142, Receptacles. 6. Section 16142, Snap Switches. 7. Section 16143, Disconnect Switches. 8. Section 16144, Control Stations. 9. Section 16271, Dry-Type Transformers. 10. Section 16412, Automatic Transfer Switches. 11. Section 16442, Panelboards. 12. Section 16611, Uninterruptible Power Supply. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 110, Requirements for Electrical Installation. 2. NEC Article 210, Branch Circuits. 3. NEC Article 215, Feeders. 4. NEC Article 504, Intrinsically Safe Systems. 5. NEC Article 701, Legally Required Standby Systems. 6. 40 CFR 1910.145 (OSHA) — Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags. 7. NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: a. Complete description and listing of proposed electrical identification and electrical identification devices for associated equipment or systems. 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -1 Electrical Identification b. Conduit and wire identification numbering system and equipment signage. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature, cut sheets, specifications, dimensions and technical data for all products proposed under this Section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Engraved Identification Devices (Nameplates and Legend Plates): 1. Nameplates: a. Laminated thermoset plastic, 1/16-inch thick, engraved condensed block black lettering on white background, square corners, and beveled front edges, or match existing. b. Size: As required. c. Letter Size: Minimum 3/16 -inch. d. Nameplates one -inch or less in height shall have one mounting hole at each end. Nameplates greater than one -inch in height shall have mounting holes in the four corners. 2. Legend Plates: a. Legend plates for pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches, and other panel- mounted devices shall be large size with dimensions of approximately 2 -7/16 inches wide by 2 -13/32 inches tall (Allen Bradley large automotive size), plastic, custom engraved with black letters on white background. 1) Provide standard -size legend plates where devices are mounted on motor control centers and spacing of devices precludes using automotive -size legend plates. b. Lettering size and line weight shall be the same for all legend plates on the same panel or enclosure. Maximum size shall be 1/4 -inch and minimum size shall be 1/8 -inch. B. Safety Signs and Voltage Markers: 1. Provide high voltage signs for equipment operating over 600 volts. 2. High- Voltage Safety Signs for Outdoor Applications: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) B -120 -45471 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, high voltage safety signs shall be not less than 10 inches high by 14 inches wide, of fiberglass reinforced plastic, and shall comply with 40 CFR 1910.145. Signs shall resist fading from exposure to temperature extremes, ultraviolet light, abrasive, and corrosive environments, and shall read, "DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT" c. Mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -2 Electrical Identification 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. High - Voltage Safety Signs for Indoor Applications: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) B- 302 -84084 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. High voltage safety signs for installation on indoor equipment shall be either pressure- sensitive acrylic or vinyl, and shall be not less than 10 inches high by 14 inches wide, shall comply with 40 CFR 1910.145, and shall read, "DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT ". 4. Cable Tray Safety Signs: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) B- 302 -86139 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Cable tray safety signs shall be pressure- sensitive vinyl conforming to 40 CFR 1910.145, 5 inches by 3.5 inches in size, and shall read, "DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE" 5. Low - Voltage Safety Signs: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) B- 302 -86060 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Low voltage safety signs shall be pressure- sensitive vinyl complying with 40 CFR 1910.145, five inches by 3.5 inches in size, and shall read, "DANGER — 480 VOLTS ". 6. Low - Voltage Markers: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) CV442xx by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Low voltage markers shall be either pressure- sensitive vinyl or vinyl cloth with black lettering on orange background and shall read, "120 VOLTS ", "208 VOLTS ", "120/208 VOLTS ", or "240 VOLTS" as required. C. Voltage System Identification Directories: 1. General: a. Directories shall be laminated thermoset plastic, 1/16 -inch thick, engraved block black letters on white background, square corners, and beveled front edges. b. Directories shall identify all voltage systems within building or structure. c. Directories shall list the colors that identify ungrounded and grounded conductors of each system. d. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 16122 600 Volt Cable. e. Example Directory Text: 11- 0025 -UT Voltage System Identification System A, B, C Neutral 277/480 Brown, Orange, Yellow Gray 120/208 Black, Blue, Red White 16075 -3 Electrical Identification 2. Large directories for rooms shall have text height not less than 1/2 -inch. 3. Small directories for equipment shall have text height of not Less than 1/4- inch. D. Conduit Labels: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. B- 915 -xxxxx by Brady. b. Or equal. 2. Shall be pre- tensioned acrylic /vinyl construction coiled to completely encircle conduit for conduit up through five -inch diameter, or pre - molded to conform to circumference of conduit six -inch diameter and larger. 3. Attach strap -on style for six -inch diameter conduit with stainless steel springs. 4. Shall be blank for use with custom printed labels. 5. Custom Labels: a. Shall have black lettering on yellow background. b. Shall not contain abbreviations in legend. c. Shall be custom printed on continuous tape with permanent adhesive using thermal printer specified below. E. Wire Identification: 1. Heat Shrinkable Wire and Cable Labeling System: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) B -341 PS- xxx -2W by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. White heat - shrinkable irradiated polyolefin shrink -on sleeves. Labels shall be thermal printed. Labels shall be not less than two inches wide. 2. Wrap- Around Wire and Cable Labeling System: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) THT -XX -427 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Self - laminating white /transparent self extinguishing vinyl strips. Length shall be sufficient to provide at least 2.5 wraps. Labels shall be thermally printed and not less than two inches wide. F. Detectable Underground Warning Tape: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Indentoline by Brady. b. Or equal. 2. Material: Polyethylene or polyester with detectable metal core and polyester underlaminate. 3. Width: Two inches. 4. Color and Labeling: Yellow or red with permanently imprinted black letters: "CAUTION — Buried Electric Line ", repeated continuously over full length of tape. 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -4 Electrical Identification G. Thermal Printing System: 1. Utilize thermal transfer process to provide non - smearing 2. Wire and Cable Markers: a. Portable, Products and Manufacturers: Provide one 1) TLS2200 by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Desktop, Products and Manufacturers: Provide one 1) 200M by Brady. 2) Or equal. 3. Cable Markers: a. Portable, Products and Manufacturers: Provide one 1) Handimark by Brady. 2) Or equal. b. Desktop, Products and Manufacturers: Provide one 1) Labelizer PLUS by Brady. 2) Or equal. labels and markers. of the following: of the following: of the following: of the following: H. Generator System Warning Signs: 1. Generator warning signs shall be labeled in accordance with NEC Article 700, NEC Article 701, or NEC Article 702. 2. Material, Colors, Letters: Plastic with white letters on red background. Letters shall be not less than 3/8 -inch high. 3. Attachment: Use stainless steel self - tapping screws. 4. Location warning sign shall read, "WARNING — THIS SITE EQUIPPED WITH A DIESEL DRIVEN STAND -BY GENERATOR LOCATED IN AN ADJACENT ROOM ". 5. Generator ground warning sign shall read, "WARNING — GENERATOR GROUNDED CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR IS CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR IN THIS ENCLOSURE. DO NOT OPERATE GENERATOR WHILE EITHER CONDUCTOR IS DISCONNECTED TO AVOID SEVERE SHOCK HAZARD AND POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE." I. Contractor shall provide and install a sign at service entrance (MCB -1) indicating type and location of on -site legally required standby power source. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Engraved Identification Devices (Nameplates and Legend Plates): 1. Nameplate and legend plate text is preliminary and subject to change pending final review and approval of nomenclature by CITY after start-up and testing. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -5 Electrical Identification A. Provide electrical identification in accordance with manufacturer recom- mendations and as required for proper identification of equipment and materials. B. Engraved Identification Devices (Nameplates and Legend Plates): 1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, attach permanent nameplates with permanent adhesive and with 3/16 -inch diameter, round head, stainless steel machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Provide nameplate with 1.5 -inch high letters to identify each console, cabinet, panel, or enclosure as shown or indicated. 3. Provide nameplates for field- mounted motor starters, disconnect switches, manual starter switches, pushbutton stations, and similar equipment operating components, which shall describe motor or equipment function and circuit number. 4. Provide nameplates with 1/2 -inch high letters to identify each junction and terminal box shown or indicated. 5. On switchgear, provide nameplates for each main and feeder circuit including control fuses, and for each indicating light and instrument. a. Provide nameplate with 1.5 -inch high letters giving switchgear designation, voltage rating, ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number. b. Identify individual door for each compartment with nameplate giving item designation and circuit number. 6. Motor Control Centers: a. Provide nameplate with 1.5 -inch letters with motor control center designation. b. Identify individual door for each unit compartment with nameplate identifying controlled equipment. 7. Except conduit, all electrical appurtenances including lighting panels, convenience outlets, fixtures, and lighting switches, shall be provided with nameplates indicating appropriate circuit breaker number(s). 8. Push Buttons: a. Provide legend plates for identification of functions. b. Provide nameplates for identification of controlled equipment. c. Provide red buttons for stop function. d. Provide black buttons for other functions. 9. Pilot Lights: a. Provide legend plates for identification of functions. b. Provide nameplates for identification of controlled equipment. c. Shall have lens colors as shown or indicated. Where no color is indicated, provide the following lens colors: 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -6 Electrical Identification 1 1 1 1 f i f 1 1 f t 1 1 1 1 Color Legend Green Running, Open Red Stopped, Closed Amber Alarm Blue Power White Status 10. Selector Switches: a. Provide legend plates for identification of functions. b. Provide nameplates for identification of controlled equipment. 11. Panel Mounted Instruments: a. Provide nameplates for identification of function. 12. Interiors of Cabinets, Consoles, Panels, Terminal Boxes, and Other Enclosures: a. Provide nameplates for identification. b. Provide each item inside cabinet, console, panel, terminal box, or enclosure with laminated plastic nameplate as shown on approved Shop Drawings and CONTRACTOR "s other submittals. Install nameplates with adhesive. c. Interior items requiring nameplates include: 1) Terminal blocks and strips. 2) Bus bars. 3) Relays. 4) Rear of face - mounted items. 5) Rear of door - mounted items. 6) Interior mounted items that require identification when mounted externally. d. Circuit Breaker Directory: 1) Provide engraved laminated plastic directory listing function and load controlled for each circuit breaker within panel used for power distribution. 13. Re -label existing equipment whose designation have changed. C. Safety Signs and Voltage Markers: 1. Provide safety signs and voltage markers on and around electrical equipment as shown or indicated. a. Install rigid safety signs using stainless steel fasteners. b. Clean surfaces before applying pressure- sensitive signs and markers. 2. Install high voltage safety signs on all equipment doors providing access to uninsulated conductors, including terminal devices, greater than 600 volts. 3. Provide cable tray safety signs on both sides of cable trays at maximum intervals of 20 feet. Install signs on side rails of tray as acceptable to CITY. a. Label cable trays that contain conductors greater than 600 volts with cable tray safety signs. b. Cable trays that contain conductors greater than 208 volts and less than 600 volts shall be labeled with low voltage safety signs. 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -7 Electrical Identification c. Cable trays that contain conductors of 120/208 volts shall be labeled with low voltage markers. d. Do not label cable trays that contain only instrument signal cables. e. Label cable trays that contain intrinsically safe wiring or cables in accordance with NEC Article 504. 4. Install low voltage safety signs on equipment doors that provide access to uninsulated 480 -volt conductors, including terminal devices. 5. Install low voltage markers on each terminal box, safety disconnect switch, and panelboard installed, modified, or relocated as part of the Work and containing 120/208 volt conductors. D. Voltage System Identification Directories 1. Provide voltage system identification directories as required by NEC Article 210 and NEC Article 215. 2. Provide in each electrical room voltage system identification directory mounted on wall or door at each entrance to room. 3. For panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and other branch circuit or feeder distribution equipment that are not located in electrical rooms, provide voltage system identification directory mounted on equipment. a. Directories shall be affixed using epoxy glue. Screws or bolts shall not penetrate equipment enclosures. b. Directories shall be readily visible and not obscure labels and other markings on equipment. E. Conduit Labels: 1. Provide conduits with conduit labels unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Do not label flexible conduit. 3. Do not label exposed single conduit runs of less than 25 feet between local disconnect switches and their associated equipment. 4. Conduit labels shall indicate the following information: a. Contract Number: Alphanumeric, three or four digits, as applicable. b. Conduit Number: Alphanumeric as shown on the Drawings, as assigned by CONTRACTOR for unlabelled conduits, and in accordance with approved submittals. 5. Conduits that contain intrinsically safe wiring shall have an additional pipe marker provided that has blue letters on white background and reads, "INTRINSICALLY SAFE WIRING ". a. Install intrinsically safe pipe markers in accordance with NEC Article 504 along entire installation. Spacing between labels shall not exceed 25 feet. 6. Provide conduit labels at the following locations: a. Where each conduit enters and exits walls, ceilings, floors, or slabs. b. Where conduit enters or exits boxes, cabinets, consoles, panels, or enclosures, except pull boxes and conduit bodies used for pull boxes. c. At maximum intervals of 50 feet along length of conduit. 7. Orient conduit labels to be readable. 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -8 Electrical Identification F. Wire and Cable Identification: 1. Color- coding of insulated conductors shall comply with Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable. 2. Use heat - shrinkable wire labels where wire or cable is terminated. Use wrap- around labels where wire or cable is to be labeled but is not terminated. 3. Do not provide labels for the following: a. Bare (uninsulated) conductors, unless otherwise shown or indicated as labeled. 4. Provide wire and cable labels for the following: a. New, rerouted, or revised wire or cable. b. Insulated conductors. c. Wire and cable terminations: 1) Wire labels shall be applied between completed termination 2) Apply cable labels between 1/2 -inch and into individual conductors. a) Label individual conductors in a specified for wires. d. Wire or cable exiting cabinets, consoles, panels, terminal boxes, and enclosures. 1) Label wires or cables within two inches of entrance to conduit. e. Wire or cable in junction boxes and pull boxes 1) Label wires or cables within two inches of entrance to conduit. f. Wire and cable installed in cable tray. 1) Wire and cable shall have labels at maximum intervals of 20 feet. Wire and cable installed without termination in electrical manholes. 1) Wire and cable shall have wrap- around labels applied within one foot of exiting manhole. 5. Wire and Cable Identification System: a. Wire and cable labels shall be imprinted with an identifying designator. 1) Wire and cable extending between two devices or items and that does not undergo a change of function shall be identified by a single unique designator as specified below. b. Cabinet, Console, Panel, and Enclosure Wiring, Internal: 1) New Cabinets, Consoles, Panels, and Enclosures: a) Wire and cable inside cabinets, consoles, panels, and enclosures shall have designators as specified in Section 13400, Instrument and Control Equipment. 6. Modified Cabinets, Consoles, Panels, and Enclosures: a. New or rerouted wire or cable in existing cabinets, consoles, panels, and enclosures shall be labeled as shown on the Drawings or be assigned a ten - character designator equivalent to field wire designator. 1/2-inch and one inch of one inch of cable breakout cable after breakout as g. G. Terminal Strip Labeling: 11- 0025 -UT 16075 -9 Electrical Identification 1. Label panel side of terminal to match panel wire number. 2. Label field side of terminal to match field wire number. Terminal number shall not include the Contract number. H. Generator System Warning Signs: 1. Provide warning signs for generator systems as required by NEC. 2. Install generator location warning sign on or immediately adjacent to service equipment, or to "normal" source disconnecting means when generator is located out of sight of service equipment or disconnecting means. 3. Install generator grounding warning sign on enclosure or immediately adjacent to point where generator neutral is connected to grounding electrode system if connection is made remote from generator. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16075 -10 Electrical Identification SECTION 16121 INSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install instrumentation and communication cables. 2. Types of cables include the following: a. Shielded instrumentation cables. b. Data communication cables. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16131, Rigid Conduits. 2. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.2 TERMINOLOGY A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. "CPE" means chlorinated polyethylene. 2. "FEP" means fluorinated ethylene - propylene. 3. "XLPE" means cross - linked polyethylene. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM A510, Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel. 2. ASTM B633, Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA -568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling (requirements and restrictions of Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) apply.) 4. TIA/EIA -485, Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems (known as RS -485). 5. UL 13, Power - Limited Circuit Cables. 6. UL 1581, Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords. 7. UL VW -1, Vertical Wire Flame Test. 11- 0025 -UT Cables 16121 -1 Instrumentation and Communication 8. UL 910, Safety Test for Flame- Propagation and Smoke - Density Values for Electrical and Optical -Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NEC 725, Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote - Control, Signaling and Power - Limited Circuits. 2. NEC 727, Instrumentation Tray Cable. 3. NEC 800, Communications Circuits. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information for instrumentation cables and communications cables proposed. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: Written report of results of field quality control testing specified in this Section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Cables shall bear the UL label. B. Single Shielded Pair Instrument Cables: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Belden Company. b. Okonite Company. c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company. d. Or equal. 2. Tinned copper, XLPE - insulated, stranded conductors, not less than no. 16 AWG, twisted pair, with overall shield, stranded tinned no. 18 AWG copper drain wire and overall PVC or CPE jacket. Rated for not less than 600 volts and complying with UL 1581. C. Multi - Paired Shielded Instrument Cables: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Belden Company. b. Okonite Company. 11- 0025 -UT Cables 16121 -2 Instrumentation and Communication c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company. d. Or equal. 2. Tinned copper, XLPE - insulated stranded conductors, not less than no. 16 AWG, twisted pairs with shield over each pair, stranded tinned no. 18 AWG copper drain wire, and overall PVC or CPE outer jacket. Rated for not less than 600 volts and complying with either UL 1581 or UL 13. D. Multi - Conductor Shielded Instrument Cables: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Belden Company. b. Okonite Company. c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company. d. Or equal. 2. Tinned copper, XLPE - insulated stranded conductors, not less than no. 16 AWG, stranded tinned no. 18 AWG copper drain wire, with overall 100 percent foil shield and overall PVC or CPE jacket. Rated for not less than 600 volts. E. Cable Terminals: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. T &B Sta -Kon. b. Burndy Insulug. c. Or equal. 2. Fork type copper compression terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at terminal blocks. F. Patch Cords: 1. Patch cords are used for connecting patch panel to hub, or wall jack to equipment. 2. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Bertek. b. Belden. c. Mohawk d. Or equal. 3. Cables shall consist of no. 24 AWG, thermoplastic- insulated, stranded conductors formed into four individually - twisted pairs and enclosed by thermoplastic jacket. 4. Cables shall be riser - rated. 5. Rated for Category 6 use. 6. Cables shall incorporate integral strain relief into the connector at each end. Connectors shall be RJ45 plugs. 7. Provide the following patch cords: a. One 10 -foot cable per wall jack installed. b. One 3 -foot cable per every two wall jacks installed. c. One 5 foot cable per every two wall jacks installed. 11- 0025 -UT Cables 16121 -3 Instrumentation and Communication PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install cables complete with proper terminations at both ends. 2. Install in conduit separate from power cables, unless shown or indicated otherwise. 3. Ground shield on shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument manufacturer. 4. Identify conductors in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 5. Install and terminate Supplier- furnished cable in accordance with equipment manufacturer requirements and cable manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations, including NEC. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with ohmmeter for continuity along full length of cables, and for shield continuity to ground. 2. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to calibrated 4 to 20 mA dc signal transmitter and receiver. Test at 4 and 20 mA transmitter settings. 3. Replace with new cables the full length of cables that fail test. 4. Test equipment shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. 5. For testing of communications cables, test equipment used shall comply with the following: a. Equipment shall consist of a "master" and a "remote" unit. b. Test of all aspects of cables shall be automatic and initiated with a single command. Test over entire frequency range. Test unit shall be capable of accepting cable identification tag for reporting. Test unit shall return "pass /fail" status for cables and, if "fail ", shall indicate reason for failure. c. Test unit shall be capable of storing all test results internally and printing the results later. d. For unshielded twisted pair cables, test unit shall be specifically designed and manufactured to certify cabling relative to Category 6 compliant. 11 -0025 -UT Cables + + END OF SECTION + + 16121 -4 Instrumentation and Communication SECTION 16122 600 VOLT CABLES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install low- voltage conductors and cabling. 2. Types of cabling required include: a. Insulated cable for installation in raceways. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/NETA ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems. 2. ASTM B3, Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 3. ASTM B8, Specification for Concentric - Lay- Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard or Soft. 4. ASTM D3485, Specification for Smooth -Wall Coilable Polyethylene (PE) Conduit (Duct) for Preassembled Wire and Cable. 5. ASTM F2160, Solid Wall High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit Based on Controlled Outside Diameter (OD). 6. NEMA TC 7, Smooth Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit. 7. UL 83, Thermoset- Insulated Wires and Cables. 8. UL 62, Flexible Cords and Cables. 9. UL 1277, Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical - Fiber Members. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 300, Wiring Methods. 2. NEC Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring. 11- 0025 -UT 16122 -1 600 Volt Cables 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, and engineering data for low volt insulated cable proposed for use. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Written results of field insulation resistance tests. PART 2 —PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Insulated Cable In Raceways: 1. Application: Use for circuits located indoors and outdoors. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Southwire. b. The Okonite Company. c. American Insulated Wire d. General Cable e. Or equal. 3. Material: Single conductor copper cable complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 with flame - retardant, moisture- and heat - resistant insulation rated for 90 degrees C in dry or wet locations, listed by UL as Type THWN -2 complying with UL 62. Utilize RHW -2 cable in ductbanks for East WRF Project. 4. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting and No. 14 AWG for 120 -volt control circuits. 5. Stranding: 600 -volt cable shall be stranded, except that solid cable, No. 10 and smaller may be used for lighting circuits. B. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. T &B Sta -Kon. b. Burndy Hylug. c. Or equal. 2. For wire sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted type with silver - plated contact faces. 3. For wire sizes up to and including No. 6 AWG, use compression type. Alarm and control wire shall be terminated using forked type connectors at terminal boards. 4. For wire sizes No. 250 KCMIL and larger, use connectors with at least two cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two bolts for joining to apparatus terminal. 11- 0025 -UT 16122 -2 600 Volt Cables 5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size. Connectors shall be rated for 90 degree C, 600 volts. C. Cable Splices: 1. Products and Manufacturers: a. Compression -Type Splices: Provide one of the following: 1) Burndy Hylink. 2) T &B Color -Keyed Compression Connectors. 3) Or equal. b. Spring Connectors: Provide one of the following: 1) Buchanan B -Cap. 2) T &B Wire Connector. 3) Or equal. 2. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, splices shall be made up with compression type copper splice fittings. Splices shall be taped and covered with materials recommended by cable manufacturer to provide insulation equal to that on conductors. 3. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller, splices may be made up with pre - insulated spring connectors. 4. For wet locations, splices shall be waterproof. Compression type splices shall be waterproofed by sealant - filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring thermosetting resin into mold that surrounds the joined conductor. Spring connector splices shall be waterproofed with sealant filler. 5. Splices shall be suitably sized for cable, rated 90 degrees C, and 600 volts. D. Wire and Cable Markers: 1. Provide wire and cable markers in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: 1. Factory -test wire and cable in accordance with UL standards PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cables complete with proper terminations at both ends. Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation. B. Pulling: 1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil. 2. Pulling tension shall be within limits recommended by wire and cable manufacturer. 11- 0025 -UT 16122 -3 600 Volt Cables 3. Use dynamometer where mechanical means are used. 4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means. C. Bending Radius: Limit to minimum of six times cable overall diameter. D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points. E. Splices: 1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to termination. 2. Where required, splice as shown and also where required for cable installation. Splices below grade, in manholes, handholes, and wet locations shall be waterproof. 3. Splices are not allowed in conduits. F. Identification: 1. Identify conductors in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Identify power conductors by circuit number and phase at each terminal or splice location. 3. Identify control and status wiring using numeral tagging system. G. Color -code power cables as follows: 1. No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 2. No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, wrapped in overlapping turns to cover an area of at Least two inches. 3. Colors: Match color scheme in use at the Site. If the Site does not have an existing color scheme, use the following colors: System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 240/120 Volts Single- Phase, Three -Wire Grounded Neutral One Hot Leg Other Hot Leg White Black Red 208Y/120 Volts Three - Phase, Four -Wire Grounded Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C White Black Red Blue 240/120 Volts Three - Phase, Four -Wire Delta, Center Tap Ground on Single -Phase Grounded Neutral Phase A High (wild) Leg Phase C White Black Orange Blue 480Y/277 Volts Three- Phase, Four -Wire rounded Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C Gray Brown Orange Yellow 11- 0025 -UT 16122 -4 600 Volt Cables 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place, to demonstrate that circuit and equipment are connected properly and will perform satisfactorily, free from improper grounds and short circuits. 2. Individually test 600 -volt cable mechanical connections after installation and before they are put in service, with calibrated torque wrench. Values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Individually test 600 -volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service, with Megger for one minute at voltage rating recommended by cable manufacturer or in accordance with ANSI/NETA ATS recommendations. 4. Insulation resistance for each conductor shall not be less than value recommended by cable manufacturer. Cables not meeting recommended value or that fail when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable for full length. 5. Where existing cables are spliced to cables provided under the Project, test existing cables prior to splicing. Test cables at 1,000 vdc for one minute. Entire spliced cable installation shall be re- tested after splice is completed. Existing cable that fails or has value less than two megohms shall be brought to attention of CITY and splicing shall not proceed until condition is acceptable. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16122 -5 600 Volt Cables 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16122 -6 600 Volt Cables 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16131 RIGID CONDUITS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install conduit and fittings to form complete, coordinated and grounded raceway systems. 2. When specific, detailed conduit routings for various systems within buildings and other areas are not be shown on the Drawings, CONTRACTOR shall establish routings based on single -line, riser, and interconnection diagrams and other information on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide for the proper installation of conduits in each system. 3. Conduit types and the installation methods shall comply with the following, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents: a. Use aluminum at East WRF and EMT at Marshall Street Lab for exposed indoor conduit runs in non - corrosive areas. b. Use aluminum conduit for exposed interior or exterior conduit runs in hazardous, wet, and corrosive locations. c. Use PVC - coated rigid steel conduit for individual conduits direct - buried in the ground. d. Use Schedule 40 PVC for concrete - encased duct bank runs. e. Use steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit for conduit runs embedded in structural concrete slabs. B. Coordination: 1. Conduit runs shown are diagrammatic. Coordinate conduit installation with piping, ductwork, light fixtures, and other systems and equipment and locate to avoid interferences. 2. For conduits to be embedded in concrete slabs, confirm adequate slab thickness and coordinate location of conduits with placement of reinforcing steel, waterstops, expansion joints, and other features of the concrete slab. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill 2. Section 02742, Bituminous Paving. 3. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 4. Section 16070, Supports Systems. 5. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -1 Rigid Conduits 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI C80.1, Standard for Rigid Electrical Steel Conduit (ERSC). 2. ANSI/NEMA FBI, Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable. 3. NEMA TC2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. 4. NEMA TC3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 5. NEMA TC14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 6. UL 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit — Steel. 7. UL 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 8. UL 651, Safety Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 9. UL 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 10. UL 1242, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit — Steel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 342, Intermediate Metal Conduit 2. NEC Article 344, Rigid Metal Conduit. 3. NEC Article 352, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Assembly details of conduit racks and other conduit support systems. b. Layout drawings showing proposed routing of exposed conduits, conduits embedded in structural concrete, and conduits directly buried in the ground. Shop Drawings shall show locations of pull and junction boxes and penetrations in walls and floors. Shop Drawings of embedded conduits shall include cross - sections showing thickness of concrete slabs and locations of conduits relative to reinforcing steel, waterstops, and other features of the slab. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and product data for conduit, fittings, and appurtenances. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. When requested by CITY, provide copies of manufacturer's recommendations for handling and installing products. 2. Site Quality Control Submittals: 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -2 Rigid Conduits a. When requested by CITY, provide copies of results of specified Site quality control testing. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Drawings: a. Show actual routing of exposed and concealed conduit runs in record documents in accordance with Section 01782, Record Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows, and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Wheatland Tube Company. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. d. Or equal. 2. Material: Rigid, heavy -wall, mild steel, hot -dip galvanized, smooth interior, tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4 -inch NPS minimum size. B. PVC - coated Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows, and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Robroy Industries. b. Perma -Cote Industries. c. OCAL, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Material: Rigid, heavy -wall, mild steel, hot -dip galvanized, smooth urethane interior coating, tapered threads, carefully reamed ends, 3/4 -inch NPS minimum size with factory exterior coating of 40 -mil thick PVC. 3. Color: Color of coating shall be the same on all conduit and fittings. C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit, Elbows, and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Wheatland Tube Company. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp. d. Or equal. 2. Material: Rigid -type steel, work- hardened, hot -dip galvanized, smooth interior, tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4 -inch NPS minimum size. 3. Couplings: Same as for rigid steel conduit. 4. Elbows: Factory formed of same material specification as for intermediate metallic conduit. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -3 Rigid Conduits D. Aluminum Conduit, Elbows, and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Wheatland Tube Company. c. Or equal. 2. Material: Rigid, heavy -wall aluminum, smooth interior, tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4 -inch NPS minimum size. E. Metallic Conduit Fittings, and Outlet Bodies: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Crouse -Hinds Company. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. 2. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron or aluminum bodies and covers consistent with conduit material. Units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Materials shall comply with ANSI/NEMA FBI and be listed by UL. Do not use "LB" fittings. Use type "LBD" fittings where use of fittings is unavoidable. 3. Use: Conduits shall be gasketed and watertight in hazardous, wet, and corrosive locations. F. PVC - coated Conduit Fittings, and Outlet Bodies: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Robroy Industries. b. Perma -Cote Industries. c. OCAL, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies and covers with factory coating of 40 -mil thick PVC and smooth urethane interior coating. Units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Material shall comply with ANSI/NEMA FB1 and be listed by UL. Do not use "LB" fittings. Use type "LBD" fittings where use of fittings is unavoidable. 3. Use: Provide PVC - coated or aluminum conduit fittings and outlet bodies in hazardous, wet, and corrosive locations. Fitting material shall be consistent with conduit material. G. Non - metallic Conduit and Fittings: 1. PVC Plastic Conduit: a. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1) Amoco Chemicals Corp. 2) Carlon Electrical Products. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Schedule 40 PVC, rated for 90 degrees C, complying with NEMA TC3 and UL 514B and 651. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -4 Rigid Conduits 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 1 c. Fittings: Form elbows, bodies, terminations, expansions, and fasteners of same material and manufacturer as base conduit. Provide cement by same manufacturer as base conduit. H. Conduit Hubs: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products one of the following. a. Myers Electrical Products Company. b. Or equal. 2. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration - proof, weatherproof, with captive 0-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and bonding screw. 3. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets, and other enclosures in areas designated as wet locations. I. PVC - coated Conduit Hubs: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products one of the following: a. Robroy Industries. b. Perma -Cote Industries. c. OCAL, Inc. d. Or equal. 2. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration - proof, weatherproof, with captive 0-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and bonding screw, and factory coating of 40 -mil thick PVC and smooth urethane interior coating. 3. Use: Provide for PVC - coated steel or aluminum conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets, and other enclosures in areas designated as corrosive location. J. Conduit Bushings and Locknuts: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products one of the following: a. 0-Z/Gedney. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. 2. Insulated Bushings: Malleable iron body with plastic liner. Threaded type with steel clamping screw. Provide with bronze grounding lug, as required. 3. Locknuts: Steel for sizes 3/4 -inch through two -inch diameter and malleable iron for sizes 2.5 -inch through four -inch diameter. 4. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other enclosures except threaded type in areas designated as dusty locations. K. Thruwall Seals 1. For new construction through exterior subsurface walls and exterior concrete walls. a. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Type WSK and WSCS by 0-Z/Gedney. 2) Or equal. 2. For new construction passing through concrete floors and floor slabs. a. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -5 Rigid Conduits 1) Type FSK and FSCS floor seals by O -Z /Gedney. 2) Or equal. 3. For conduits passing through new exterior masonry block walls or through core - drilled holes in existing exterior subsurface walls, exterior concrete walls, floor slabs ,and roof slabs, and for conduits passing through existing interior concrete walls or floors and interior masonry block walls. a. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Type CSMI sealing bushing at the inside of the structure and Type CSMC sealing bushing at the outside of the structure by O- Z /Gedney. 2) Or equal. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: To the extent possible, fastener material shall be consistent with conduit material. For PVC - coated rigid steel conduit runs, fasteners shall have factory applied PVC coating or be stainless steel. Fasten raceway systems to supporting structures using the following: 1. To Wood: Wood screws. 2. To Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts, in accordance with Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 3. To Brick Masonry: Expansion bolts by Price, or equal. 4. To Concrete: Anchors in accordance with Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps in accordance with Section 16070, Support Systems. B. Duct Sealing Compound 1. Soft, fibrous, slightly tacky, non - hardening sealing compound. 2. Remains workable at all temperatures. 3. Manufacturer: a. Type DUX by O -Z /Gedney. b. Or equal. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Labels: 1. Provide conduit labels in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -6 Rigid Conduits B. Warning Tape: 1. Provide warning tape in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Supports: 1. Rigidly support conduits by clamps, hangers, or Unistrut -type channels. Conduit supports and accessories shall be in accordance with Section 16070, Supporting Systems. 2. Support single conduits by means of one -hole pipe clamps in combination with one -screw back plates, to raise conduits from the support surface. Support multiple runs of conduits on trapeze type hangers. C. Fastenings: Fasten raceway systems rigidly and neatly to supporting structures using specified materials. D. Exposed Conduit: 1. Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members or walls. 2. Where possible, run in groups. Provide conduit racks of suitable width, length, and height, arranged to suit field conditions. Provide support every ten feet, minimum. 3. Install on structural members in protected locations. 4. Locate clear of interferences. 5. Provide six inches of clearance from hot fluid lines and 1/4 -inch from walls. 6. Install vertical runs plumb. Unsecured drop length shall not exceed 12 feet. E. Conduit Embedded in Structural Concrete: 1. Run embedded conduit in structural concrete in center of slabs and walls and above waterstops. Conduit connections shall be made watertight. 2. Before placing concrete, arrange for observation of conduit installation by RPR or CITY and make necessary conduit location measurements and provide required information on record documents. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -7 Rigid Conduits 3. Confirm that concrete thickness is sufficient for embedding the quantity of conduits intended. Unless specifically shown or indicated otherwise, embedded conduits shall be in accordance with the following criteria: a. Minimum concrete thickness shall be as follows: 1) For concrete 16 inches thick and less, minimum concrete thickness shall be 11.5 inches plus the depth of largest conduit assembly. Conduit assembly depth shall be from the top of uppermost conduit to bottom of lowest conduit. 2) For concrete greater than 16 inches thick, minimum concrete thickness shall be 13.5 inches plus depth of largest conduit assembly. 3) For concrete at foundation slabs, provide an one inch additional to minimum concrete thicknesses specified. b. Conduit spacing shall be as follows: 1) Two adjacent conduits shall be separated by center -to- center distance of three times the outer diameter of larger conduit 2) When conduits cross at a point, conduits may be in direct contact and angle of cross shall be 45 degrees or greater. Conduits may also cross within the vertical spacing of multi- conduit layer assembly. 3) When conduits cross structural expansion joint, two adjacent conduits shall be separated by center -to- center distance of three times the outer diameter of conduit fitting of the larger conduit. F. Underground Conduits: 1. Install individual, underground conduits minimum of 20 inches below grade, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Perform excavation, bedding, backfilling, and surface restoration, including pavement replacement where required, in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill and Section 02742, Bituminous Paving. 3. Install warning tape 12 inches below finished grade over buried conduits. G. Empty Conduits: 1. Install nylon pull wire in each empty conduit and cap conduits not terminating in boxes with permanent fittings designed for the purpose. H. Field Bends: No indentations. Diameter of conduit shall not vary more than 15 percent at bends. I. Joints: 1. Apply conductive compound to joints before assembly. 2. Make up joints tight and ground thoroughly. 3. Use standard tapered pipe threads for conduit and fittings. 4. Cut conduit ends square and ream to prevent damaging wire and cable. 5. Use full threaded couplings. Split couplings are not allowed. 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -8 Rigid Conduits 6. Use strap wrenches and vises to install conduit. Replace conduit with wrench marks. 7. Apply zinc -rich paint to exposed threads and other areas of galvanized conduit system where base metal is exposed. J. Terminations: 1. Install insulated bushings on conduits entering boxes or cabinets, except when threaded hubs are used. 2. Provide locknuts on both inside and outside of enclosure, except when threaded hubs are used. 3. Use of bushings in lieu of locknuts is not allowed. 4. Install conduit hubs on conduits entering boxes or cabinets in wet and corrosive areas. K. Moisture Protection: 1. Plug or cap conduit ends at time of installation to prevent entrance of moisture and foreign materials. 2. Underground and embedded conduit connections shall be watertight. 3. Thruwall Seals and Conduit Sealing Bushings: Install for conduits passing through concrete slabs, floors, walls, or concrete block walls. 4. Drainage: Conduit runs shall be fully drainable. Where possible install conduit runs to drain to one end and away from building. Avoid pockets or depressions in conduit runs. 5. Seal conduit openings within control and instrumentation panels and distribution equipment with duct sealing compound to provide watertight seal. L. Corrosion Protection: 1. Conduit Curb: a. For conduits routed in concrete slabs or floors and stub -ups through floor, provide 4 -inch high concrete curb, extending two inches from outer surface of conduit penetrating floor, to prevent corrosion. For floor- mounted equipment, concrete equipment base shall be in lieu of concrete curb. b. Conduit stub -ups shall be 90- degree, PVC - coated, rigid, galvanized steel conduit elbow. PVC - coated elbow shall extend a minimum of 1/2 -inch above top of concrete curb or equipment base. Should elbow not reach specified height, provide PVC - coated conduit extension to accommodate specified requirements. Provide coupling or fitting for transition from rigid galvanized steel conduit or PVC conduit in slab to PVC - coated elbow. c. For conduits stubbing up and terminating at equipment enclosure mounted on concrete base, provide insulated grounding bushing on PVC - coated rigid steel elbow. d. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets, and other enclosures above the concrete curb in wet and dusty areas, provide 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -9 Rigid Conduits conduit coupling /fittings between the PVC - coated rigid steel elbow and rigid steel conduit for transition between the two conduit types. e. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets, and other enclosures above the concrete curb or equipment base in corrosive areas, continue conduit system with PVC - coated rigid steel conduit 2. Dissimilar Metals: a. Prevent occurrence of electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. b. Do not use copper products in connection with aluminum, and do not use aluminum in locations subject to drainage of copper compounds on bare aluminum. c. Back paint aluminum in contact with masonry or concrete with two coats of aluminum - pigmented bituminous paint. M. Reused Existing Conduits: 1. Pull rag swab through conduits to remove water and to clean conduit prior to installing new cable. 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through conduit, if necessary, to remove obstructions. N. Core drill for individual conduits passing through existing concrete slabs and walls. Notify CITY in writing in advance of core drilling. Prior to core drilling, drill sufficient number of small exploratory holes to establish that the area to be core drilled is free of existing embedded conduits. Seal spaces around conduit as indicated in Paragraph 3.2.K.3 of this Section. O. Non - metallic Conduit: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesives or sealants for watertight connections. 3. Provide expansion fittings for expansion and contraction to compensate for temperature variations. Fittings shall be watertight and suitable for direct burial. 4. Transition to PVC - coated rigid steel conduit before making turn up to enclosures. P. PVC - coated Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install with manufacturer's installation tools to avoid damage to PVC coating. 3. Repair damaged PVC coating with manufacturer's recommended touch -up compound. Q. Identify conduits, including spares, in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 11- 0025 -UT 16131 -10 Rigid Conduits A. Site Tests: 1. Test conduits by pulling through each conduit a cylindrical mandrel with length not less than two pipe inside diameters, having an outside diameter equal to 90 percent of conduit's inside diameter. 2. Maintain a record, by number, of all conduits successfully tested. 3. Repair or replace conduits that do not successfully pass testing, and re -test. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16131 -11 Rigid Conduits 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16131 -12 Rigid Conduits SECTION 16132 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required to furnish and install flexible metallic conduit and fittings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL 360, Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 350, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature and technical information for flexible conduit and fittings proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Flexible Conduit (Non- hazardous Areas and Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Areas): 1. Material: Flexible galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion - resistant, liquid- tight, polyvinyl chloride cover. Continuous copper ground built in for sizes 3/4 -inch through 1.25 -inch. Material shall be UL- listed. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Anaconda Sealtite Type UA by Anamet Electrical, Inc. b. Liquatite Type L.A. by Electric -Flex Company. c. Or equal. B. Flexible Conduit (Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Areas): 11- 0025 -UT 16132 -1 Flexible Conduits 1. Material: Flexible brass inner core with bronze outer braid and protective neoprene plastic coating. Steel, brass, or bronze end fittings. Minimum of 12 inches long. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Type ECGJH or ECLK by Crouse Hinds Company. b. Type EXGJH or EXLK by Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. C. Flexible Conduit Fittings: 1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with cadmium finish. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size and shall be UL listed. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Crouse -Hinds Company. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. 3. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in non - hazardous and Class 1, Division 2 hazardous areas. D. PVC - Coated Conduit Fittings: 1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with standard finish and 40 -mil PVC exterior coating. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, and shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Robroy Industries. b. Permacote Industries. c. OCAL, Inc. d. Or equal. 3. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in areas designated as corrosive locations. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION 11- 0025 -UT 16132 -2 Flexible Conduits A. Install at motors, transformers, field instruments, and equipment subject to vibration or require movement for maintenance purposes. Provide necessary reducer where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4 -inch diameter flexible conduit. Limit flexible conduit length to three feet maximum. B. Install in conformance with the Laws and Regulations. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16132 -3 Flexible Conduits 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16132 -4 Flexible Conduits SECTION 16133 SEALED FITTINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install conduit sealing fittings with sealing fiber and sealing compound. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Class 1, Groups A, B, C and D and Class II, Groups E, F and G. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of locations where fittings are to be used. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature and technical information for sealing fittings, sealing fiber, and sealing compound proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Crouse Hinds Company. 2. Appleton Electric Company. 3. Or equal. B. Materials and Construction: 11- 0025 -UT 16133 -1 Sealed Fittings 1. Cast gray iron alloy, or cast malleable iron, or copper free aluminum bodies with zinc electroplate and lacquer or enamel finish. 2. Ample opening with threaded closure for access to conduit hub for making dam. 3. In corrosive locations, fittings shall include factory- applied 40 -mil PVC coating. 4. Construct fitting to allow 40 percent cross - sectional fill. C. Sealing fiber for forming the dam within the hub and sealing compound shall be suitable for use with fittings furnished, and shall be products of fitting manufacturer. D. Sealing fitting, fiber, and sealing compound shall conform to UL 886. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install for hazardous locations as required by Laws and Regulations and as shown. B. Provide fittings for proper use relative to mounting position. C. Use oversized fittings with reducing bushings when necessary to maintain cable fill requirements of the conduit system. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16133 -2 Sealed Fittings SECTION 16134 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install conduit expansion and deflection fittings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL 514B, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 2. UL 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 300, Wiring Methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1 Shop Drawings: a. Listing of locations where fittings are required. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature and technical information for expansion and deflection fittings proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Type DX for expansion /deflection or AX for expansion only, by O -Z Gedney Company. 2. Type XD for expansion /deflection or XJ for expansion only, by Crouse Hinds Company. 3. Type DF for expansion /deflection or XJ for expansion only, by Appleton Electric Company. 1I-0025-UT 16134 -1 Expansion/Deflection Fittings 4. Or equal. B. Cast gray iron alloy or bronze end couplings, malleable iron, or hot - dipped galvanized body, stainless steel clamps and tinned copper braid bonding jumper. Fitting shall be watertight, corrosion- resistant, UL- listed, and compatible with the conduit system. C. Features: 1. Expansion/Deflection Fittings: a. Axial expansion or contraction up to 3/4 -inch. b. Angular misalignment up to 30 degrees. c. Parallel misalignment up to 3/4 -inch. 2. Expansion Fittings: a. Expansion /Contraction: Eight -inch total movement. D. Expansion/Deflection fittings shall comply with UL 514B and UL 467. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fittings in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Provide expansion fittings on exposed conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints and where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. Provide expansion fittings on exposed conduit runs exceeding 200 feet. C. Provide expansion /deflection fittings on embedded conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints. Provide fittings above waterstops. D. Unless specifically shown or indicated otherwise, when crossing structural expansion joints larger than one inch, provide expansion fitting together with expansion/ deflection fitting. Install fittings on each conduit run in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to accommodate additional movement necessary. E. Provide expansion /deflection fittings for underground conduit runs at penetrations of buildings, manholes, handholes, and outdoor concrete equipment pads. 11- 0025 -UT 16134 -2 Expansion/Deflection Fittings F. Where required in non - metallic conduit and duct systems, provide rigid metal conduit nipples and metal rigid -to -PVC adapters for connection to fittings. Ensure that joints exposed to water or other liquid are made watertight. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16134 -3 Expansion/Deflection Fittings 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16134 -4 Expansion/Deflection Fittings SECTION 16135 PULL, JUNCTION, AND TERMINAL BOXES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install pull, junction, and terminal boxes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General provisions. 2. Section 16070, Supporting Systems. 3. Section 16025, Electrical Identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are. 1 AASHTO, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. UL 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1 NEC Article 314, Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole Enclosures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information for pull, junction, and terminal boxes proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes: 1. General — Applicable to All Boxes: a. Description and Performance Criteria: 11- 0025 -UT 16135 -1 Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes 1) Provide pull, junction, and terminal boxes rated at not less than NEMA 12. Boxes shall be appropriate for each location in accordance with NEMA requirements and as required for area classifications specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. 2) For flush- mounted pullboxes in slabs or pavement potentially subject to vehicular traffic, boxes and covers shall be constructed for H -20 loading in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. b. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1) Appleton Electric Company. 2) Crouse -Hinds Company. 3) Hoffman Engineering Company. 4) Or equal. c. Materials: Pull boxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron. d. Terminal strips and terminal blocks in terminal boxes shall be mounted on terminal box sub - panels. e. Identification: Boxes shall be identified in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Materials and Construction — Dusty Locations: a. Material: Welded and galvanized sheet steel of USS gage. b. Gasket: Oil- resistant gasket. c. Access: Lift -off hinges and quick - release latches. d. Material Thickness: 1) Boxes with dimension two feet and smaller shall be 14 -gage. 2) Boxes with dimension between two and three feet shall be 12 gage. 3) Boxes with dimension of three feet or more in any direction shall be 10 -gage. 3. Materials and Construction - Wet, Corrosive, or Hazardous Locations: a. Rating: 1) Pull boxes in wet, corrosive, or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X. 2) Boxes for areas classified as hazardous locations, where required by NEC, shall be explosion -proof and comply with UL 886. b. Material: 1) Cast gray iron alloy with hot -dip galvanized finish, or cast malleable iron bodies and covers. 2) Large boxes not generally available in cast iron construction shall be copper -free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel, as required by location. 3) In corrosive locations, where the conduit system is PVC- coated, boxes shall be cast metal with factory- applied 40 -mil PVC coating, Type 316 stainless steel, or non - metallic thermoplastic or fiberglass reinforced plastic material. c. Gasket: 1) Provide neoprene gaskets for wet and corrosive locations. 2) Gaskets shall be an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable. d. Access: Stainless steel cover bolts. 11- 0025 -UT 16135 -2 Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e. Features: 1) External mounting lugs. 2) Drilled and tapped conduit holes. 3) Boxes where conduits enter building or structure below grade shall have 1/4 -inch drain hole at bottom of the box. 4) Provide threaded connections for explosion proof boxes. B. Terminal Blocks: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Allen- Bradley Company, Bulletin, Model 1492. b. General Electric Company, Model CR151K. c. Or equal. 2. Material and Construction: a. NEMA -rated nylon modular terminal blocks. b. 600 -volt rated. c. Control and alarm circuit terminals shall be screwed type with permanently affixed numeric identifiers beside each connection. d. Power terminals shall be copper and rated for the circuit ampacity. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided and maintain clearance of not less than 1/4 -inch from walls. B. Securely fasten boxes to walls or other structural surfaces on which boxes are mounted. Provide independent supports that comply with Section 16070, Supports Systems, where boxes will not be mounted on walls or other structural surface. C. Install pull boxes where shown or indicated, and provide pull boxes where one or more of the following conditions exist: 1. Conduit runs containing more than three 90- degree bends. 2. Conduit runs exceeding 200 feet in length. D. Provide removable, flame - retardant, insulating cable supports in boxes with any dimension exceeding three feet. E. Field -apply PVC touch -up to scratched PVC boxes damaged during installation. 11- 0025 -UT 16135 -3 Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes Touch -up work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. F. Size junction, pull, and terminal boxes in accordance with NEC Article 314 and other Laws and Regulations. G. Provide terminal blocks in boxes where shown and where cable terminations or splices are required. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16135 -4 Pull, Junction, and Terminal Boxes SECTION 16136 OUTLET BOXES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install outlet boxes for mounting wiring devices and lighting fixtures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16070, Supporting Systems. 3. Section 16075, Electrical Identification 4. Section 16141, Receptacles. 5. Section 16142, Snap Switches. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply wit the following: 1. NEC Article 314, Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes; Fittings; and Handhole Enclosures. 2. NEC Article 501, Class I locations. 3. UL 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. 4. UL 514B, Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information for outlet boxes proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Device Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Crouse -Hinds Company. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. 11- 0025 -UT 16136 -1 Outlet Boxes 2. Material: a. In Wet Locations: Cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron with zinc electroplate finish, or aluminum bodies consistent with conduit material. b. In Dusty Locations: Zinc - coated sheet steel or aluminum bodies consistent with conduit material. c. Where conduit is installed concealed, boxes shall include suitable extension rings and covers, as required. d. Where used with PVC - coated conduit system, boxes shall include factory applied 40- mil -thick PVC coating. e. Cast boxes shall be hub -type and include external mounting lugs. f. Metallic outlet boxes shall comply with UL 514A. g. Fittings for outlet boxes shall comply with UL 514B. 3. NEMA rating of box shall be as required for area classifications specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. 4. Cover Plates: a. Type 302 stainless steel alloy for indoor finished areas. b. Plates in corrosive locations shall include factory- applied 40 -mil PVC coating. c. Stainless steel screws and hardware. d. For receptacle and switch cover plates, comply with Section 16141, Receptacles, and Section 16142, Snap Switches. B. Flexible Fixture Hangers: 1. For Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Areas: a. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Type EFH by Crouse - Hinds. 2) Or equal. b. Materials: 1) Iron alloy with electro- galvanizing and aluminum acrylic paint. 2) Products shall have brass bellows and stainless steel spring. 3) Product shall be capable of 15 degree swing from perpendicular in all directions. 4) Product shall allow fixtures to be pendant -hung in accordance with NEC Article 501.130(A). 2. For Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Areas: a. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Type AHG by Crouse - Hinds. 2) Or equal. b. Materials: 1) Malleable iron top section and removable malleable iron bottom fixture support assembly with electro- galvanizing and aluminum acrylic paint. 2) Include vapor -tight cushion to support fixture stem. 3) Provide neoprene diaphragm to exclude moisture and dirt from conduit system. 4) Provide with manufacturer's neoprene gasket between fixture hanger •11- 0025 -UT 16136 -2 Outlet Boxes and box. 5) Product shall be capable of eight- degree swing from perpendicular in all directions, before and after coating. 6) Product shall allow fixtures to be pendant -hung in accordance with NEC Article 501.130 (B). PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fasten boxes rigidly and neatly to supporting structures. B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which materials or equipment is mounted. Provide independent supports complying with Section 16070, Hangers and Supports Systems, where boxes are not mounted on walls or other surface capable of supporting the materials or equipment. C. For units mounted on masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2 -inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall. D. Leave no open conduit holes in boxes. Close unused openings with capped bushings. E. Label each circuit in boxes and identify each circuit in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. F. Install outlet boxes in accordance with NEC Article 314. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16136 -3 Outlet Boxes 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16136 -4 Outlet Boxes SECTION 16137 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANKS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install underground ductbanks. B. Coordination: 1. Ductbank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate installation with Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures and locate ductbanks clear of interferences. Underground Facilities shall include, but not be limited to, any equipment, pipelines, electrical and communication raceway related to plant operations, past or present. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to locate all Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures via Nondestructive Inspection Method(s) and /or hand digging. Prior to the demolition and removal of any abandoned Underground Facilities, Utilities and Structures, the CONTRACTOR shall receive CITY approval. 2. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before underground ductbank Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01721, 2. Section 02315, 3. Section 03200, 4. Section 03300, 5. Section 16061, 6. Section 16075, 7. Section 16131, 8. Section 16134, 1.2 SUBMITTALS Protection of the Work and Property. Excavation and Backfill Concrete Reinforcement. Cast -in -Place Concrete. Grounding Systems Electrical Identification. Rigid Conduit. Expansion/Deflection Fittings. A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Layouts showing proposed routing of ductbanks and locations of manholes, handholes, and areas of reinforcement. b. Profiles of ductbanks showing crossings with piping and other 11- 0025 -UT 16137 -1 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems Underground Facilities. c. Typical cross sections for each ductbank. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Installation procedures. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Field test report. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Drawings: a. Include actual routing of underground ductbank runs on record documents in accordance with Section 01782, Project Record Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Duct: Provide conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16131, Rigid Conduits. Conduit types shall be as follows: 1. Schedule 40 PVC conduits for power circuits. 2. Galvanized rigid steel conduits for the following types of circuits: low voltage status, analog, and communication. B. Backfill: Provide backfill, including select backfill, in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill C. Reinforcing: Provide Ductbank reinforcing in accordance with Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. D. Concrete: Provide ductbank concrete in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -in- place Concrete. E. Grounding: Provide ground cable in accordance with Section 16061, Grounding Systems. F. Conduit Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be nonmetallic, interlocking type to maintain spacing between conduits. Provide spacers suitable for all conduit types used in multiple sizes. G. Duct Sealing Compound: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 0 -Z /Gedney, Type DUX. b. Or equal. 1 1-0025-UT 16137 -2 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation and Backfilling: 1. Provide excavation and backfilling for ductbank installation in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill 2. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material, or other materials that can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables, or prevent adequate compaction of backfill. B. Ductbank Layout: 1. Top of ductbank concrete shall be as indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Slope ductbank runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with slope of approximately three inches vertical per 100 feet of run. C. Ductbank Assembly: 1. Assemble ductbanks using non - magnetic saddles, spacers, and separators. Position separators to provide minimum three -inch concrete separation between outer surfaces of each conduit. Provide side forms for each ductbank. 2. Make bends with sweeps of not less than four -foot radius or five- degree angle couplings. D. Concrete Placing: 1. Provide minimum four -inch concrete covering on each side, top, and bottom of concrete envelopes around conduits. Concrete covering shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide red dye in concrete for easy identification during subsequent excavation; all concrete in entire ductbank, including top and bottom, shall be dyed. 3. Firmly fix conduits in place during concrete placing. Carefully place and vibrate concrete to fill spaces between conduits. E. Conduit Transitions: 1. Conduit installations shall be watertight throughout entire length of ductbank. 11- 0025 -UT 16137 -3 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems 2. Transition from non - metallic to galvanized rigid steel conduit where ductbanks enter structure walls and slabs. 3. Terminate conduits in insulated grounding bushings. 4. Continue conduits inside buildings in accordance with Section 16131, Rigid Conduits, and as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 5. If ducts are not concrete - encased, provide expansion and deflection fittings in accordance with Section 16134, Expansion/Deflection Fittings. 6. Plug and seal empty spare conduits entering structures. Conduits in use entering structures shall be sealed watertight with duct sealing compound. F. Ductbank Reinforcing: 1. Provide reinforcing for all ductbanks: 2. Install ductbank reinforcement as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide cover /protection from reinforcement to edge of concrete encasement per ACI 318, 7.7.1. G. Connections to Structures: 1. Firmly anchor ductbanks to structure walls or slabs. Epoxy -grout ductbank rebar into structure concrete to eliminate sheer forces between ductbank and structure wall concrete. 2. Ductbank penetrations through structure walls shall be watertight. H. Grounding: 1. Provide bare stranded copper ductbank ground cable in each ductbank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout entire ductbank system. 2. Connect ground cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. Also, connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of underground ductbank system. 3. Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension to maintain continuity of ground system. 4. Terminate ground cable at last manhole or handhole for outlying structures. I. Detectable Underground Warning Tape: 1. Provide detectable underground warning tapes complying with Section 16075, Electrical Identificaiton over the full length of each underground ductbank. 2. Install warning tapes approximately 12 inches below grade. 3. Provide multiple tapes across the width of each ductbank. Locate center of a warning tape above each edge of ductbank, and at intervals across top width of ductbank so that clear space between tapes does not exceed six inches. J. Reused Existing Ducts: 1. Pull rag swab through duct to remove water and to clean conduits prior to installing new cable. 11- 0025 -UT 16137 -4 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through duct, if necessary, to remove obstructions. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16137 -5 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16137 -6 Underground Ductbanks for Electrical Systems SECTION 16138 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install manholes and handholes for electrical systems Work. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate manhole and handhole installation with piping, sheeting other excavation supports, and other Underground Facilities, and locate clear of interferences. 2. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before manhole and handhole for electrical systems Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AASHTO, Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. ANSI A14.3, Fixed Ladders — Safety Requirements. 3. ANSI /SCTE 77, Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity. 4. ASTM A48/A48M, Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 5. ASTM A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 6. ASTM C478, Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 7. ASTM C 1028, Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull - Meter Method. 8. ASTM D4101, Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -1 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all manholes and handholes furnished under this Section from a single Supplier, unless otherwise acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Manhole and handhole Supplier shall review and approve the Shop Drawing submittals for the manholes and handholes furnished. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Manholes: Plan and section drawings showing arrangement of each manhole, including interior and exterior dimensions, elevations, location of manhole wall penetrations, details of typical openings, jointing, inserts, and reinforcing. b. Handholes: Submit schedule ofhandholes to be furnished and dimensions and pertinent data for each. c. Castings: 1) Schedule of casting types and models to be furnished, with dimensional data and other pertinent data for each. 2) Fabrication and erection of all frame and cover assemblies. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 3) Where Site - specific castings are specified with unique lettering on manhole or handhole cover, provide Shop Drawing for castings indicating appropriate detail to indicate conformance to the Contract Documents. d. Layout of Manhole Electrical Systems: Where manholes have extensive electrical systems and supports for electrical systems, submit for each plans, sections, and details indicating proposed layout of such materials and equipment in each manhole. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information, specifications, and literature for manholes, handholes, castings, and accessories proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Material and Construction: 1. Material shall be precast or cast -in -place reinforced concrete. Reinforcing shall be in accordance with Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -2 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems 2. Provide minimum interior dimensions as shown or indicated. Provide a 12- inch by 12 -inch by six -inch deep sump in manhole floor 3. Duct entrances shall be sized and located to suit the ductbanks. 4. Precast Manholes: a. Except where otherwise specified, precast manhole components shall consist of reinforced concrete pipe sections specially designed and constructed for use as manholes and manufactured in accordance with ASTM C478, except as modified in this Section. b. Precast, reinforced concrete manhole bases, riser sections, flat slabs, and other components shall be manufactured by wet -cast methods, using forms that provide smooth surfaces free of irregularities, honeycombing, and other imperfections. c. Joints between manhole components shall be tongue- and - groove type employing a single, continuous rubber 0-ring gasket. Circumferential and longitudinal steel reinforcing shall extend into bell and spigot ends of joint without breaking steel continuity. Joints between base sections, riser sections, and top slabs of manholes six feet in diameter and less shall be rubber and concrete joints. Joints for manhole components greater than six -foot diameter shall have steel bell and spigot rings. d. Precast manhole components shall: 1) Have sufficient strength to withstand loads imposed upon them; and 2) Be constructed for minimum earth cover loading of 130 pounds per cubic foot, AASHTO H -20 wheel loading, and an allowance of 30 percent in roadways and 15 percent in rights -of -way for impact. 3) Manhole bases shall have two cages of reinforcing steel in the walls, each reinforcing cage shall be of area equal to that required in the riser sections. 4) Wall thickness shall be not less than five inches. 5) Concrete top slabs shall be not less than eight inches thick. e. Lifting holes, when provided, shall be tapered. Not more than two lifting holes shall be cast into each section. Provide tapered, solid rubber plugs to seal lifting holes. Lifting holes shall be made to be sealed by plugs driven from the outside face of section only. f. Point of intersection (P.I.) of ductbank centerlines shall be marked with 1/4-inch diameter steel pin firmly enclosed in floor of each manhole base and protruding approximately one -inch above finished floor of base. g. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of manhole barrel. h. Barrel of manhole shall be constructed of various lengths of riser pipe manufactured in increments of one foot to provide correct height with the fewest joints. Provide not less than one foot clear between openings in barrel of manholes for ductbanks or other penetrations and the nearest joint. Provide special manhole base or riser sections as required. i. Provide at top of manhole barrel a precast or cast -in -place slab, or precast eccentric cone, as shown or approved, to receive manhole frame and cover. 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -3 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems B. Accessories: 1. Frames and Covers: a. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1) Neenah Foundry Company. 2) Campbell Foundry Company. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Covers and frames shall be cast aluminum alloy, rated for AASHTO H -20 loading. c. Covers: Watertight, sealed type marked "ELECTRICAL" in raised two - inch letters. Identify covers as shown or indicated on the Drawings. d. Grout the frame to the manhole or handhole. 2. Pulling Irons: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. 8119 by A.B. Chance Company. 2) Catalog No. DU2T3 by McGraw Edison Company. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Galvanized steel. c. Cast in the wall opposite to centerline of each incoming ductbank and 12 inches below centerline of bottom line of ducts. 3. Cable Racks: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. J5125 by MacLean Power Systems. 2) Catalog No. C203 -1125 by A.B. Chance Company. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Galvanized steel. c. Cable racks shall adequately support cables with space allowed for future cables. d. Each rack shall be a vertical assembly of two -foot cable racks extending from within six inches of manhole roof slab to within six inches of manhole floor. 4. Cable Hooks: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. J5132A by MacLean Power Systems. 2) Catalog No. C203 -1132 by A.B. Chance Company. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Galvanized steel. c. Length: 7.5 -inch minimum. 5. Insulators: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. J5122 by MacLean Power Systems. 2) Catalog No. C203 -1120 by A.B. Chance Company. 3) Or equal. b. Material: Porcelain. 2.2 SMALL HANDHOLES 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -4 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems A. Material and Construction: 1. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Strongwell Quazite b. Or equal 2. Material: Precast polymer concrete. 3. Duct entrances sized and located to suit ductbanks. 4. Enclosures and covers shall be UL- listed. 5. Enclosures, boxes, and covers shall comply with test provisions ofANSI /SCTE 77 for Tier 15 applications. 6. Covers shall have coefficient of friction of not less than 0.50, in accordance with ASTM C1028. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation and Backfill: 1. Provide manholes and handholes for electrical systems where shown or indicated and verify at the Site the required locations. 2. Perform excavation and filling required for installing manholes and handholes for electrical systems, in accordance with Section 02315, Excavation and Backfill. 3. Provide manholes and handholes on granular subbase course as shown or indicated. If not shown, provide layer of compacted select fill not less than six inches deep on which manhole or handhole for electrical systems will be installed. 4. Carefully set, level, and align at proper grade manhole bases and handholes. B. Precast Manholes: 1. Set manhole sections vertical with steps and sections in true alignment. Butter the base of each bell or groove end at joints between components with one -to- two proportion cement -sand mortar to provide uniform bearing between components. Seal joints with cement mortar inside and out and trowel smooth to contour of wall surface. Raised or rough joint finishes are unacceptable. 2. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -5 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems 3. Tightly seal each lifting hole with solid rubber plug driven into hole from outside of barrel; fill remaining void with one -to -two proportion cement -sand mortar. C. Manhole and handhole structures shall be watertight. Provide foam sealant to seal all penetrations into manholes and handholes for electrical systems. D. Cable Supports in Manholes: 1. Attach cable racks with three -inch by 3/8 -inch diameter "tamp -in" studs mounted in one -inch holes drilled into walls of manholes in absence of inserts. Provide PVC coating on racks. 2. Provide cable hooks to support each cable on each rack along the cable run within manholes. Provide PVC coating on hooks. 3. Individually support each cable at each hook on porcelain insulators. Provide sufficient slack for each cable. 4. Securely tie each cable in place at each insulator block to prevent excessive movement of insulators, cables, or fireproof tape. Tie cables with non - metallic 3/4 -inch strapping tape manufactured by 3M or equal, or tie down with nylon straps. E. Grounding: 1. Provide 3/4 -inch by 10 -foot copper -clad ground rod for each manhole. 2. Bond all exposed metal manhole accessories and concrete reinforcing rods with No. 4 AWG minimum bare copper wire and connect to ground rod and to the ductbank ground cable. F. Metal Pull Box: 1. Provide NEMA 4X, stainless steel, wall- mounted pull box inside each manhole and handhole for electrical systems where analog signal cables are mixed with power cables. 2. Route conduits for analog cables directly into and out of metal pull box so that analog cables are not exposed. G. Grade Rings: 1. Provide grade rings for manholes when required to adjust cover to proper grade. Construct grade ring on manhole roof slab or cone section on which manhole frame and cover will be placed. 2. Height of grade ring shall be as required to bring frame to proper grade and shall not exceed 12 inches in height. H. Grading at Manholes and Handholes: 1. Unpaved Areas: a. Install manholes and handholes in unpaved areas as shown or directed by CITY to rim elevation higher than finished grade. b. Grade the ground surface to drain away from manholes and handholes. 11- 0025 -UT 16138 -6 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 c. Provide fill around manholes and handholes to level of upper rim of manhole or handhole frame, and evenly grade the surface to a one (vertical) -to -five (horizontal) slope to surrounding grade, unless otherwise shown or directed by CITY. 2. Paved or Travelled Areas: a. Install manholes and handholes in paved or travelled areas to meet final grade of paved or concrete surface. b. In paved areas in state or county highways or municipal streets or roads, manholes and handholes shall be 1/2 -inch below elevation of final surface course (also known as top course or wearing course) of pavement. c. Manholes and handholes shall not project above finished roadway pavement. 3. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for proper height of manholes and handholes necessary to reach final grade. CITY's review of Shop Drawings and other submittals for manholes and handholes is general in nature. Provide random - length precast manhole riser sections to adjust manholes to accommodate field conditions for final grading and final elevations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Watertightness: 1. Manholes and handholes for electrical systems shall be free of visible leakage. Inspect each manhole and handhole accompanied by CITY, and repair leaks. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16138 -7 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16138 -8 Manholes and Handholes for Electrical Systems SECTION 16141 LOW - VOLTAGE RECEPTACLES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install low- voltage receptacles. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16075, Electrical Identifications. 3. Section 16136, Outlet Boxes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1 UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 2. UL 514D, Cover Plates for Flush - Mounted Wiring Devices. 3. UL 943, Standard for Ground -Fault Circuit - Interrupters. 4. UL 1010, Standard for Receptacle -Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 5. UL 1449, Standard for Surge Protective Devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. NEC Article 406, Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information for receptacles and cover plates proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 11- 0025 -UT 16141 -1 Low Voltage Receptacles A. Receptacles: 1. Grounding receptacle, two -pole, three -wire, NEMA 5 -20R configuration, ivory color for normal power circuit or red for UPS circuit or orange for Generator circuit. a. Single: 1) Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a) HBL5361I by Hubbell, Inc. b) 5361 -I by Pass & Seymour. c) Or equal. b. Duplex: 1) Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a) HBL5362I by Hubbell, Inc. b) PS5362 -I by Pass & Seymour. c) Or equal. c. Weather- resistant Duplex: 1) UL- listed as weather - resistant. 2) Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a) HBL5362IWR by Hubbell, Inc. b) WR5362 -I by Pass & Seymour. c) Or equal. 2. Provide Type 302 stainless steel cover -plate conforming to UL 514D, or for Marshall Street Lab, red cover - plates for UPS circuit or orange cover plates for Generator circuit. Provide weatherproof - while -in -use cover where shown on the Drawings as "WP" or "WPU ", and provide where receptacles are located in wet or corrosive location. 3. Receptacles shall comply with UL 498. B. Receptacles for Hazardous Locations: 1. Material: Factory- sealed receptacle suitable for installation in Class I, Group D hazardous locations. Copper -free aluminum receptacle and cover with cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron mounting box with zinc electroplate finish. Receptacle rated at 20 amperes, 125 to 250 volts AC, two -wire, and three -pole. Provide matching plug for each receptacle. 2. Receptacles for hazardous locations shall conform to UL 1010. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Series CPS by Crouse -Hinds Company. b. Type CPS by Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. C. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: 1. Duplex grounding receptacle, two -pole, three -wire, NEMA 5 -20R configuration, 125 -volt AC, 20 amperes, gray color for normal circuits or red for UPS circuit or orange for Generator circuit. with ground fault circuit interrupting (GFCI) protection. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall comply with UL 943. 11- 0025 -UT 16141 -2 Low Voltage Receptacles 1 1 t 1 1 1 3. Provide Type 302 stainless steel cover -plate conforming to UL 514D, or for Marshall Street Lab, red cover - plates for UPS circuit or orange cover plates for Generator circuit. Provide weatherproof - while -in -use cover where shown on the Drawings as "WP" or "WPU ", and provide where located in wet or corrosive location. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GFR5362SGY by Hubbell, Inc. b. 2091 -GRY by Pass & Seymour. c. Or equal. 5. Weather- resistant Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) 2095TRWRGRY by Pass & Seymour. 2) Or equal. D. Weatherproof Covers: 1. Where receptacles are installed in damp locations as defined in area classification portion of Section 16050, General Provisions, provide receptacles as specified in Paragraphs 2.1.A through 2.1.D of this Section, as applicable, with weatherproof covers as specified below. 2. Provide covers that are UL- listed weatherproof and suitable for use in damp locations in accordance with NEC 406. 3. Material: a. Gasketed spring door type for wet and corrosive locations. Plates in corrosive locations shall have factory- applied 40 -mil PVC coating. b. Stainless steel screws and hardware. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Hubbell, Inc. b. Crouse -Hinds Company. c. Appleton Electric Company. d. Or equal. E. Weatherproof - While -in -Use Covers: 1. Where receptacles are shown on the Drawings as "WP" or "WPU ", and where receptacles are installed in wet locations as defined in area classification portion of Section 16050, General Provisions, provide receptacles as specified in Paragraphs 2.1.A through 2.1.D of this Section, as applicable, with weatherproof - while -in -use covers as specified below. 2. Provide covers that are UL- listed, weatherproof while receptacle is in use, and are of ultraviolet- resistant construction suitable for outdoor use in accordance with NEC 406. 3. Material: a. Non - metallic box with hinged, non - metallic cover. b. Sealing gaskets between box and cover. c. Stainless steel screws and hardware. d. Color: Gray finish 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 11- 0025 -UT 16141 -3 Low Voltage Receptacles a. TayMac Corporation. b. Pass and Seymour Type WIU c. Or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Non - hazardous Locations: Install receptacles at locations shown, in outlet or device boxes in accordance with Section 16136, Outlet Boxes. B. Hazardous Locations: Install receptacles in rigid metallic conduit systems. C. Install receptacles with ground pole in the down position. D. Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor in non - hazardous locations and 4.5 feet above finished floor in hazardous locations, in accordance with the Americans with Disability Act, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Install in conformance with Laws and Regulations. F. Identification: 1. Identify each conductor with circuit number and lighting panel number in accordance with Section 16121, Electrical Identification. 2. Identify each receptacle with permanent phenolic tag. Tags shall include circuit number and lighting panel number. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16141 -4 Low Voltage Receptacles SECTION 16142 SNAP SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install snap switches for lighting and other systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Section 16136, Outlet Boxes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. UL 20, General Use Snap Switches. 2. UL 894, Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Americans with Disabilities Act 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information for switches proposed for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Switches for Non - Hazardous Locations: 1. Single pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 -volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory, specification grade. a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. 1221 -I, by Harvey Hubbel, Inc. 2) Catalog No. 1991 -I, by Arrow -Hart, Inc. 11- 0025 -UT 16142 -1 Snap Switches 3) Catalog No. 20AC1 -I, by Pass & Seymour 4) Or equal. 2. Single pole, three -way AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 -volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory, specification grade. a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. 1223 -I, by Harvey Hubbell, Inc. 2) Catalog No. 1993 -I, by Arrow -Hart, Inc. 3) Catalog No. 20AC3 -I, by Pass & Seymour 4) Or equal. 3. Two -pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 -volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory, specification grade. a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. 1222 -I, by Harvey Hubbel, Inc. 2) Catalog No. 1992 -I, by Arrow -Hart, Inc. 3) Catalog No. 20AC2 -I, by Pass & Seymour 4) Or equal. 4. Switches in non - hazardous areas shall be UL- listed in accordance with UL 20. B. Switches for Hazardous Locations: 1. Material: Factory sealed tumbler switch suitable for installation in Class I, Group D hazardous locations. Cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron body and cover with zinc electroplate finish. Switch rated at 20 amperes, 120/277 - volt AC. 2. Switches in hazardous areas shall be UL- listed in accordance with UL 894. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Series EDS by Crouse -Hinds Company. b. Type EDS by Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal. C. Switch Covers: 1. Indoor covers shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Outdoor, wet, or corrosive location covers shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant. D. Key Operated On -Off Switches: 1. Key operated switches shall be complete with legend plate and NEMA 4 enclosure and two keys for each switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 11- 0025 -UT 16142 -2 Snap Switches 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install switches at locations as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents in outlet or device boxes, in accordance with Section 16136, Outlet Boxes. B. Mount wall switches 4.0 feet above finished floor, in accordance with the Americans with Disability Act, unless otherwise noted. C. Identify each conductor with circuit number and lighting panel number. Identification shall be in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16142 -3 Snap Switches 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16142 -4 Snap Switches SECTION 16143 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install disconnect switches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 3. Section 16142, Snap Switches. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL 98, Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches. 2. NEMA KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 3. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NEC Article 404, Switches. 2. Disconnect switches shall bear the UL label. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of each switch to be furnished, including location, rating, and NEMA enclosure type for each. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information for disconnect switches proposed for use. B. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Extra Stock Materials: a. Furnish one set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch to be installed. 11- 0025 -UT 16143 -1 Disconnect Switches PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Square -D Company. 2. Cutler - Hammer. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Siemens. 5. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Service Disconnect Switches: 1. Type: Fused, heavy -duty, single throw, quick -make, quick -break mechanism, visible blades in "OFF" position and safety handle. 2. Rating: Voltage, current and short circuit ratings and number of poles as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Switch shall bear UL label indicating suitability for use as service equipment and shall comply with UL 98, NEMA KS 1, and NEMA 250. 3. Provide auxiliary dry contacts to indicate switch position where shown on the Drawings. B. Single Throw, Circuit Disconnect Switches: 1. Type: Fused or unfused, horsepower rated, heavy -duty, single throw, quick - make, quick -break mechanism, visible blades in the "OFF" position and safety handle. 2. Rating: Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for motor or equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches shall bear a UL label and shall comply with the requirements of UL 98, NEMA KS 1 and NEMA 250. 3. Provide auxiliary dry contacts to indicate switch position. C. Disconnect Switches for 120 -volt, Single -phase Circuits: 1. Refer to Section 16142, Snap Switches. D. Enclosures: NEMA rating shall be as required for area classifications specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. E. Identification: 1. Identify enclosures in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2. Provide nameplate to identify the equipment served by disconnect switch and associated source of power. 11- 0025 -UT 16143 -2 Disconnect Switches PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other structural supports on which they are mounted. Provide independent stainless steel supports where no wall or other structural surface exists. Mount disconnect enclosures at a height not exceeding six feet. C. Provide suitable 1/4 -inch spacers to prevent mounting enclosure directly against walls. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16143 -3 Disconnect Switches 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16143 -4 Disconnect Switches SECTION 16144 CONTROL STATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install control stations, including pushbuttons, selector switches, and other control stations elements. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before control stations Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16070, Support Systems. 3. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. NEMA ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. 2. NEMA ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control- Circuits and Pilot Devices. 3. NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures. 4. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 5. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all control stations furnished under this Section from a single control station manufacturer. 2. Components shall be suitable for the specified application and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by control station manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 11- 0025 -UT 16144 -1 Control Stations A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of control stations to be furnished with their location, rating, and NEMA enclosure type for each. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information and specifications for control stations proposed for use. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Control Stations: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Cutler- Hammer. b. General Electric Company. c. Allen Bradley Company. d. Square -D Company. e. Or equal. 2. Type: 30.5 mm industrial, heavy duty, oil -tight construction with clearly - marked legend plates. 3. Emergency Stop or Lockout Stop: Lockout stop pushbuttons shall be two - position, push -pull type with maintained contact and mushroom head. Provide control stations with padlocking attachment and legend plate reading "PUSH -TO -STOP, PULL -TO- START ". 4. Pushbuttons: Momentary or maintained types, NEMA A600 contact rating. 5. Selector Switches: Rotary type with round or oval handles and positioning device to securely hold switch in selected position for maintained type and for spring return from left, right, or both left and right to maintained position. 6. Control stations shall comply with NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 5, and UL 508, and shall bear the UL label. 7. Indicating Lights: 120vac LED module push -to -test. Lens color shall be in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identifications. 8. Enclosures: As required for area classifications specified in Section 16050, General Provisions, and complying with NEMA 250 and NEMA ICS 6. 9. Identification: Identify enclosures in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. Devices shall include front - mounted nameplates identifying function and equipment controlled, if not readily apparent. PART 3 — EXECUTION 11- 0025 -UT 16144 -2 Control Stations 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as shown and indicated, and provide sufficient access and working space for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which equipment is mounted. Provide independent supports where no wall or other surface exists, in accordance with Section 16070, Supporting Systems. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16144 -3 Control Stations 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16144 -4 Control Stations SECTION 16215 ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, professional services, and incidentals required to perform electrical power distribution system studies. Study shall cover all new equipment and existing equipment to the MCC main Breaker level. 2. Motor starting and transformer information used in electrical power distribution system studies shall be based on equipment provided by CONTRACTOR and, where applicable, existing equipment ratings and settings. 3. Electrical power distribution system studies shall include the following, as specified in this Section: a. Short- circuit study. b. Protective device evaluation study. c. Protective device coordination study. d. Arc flash analysis. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16075, Identification for Electrical Systems. 2. Div 16 Sections for Electrical Equipment Provided under this Contract 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/IEEE C37.91, Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power Transformers 2. ANSI/NCSL Z540.3 Requirements for the Calibration of Measuring and Test Equipment. 3 IEEE 141, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution in Industrial Plants (IEEE Red Book). 4. IEEE 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coord. of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Buff Book). 5. IEEE 399, Analysis (IEEE Brown Book), Recommended Practice for Power System Analysis. 6. IEEE 1584, Guide for Performing Arc -Flash Hazard Calculations. 7. NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -1 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies A. Action Submittals: 1. Calculations and results of arc -flash analysis in report format sealed and signed by professional engineer retained for the studies. Submit preliminary reports (when specified) and final reports. 2. Testing Plan: Submit work plan for field testing. Submit and obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to performing tests. Plan shall indicate schedule of field testing, time frames for tests, and duration of equipment outage for testing. Submit shutdown requests for each outage in accordance with Section 01143, Coordination with CITY's Operations. 3. Field Survey Plan: Submit work plan for field survey and data gathering prior to beginning work. Plan shall indicate the schedule of work, time frames for data collection, and duration that equipment will be temporarily out of service. Submit shutdown requests for each outage in compliance with Section 01143, Coordination with CITY's Operations. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: a. Results of field testing. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Professional engineer. b. Field engineer, when required by ENGINEER. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Final settings of protective devices. Submit compilation of final settings for each equipment lineup within 10 days of programming the associated protective devices. 2. Electronic Files: a. Protective Devices: 1) Settings for all microprocessor -based protective devices. 2) Software versions used to program the protective devices. b. Electrical Power Distribution System Studies: 1) Upon ENGINEER's approval or acceptance, as applicable, of submittals required under this Section, submit for CITY's use all electronic files developed for the Work under this Section associated with the approved or accepted, as applicable, submittal to ENGINEER. 2) Electronic files submitted for CITY's use shall become CITY's property. 3) Source files for power studies performed under this Section. 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -2 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies 1.4 ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM STUDIES A. General: 1. Perform a current and complete short- circuit study, protective device evaluation study, and protective device coordination study for the Site's electrical distribution system. Perform studies in accordance with IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399. 2. Studies shall include all portions of high -, medium -, and low- voltage electrical power distribution systems, from the normal and alternate sources of power through low- voltage distribution system. Thoroughly cover in the study normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. 3. Perform a complete study to evaluate both new and existing devices, and include recommendations on required adjustments. Studies shall include both the normal utility supply and standby generator systems. 4. Promptly bring to attention of ENGINEER and CITY problem areas and inadequacies in equipment. 5. Perform both preliminary and final short- circuit and coordination studies. Preliminary study shall verify adequacy of equipment's short- circuit ratings and establish preliminary settings required prior for energizing equipment. Perform final short- circuit and coordination study and arc flash analysis after ENGINEER's acceptance of preliminary study, but not later than the date when equipment installed under the Project is placed into service. Study data shall include the following: a. Preliminary Short- circuit and Coordination Study: Base the evaluation on the worst case operating mode. Include the utility - confirmed contribution. Base the evaluation on estimated cable lengths, and proposed equipment and protective devices. b. Final Short- circuit and Coordination Study: Base the evaluation on utility - confirmed contribution. Evaluate the distribution system under each of the various operating modes. Base the evaluation on actual confirmed cable lengths, and installed equipment and protective devices. B. Short- circuit Study: 1. Perform short- circuit evaluation using computer software specifically designed for such use. 2. Input data shall include electric utility company's short- circuit, single -, and three -phase contributions, with reactance /resistance (X/R) ratio, resistance and reactance components of each branch impedance, motor and generator contributions, base quantities selected, and other applicable circuit parameters. 3. Calculate short- circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current at each switchgear bus, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboards, and other significant locations through the system. 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -3 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies 4. Short- circuit tabulations shall include symmetrical fault currents and X/R ratios. For each fault location, total duty on the bus and individual contribution from each connected branch, including motor back electro- motive force (EMF) current contributions, shall be listed with its associated X/R ratio. C. Protective Device Evaluation Study: 1. Determine adequacy of circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busways, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing short- circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 2. Apply appropriate multiplying factors based upon system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards. D. Protective Device Coordination Study: 1. Perform study to select or to check selections of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated voltage and current transformers, and low - voltage breaker trip characteristics and setting. 2. Overcurrent device settings estimated in the protective device coordination study shall provide complete, 100 percent selectivity. Selectively coordinate system such that only the device nearest a fault will operate to remove the faulted circuit. System selectively shall be based on both the magnitude and duration of a fault current. 3. Study shall include all voltage classes of equipment starting at electric utility's incoming line protective device, down to and including medium - and low- voltage equipment. Phase and ground overcurrent and phase and ground fault protection shall be included, and settings for other adjustable protective devices. 4. Plot time - current characteristics of installed protective devices on appropriate log -log paper. Maintain reasonable coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves. Provide coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices for complete system. Use sufficient curves to clearly indicate selective coordination achieved through electric utility's main breaker, power distribution feeder breakers, and overcurrent devices at each major load center. 5. Show maximum of eight protective devices per plot. Appropriately title each plot and include the following information as required for the circuits shown: a. Representative one -line diagram, legends, and types of protective devices selected. b. Power company's relays or fuse characteristics. c. Significant motor starting characteristics. d. Parameters of transformers, magnetizing inrush and withstand curves in accordance with ANSI C37.91. e. Operating bands of low- voltage circuit breaker trip curves, and fuse curves. 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -4 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies f. Relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings. g. Cable damage curves. h. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. 6. Provide selection and settings of protective devices separately in tabular format listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios, manufacturer, type, range of adjustment, and recommended settings. Provide a tabulation of recommended power fuse selection for all fuses in system. E. Arc -Flash Analysis: 1. Conduct are flash analysis after acceptance by ENGINEER of short- circuit study and coordination study. Perform arc flash analysis for each operating mode of the system, in accordance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. 2. Document the protection and calculation procedures and coordination review in testing report. Present analysis results in tabular format showing the following: a. Bus and protection device name. b. Bolted and arcing fault values. c. Protective device trip times. d. Arc flash boundary, working distance, and incident energy. e. Required protective flame - resistant (FR) clothing class. 1.5 STUDY REPORT A. Summarize results of electrical power distribution system studies in a typed or computer - printed report that includes the following: 1. Description, purpose, basis, written scope, and single -line diagram of power distribution systems evaluated. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuses, and other equipment ratings versus calculated short- circuit duties. Evaluation of short- circuit calculations and identification of underrated equipment. 3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, and fuse selection. Include an evaluation and discussion of logical compromises for proposed protection. 4. Fault current tabulation including definition of terms and guide for interpretation. 5. Tabulation of appropriate tap settings for relay seal -in units. 6. Tabulation of equipment survey information. B. Electrical power distribution system studies report shall include a separate section addressing arc flash analysis. In addition to protection and calculation procedures, and coordination review and analysis results, report shall include protective device evaluation for each high- incident energy case to determine if adjustments can improve system performance relative to arc flash hazard level. 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -5 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND EVALUATION FIRM A. Power distribution system studies shall be performed by one of the following: 1. Eaton 2. Schneider Electric 3. Or approved Equal 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Coordinate with professional engineer performing the studies and assist professional engineer with collecting information necessary to complete the specified studies. 2. Prior to performing studies, obtain information pertaining to existing system necessary for performing studies. 3.3 FIELD SERVICES A. CONTRACTOR's professional engineer shall conduct an equipment survey and data gathering of existing devices and information necessary to perform electrical power distribution system studies. B. To the extent applicable, perform survey that includes the following information: 1. Manufacturer, type, and size of each power fuse. 2. Manufacturer, type, model, and settings for each protective relay, trip unit, and circuit breaker. 3. Current transformer ratios for each protective relay. 4. Appropriate data for motors and transformers included with the study. C. CONTRACTOR's professional engineer shall confirm and establish proper settings for protective devices. Professional engineer shall collect data and coordinate with equipment Suppliers to establish proper settings for the devices provided. Document in the study all devices and settings. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Site Tests: 1. Provide protective device field testing in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Field testing shall be by CONTRACTOR's field engineer, after submittal of and ENGINEER's acceptance of electrical power distribution system studies. Field testing results shall be documented in a report that shall include final settings of protective devices. 11- 0025 -UT 16215 -6 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies 2. Field engineer shall provide necessary tools and equipment and adjust, set, calibrate, and test protective devices. Protective relays and meters in medium- and low - voltage equipment shall be set, adjusted, calibrated, and tested in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and the coordination study. Provide minor adjustments, repairs, and lubrication necessary for proper operation. 3. Electromechanical protective relays provided in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be set and tested for acceptance. Testing shall include visual and mechanical inspection. Testing shall include overcurrent time and pick -up tests. 4. Solid state and multi - function trip devices shall be set, including required programming necessary for the protection required. Devices shall be checked, configured, and tested for setting and proper operation. 3.5 MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS A. Field testing may require that certain equipment be temporarily taken out of service. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work with due regard to the need of CITY for continuance of operations and in accordance with sequencing required in the Contract Documents, and in accordance with Section 01143, Coordination with CITY's Operations. Submit testing procedures and schedules and obtain acceptance by ENGINEER prior to starting testing and related Work. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Provide personnel protective equipment labels in accordance with Section 16075, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Supplier Services: Provide training for CITY's operation and maintenance personnel in personnel protection equipment. Provide at least eight hours of training, in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16215 -7 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16215 -8 Electrical Power Distribution System Studies SECTION 16231 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown specified and required to furnish and install 480 -volt standby power generator system with appurtenances for complete and operational system. 2. The following generator system is included in this Section: a. 800 KW, 1000 KVA, 0.8 power factor, 480 volts, 3- phase, 4 wires engine generator, with Sound Attenuated ( <74dBA @ 7 meters), Non - Walk -In Weatherproof enclosure, 160mph Ultimate Wind Speed load rated, to be located at Clearwater East Plant. b. Generator to be installed on elevated reinforced concrete platform. Refer to drawings. c. Provide fuel system day tank with, controls, valves and pumping system to connect to two existing above ground bulk storage tanks. 3. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) shall be furnished separately per Section 16412, Automatic Transfer Switches. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before engine generator Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this section are: 1. International Standards Organization (ISO), ISO 8528, Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine Driven Alternating Current Generator Sets. 2. ISO 9001, Quality Management Systems — Requirements. 3. NEMA MG -1, Motors and Generators. 4. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 5. NFPA 37, Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines. 6. NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 7. NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. 8. NEC Article 701, Legally Required Standby Systems. 9. UL 142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -1 Engine Generator System 10. UL 508, Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 11. UL 2200, Standard for Safety Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies (rated 600 volts or less) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Shall have minimum of twenty five years of experience of producing substantially similar equipment to that specified and shall document at least five Florida installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. The manufacturer shall design and manufacture all major components; engine, alternator, transfer switches and controls. b. Shall possess valid ISO 9001 certification. c. Supplier shall have complete parts and service facilities, factory- trained service staff available for 24 -hour emergency service, and be authorized to administer the warranty for all components of engine generator systems. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single generator set manufacturer. Materials, equipment, and parts shall be new, of current production of a firm that manufactures the generator set as a matched system. Manufacturer shall have full responsibility for engine generator performance. Generator set manufacturer shall prepare or approve all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 2. Engine generator shall be factory- assembled and factory- tested. Verify in the factory that system is free from electrical and mechanical defects and conforms to the Contract Documents. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of authorities having jurisdiction, including the following: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40, Part 89, Control of Emissions from New and In -Use Nonroad Compression Ignition Engines, Subpart D Emission Test Equipment Provisions 2. Local Ordinances: Systems shall conform to Laws and Regulations relative to noise control and emissions. 3. Local and State Building Codes: Installations shall conform to applicable codes including requirements of local fire marshals. 4. Permits: Obtain and pay for required permits, fees, and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -2 Engine Generator System 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. B. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Installation drawings specific to the Project. b. Bill of material for all equipment and spare parts. c. Electrical wiring and interconnection diagrams with all external connections identified. d. Control panel data shall include: 1) Description of control features. 2) Operator panel control switches and functions. 3) Alarm and status displays. 4) Provisions for remote start signal and remote status and alarm. 5) Compliance with UL 508. e. Enclosure data shall include the following: 1) Plan and elevation drawings showing overall dimensions, interior equipment arrangement, and working spaces. 2) Construction details and hardware specifications. 3) Exhaust piping and silencer mounting arrangement. 4) Sound attenuation provisions and decibel levels. f. Fuel storage system data shall include: 1) Day tank, valving, pumping, controls and tank piping arrangements including bulk storage. 2) Existing Storage capacity and hours of operation at rated load and 3/4 load. 3) Alarm devices. 4) Construction details including secondary containment provisions for fuel day tank. 5) Piping arrangements and details. 6) Compliance with UL 142 and local codes. g. Provide the following relative to installation: 1) Vibration isolators and anchor bolt requirements. 2) Wind restraint requirements. 3) Provisions for fuel piping, electrical conduits, and other external connection requirements. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, engineering data sheets, and standard drawings, necessary to fully describe the engine generator sets and appurtenances, and substantiate compliance with the Contract Documents. Information shall be annotated to clearly indicate ratings, features, and options specific to the Project. b. Generator data shall include: 1) Listed to UL 2200. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -3 Engine Generator System 2) Heat rejection to room 3) Combustion air requirements. 4) Factory painting specifications. c. Engine data shall include: 1) Fuel flow at rated load. 2) Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load. 3) Engine Type: Naturally aspirated or turbocharged and after - cooled. 4) Maximum exhaust backpressure. 5) Silencer attenuation rating. 6) Jacket water heater system. 7) Gaseous emissions data measurements for hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, particulate matter, and NOx conforming to 40 CFR 89, Subpart D. d. Alternator data shall include: 1) Winding insulation class and temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG -1 -1.65 2) Standby and continuous KW/KVA ratings. 3) Motor starting KVA at 90 percent sustained voltage. 4) Surge KW capacity. 5) Machine reactance's and time constants. e. Starting system data shall include: 1) Battery system. 2) Battery charger. 3) Cycle cranking configuration. 3. Testing Procedures: a. Source Quality Control Testing Procedures: Provide factory testing procedures and dates at least thirty days prior to testing. b. Site Quality Control Testing Procedures: Testing procedures, provided at least thirty days prior to scheduled start of testing. C. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Manufacturer's unloading, rigging, installing, testing, and startup instructions. Information shall be specific to and indicate options for the Project. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Provide factory testing results within seven days of completing factory test. 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Services to be performed by Supplier's representative, provided at least thirty days prior to start of Site testing. b. Report on results of testing at the Site, provided within seven days of completion of testing. 4. Manufacturer Reports: Reports of visits to Site by Supplier's representative, including purpose of visit, problems encountered, and resolutions. 5. Qualifications Statements: 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -4 Engine Generator System a. Manufacturer: When requested by CITY, submit data documenting compliance with qualifications requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. Include the following information: a. Operating Instructions: Instructions for starting, stopping, protection of circuits, automatic controls, battery charging and safety considerations. Methods for adjusting speed, output voltage, and control timers. b. Performance Parameters: Provide nominal values and acceptable limits for output voltage, frequency, load, engine temperature, and oil pressure Include circuit drawings with component identifications for reference . c. Maintenance Instructions: Procedures for daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis, or on an hours -run basis. Include guidance for selecting fuel oil, lubricating oil, use of water treatment additives, and anti- freeze. 2. Warranty Documentation. E. Maintenance Materials: 1. Provide the following spare parts for generator set: a. Two sets of primary and secondary fuel filters. b. One set of air filters. c. Two control circuit fuses of each size used. d. Two sets of lube oil filters. e. One set of fan belts. 2. Provide weather proof lockable stainless steel metal storage cabinet for the storage of spare parts and O &M manuals. 3. Provide the following spare parts for day tank: a. Two control circuit fuses of each size used. b. Two relays of each size used. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive CITY of other rights or remedies CITY may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. Obligations of CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents shall not be limited by provisions of the specified special warranty. B. Special Warranty: 1. Provide manufacturer's written warranty, running to the benefit of CITY, agreeing to correct or, at option of CITY remove or replace materials or equipment specified in this Section found to be defective during a period of five years after date of Substantial Completion or 3,000 hours of operation. 2. Products supplied under this Section shall be covered by a single warranty for the coverage period. Warranty shall provide for free replacement or repair of 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -5 Engine Generator System parts for five years or 3,000 hours of operation, and free labor for the first two years. C. Return a call for service within 24 hours and provide repair personnel on site within 48 hours after call. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Cover all generator air and exhaust openings with vapor inhibiting and water repellent material. 2. Deliver anchorage devices that are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 3. Inspect equipment for shipping damage or loose parts upon delivery. Check for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit. 4. Notify CITY of loss or damage to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Furnish at least one copy of instructions with equipment at time of shipment. C. Storage: 1. Store equipment in a clean, dry location with controls for uniform temperature and humidity. Protect equipment with coverings and maintain environmental controls. 2. Store materials for easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all materials off the ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect equipment from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Quantity and ratings of the systems shall be as indicated in Paragraph 1.1.A.2 of this Section. B. Generators shall be rated for standby operation for duration of normal utility outage as defined by ISO 8528 for limited time operation. Generators shall be capable of operating for up to 500 hours per year, of which maximum of 300 hours is continuous running, and no overload is allowed. C. Generator assemblies shall be UL 2200 - listed, control panels shall be UL 508- listed and above - ground fuel tanks shall be UL 142 - listed. D. Generators shall be rated for the specified KW, without overload, at the following Site conditions: 1. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 104 degrees F. 2. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 25 degrees F. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -6 Engine Generator System 3. Altitude: 10 feet above mean sea level. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide generator systems of one of the following: 1. Cummins /ONAN 2. Caterpillar 3. No equal. 2.3 ENGINE A. Engine Type: Four -cycle compression ignition, water cooled diesel 1800 RPM. Two -cycle engines are not acceptable. B. Engine Construction: 1. Steel - backed bearings. 2. Crank Case: Reinforced cast iron. 3. Crank Shaft: Forged alloy steel with hardened journals, finished and dynamically balanced. 4. Cylinder Head: Cast iron. 5. Pistons: Aluminum alloy with chrome faced rings. 6. Replaceable cylinder liners and valve seat inserts for engines rated over 200 horsepower. 7. Single -block construction. Bolted, multiple blocks are not acceptable. C. Cooling System: 1. Radiator: Engine- mounted with engine- driven blower fan capable of cooling the engine under full load conditions in an ambient temperature of 122 °F (50 °C) without de- rating. 2. Thermostatic valve in jacket water outlet between radiator and engine to maintain proper jacket water temperature. Engine- driven pump to circulate water through cooling system. 3. Coolant: Fill system with 50 percent solution of ethylene glycol and water. 4. Coolant water temperature gauge. 5. High engine temperature shutdown. 6. Loss of coolant shutdown. 7. Fan guard. 8. Radiator face duct connection. 9. Engine coolant heaters, thermostatically controlled, capable of keeping jacket water at temperature not less than 90 degrees F in compliance with NFPA 110. Coolant heaters shall operate at 208 volts, single phase. House contactor for controlling heater in NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure mounted on unit. D. Lubrication System: Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure lube pump, full flow and bypass lubrication filters with replaceable spin -on canister elements, oil drain line with valves and dipstick oil level indicator. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -7 Engine Generator System E. Fuel System: Suitable for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel oil. System to include primary and secondary fuel filters, fuel /water separator, fuel priming pump, flexible fuel lines and fuel pressure gauge. F. Governor: Electronic system to provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. System dynamic capabilities to be controlled as function of engine temperature for fast stable operation at varying engine operating conditions. System to actively control fuel rate and excitation. Fuel rate to be regulated as function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed, and operating in various isochronous states. G. Fuel Oil Day Tank System: 1. Construction: Heavy -gage double walled steel primary tank, 50 gallon capacity. Rust inhibitor coating inside tank and interstitial wall, primed and finish coated outside. 2. Comply with the following: a. Listed in and labeled with UL 142 and UL 508. b. NFPA 30 and NFPA 37. c. Codes for: 1) Florida Department of Environmental Protection. (FDEP). 3. Fittings: One -inch diameter NPT for engine supply and return and overflow; two - inch diameter for normal vent; NPT for emergency vents and drains; inspection port. 4. Leak detection system wired to control panel to shut down pump motor in case of leak in interstitial area with alarm contacts to plant SCADA system. 5. Control panel with the following functions, indicators, and alarms: a. Pump on /off/test manual control and automatic control on level. b. Fuel level indicator with 4 -20mA output for retransmission to SCADA. c. Low fuel, low -low fuel level pump shut off, and fuel in basin alarms. d. Contacts for remote annunciation of all alarms. e. Provide back lit color display with sunshield 6. Heavy -duty high lift, 2 gpm, 1/3 hp, gear pump sized to draw fuel from two bulk fuel storage tanks. (Min. 15' lift capable). Fuel Return direct into Bulk Tank. 7. Manual 3 -way Valve system to draw from two separate bulk tanks. Provide all isolation and check valves necessary. 8. Plumbing and wiring pre - connected for a packaged system. 9. Status and Alarms a. Not in Auto b. Pump Run c. Loss of flow d. Low Fuel Level e. Critical Low and Shutdown of Generator f. Fuel leak g. High Fuel Level h. High Fuel Temperature 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -8 Engine Generator System i. Fuel Solenoid Fail 10. Manufacturers: Provide day tank systems of one of the following: a. Simplex. b. Pryco, Inc. c. Tramont Corp. d. No equal. H. Air Supply/Exhaust Systems: 1. Heavy duty air cleaner with service indicator. 2. Flexible stainless steel exhaust connector. 3. Critical grade silencer (35 dBA min.) with condensate drain ports. 4. Schedule 40 stainless steel piping. Insulate indoor piping to limit surface temperature to 50 degrees C. I. Air Emissions: 1. Comply with current United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) standards for stationary non -road engines and with state and local requirements. 2. Submit emissions data measurements for hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), particulate matter (PM) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) conforming to USEPA test procedures. Include USEPA not -to- exceed requirements for each pollutant. J. Starting System: DC system complete with engine mounted batteries, locally mounted charger and connecting cables between batteries and engine and between charger and batteries. 1. Batteries: Lead -acid or calcium /lead antimony, engine cranking type, rated in accordance with engine manufacturer's requirements for minimum ofthree 15- second cranking cycles at firing speeds without recharging, and to accommodate DC power requirements of control panel and other accessories requiring DC power. 2. Battery racks, cables, connectors, and disconnect switch. 3. Engine- mounted battery charging alternator and solid state voltage regulator. 4. Battery Charger: a. UL- listed, voltage regulated and equipped with float, taper and equalize charge settings. b. Analog DC ammeter and voltmeter; 12 -hour equalize timer; AC and DC fuses. c. Loss of AC power, low battery voltage and high battery voltage alarm lights and contacts for remote annunciation; power on light. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -9 Engine Generator System 2.4 ALTERNATOR A. Construction: Synchronous generator, four -pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, self ventilated, drip -proof construction, single bearing, dynamically balanced rotor with amortisseur windings to minimize voltage deviations and heating effects under unbalanced load conditions. Rotor directly connected to engine flywheel housing to ensure permanent alignment. B. Winding Insulation Systems: Class F in accordance with NEMA MG -1. Temperature rise not to exceed 105 degrees C over 40 degrees C ambient at rated load. Epoxy coating for fungus resistance and abrasion protection. C. Excitation System: Brushless construction. Excitation support system, permanent magnet type, to sustain 300 percent rated current for up to 10 seconds under short circuit conditions. Provide surge suppressors to protect against voltage spikes. D. Voltage Regulator: Automatic solid state system to maintain generator output voltage within plus or minus 0.5 percent from no load to full load. Control voltage buildup, provide volts per Hertz regulation, protect from over - excitation, limit voltage overshoot on startup, and be environmentally sealed. E. Provide anti- condensation heater to maintain temperature approximately five degrees Fahrenheit above ambient when generator is idle. 2.5 CONTROL PANEL A. Provide controls to all emergency load pickup in 10 seconds or less, with recovery time of less than 3.5 seconds, a voltage dip of less than 39.5% and a frequency dip of less than 1.5 Hz. B. Controls shall be in accordance with NFPA 110, Level 1, and control panel shall conform to the following: 1. Install control panel on vibration isolators with controls, instruments, lights, and devices necessary to manually and automatically start, stop, monitor, and protect the generator. 2. Controls shall be UL 508- listed and microprocessor -based with programmable adjustments. Control power from starting battery system. Panel shall include the following: a. Emergency stop pushbutton. b. Adjustable cycle cranking. c. KW, KVA, KVAR, and power factor meters. d. Engine coolant temperature readout. e. Engine oil pressure readout. f. Running time readout. g. RPM meter. h. Cool down timer. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -10 Engine Generator System 1 1 1 t r 1 1 i t r 1 1 3. Readouts and dry contact outputs shall be provided as required by NFPA 110, Level 1. 4. Provide output dry contacts for remote monitoring and control for the following: a. Generator running b. Generator common warning alarm. c. Generator common shutdown alarm. d. Low day tank fuel if day tank is used (warning alarm). e. Low main tank fuel (warning alarm). f. Liquid leak in containments areas, including tank, double walled piping, and other fuel supply components (warning alarm). 5. Reset Control: Manual or remote restarts are not allowed and alarm lamps shall remain in alarm state until manual reset is accomplished even if alarm condition has been corrected. 6. Provide control panel anti - condensation space heater. 2.6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Provide main and exciter circuit breakers, sized for protecting the engine - generator. B. Type: UL- listed, molded case with interchangeable electromechanical trip unit for sizes 225 -amp and larger. Provide NEMA 1 enclosed units and mount on engine generator. 2.7 FUEL SYSTEM A. Fuel Piping 1. Unions shall be supplied between the fuel tank and the generator on both the supply and return lines to allow for easy removal of piping. Any surface mounted piping that may be a trip hazard shall be painted Safety red. Fuel piping shall receive surface preparation and coating schedule prior to installation. 2. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without forcing or bending. All pipes shall be installed into place without traps or pockets and pitched 1 -inch in 20 -foot minimum to drain. 3. Piping shall be installed to minimize the quantity of piping joints. Provide unions and /or flexible connections at all equipment connections. 4. Joints shall be fabricated in accordance with standard industry practices and the manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be liquid tight, welded joints except where flanged connections to equipment or valves are required. Cut pipe square using pipe cutting tool and carefully ream pipe to remove all burrs prior to welds. 5. Contractor shall flush system piping with grade of fuel to be used by City to remove any debris and foreign matter in piping prior to testing for a minimum 1 1-0025-UT 16231 -11 Engine Generator System of 6 -hours continuously. Contractor shall dispose of fuel in accordance with FDEP regulations after flushing. 6. All piping shall be labeled including flow arrows indicating the direction of flow. B. Flexible Fuel Piping 1. Provide flexible piping connectors at generator connections and equipment connections. 2. Flexible connections shall be a minimum of 12- inches long or as required for equipment removal or maintenance. Protect flexible connectors where physical damage may occur due to adjacent equipment, other piping, wiring, or where subject to possible damage from operating personnel. C. Testing 1. Piping shall be tested in strict accordance with the manufacturer's testing requirements. Piping systems shall be tested upon completion ofthe roughing - in before setting equipment. The entire system shall be pressure tested with fuel at 25 -psig and proved tight at this pressure for a period of 4- hours. Defective work or material shall be replaced and retested. The system shall be test plugged or capped prior to testing to prevent test pressure from reaching any equipment or storage tank. 2.8 ENCLOSURE A. Provide engine - generator system with outdoor aluminum weatherproof enclosure as indicated in Paragraph 1.1.A.2 of this Section. B. Non - walk -in enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 14- gauge, reinforced aluminum and shall attach directly to engine - generator base or sub -base fuel tank. Enclosure shall be factory assembled structure with key - lockable access doors for performing normal maintenance operations. Hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Lube oil and coolant drains shall be extended to exterior of enclosure and terminated with drain valves, capped with pipe nipples on flanged connections. C. Sound Attenuation: Engine - generator enclosure shall be sound - attenuated to reduce noise level to 74dBA at a point seven meters from engine - generator in free air environment, while operating at full load. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Engine Generator Mounting: 1. Vibration Isolators: Steel springs in combination with rubber pads. 2. Vibration Isolation: Provide flexible connections between engine - generator set and fuel lines, exhaust system, electrical conduits, and other externally connected support systems. 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -12 Engine Generator System 1 3. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, conforming to Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts. 4. Template shall be furnished by manufacturer for setting anchorages devices, pipe sleeves, and nuts for mounting spring -type isolators to concrete foundation. Provide bolts and nuts for bolting isolators to channel frame base of engine - generator set. 2.10 FINISHING A. Engine generator ferrous metal surfaces shall be prime- coated for corrosion protection and finish- painted in accordance with manufacturer's standard painting system. B. Color of finish paint to be selected by CITY from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests 1. Generators 500 kW and Smaller: Provide results of tests and evaluations previously performed on prototype generator sets representative of the models to be provided, in accordance with NFPA 110. 2. Generators 501 kW and Larger: Following assembly, perform at the factory standard production tests to verify proper operation and performance. Tests shall include two -hour load test. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install engine generator system in accordance with the Contract Documents, approved Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Testing: Test engine - generator set in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide all materials and equipment, including load banks, fuel, lubricants and material required for Site testing. Completely fill fuel tank at conclusion of testing. B. Manufacturer's Services: Provide qualified, factory- trained serviceman to perform 11- 0025 -UT 16231 -13 Engine Generator System the following: 1. Supervise unloading and installation of equipment. 2. Instruct CONTRACTOR in the installation of equipment. 3. Inspect and adjust equipment after installation and ensure that equipment operates properly. 4. Instruct CITY's personnel in operating and maintaining the equipment. Minimum 2hrs instruction. 5. Service representative shall make a minimum of 4 visits, with a minimum of 2 hours at the Site for each visit. First visit shall be for unloading supervision and instruction of CONTRACTOR in installing equipment; second visit shall be for assistance in installation of equipment; third visit shall be for checking completed installation and start-up of system; fourth visit shall be to instruct operations and maintenance personnel. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until installation is acceptable. 6. Provide Load bank testing per manufactures recommendation, minimum 4hr duration at 50 %, 75% and 100% loading. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16231 -14 Engine Generator System SECTION 16271 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install dry type low - voltage distribution transformers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16061, Grounding Systems. 3. Section 16075, Electrical Identifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1 NEMA ST -20, Dry Type Transformers for General Applications. 2. NEMA TP -1, Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. 3. NEMA TP -2, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption for Distribution Transformers. 4. UL 1561, Dry Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NEC Article 450, Transformers and Transformer Vault (Including Secondary Ties). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of transformers to be furnished with ratings and other required technical data. b. Proposed location for each transformer, including pad layout, dimensions, and appurtenances. 2. Product Data: a. Supplier's technical information for transformers proposed for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11- 0025 -UT 16271 -1 Dry-Type Transformers 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dry Type Two - Winding Transformer: 1. Type: Dry type, air cooled, low temperature rise. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be energy efficient, complying with NEMA TP -1 Class 1 efficiency levels. Transformers Iess than 15 kVA shall be general purpose. 2. Rating: KVA, primary voltage and connection, secondary voltage and connection, frequency and number of phases shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3. Insulation: Insulation and average winding temperature rise (in a 40 degree C maximum ambient) for rated kVA per the following table. Energy efficient transformers shall be capable of 15 percent continuous overload at 150 degrees C temperature rise. kVA Rating Insulation Class (degrees C) Temperature Rise (degrees C) 1to15kVA 185 115 25 to 500 kVA 220 115 4. Winding Taps, Transformers 15 kVA and Less: Two 5- percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary winding. 5. Winding Taps, Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2 -1/2- percent above rated voltage and four 2-1/2+ percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps on primary. 6. Basic impulse level shall be 10 kV. 7. Sound Level: NEMA ST -20 standard. 8. Enclosure: UL listed for the application. 9. Identification: Identify transformers in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification , with the transformer number and voltages, connection data, kVA ratings, impedance, and overload capacity. 10. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST -20, NEMA TP -1, NEMA TP -2, and UL 1561. 11. Transformers shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. B. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Cutler- Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens. 5. Or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 11- 0025 -UT 16271 -2 Dry-Type Transformers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the conditions under which the dry type transformers are to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers on walls or floors at locations shown. Install floor mounted transformers on raised concrete bases. Provide sufficient access and working space for convenient and safe operation and maintenance. B. Mount transformers so that vibrations are not transmitted to the building structural parts and other equipment. Make connections to transformers with flexible conduit. C. Adjust tap settings to provide proper voltage at panelboards. D. Install dry type transformers in conformance with governing codes and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and the Contract Documents. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16271 -3 Dry-Type Transformers 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16271 -4 Dry-Type Transformers 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r SECTION 16282 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install surge protective devices (SPD). 2. SPDs furnished under this Section shall be ANSI/UL 1449 Type 2 integrating both surge suppression and high - frequency noise filtering suitable for use on low- voltage distribution systems. 3. The following electrical equipment shall have surge protective devices installed: a. Generator Switchboard (SWBD -G) — East WRF b. Panel EL1 - Marshall Street Lab B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions 2. Section 16440, Switchboards. 3. Section 16442, Panelboards. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/UL 1449, Surge Protective Devices. 2. IEEE C62.11, Metal -Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits ( >1 kV) 3. IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low - voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. IEEE C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low - Voltage (1,000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. 5. UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Shall have at least five years experience manufacturing and servicing products substantially similar to those required and shall be able to submit documentation of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years each. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 11- 0025 -UT 16282 -1 Surge Protective Devices 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single SPD manufacturer. 2. SPD manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be suitable for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by SPD manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC 110.9, Requirements for Electrical Installations, Interrupting Rating. 2. NEC 240.21, Overcurrent Protection, Location in Circuit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Electrical and mechanical drawings for each type of unit, showing electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting provisions, connection details, and layout diagrams. b. Components list and nameplate schedule. c. Summary sheets with schedules of equipment. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information, including catalog information. b. Manufacturer's technical specifications with assembly and component ratings. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: a. Certification that SPD devices comply with standards referenced in this Section. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Report of results of testing and inspections performed at manufacturer's shop. 3. Supplier Reports: a. Submit written report ofresults of each visit to Site by Supplier's service technician, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacture, when requested by CITY. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the Following 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. 11- 0025 -UT 16282 -2 Surge Protective Devices 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t b. Include acceptable test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, wiring diagrams, and list of spare parts recommended for one year of operation with current price list. 2. Warranty Documentation: Submit example warranty at time of shipment of the equipment. Include final warranty accepted by CITY in the operations and maintenance manual for the equipment. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Delivery: 1. Upon delivery, check for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit. B. Storage: 1. Store SPD equipment in a clean, dry location with controls for uniform temperature and humidity. Protect equipment with coverings and maintain environmental controls. 2. Protect equipment from corrosion and deterioration. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive CITY of other rights or remedies CITY may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents shall not be limited in any way by the provisions of the specified special warranty. B. Special Warranty on Materials and Equipment: 1. Provide manufacturer's written warranty, running to the benefit of CITY, agreeing to correct, or at option of CITY, remove or replace materials or equipment specified in this Section found to be defective during a period of five years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide equipment of one of the following: 1. General Electric. 2. Schneider Electric /Square -D Company. 3. Eaton/Cutler- Hammer. 4. Or equal. 2.2 EQUIPMENT 11- 0025 -UT 16282 -3 Surge Protective Devices A. General: 1. SPD shall be modular, high- energy, parallel design with fast - acting transient voltage suppression using metal oxide varistors. Equipment shall provide noise attenuation with electromagnetic interference filter. 2. SPD shall comply with requirements of the following: a. ANSI/UL 1449. b. UL 1283. c. IEEE C62.11, IEEE C62.41 and IEEE C62.45. 3. SPD shall be suitable for operation under the following environmental conditions: a. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent, non - condensing. b. Frequency: 47 to 63 Hertz. c. Temperature: Zero to 149 degrees F. 4. SPD operating voltage and IEEE C62.41 and IEEE C62.45 Category A, B, and C application environments shall be suitable for the associated SPD location(s) shown or indicated on the Drawings. 5. SPD shall be suitable for internal and external mounting. Where shown on the Drawings, SPD shall be factory- mounted and integrated into distribution equipment specified under the following Sections: a. Section 16440, Switchboards. b. Section 16442, Panelboards. B. SPD shall include a surge suppression path for each mode as required for the system configuration shown on the Drawings. Each mode shall be individually fused and equipped with thermal cutouts. SPD short- circuit rating shall be 200 kA. Protection modes shall include, to the extent applicable, the following: 1. Line -to -line. 2. Line -to- neutral. 3. Line -to- ground. 4. Neutral -to- ground. C. SPD shall include electromagnetic interference /radio frequency interference (EMI/RFI) noise rejection filter with attenuation up to 30 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz. D. SPDs and components in the operating path shall have maximum continuous operating voltage greater than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. E. ANSI/UL 1449 minimum withstand rating shall be 20 kA per pole, and ANSI/UL 1449 voltage protection rating for SPD shall not exceed the following: 11- 0025 -UT 16282 -4 Surge Protective Devices 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 L-N,L-G, N-G 800 _ 1200 L -L 1200 2000 F. SPD surge capacity based upon IEEE C62.41 location category shall, as a minimum, be the following: Category 1 Application Per Phase Per Mode C _ Service entrance 240 kA 120 kA B High exposure locations (distribution equipment) 160 kA 80 kA A Branch locations 120 kA 60 kA 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide SPD equipped with the following accessories: 1. Surge counter with display for indicating the number of surges detected. 2. LED indicators for monitoring device status. 3. Audible alarm and silence switch for indicating an inoperative condition. 4. Dry contacts, "Form C ", for remote annunciation of unit status. 5. Indicators, counter, alarm, and silence switch shall be visible and accessible from front of the SPD. When SPD is integral to switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, or other equipment, indicators, counter, alarm, and silence switch shall be visible and accessible from front of the equipment in which the SPD is installed. 6. Enclosure for each externally- mounted SPD: NEMA rating shall be as required for area classifications specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform manufacturer's standard factory tests on equipment. Tests shall be in accordance with IEEE C62.45 and ANSI/UL 1449. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 11- 0025 -UT 16282 -5 Surge Protective Devices 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install SPD at locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations, Laws, and Regulations, and the Contract Documents. B. Conductor length between suppressor and connection point shall be as short and as straight as possible. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16282 -6 Surge Protective Devices SECTION 16412 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install automatic transfer switches as shown on drawings. 2. Scope includes the replacement of four existing switches in exact location of originals. CONTRACTOR shall verify and coordinate existing footprint, clearances and existing conduit penetrations to maintain continuity. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any deviations, temporary connections, conduit and wire or equipment adjustments necessary to install switches. 3. Switches specified under this Section include both open and enclosed types. Open type switches shall be factory tested and shipped for mounting and connection. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. IEEE 472, Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests. 2. IEEE 446, Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications. 3. IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. NEMA ICS1 109, Tests and Procedures. 5. NEMA ICS10, AC Automatic Transfer Switches. 6. UL 1008, Transfer Switch Equipment. 7. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment 8. UL 61010B -1 (previously UL 3111 -1), Electrical Measuring and Test Equipment; Part 1: General Requirements. 9. ANSI C37.90a, Surge Withstand Capability Test (formerly IEEE Standard 472 -1974) — Ring Wave Test. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -1 Automatic Transfer Switches 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NEC Article 700, Emergency Systems. 2. NEC Article 701, Legally Required Standby Systems. 3. NEC Article 702, Optional Standby Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of transfer switches to be provided, including ratings and location of each. b. Equipment dimensions, and construction details of enclosures with conduit entry locations. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information for products proposed, including catalog cut sheets. 3. Test Procedures: a. At least thirty days prior to actual factory and field testing, submit proposed testing procedures, methods and apparatus. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit reports of completed factory tests, including test results and procedures used for testing. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit reports of completed field tests, including test results and procedures used for testing. 3. Supplier Instructions: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for transporting, handling, storing, and installing the products. 4. Supplier Reports: a. Written report of each visit to Site by supplier's service representative. C. Closeout Submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information. b. Manuals shall include record drawings of control schematics, including point -to -point wiring diagrams. c. Furnish operation and maintenance manuals per Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -2 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Maintenance Material Submittals: Furnish the following: 1. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: Provide as specified in this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete in time to prevent delay of the Work. B. Shipping sections shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, and ship. Indoor sections shall be bolted to skids. C. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the sections. D. Comply with Section 01651, Product Delivery, and Section 01661, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and long term storage the following spare parts for each switch: Item Quantity per Switch a. Control relay Two of each type used b. Pilot light Two per ten of each type used c. Fuses Two set of each type and size used 2. Furnish a list of additional recommended spare parts for an operating period of one year. Describe each part, quantity recommended, and current unit price of each. 3. Package spare parts in suitable containers bearing labels clearly indicating contents and equipment with which they are to be used. Deliver spare parts at same time as switchgear. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Provide automatic transfer switches as specified for transferring loads from one power source to another. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -3 Automatic Transfer Switches 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Eaton Cutler Hammer 2. Zenith 3. ASCO 4. No equal. 2.3 SWITCH A. Ratings: 1. Switches shall be capable of switching all classes of loads and rated for continuous duty when installed in a non - ventilated enclosure. 2. Switches shall be rated with continuous ampere rating, number of poles and voltage as shown on Drawings. 3. Switches shall be rated to withstand the magnitude of fault current available without welding of contacts in compliance with ANSI C37.90a and IEEE C62.41. B. Standards and Performance: 1. Switches shall comply with UL Standard 1008, NEMA Standard ICS10, and applicable requirements of NEC Article 700, IEEE 446, IEEE C62.41, UL 508, and UL 61010B -1. Switches shall be UL labeled with performance meeting or exceed the following: a. Temperature Rise: Measurements shall be made after overload and endurance tests. b. Withstand: UL listed to withstand magnitude of fault current available at switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices shown on Drawings at an X/R ratio of 6.6 or less. Main contacts shall not trip open or weld when subjected to fault currents. 1) As a condition for approval, manufacturer of automatic transfer switches shall verify that switches are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL -1008 with three -cycle short circuit closing and withstand as follows: 11- 0025 -UT RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 480 VAC Amperes 3 Cycle Closing & Withstand 100 to 400 42,000 600 to 800 65,000 1000 to 1200 85,000 1600 to 4000 100,000 2) During three -cycle closing and withstand tests, there shall be no contact welding or damage. Three -cycle tests shall be performed without using current limiting fuses, and oscillograph traces across main contacts shall be furnished to verify that contact separation has not occurred, and there is contact continuity across all phases 16412 -4 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 after completion of testing. Test procedures shall be in accordance with UL -1008, and testing shall be certified by UL. 3) When conducting temperature rise tests to UL -1008, Supplier shall include post- endurance temperature rise tests to verify ability of transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing overload and endurance tests. c. Dielectric: Measurements shall be made at 1960 VAC RMS minimum following the withstand current rating test. d. Transient Withstand: Control panel shall pass the voltage surge withstand test per IEEE Standard 472 and voltage impulse withstand test per NEMA ICS1 109. C. Construction: 1. Switch shall be double throw actuated by non - fused, momentarily energized operating mechanism(s). 2. Accomplish mechanical locking of main contacts in each direction without aid of latching solenoids, toggle mechanisms, or gear arrangements. 3. An overload or short- circuit shall not cause switch to go to a neutral position. 4. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and commonality of parts. 5. Switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. 6. Main contacts shall be silver - tungsten composition. Switches shall have segmented, blow -on construction for high withstand and close -on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts. 7. Inspection of contacts shall be possible from front of switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnecting power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front - removable and - replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors or bus bars. 8. Transfer switch shall be equipped with a safe manual operator designed to prevent injury to operating personnel. Manual operator shall provide same contact -to- contact transfer speed as electrical operator to prevent a flash- over from switching main contacts slowly. Manual operation shall be safe even if electrical operator becomes energized and shall not require prior disconnection of operators or control wiring. Safe manual transfer shall be possible under all load conditions, energized or non- energized. Manual operator shall be an external type, operable through door of transfer switch enclosure. Operating personnel shall not be required to open transfer switch door to facilitate manual transfer. Manual operator shall be functional at all times, regardless of switch position or status. Manually initiated electrical operation does not meet intent of this requirement. Manual operator is not required on closed transition type switches. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -5 Automatic Transfer Switches 9. Neutral Connections: a. Switch shall include a solid neutral suitable for neutral conductors to be solidly connected. Provide neutral conductor plate with fully rated ALCU pressure connectors. D. Enclosure: Enclosed switches shall be NEMA 1 at minimum. 1. Standard and optional door - mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 30.5 - mm industrial grade type or equivalent. 2. Provide door controls on a separate, removable plate that can be supplied loose for open type units. E. Identification: Identify switches per Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 2.4 TRANSFER SWITCHING FEATURES A. Delay Transition (Open): Provide automatic delayed open transition transfer for each switch. Switch shall transfer load in delayed transition (break- before -make) mode. Transfer shall be accomplished with a user - defined interruption period in both directions adjustable from one second to five minutes in at least 15 increments. 2.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. When voltage on any phase of normal source is outside of specified parameters and after a programmable time delay period to allow for momentary dips, engine starting contacts shall close to start generating supply. B. Transfer switch shall transfer to emergency source when generating supply has reached specified voltage and frequency on all phases. C. Once normal power has been restored transfer will occur after time delay. After retransfer to normal, engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a programmable period to cool down. D. Should transfer to emergency source be initiated by test switch rather than an actual source failure, transfer from normal to emergency shall be as described above. 2.6 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER A. Each switch shall include a microprocessor controller for operation of the switch. Equip controller with the following: 1. Provide controller's sensing and logic by a built -in microprocessor with ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module. 2. Controller shall provide a minimum of five selectable nominal voltages. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and be accurate to plus /minus one 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -6 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 percent of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to plus /minus 0.2 percent. Controller shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C. 3. Connect controller to transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness that shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable controller to be disconnected from transfer switch for routine maintenance. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug -in type with dust covers. Enclose controller with a protective cover. Mount controller internally but separately from transfer switch. 4. Customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block. B. Controller Display and Keypad: 1. Display and keypad shall be an integral part of controller for viewing available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through serial communications input port. The following parameters shall be adjustable: a. Nominal line voltage and frequency b. Single- or three -phase sensing c. Operating parameter protection d. All time delay functions shall be adjustable from control display on face of enclosure. 2. Instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable, and accomplished without using codes, calculations, or instruction manuals. C. Controller Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing: 1. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities values shown as a percent nominal unless otherwise specified: Parameter Sources Dropout /Trip Pickup/Reset Under-voltage g Normal and Emergency, three -phase o 70 to 98% 0 85 to 100 /o Over - voltage Normal and Emergency, three -phase 102 to 115% 2% below trip Under- frequency Normal and Emergency 85 to 98% 90 to 100% Over - frequency Normal and Emergency 102 to 110% 2% below trip Voltage Unbalance Normal and Emergency 5 to 20% 1% below dropout 2. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within plus /minus 0.5 percent over an operating temperature range of -20 degrees C to +60 degrees C. 3. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in one percent increments, either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access. 4. When activated by keypad or through serial port, controller shall be capable of sensing phase rotation of both normal and emergency sources. Source 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -7 Automatic Transfer Switches will be unacceptable if phase rotation is not preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA). 5. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal and emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all three phases, frequency, and phase rotation. D. Controller Time Delays: 1. Provide controller with time delays below. Time delay settings shall be adjustable over a range of zero to 9999 seconds (factory set at three seconds) unless specified otherwise. a. Normal source failure, for engine starting. b. Transfer to emergency on availability of emergency source. c. Emergency source failure, retransfer on availability of normal source. d. Engine cool down following retransfer to normal. e. Time delay to control contact transition time during open transition transfer to either source. f. All timers can be bypassed via operation on processor's keypad. 2. Provide adjustable time -delay on retransfer to normal. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable. 3. Provide a time delay activated output signal to drive external relays for selective load disconnect control. Controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable zero to five- minute time delay for one of the following modes: a. Prior to transfer only. b. Prior to and after transfer. 4. Time delay and sensing functions shall be field adjustable and operate with drift that does not exceed plus /minus one percent of set frequency, plus /minus two percent of set voltage, and plus /minus ten percent of set time delay, over the temperature range of -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C. 5. Time delays shall be adjustable in one - second increments, except extended parallel time, that shall be adjustable in 0.01- second increments. 6. Time delays shall be adjustable by using display and keypad or with a remote device connected to serial communications port. Time delay value displayed shall be time remaining until next event occurs. 7. For (open) delay transition transfer switches controller shall include the following built -in time delays for delayed transition operation: a. Zero to five- minute time delay for load disconnect position for delayed transition operation. 2.7 ACCESSORY FEATURES: A. Provide each switch with the following: 1. A two - position maintained -type test switch for test /automatic/ modes. Test position shall simulate a normal source failure. 2. A SPDT silver - tungsten contact, rated five amps at 30 VDC, for a low - voltage engine start signal. Start signal shall prevent dry cranking of engine 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -8 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 by requiring generator set to reach proper output and run for duration of cool down setting regardless of whether normal source restores before Load is transferred. 3. Auxiliary contacts, rated ten amps at 250 VAC, consisting of one contact, closed when switch is connected to normal source and one contact closed when switch is connected to emergency source. 4. LED indicating lights. One shall indicate when switch is connected to normal source (green) and one to indicate when the switch is connected to emergency source (red). 5. LED indicating lights energized by controller outputs. Lights shall provide true source availability of normal and emergency sources as determined by voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source. 6. Provide the following built -in to controller, capable of being activated through keypad programming or serial port only when required by user: a. Provide ability to select "commit/no commit to transfer" to determine whether load should be transferred to standby generator if normal source restores before generator is ready to accept load. b. Provide contacts for remote start and stop of generator. c. Provide terminals for a remote contact that opens to signal switch to transfer to emergency, and for remote contacts that open to inhibit transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal. Provide ability to activate both inhibit signals through keypad, contacts and serial port. d. Controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow transfer switch to function in a non- automatic mode using an external control device. e. Engine Exerciser: Controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser that allows user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, user shall be able to: 1) Enable or disable routine. 2) Enable or disable transfer of load during routine. 3) Set start time. 4) Time of day. 5) Day of week. 6) Week of month (first, second, third, fourth, last, alternate, and every). 7) Set duration of run. 8) At end of specified duration, switch shall transfer load back to normal and run generator for specified cool down period. A ten - year life battery that supplies power to real time clock in event of a power loss shall maintain time and date information. 7. System Status: Controller display shall include a "System Status" screen that shall be readily accessible from all points in the menu by a maximum of two key strokes. System status screen shall display a clear description of active operating sequence and switch position. 8. Self- Diagnostics: Controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for detecting system errors. Screen shall provide information on status input signals to controller that may be preventing completion of load transfer commands. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -9 Automatic Transfer Switches 9. Communications Interface: Controller shall be capable of interfacing, through an full - duplex RS 485 serial communication module, and Ethernet communication module with a network of transfer switches, within 4,000 feet (locally) and remotely through modem serial communications. Standard software specific for transfer switch applications shall be available from transfer switch manufacturer. Software shall include monitoring, control, and setup of parameters. 10. Data Logging: Controller shall have ability to log data and to maintain last 99 events, even during total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non - volatile memory: a. Event Logging 1) Date and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency. 2) Date and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal. 3) Date and time emergency source available. b. Statistical Data 1) Total number of transfers. 2) Last ten numbers of transfers due to source failure. 3) Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available. 11. Terminate control wires with crimp lugs and identify with sleeve type markers. Provide suitable copper connector lugs for each service and load connections. 2.8 DATA MONITOR A. Provide a data monitor for each switch to monitor all functions specified. Flush - mount monitor on switch enclosure and equip monitor with continuous duty, long -life, lit display. B. Data monitors shall be rated for an operating temperature range of -20 degrees C to +60 degrees C. C. Data monitor shall be accurate to one percetlt measured, two percent computed values and display resolution to 0.1 percent. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics). D. Data monitor shall be capable of operating without modification at nominal frequencies of 45 to 66 Hertz and over a control power input range of 20 to 32 VDC. E. Data monitor shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers, including five -amp secondary current transformers. Direct -phase voltage connections, 600 VAC and under, shall be possible without using potential transformers. Provide current transformers. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -10 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t t 1 1 1 F. Data monitor shall be applied in single, three - phase, or three- and four -wire circuits. G. Setup parameters required by data monitors shall be stored in non - volatile memory and retained during control power interruption. H. Metered readings listed below shall be available from display and transmitted remotely by serial communications module. Transmit data in format compatible with plant monitoring and control system. 1. Current, per phase RMS. 2. Current unbalance percentage 3. Voltage, phase -to- phase, and phase -to- neutral 4. Voltage unbalance percentage 5. Real power (KW), per phase and three -phase total 6. Apparent power (KVA), per phase and three -phase total 7. Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and three -phase total 8. Power factor, three -phase total and per phase 9. Frequency. 10. Accumulated energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH) I. The following energy readings shall be communicated by data monitor: 1. Accumulated real energy (KWH) 2. Accumulated reactive energy (KVAH) 3. Accumulated apparent energy (KVARH) 4. Real and reactive energy reported values for the load circuit. J. Provide menu scroll buttons to display data monitor quantities. K. Display shall remain continuously on, without detrimental effect on life of data monitor. L. Setup for system requirements shall be via the front of data monitor. Setup provisions shall include: 1. CT Rating: Five ampere secondary and primary rating equal to automatic transfer switch rating. 2. System Type: Single, three - phase; three- and four -wire. 3. Communication parameters M. Provide capability to reset the following electrical parameters front of data monitor: 1. Real energy (MWH), apparent energy (MVAH), and reactive energy (MVARH). 2. All reset and setup functions shall have a means for protection against unauthorized and accidental changes. 11- 0025 -UT 16412 -11 Automatic Transfer Switches 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform manufacturer's standard factory tests that shall include: 1. Physical inspection and checking of components. 2. Mechanical operation and device functional tests. 3. Control operation and functionality tests. 4. Primary, control, and secondary wiring hi -pot tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which Work is to be performed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Install equipment in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer recommendations. C. Securely fasten equipment to floors, walls, or other surfaces on which equipment will be mounted. Install freestanding switches on raised concrete pad at locations shown on Drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field testing and inspection of each automatic transfer switch. Testing and inspection shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be performed by manufacturer's factory- trained representative, who shall inform CITY when equipment has been correctly installed. Do not energize equipment without permission of CITY. 3.4 MANUFACTURER SERVICES A. Manufacturer Services: 1. Manufacturer's factory- trained representative shall test the system as specified in Article 3.3 of this Section. Representative shall operate and test system in the presence of CITY and verify that equipment conforms to requirements. These services shall be at least one 4 -hour day at the Site. 2. Manufacturer's factory- trained representative shall adjust the system to initial settings specified in Article 2.6 of this Section. I I- 0025 -UT 16412 -12 Automatic Transfer Switches 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until all deficiencies are corrected, prior to readiness for final payment. 4. Provide services of manufacturer's factory- trained representatives to correct defective Work within 24 hours of notification by CITY during the Correction Period specified in the General Conditions as amended by the Supplementary Conditions. 5. Replacement parts or equipment installed during the Correction Period shall be equal to or better than the original. B. Training: Furnish services of qualified factory trained specialists from manufacturer to instruct CITY's operations and maintenance personnel in recommended operation and maintenance of the products. Training requirements, duration of instruction, and other qualifications shall be in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16412 -13 Automatic Transfer Switches 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16412 -14 Automatic Transfer Switches SECTION 16440 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install switchboards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provision. 2. Section 16282, Surge Protection Devices. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. NEMA PB2, Dead -Front Distribution Switchboards. 2. UL 891, Dead -Front Switchboards. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Shall have not less than twenty years experience manufacturing and servicing materials and equipment substantially similar to those required and upon request shall submit documentation of not less than five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years each. 2. Manufacturer shall manufacture circuit protective devices within the assembly. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all materials and equipment included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single switchboard manufacturer. 2. Switchboard manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be suitable for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by switchboard manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 408, Switchboards and Panelboards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -1 Switchboards A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Three -line diagrams. b. Dimensional information including front view elevation and plan view. c. Construction details of enclosures with conduit entry locations and connection details between assemblies. d. Components list and nameplate schedule. e. Summary sheets with schedules of equipment. f. Key interlock scheme and sequence of operation. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information, including catalog information. b. Manufacturer's technical specifications with assembly and component ratings. c. Time current curves for protective devices. 3. Testing Plans, Procedures, and Testing Limitations: a. At least thirty days prior to factory testing, submit description of proposed factory testing methods, procedures, and apparatus. b. At least thirty days prior to field testing, submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certifications required in this Section, including seismic requirements. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Report of results of testing and inspections performed at manufacturer's shop. 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Report of results of field testing. 4. Supplier Reports: a. Submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier's service technician, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed, and results obtained. Submit within two days of completion of visit to the Site. 5. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacture, when requested by CITY. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: a. Submit in accordance with Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. b. Include acceptable test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, wiring diagrams, and list of spare parts recommended for one year of operation with current price list. c. Include record drawings of control schematics, with point -to -point wiring diagrams. 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -2 Switchboards 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Upon delivery, check for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit. B. Handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One copy of these instructions shall be furnished with equipment at time of delivery. C. Storage: 1. Store switchboards equipment in a clean, dry location with controls for uniform temperature and humidity. Protect equipment with coverings and maintain environmental controls. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide equipment of one of the following: 1. Eaton /Cutler- Hammer. 2. General Electric. 3. Schneider Electric /Square D Company. 4. Or equal. 2.2 SWITCHBOARD EQUIPMENT A. Ratings: 1. Switchboard shall be 600 -volt class, suitable for operation on three - phase, 60 -Hertz system. 2. System operating voltage, number of wires, bus ampacity, and short circuit withstand capability and interrupting rating shall be as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. B. General: 1. Switchboards shall be dead -front type with individual and group- mounted devices, front - accessible. 2. Arrange switchboards with number of sections and compartments required for distribution arrangement shown. 3. Provide switchboard in accordance with the arrangement shown on the Drawings. Switchboard shall consist of bus system, structure, circuit breakers, metering, surge protective device (SPD), and enclosure. 4. Switchboards shall be in accordance with NEMA PB2, UL 891, and NEC Article 408. C. Bus Bars: 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -3 Switchboards 1. Switchboard bus bars shall be tin - plated copper, supported with high - impact, non - tracking insulating material. Secure bus joints with Belleville type washers, and braced bus joints for mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions. Mount main horizontal bus bars with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. 2. Bus bar sizes shall be based upon a maximum temperature rise of 65 degrees C over a 40- degree C ambient in accordance with NEMA PB2 and UL 891. 3. Provide copper ground bus, minimum size of 1/4 -inch by two inches, secured to each vertical section and extending entire length of equipment. Ground bus current capacity shall equal one -half the capacity of main power bus. 4. Conductor hardware shall be high - tensile strength and zinc - plated. Provide bus joints with conical spring -type washers. D. Structure: 1. Equipment structure shall be completely self - supporting and shall include required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a single metal - enclosed enclosure. 2. Enclosure shall be rated NEMA 3R, non - walk -in with slopped roof. 3. Enclosure structure frame shall be die - formed, 12 -gauge steel bolted together and reinforced. 4. Equipment shall have identifying nameplates in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. Provide nameplates for each breaker circuit and provide typewritten directory of circuits. 5. Cover sides and rear of enclosure with removable, bolt -on covers. Edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within enclosure. 6. Sections of switchboard shall be front- and rear - aligned with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices shall be front - removable and load connections shall be front - accessible. 7. Provide assembly with adequate lifting means so that assembly is capable of being moved to its installation position. 8. Conduit entry and exit shall be bottom entry and coordinated by CONTRACTOR. 9. Quantity of conduits and cables associated with each feeder shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. E. Circuit Breakers: 1. Main Breaker shall be manual draw -out type 100% rated with shunt trip. For 1200 amp Mains provide ground fault relays. 2. Feeder circuit breakers shall be molded case type with quantity of poles, voltage, and current ratings shown. 100% rated. 3. Breakers shall be manually- operated thermal magnetic type, with LSIG protection. Contacts shall be non - welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by arc chutes. 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -4 Switchboards 4. Breakers shall be operated by a toggle -type handle and shall have quick - make /quick -break over - center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of breakers shall be clearly indicated by handle position. 5. Where shown or required due to capacity, breakers shall be insulated case type. Insulated case breakers shall be manually- operated with stored energy mechanisms. Breakers shall include open -close pushbuttons, five -cycle close time, and rotary operated stored energy handle mechanism providing quick make /quick -break protection. 6. Provide breakers 100 -amp frame and larger with an electronic solid state programmable trip unit. For four -wire power systems and circuits, provide a neutral current transformer, and trip unit shall be suitable to accept neutral input. Provide push -to -trip button on front of circuit breaker to provide local manual means of exercising trip mechanism. Electronic trip system shall include: a. Plug -in protection programmer, flux shift trip device, and current sensor package. Construct programmer, sensor, and flux- shifting trip device as integral elements of breaker, requiring no externally mounted assemblies for proper operation. b. Solid state, microprocessor- based, nine - function programmer shall provide true RMS current sensing and include adjustable continuous and instantaneous current elements with adjustable long time, short time, zero sequence ground fault pickup and delay and zone selective interlocking. Main, tie and feeder circuit breakers shall be connected for zone selective interlocking to allow instantaneous bus protection. 7. Where shown, provide breakers with shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary devices. F. Provide main meter device as shown on the Drawings, and in accordance with the following. 1. Type 1 Microprocessor -based Monitoring Device: a. Device shall provide complete electrical metering in one package. Device shall include self - contained potential transformers and self - protected internal fuses. b. Mount device on compartment door to allow personnel access to meter menu and display. c. Device shall include trend analysis, event logging, and recording. Device shall include the following direct reading metered values: 1) Volts: 0.2 percent accuracy. 2) Amperes: 0.2 percent accuracy 3) Watts, Vars, and VA: 0.5 percent accuracy 4) Power Factor: 1.0 percent accuracy 5) Frequency: 0.05 percent accuracy 6) Watts, and VA Hours: 0.5 percent accuracy 7) Var Hours: 1.0 percent accuracy 8) Watts, Var, and VA Demand: 0.4 percent accuracy 9) THD- Voltage: 50th harmonic 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -5 Switchboards 10) THD- Current: 50th harmonic 11)Individual Ampere Harmonics: 50th harmonic 12) Individual Voltage Harmonics: 50th harmonic d. Metering device shall have the following additional features: 1) Trend analysis that shall display minimum and maximum values for each metered parameter with date and time of each occurrence. 2) Input range of device shall accommodate external current transformers with ranges from 100/5 to 5000/5 and potential transformers from a ratio of 120:120 to 500,000:120. Three current transformers suitably rated shall be included. 3) Alarm contacts rated five amps at 120 vac. 4) Three analog outputs programmable to reflect the metered parameters, except kilowatt hours and kilovar hours. 5) Communication capability, using RS -485, Modbus RTU Protocol or Ethernet as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Type 2 Microprocessor -based Monitoring Device: a. Device shall provide complete electrical metering in one package. Device shall include self - contained potential transformers and self - protected internal fuses. b. Mount device on compartment door to allow operator access to meter menu and display. c. Device shall include trend analysis, event logging, and recording. Device shall include the following direct reading metered values: 1) Volts: 0.2 percent accuracy. 2) Amperes: 0.2 percent accuracy 3. Control power shall be drawn from the monitored incoming AC line. Device shall have non - volatile memory and not require battery backup. During power failure, device shall retain preset parameters. G. Wiring/Terminations: 1. Provide small wiring, necessary fuse blocks, and terminal blocks in switchboard as required. Control components mounted in assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, and other components, shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 2. Provide mechanical -type terminals for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of size indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide lugs in incoming line section for connection of main grounding conductor. Provide additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors as indicated on Drawings. 4. Control wire shall be Type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Provide insulated locking spade terminals for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. Current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short- circuit terminal blocks before connecting to another device. Provide groups of control wires leaving switchboard with terminal blocks 16440 -6 Switchboards 11- 0025 -UT with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. H. Accessories: 1. Provide a surge protective device (SPD) with 200kA rating, for switchboard bus shown or indicated on the Drawings. Surge protective device shall be included and factory- mounted within switchboard -by- switchboard manufacturer. Surge protective device monitoring and display shall be visible from switchboard front. Device shall have surge counter 2. Provide disconnecting means in switchboard for SPD. 3. Provide thermostatically - controlled space heater to prevent moisture condensation. I. Miscellaneous Devices: 1. Provide control power transformers with primary and secondary protection, as indicated on the Drawings or as required for proper operation of equipment. J. Finishing: 1. Exterior and interior steel surfaces of switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with rust - inhibiting phosphatized coating by switchboard manufacturer. Color and finish of switchboard shall be light gray. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Factory-test switchboards in accordance with NEMA PB2 and UL 891 2. Perform factory tests on equipment prior to shipment. Tests shall consist of the manufacturer's standard tests, and shall include: a. Physical inspection and checking of all components. b. Operation and device function tests under simulated service conditions to verify accuracy of wiring and functioning of all equipment. c. Primary, control, and secondary wiring hi -pot tests. 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -7 Switchboards PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Install equipment on concrete pad, as shown. Coordinate pad dimensions to fit equipment furnished. C. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations, manufacturer's recommendations, and the Contract Documents. Do not energize equipment without permission of CITY. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. After installation, inspect and perform field testing of each switchboard. Testing and inspections shall by Supplier's factory- trained representative, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Inform CITY when Supplier's representative indicates that equipment is correctly installed. 2. Perform the following tests and checks before energizing equipment: a. Verify proper installation. b. Inspect all mechanical and electrical devices for proper operation. c. Check tightness of bolted connections. d. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section, phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. e. Measure insulation resistance of each circuit breaker, pole -to -pole and from pole -to- ground. f. Check for proper anchorage, required area clearances, physical damage, and proper alignment. g. Clean and lubricate as required. h. Perform other tests and adjustments recommended by equipment manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Services: Provide services of qualified, factory- trained serviceman to perform the following: 1. Instruct CONTRACTOR in installing equipment. 2. Inspect and adjust equipment after installation and ensure proper operation. 11- 0025 -UT 16440 -8 Switchboards 3. Instruct operations and maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. 4. Manufacturer's technician shall make visits to the Site as follows: a. First visit shall be for instructing CONTRACTOR in proper equipment installation, and assisting in installing equipment. Minimum number of hours on -Site: 1 hours. b. Second visit shall be for checking completed installation, start-up of system; and performing field quality control testing. Minimum number of hours on -Site: 1 hours. c. Third visit shall be to instruct operations and maintenance personnel. 1) Furnish services of manufacturer's qualified, factory- trained specialists to instruct CITY's operations and maintenance personnel in recommended operation and maintenance of equipment. 2) Training requirements, duration of instruction and qualifications shall be in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. 3) Number of hours on -Site shall be in accordance with Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. d. Technician shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until installation is acceptable. 5. All costs, including expenses for travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, and cost of travel time, for visits to the Site shall be included in the Contract Price. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Calibrate, set and program protective devices. Coordinate the protective devices furnished under this Section. 11- 0025 -UT 1 + + END OF SECTION + + 16440 -9 Switchboards 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16440 -10 Switchboards SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install: a. Panelboards (EAST PLANT/LAB). b. Standard and electrically operable circuit breakers (LAB). c. Control electronics for switching circuit breakers and monitor emergency power system (LAB). d. Installation and programming of advance metering with load shed routine (LAB). e. Interface for demand response signals (LAB). 2. The LAB advance metering with load shed system shall include but not limited to: a. Wiring of main and branch circuit conductors. b. Installation of external control devices and wiring to the panelboard controller. c. Installation of communication conductors and associated hardware. B. Related Sections: 1 Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 3. Section 16271, Dry -Type Transformers 4. Section 16282, Surge Protective Devices. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. NEMA PB 1, Panelboards. 2. UL 67, Panelboards. 3. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." 4. NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches." 5. NEMA KS 1, "Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)." 6. NEMA PB 1, "Panelboards" 7. NEMA PB 1.1, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less." 8. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC). 11-0025-UT 16442 -1 Panelboards 9. UL 50, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non- Environmental Considerations." 10. UL 67, "Standards for Panelboards." 11. UL 98, "Standard for Enclosed and Dead Front Switches." 12. UL 489, "Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures." 13. ISO 9001, "Quality Management System." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Listing of panelboards to be furnished with identification of their proposed location, and all electrical characteristics, including number and rating of branch circuit breakers and enclosure type. b. Provide one -line diagram of system configuration proposed if it differs from design one line diagram included with these specifications. c. Wiring diagrams detailing power, signal and control between systems that clearly differentiate between manufactuer - installed wiring and field install wiring. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's technical information for panelboards proposed for use, including product literature and specifications. Indicate options and features to be provided. 3. Design is based around a particular panelboard, control electronics, and power metering with Load shedding capabilities, if another system from a different manufacturer is submitted for approval, the following additional submittals must be provided: a. Short circuit study demonstrating NEC 110 -10 compliance for electrically operated switching devices. b. Elevation drawing showing placement of equipment in equipment rooms. c. Interconnect diagram of new and existing equipment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements; Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 408, Switchboards and Panelboards. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Packing: a. Inspect prior to packing to assure that assemblies and components are complete and undamaged. b. Protect mating connections. 11- 0025 -UT 16442 -2 Panelboards c. Cover all openings into enclosures with -vapor inhibiting, water - repellent material. 2. Deliver materials and equipment to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage materials to be embedded in concrete in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. Upon deliver, check materials and equipment for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit. 3. Comply with Section 01651, Product Delivery Requirements. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store panelboards in a clean, dry location with controls for uniform temperature and humidity. Protect equipment with coverings and maintain environmental controls. 2. Comply with Section 01661, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Panelboards: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Schneider Electric /Square D Company. b. Eaton/Cutler- Hammer. c. General Electric Company . d. Or approved equal. 2. Rating: Voltage rating, current rating, number of phases, number of wires and number of poles as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt -in thermal magnetic type with number of poles and trip ratings as shown or indicated. Where indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be ground fault circuit interrupting type equipped with solid state sensing and five - milliamp sensitivity. 4. Circuit breakers for 480 -volt panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating of 14,000 ampere RMS symmetrical, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breakers for other panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 ampere RMS symmetrical, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5. Bus Bars: Bus bars shall be 98 percent conductivity copper. Four -wire panel - boards shall have solid neutral bar. Each panel shall have ground bus bar. 6. Main: Panelboards shall have main circuit breaker, unless the Drawings specifically indicate main Lugs only. 7. Connect branch circuit breakers for sequence phasing. 8. Enclosures: Panel enclosures shall be as required for the area classifications indicated in Section 16050, General Provisions unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 9. Construction: Code -grade steel, ample gutter space, flush door, flush snap latch and lock. Panelboards shall comply with NEMA PB 1 and UL 67. 11- 0025 -UT 16442 -3 Panelboards 10. Trim: Surface or flush as required. 11. Directory: Typed or computer - printed card, with transparent protective cover in frame on back of door giving circuit numbers and area or equipment served. 12. Identification: Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. Identification shall indicate panel number and voltage. 13. Directory of Existing Panelboards: When adding or removing breakers or loads from existing panelboards, provide a new typed or computer - generated directory card, indicating the circuit numbers and equipment served. 14. Provide surge protective device in accordance with Section 16282, Surge Protection Devices for each panelboard shown or indicated on the Drawings. Surge protective device shall be included and factory- mounted within panelboard by panelboard manufacturer. Surge protective device monitoring and display shall be visible from front of panelboard. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting: Install panelboards at locations shown or indicated in accordance with manufacturer's installation bulletins. Set cabinets so that top branch circuit breaker is not over six feet above the floor. Provide complete installation in accordance with contract documents. B. Directory: Complete typewritten or computer - printed directory indicating items controlled by each circuit breaker and the size of feeder serving the panel. C. Arrange circuits to balance the loads on the panelboards. D. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification E. Install in accordance with Laws and Regulations, manufacturer's recommendations, and the Contract Documents. Verify proper installation prior to energizing panelboards. F. Manufacturer shall provide any custom hardware or communication devices necessary to make the system perform as specified above. 11- 0025 -UT 16442 -4 Panelboards G. Manufacturer shall provide PC user interface custom screens. Rough layouts of the screens shall be provided to the manufacturer no less than 30 days before scheduled system start-up. H. Provide as -built drawings indicating sensor placements on drawings. I. Provide one -line drawings indicating location and addresses ofnetworked hardware, including but not limited to, panels, distributed relays and dimmers, keypads, and sensors. 3.3 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for furnishing fully functional system, including, but not limited to, necessary programming, calibration, and operational interfaces to other devices. B. The CONTRACTOR shall meet with the CITY to identify desired operation of the control system. At minimum, the lighting control system shall meet the functional requirements of the applicable energy building code for the location of the property. C. The CONTRACTOR shall fully document the control operation of the system, including load shedding of specific electrical equipment based on standby generator's loads over time, including, but not limited to, information that is to be shared with other building systems. Full documentation shall be made available to the CITY and the manufacturer no less than 14 days before planned start up. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16442 -5 Panelboards 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16442 -6 Panelboards SECTION 16501 LIGHTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install lighting fixtures and associated controls. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate location of fixtures with piping, ductwork, openings, and other systems and equipment and locate clear of interferences. 2. Coordinate fixtures to be mounted in hung ceilings with the ceiling suspension system proposed. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 16050, General Provisions 2. Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. UL 844, Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 2. UL 935, Safety of FluorescentLamp Ballasts. 3. UL 1029, Safety of High - Intensity- Discharge Lamp Ballasts. 4. UL 1598, Safety of Luminaires. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NEC Article 410, Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of light fixtures to be furnished, indicating fixture type and location for each. b. Customized wiring diagrams. 2. Product Data: 11- 0025 -UT 16501 -1 Lighting a. Manufacturer's technical information, specifications, standard wiring diagrams, and catalog cuts for lighting fixtures proposed. b. Fixture construction details. c. ETL photometric and isocandle curves for each fixture proposed. d. Verification that recessed fixtures to be mounted in hung ceilings are compatible with ceiling suspension system proposed. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Instructions and recommendations for handling, storing, and protecting the equipment. b. Installation instructions for for the equipment, including setting drawings, templates, and directions and tolerances for installing anchorage devices. C. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: Furnish spare parts for each type of unit required as indicated in Part 2 of this Section. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Upon delivery, inspect equipment for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit. B. Storage: 1. Store lighting fixtures, controls, related materials and equipment in clean, dry location with controls for uniform temperature and humidity. Protect materials and equipment with coverings and maintain environmental controls. 2. Store materials and equipment for easy access for inspection and identification. Keep materials and equipment off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Type: Lighting fixtures required shall be in accordance with the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawing. Fixtures shall be complete with supports, ballasts, lamps, and incidentals, as required. B. Fixtures in hazardous locations shall be listed in accordance with UL 1598 and UL 844. C. Lamps: 11- 0025 -UT 16501 -2 Lighting 1. Fluorescent: Cool white, energy - efficient type, unless indicated otherwise in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2. High Pressure Sodium: Clear. 3. Mercury Vapor: Color - corrected. 4. Metal Halide: Phosphor- coated. 5. Incandescent: Inside - frosted. 6. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: Ten percent spare lamps of each type and wattage. D. Ballasts: 1. Fluorescent: UL 935 listed, high power factor, energy - efficient type, equipped with thermal protectors (Type "P" ballast), compatible with lamps installed. Indoor two -lamp fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type with total harmonic distortion of less than 20 percent. Ballast factor shall be 0.85 minimum with total of less than 61 watts input. Provide cold weather type ballast where indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2. High Intensity Discharge: UL 1029 listed, high power factor, constant wattage, stabilized autotransformer with line starting current the same or less than operating current. 3. Ballasts sound level shall be 30 decibels or less, sound rating "A ". 4. Ballasts shall be Edison Testing Laboratories (ETL) listed and Certified Ballast Manufacturer Association, CMB- certified. 5. For fixtures utilizing double -ended lamps, provide fixture disconnecting means within the fixture. 6. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: Ten percent spare ballasts of each type and quantity, but not less than one. E. Fixtures located in area identified as hazardous in Section 16050, General Provisions shall each be approved as a complete assembly, shall be clearly marked to indicate maximum wattage of lamps for which they are approved, and be protected against physical damage by suitable guards. F. Hardware: Provide necessary hangers, supports, conduit adaptors, reducers, hooks, brackets, and other hardware required for safe fixture mounting. Hardware shall have protective, non - corrosive finish. G. Outdoor Fixtures: Provide each fixture to be installed outdoors with cut -off lens to reduce the fixture's light pollution emissions. H. Time Switch: 1. Type: Astronomic dial time switch with day- omitting device. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide of one of the following: a. Z Series by Tork Time Controls, Inc. b. Or equal. 3. Timing Motor: Heavy -duty, synchronous, self - starting, high torque, 120 -volt or 277 -volt, 60 Hertz, as shown on the Drawings. 11- 0025 -UT 1 16501 -3 Lighting 4. Capacity: 40 amps per pole at 277 volts. 5. Dial: 24 -hour rotation, with gear to provide one revolution per year that automatically raises the "ON" and "OFF" settings each day according to seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. 6. Reserve Power: Spring driven reserve sufficient to operate time switch contacts for not less than 30 hours after power failure. On restoration of power, time switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve. I. Lighting Contactor and Controls: 1. Provide a lighting contactor and control system for control of each area where shown on the Drawings. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Type SMO3 by Square D Company. b. Or equal. 3. System shall include: a. Enclosure sized as required, complete with input control fuse and screw type terminal blocks rated 300 -volt, 20 -amp quantity for all circuits, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. b. Single coil, electrically- operated, mechanically -held contactor. Contactor shall be rated 30 -amp, 600 -volt, with 120 -volt operating coil, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings. Provide multiple contactors when necessary. c. Where lighting contactors are controlled by photocell, provide a 120 -volt, two -pole control relay, enclosure mounted to convert the two -wire photocell control to three -wire control required by contactor. Control shall include a cover mounted on- off -auto selector switch for "manual" or "auto" selection of operation. In "auto" position, contactor shall respond to photocell. d. Enclosure: As required for area classification per Section 16050, General Provisioins e. Identify panel in compliance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. J. Photocell: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 2100 Series by Tork Time Controls, Inc. b. Or equal. 2. Cadmium sulfide hermetically- sealed cell, fully temperature compensated, with time delay of not less than 15 seconds to prevent false switching. 3. Built -in fail safe light level selector, adjustable within limits of two to 50 foot - candles and factory set at 25 foot - candles. K. Fixture - Lowering Hanger System: 1. General: 11- 0025 -UT 16501 -4 Lighting a. Provide corrosion- resistant system that lowers fixtures to ground level to allow maintenance on fixtures. Provide lowering hanger system for each fixture as shown on the Drawings. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Thompson Hangers, by Joslyn Hi- Voltage Corp. b. Or equal. 3. System: a. Upper or fixed housing of lowering devices shall contain: 1) Attached pulley. 2) Single point latching mechanism. 3) Guide. 4) Upper or socket electrical contacts. b. Lower or moveable housing of lowering devices shall contain: 1) Operating line termination. 2) Positioning stem and lower half of latch assembly. 3) Lower electrical contacts. 4) Fixture adapter. c. Fixtures shall be lowered on a guide line to allow operation of system in adverse weather and with structural clearance. Angles of the guide line to the structure shall be in accordance with to lowering device manufacturer's instructions. d. Operating line shall be high - strength/high- flexibility stainless steel and supplied by the lowering device manufacturer. e. Each operating line shall be encased in conduit where lower than eight feet above finished floor. f. Non- hanger termination shall be of enclosed and surface mounted design. g. Pulleys shall be supplied by hanger manufacturer as required to prevent excessive cable sag and allow lateral offsets between fixture location and cable termination. h. Provide portable manual winch. 4. Electrical: a. Contact material shall be silver- impregnated /silver - plated plate copper. Contacts shall use ball and socket design for ease of alignment and to allow for residual building vibration and movement. b. Contact pressure shall be supplied by springs remote from current conductors and shall not be part of current - carrying path. c. Termination of wiring shall be to crimp connectors. d. Provide electrical insulation of contacts by porcelain standoffs. e. Lowering device shall be make - and -break rated, UL- approved, as follows: 1) 250 vac: 30 amps 2) 600 vac: 15 amps 3) 250 vdc: 10 amps f. Lowering device shall have eight contacts rated at 120 vac, 15 amps. 5. Mechanical: a. System loading capacity: 200 pounds. 11- 0025 -UT 16501 -5 Lighting b. Manual or power winch operation. c. Housing manufactured with copper -free or low copper content cast aluminum. d. Operation shall be slow pull /quick release method. e. Maintenance -free design. f. Latching means shall be single point centered design to facilitate even wear over life of hangar. g. Provide a tag line to facilitate lateral movement over inaccessible spaces. Tag line shall consist of the following parts by hanger manufacturer: 1) Termination kit for wall. 2) Manual winch. 3) Operating cable. 4) Pulley for upper mounting. L. Motion /Occupancy Sensor: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Leviton, Motion Sensor Field -of -View PR 150 -1LW b. Or equal. 2. Adjustable time delay interval of 15 seconds to 15 minutes. 3. Equipped with passive infrared (PIR) sensing technology. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify CITY in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Fixture mounting heights and locations indicated on the Drawings are approximate and are subject to revision in the field where necessary to clear conflicts and obstructions. 2. Mounting Heights: Mounting heights or elevations are to bottom of fixture or to centerline of device. 3. Install fixtures in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the Contract Documents, and manufacturer instructions and recommendations. 4. Mount fixtures so that sufficient access is available for ready and safe maintenance. 5. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which equipment is mounted. B. Suspended Fixtures: 11- 0025 -UT 16501 -6 Lighting 1. Pendant -mount using 1/2 -inch diameter conduit stems. 2. Ground to outlet box. 3. Attach mounting to building structure with expansion anchors. 4. Fixtures shall not be dependent on the outlet box cover screws for support. C. Surface Mounted Fixtures: 1. Attach to appropriate outlet box. 2. Attach to surface using fasteners and sealing washers when mounting fixture in damp or wet locations. D. Boxes and Fixtures: 1. For units mounted against masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/4 -inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall. 2. Bolt units rigidly to building with expansion anchors, toggle bolts, hangers, or Unistrut. 3. Do not install boxes with open conduit holes. 4. Cable each circuit and identify with tag. E. Re -lamp all fluorescent fixtures provided under this Contract with new lamps following Substantial Completion. F. Mount photocells as shown and adjust foot - candle setting for proper dusk and dawn photo- control. Provide wiring in conduit from photocell to controls. G. Fixture Lowering System: 1. Hangers shall be plumb. 2. Provide adequate clearance between operating line and structural members, pipes, ducts, and other equipment and devices to avoid interference. 3. Conduit runs enclosing operating lines shall be straight with no offset bends. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16501 -7 Lighting 11- 0025 -UT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16501 -8 Lighting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16611 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The Uninterruptible Power Supply section covers the furnishing of a complete three phase, continuous duty, on -line, double conversion, solid state uninterruptible power supply (UPS) that works in conjunction with existing building system as indicated on the drawings. Provide a scalable UPS system, battery cabinet and wall mounted bypass that is both expandable in capacity and battery time. B. The system shall convert incoming three phase 60 Hz, power into dc power(rectifier), maintain and charge backup batteries(sealed lead acid batteries) and reconvert outgoing power into a sinusoidal single phase(inverter), 60 Hz, a/c power source. The UPS system shall consist of a rectifier, battery charger, batteries, inverter, automatic bypass switch, and external maintenance bypass switch or transfer switch as required. The UPS system shall include all UPS power distribution terminals, circuit breakers, junction boxes, and connectors required for a complete and working system. C. The UPS System shall be installed and wired as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. D. Additional accessories and appurtenances shall be provided as specified herein to provide a complete and properly operating system. E. Control System Loads: The UPS shall supply Control System and other loads as indicated on the drawings or herein. F. UPS system shall provide the following modes of operation: 1. Normal Mode — The rectifier shall derive power as needed from the commercial AC utility or generator source and supply filtered and regulated DC power to the online inverter. The inverter shall convert the DC power to highly regulated and filtered AC power for the critical loads. 2. On Battery Mode - The critical load must continue to be supplied by the inverter without switching. The inverter must obtain its power from the battery. There must be no interruption in power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the AC input source. 3. Recharging Mode - the rectifier/battery charger must recharge the battery. The inverter shall, without interruption of power, regulate the power to the critical load. 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -1 Uninterruptible Power Supply 4. Bypass Mode - The static bypass switch must be used for transferring the critical load to the AC utility supply without interruption. Automatic re- transfer to normal operation must also be accomplished without interruption of power to the critical load. The static bypass switch must be capable of manual operation. 5. Maintenance Mode - The maintenance bypass is used for supplying the load directly from the AC utility supply, while the UPS is isolated for maintenance or repair. 1.2 GENERAL A. Equipment furnished under the Uninterruptible Power Supply section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by CITY. B. General Equipment Stipulations: The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. C. Drawings: Supplementing this section, the drawings indicate locations and arrangement of enclosures and provide one -line diagrams regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment. D. Nameplates: Each UPS shall be identified with a suitable engraved nameplate mounted on the top front. A nameplate shall also be provided for each of the external transfer switches. The nameplates shall be made of laminated black and white plastic. The lettering shall be bold, not less than 1/4 inch [6 mm] square, engraved by cutting through the white outside layer so that the letters appear black. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The UPS and all components shall designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL as follows. When conflicts arises between these documents and statements made in applicable standards, the following specifications shall govern. 1. IEC 62040 -1 -1 or EN 62040 -1 -1 2. EN 60950 3. UL 1778 4. EN 50091 -2 5. EN 61000- 4- 2 -3 -4 -5 6. IEC 61000 -4 -5 7. IEC 61000 -4 -4 8. IEC 61000 -4 -2 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -2 Uninterruptible Power Supply 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9. IEC 61000 -4 -3 10. FCC Class A15J 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. All material and equipment documentation shall be submitted for review as specified in the Submittals section. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows: 1. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which equipment applies. 2. Sheets or drawings showing items not applicable to this system, or not requiring review, shall contain clear indication as to which section or sections require review. 3. Functional line diagrams showing all major system components and external connection diagrams for all electrical equipment shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to show the intended connections. 4. A report certifying that the UPS will provide the required backup time at the specified UPS loading and UPS ambient temperature. The report shall include anticipated continuous electrical load calculations, backup time calculations and shall indicate the battery end - voltage used in the analysis. 5. Documentation showing the physical dimensions, weight, and wiring connection points of the UPS /battery system being provided. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING A. Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as specified in the Section 01651, Product Delivery Requirements, and 01661, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive CITY of other rights or remedies CITY may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: 1. Furnish manufacturer's written two -year warranty from date of substantial completion against failure or faulty workmanship of each UPS. Services during the warranty period shall include repair or replacement, and all costs related to visits to site, as necessary to remedy defects. 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -3 Uninterruptible Power Supply PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment, enclosures, and accessories shall be designed, assembled and connected in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the drawings. Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12. B. Main UPS System Design Requirements: The UPS system(s) have the following estimated capacity and rated for the following voltages. The System Supplier is to confirm the required capacity and adjust accordingly. The UPS shall have an excess capacity of 50% of the estimated load. 11- 0025 -UT Tag number HW -_UPS_ Estimated Connected Load Plus 50% 30_ KVA Input voltage at 60 Hz, +10 to -15 percent 120/208 Three phase, 4wire Output voltage at 60 Hz three phase 120/208 split phase Minimum Back up time required (minutes) at connected load. _60 Minimum UPS Size _30 kVA(Redundant) N +X Redundancy N +1 Redundancy Battery Modules 6 string Internal Battery Module + 1 EBC(72) Chassis Size 12 slot Floor Mounted+ additional 12 slot floor mounted EBC 16611 -4 Uninterruptible Power Supply 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The UPS system(s) shall h Capacity, peak (minimum) 125% of continuous power for 1 minute, 150 % of continuous power rating for 5 seconds, >150% continuous power for 300ms Input Power Factor 0.99 Input Frequency 60 Hz ( +/- 3 Hz) Topology True online, double conversion, scalable N +X power and logic redundancy Surge Suppression IEEE /ANSI C62.41 Output On- Utility Voltage Regulation +/- 2% of nominal Output On -Battery Voltage Regulation +/- 2% of nominal Output Frequency Regulation +/- 3 Hz online, +/- 0.005 Hz on free running single units, +/- 0.15 Hz Parallel Units Output Efficiency >91% normal operation Harmonic distortion (max) 2 percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) maximum phase to neutral for linear load (5% phase to phase) 5% THD maximum phase to neutral for non - linear loads (7% phase to phase) Operating temperature- humidity 0 to 40 °C; 5 to 90 percent relative humidity, non- condensing. Battery Type Sealed lead -acid maintenance free Battery Recharge time (max) <1.75 hours from complete discharge to 95% capacity Relay Dry Contact Outputs Low battery, on inverter, fault, and on bypass Optional Ethernet Communication Card Yes Optional Internal Bypass Switch Yes Optional External Bypass Switch As required per Section 2.5 Optional Automatic Transfer Switch Not Used Optional RS -232 Modbus Slave serial communications port No Used Installation Freestanding 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -5 Uninterruptible Power Supply C. Acceptable Manufacturers: All systems supplied under this contract shall be of the same manufacturer. The UPS shall be as manufactured by Powerware Model 9355 with N +1 Redundancy for any UPS 30 KVA, or approved equal. D. Terminal Blocks: Wiring for external circuits, including all alarm contacts, shall be brought to grouped terminal blocks located for convenient connection. Provisions shall include suitable marked terminal blocks for connection of No. 14 AWG control wiring, and for input /output power conductors as sized on the drawings. Terminal designations shall agree with manufacturer's wiring diagram. 2.2 BATTERY CHARGER/RECTIFIER AND BATTERIES A. The battery charger and the rectifier shall have the following characteristics: 1. The rectifier shall convert the incoming ac power to dc power to energize the static inverter. 2. The battery charger shall supply a float current to the batteries to maintain them at a fully charged state while incoming power is being provided. The charging voltage shall be temperature- compensated over the entire operating temperature range to avoid overcharging or undercharging the batteries. The battery charger shall automatically apply an elevated voltage (equalization charge) to the batteries if and as required by the battery manufacturer. Upon full charge, UPS charger will enter rest mode and suspend floating charge to preserve battery life. 3. The battery shall provide backup power for the UPS when incoming commercial power is not available. The battery cells shall be gell cell or sealed lead -acid type. The batteries shall be integral to the UPS unless additional external batteries are required to meet the time requirement. . Batteries shall have capacity to supply the dc power to the UPS while operating at full load for a period of not less than as required in Table 2 -1.01 at 25 deg C. The battery shall have an expected life of 5 years and shall carry a one -year warranty. 4. The UPS system shall provide short circuits, under - voltage, and over - voltage protection on the batteries along with internal isolation circuit breakers. 5. The UPS system shall monitor and periodically test battery health and provide visual, and audible if battery capacity or runtime fails below limits. 2.3 STATIC INVERTER A. The solid -state inverter shall employ solid state switches and other devices for converting direct current power to essentially sinusoidal alternating current power. The static inverter shall conform to the following characteristics and requirements. 1. Automatic Synchronization: During normal operation, the inverter shall provide power to critical loads. The utility electric system will act as an alternate supply. Inverter equipment shall include stable solid -state 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -6 Uninterruptible Power Supply devices designed to automatically maintain inverter output in phase with the utility electric system. 2. Overload, Short Circuit, and Load Loss: The inverter shall have input and output fuses and other equipment necessary to protect from overload, short circuit, and 100 percent loss of load. Current limiting features shall also be provided. 3. Loss of Supply Voltages: The inverter shall include protective devices to prevent damage resulting from excursion, loss, or restoration of its synchronization voltage and its dc input voltage and any inrush current occurrences associated with such conditions. 2.4 MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH A. Provide an external Make Before Break (MBB) fault rated external maintenance bypass switch. 2.5 INPUT /OUTPUT CONNECTIONS A. A hardwired terminal strip shall be provided for UPS input and UPS output wiring connections. B. Modbus Communications — UPS shall be provided with Ethernet communication port. C. Provide internal relays for back up status indication 1. Remote Status and Alarms: The UPS shall have the following provisions for remote status and alarms. a. UPS Common Fault — Dry contact b. UPS `On Battery' — Dry Contact c. UPS Low Battery — Dry contact d. UPS Bypassed — Dry Contact 2.6 CONTROL, INDICATION AND ALARM (Refer also to section 2.6 above.) A. Controls, indicators and alarms shall be provided as a part of the UPS Control buttons and LED indicators shall be provided on the UPS panel and shall be permanently labeled. B. Controls: A UPS Self Test, and system "ON" and "OFF" buttons for battery and utility power shall be provided. C. Indication: An LED display for percent UPS Load capacity and percent remaining battery capacity shall be provided. 1. LED indicators for inverter ready, frequency, battery voltage, overload, over temperature, and impending shutdown conditions shall be provided. 11- 0025 -UT 16611 -7 Uninterruptible Power Supply 2. LED indicators for normal mode, battery mode, and bypass mode shall be provided. 2.7 Local Single Phase Standalone UPS A. Provide 120V, single phase standalone true online, double conversion UPS 700 - 3000VA, >0.9 power factor and >95% efficiency with battery management, and hot swappable capability 1. Powerware 9130 or approved equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installation requirements are specified per manufacturer requirements and shall be coordinated with the Electrical section. 3.2 MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES A. A factory trained manufacturer's representative shall be provided for installation inspection, startup, commissioning and training services, as specified, to ensure that installation of the UPS complies with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. B. The representative shall make the following minimum visits: 1. Installation assistance and inspection of completed installation; one two hour visit minimum. 2. Startup services in presence of CITY; one hour visit minimum. 3. Operation and Maintenance training services with CITY and /or DESIGNATED OPERATING AGENT; 1 hour visits minimum per shift. C. Manufacturer's representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the CITY and verify that the equipment conforms to the specification requirements. Representative shall visit the site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment or system is entirely satisfactory. D. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be at no cost to the CITY. 11- 0025 -UT + + END OF SECTION + + 16611 -8 Uninterruptible Power Supply SECTION IVb SECONDARY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IVb SECONDARY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders have the meanings state in the Instructions to Bidders. 1. Delete Paragraph 9 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 9. OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, underground facilities, utilities or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 2. Delete Paragraph 12.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all ductbank and pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. SectionI V b.docx 1 7/17/2014 The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. SectionlVb.docx 2 7/17/2014 APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS • Instructions • Request to Requisition Form GEOTECHNICAL REPORT • AREHNA Engineering, Inc., "Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis, East WRF Generator Improvement, Clearwater, Florida ", May 8, 2013. Prepared for: ARCADIS U.S., Inc. BRILEY, WILD & ASSOCIATES RECORD DRAWINGS (1988/90) • Sheet 3 of 202: Key to Abbreviations • Sheet 4 of 202: Existing Site Plan • Sheet 5 of 202: Existing Site Plan (Demolition & Modifications) • Sheet 5A of 202: Temporary Erosion Control Structures • Sheet 5B of 202: Site Permit Drawing • Sheet 6 of 202: Proposed Site Layout • Sheet 7 of 202: Proposed Process Yard Piping Appendix 07.07.14.docx i 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS Appendix 07.07.14.docx 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Instructions 1. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to Contractor for the full amount of contract. 2. Contractor shall submit a list (ODP Summary) of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for approval prior to initial pay application. Certain contracts will be awarded based upon the bid proposal with pre- determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost, (b) sales tax savings, and (c) Contractor's costs associated with the item. 3. Contractor shall submit Request to Requisition forms (see attached) for each vendor to the City for review and approval, in electronic, MS Word format. The City will review and code, then return to Contractor for electronic signature. The City prefers that all Request to Requisitions be included in a single submittal. 4. A Change Order (CO) shall be issued to Contractor reducing their PO by the amount of the ODP purchase(s) and the sales tax savings (per Request to Requisitions). COs will be drafted by the City and will be forwarded to the Contractor for execution. Contractor shall submit two (2) originals, signed, sealed and witnessed, to the City for execution. One original shall be returned to the Contractor. 5. Concurrently, the City Purchasing Department shall issue ODP POs directly to each vendor (via email), per the Request to Requisition, along with an executed Certificate of Entitlement and the City's Certificate of Tax Exemption. The Contractor and City Project Manager will be copied. 6. Contractor shall coordinate delivery with Vendor. Material shall be delivered to the project site. Contractor shall instruct Vendor to send invoice to the Contractor, naming the City as the purchaser. 7. Contractor shall review, approve and submit executed invoices to the Project Manager with adequate documentation (delivery ticket, packing slips). Invoices shall include the ODP PO number, invoice number, and be addressed to the City of Clearwater, c/o Contractor. Two (2) executed invoices (1 — signed and 1 — copy) and one (1) signed packing slip shall be mailed to the City for processing. 8. City shall approve invoices and issue payment to the Vendor for materials received. 9. ODP POs must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor PO. If material costs needed for project exceeds the Vendor PO amount, the ODP PO will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP PO will be paid for by the Contractor. Appendix 07.07.14.docx 7/7/2014 REQUEST TO REQUISITION for Owner Direct Purchase Materials STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER City Project Name: City Contract #: General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City /State /Zip: Receiving Location (Ship to): (Project location) Street Address: City /State /Zip: Requested by: (General Contractor) Contact Name: Contact Name: Phone No: Email: Attention: Date Needed by: Phone No: Phone No: Email: Expense Code: (City will complete) Quantit Y Units (LS, SF. etc. ) Detailed Description shipping & handling chargesF if app 1c We) Price Per Each refer to Line Item # and details from Bidder's Pro • osal, Section special delivery instructions Hold X% for retainage LS Send Ori • inal Invoices to: City of Clearwater c/o Contractor or Subcontractor Name whoever installs the materials Mailing Address, Attention To: Email address, Phone Number PO Total LS Sales Tax Savings to Owner first $5,000 x 7.0 %, thereafter sales tax rate is 6.0% Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable technical spec., and all other applicable provisions (shop drawings, O &Ms, warranties, etc.,) of contract referenced above. Spare parts provided as per specifications; frei • ht included. Start u • services and trainin • are included in the above • rice. Contractor's signature Requesting Official - PRINT NAME Date: Title and Name of Contracting Firm City Rep Signature Approving Official - PRINT NAME Date: City of Clearwater Representative Title Engineering will provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Appendix 07.07.14.docx 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Appendix 07.07.14.docx 7/7/2014 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION AND ENGINEERING ANALYSIS EAST WRF GENERATOR IMPROVEMENT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA AREHNA PROJECT NO. B -13 -008 May 8, 2013 Prepared For: ARCADIS U.S., Inc. 14025 Riveredge Drive, Suite 600 Tampa, FL 33637 Prepared By: AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, Florida 33609 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 W. Lemon Street, Tampa, Florida 33609 Ph 813.944.3464 I Fax 813.944.4959 May 8, 2013 Ifetayo Venner, P.E. Senior Environmental Engineer ARCADIS U.S., Inc. 14025 Riveredge Drive, Suite 600 Tampa, FL 33637 (813) 353 -5751 Office ifetayo.veneer @arcadis- us.com Subject: Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis East WRF Generator Improvement Clearwater, Florida AREHNA Project B -13 -008 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. (AREHNA) is pleased to submit this report of our geotechnical exploration and engineering analysis for the proposed project. Services were conducted in general accordance with AREHNA Proposal Prop -12 -069 dated November 14, 2012. The purpose of our geotechnical study was to obtain information on the general subsurface conditions for the proposed new generator location. This report presents our understanding of the project, outlines our exploratory procedures, documents the field test data obtained and includes our recommendations for foundation design. AREHNA appreciates the opportunity to have assisted ARCADIS U.S., Inc. on this project. Should you have any questions with regards to this report, or if we can be of any further assistance, please contact this office. Best Regards, AREHNA ENGINEERING, INC. FLORIDA BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION NO. 28410 Kristina LaCava, E.I. Geotechnical Engineer Distribution: 3 — Addressee 1— File Curtis J. Roos, P.E. Senior Geotechnical Engineer Florida Registration 27570 www.arehna.com Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1.0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK 2 2.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics 2 2.2 Scope of Work 2 3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION 3 3.1 Field Exploration 3 3.2 Laboratory Testing 3 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4 4.1 General Area Geology 4 4.2 USGS Topographic Data 4 4.3 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data 4 4.4 Subsurface Conditions 5 4.5 Ground Water Conditions 5 4.6 Estimated Seasonal High Ground Water Level 5 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 6 5.1 General 6 5.2 Pile Foundations 6 5.3 Installation Method 6 5.4 Settlement 6 5.5 Foundation Recommendations for the Bulk Diesel Tank 6 5.6 Settlement for the Bulk Diesel Tank 7 6.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION 8 6.1 General 8 6.2 Ground Water Control 8 6.3 On -Site Soil Suitability 8 7.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS 9 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A Project Site Location Map — Figure 1 Field Exploration Plan - Figure 2 USGS Topographic Survey — Figure 3 USDA Soil Survey Map - Figure 4 APPENDIX B Soil Test Boring Record Key to Soil Classifications Symbols APPENDIX C Laboratory Test Results — Table 1 Field and Laboratory Procedures ii Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 1.0 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The purpose of this geotechnical exploration was to obtain information regarding the general subsurface conditions at the site. The project site is located on Gulf to Bay Boulevard at the west end of the Courtney Campbell Causeway. As a result of the WRF being susceptible to heavy flooding, the City is considering replacing the two existing fixed standby generators with one or two elevated generators. The boring performed at the site encountered fine sand (SP) and clayey fine sand (SC) from the ground surface to a depth of 8 feet. The sandy soils were underlain by high plasticity clay (CH) to the termination depth of 20 feet. The ground water level was not discernible in the boring performed at the project site, but should be about 4 to 5 feet below grade. You have asked us to evaluate auger cast piles or drilled shafts to serve as the foundation for the elevated generator pad. Based on the boring results, a 24 -inch auger cast pile or a 24 -inch drilled shaft extending to a depth of 18 feet below the existing ground surface should achieve the required capacity of 27 kips per pile. The foundation elements would be installed to the ground surface. Reinforcement extending out of the foundations would serve as lap- splices for the required columns. After the recommended site preparation, the bulk diesel tank can be supported on a mat foundation designed for a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 1,000 psf. The mat should be embedded at least 16- inches below existing grade. 1 (Page Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis East WRF Generator Improvement May 8, 2013 AREHNA Project B -13 -008 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics The project site is currently under consideration for the placement of two ground supported bulk diesel tanks with a 500 psf load and an elevated generator with four columns with compression loads of 27 kips per column. The project site is located at the Clearwater WRF located on Gulf to Bay Boulevard at the west end of the Courtney Campbell Causeway. The proposed location of the tanks currently consists of an asphalt parking area. 2.2 Scope of Work The purpose of our geotechnical study was to obtain information on the general subsurface conditions of the soils surrounding and underlying the proposed above ground storage tank area. The subsurface materials encountered were then evaluated with respect to the available project characteristics. The following services were performed to achieve the above- outlined objectives: • Requested utility location services from Sunshine State One -Call. • Performed one Standard Penetration Test (SPT) boring, utilizing a track - mounted rig, in the proposed area of the track mounted generator to a depth of 20 feet. Samples were collected and Standard Penetration Test resistances were recorded at approximate intervals of two feet for the top ten feet and at approximate intervals of five feet thereafter. • Visually classified and stratified soil samples in the laboratory using the Unified Soil Classification System. • Reported the results of the field exploration and engineering analysis. The results of the subsurface exploration are presented in this written report, signed and sealed by a professional engineer specializing in geotechnical engineering. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION 3.1 Field Exploration The SPT boring was performed with the use of a Power Drill Rig using Bentonite "Mud" drilling procedures. Samples were collected and Standard Penetration Test resistances were measured at approximate intervals of two feet for the top ten feet and at approximate intervals of five feet thereafter. The soil sampling was performed in general accordance with ASTM Test Designation D -1586, entitled "Penetration Test and Split- Barrel Sampling of Soils." Representative portions of these soil samples were sealed in glass jars, labeled and transferred for appropriate testing and classification. The soil boring records and key to classification are attached in Appendix B of this report. The location of the boring was based on e-mail communications. Our Field Procedures are presented in Appendix C. 3.2 Laboratory Testing The soil samples were transported to AREHNA's soil laboratory and were classified by the Geotechnical Engineer using the USCS in general accordance with the ASTM Test Designation D -2488. Laboratory tests performed included Atterberg limits, sieve analysis, and moisture content. Bonn 1�Io .- Sample Depth 1�eet) Percent Moisture Content Pert Fns �� ( -200 siev Uguid I emit in Limit - Piasti ity Index B -01 4.0— 6.0 25.8 35.3 37 19 18 B -01 8.0 — 10.0 47.7 83.9 113 48 65 Results are included in Appendix C of this report. Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4.1 General Area Geology Pinellas County lies in the Gulf Coastal Lowlands Province. This province, which generally includes the area from the shoreline to the 100 -foot contour line, was formed by deposition of marine units. Erosion by streams and by surface drainage has further modified the land surface. Terrain in Pinellas County is generally flat -lying and is closely related to Pleistocene and Pliocene sea -level stands and the sediments that were deposited during these times. Several terraces, or ancient shorelines, are readily visible in the county today. The Pamlico Terrace ranges from 0 to 25 feet above mean sea level (MSL). 4.2 USGS Topographic Data The topographic survey map published by the United States Geological Survey was reviewed for ground surface features at the proposed trailer mounted generator location (Figure 3, Appendix A). Based on this review, the natural ground surface elevations at the project site are approximately +0 to +5 feet National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD). The site is generally flat. 4.3 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data A review of the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) survey for Pinellas County, attached as Figure 4 in Appendix A, indicates that the soils in the vicinity of the project site consists of Wabasso soils and Urban land (mapping unit 31). The NRCS published profiles typically reports soils extending to 80 inches below the ground surface. Excerpts from the published Soil Survey are provided below for reference. Typical Profile of Wabasso soils and Urban Land [311: Surface layer: 0 to 5 inches — black fine sand Subsurface layer: 5 to 26 inches — gray fine sand Subsoil: 26 to 32 inches — black fine sand 32 to 36 inches — dark reddish brown fine sand 36 to 44 inches — dark grayish brown fine sandy clay loam that has olive brown mottles 44 to 50 inches — mixed dark brown, olive brown, and grayish brown fine sandy loam Substratum: 50 to 80 inches — light gray fine sand that has 10 percent, by volume, shell fragments Urban land consists of high - density residential development, commercial buildings, streets, highway, parking lots, and other types of impervious ground cover. The areas of Wabasso soil that are not covered by impervious material are too small to be delineated separately at the scale of mapping and are mostly grassy areas. The Urban land dominates this map unit, except for a small area that remains in native condition in the northeast corner of the county. 4IPage Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 Based on the boring performed, the shallow soils below grade are generally similar to the unit described above. 4.4 Subsurface Conditions The following soil conditions highlight the general subsurface stratification. The Soil Test Boring Record in Appendix B should be consulted for a detailed description of the subsurface conditions encountered at the boring location. When reviewing the boring record, it should be understood that soil conditions may vary between and away from the boring locations. SPT boring B -01 was positioned near the proposed area of the new trailer mounted generator. Figure 2 of Appendix A shows the approximate boring location with respect to the existing structures. • Boring B -01 encountered very loose fine sand (SP). The upper four feet of sandy material had asphalt debris and is likely fill. Clayey fine sand (SC) was then found to a depth of 8 feet. Standard Penetration Test values (N- values) of 2 blows per foot were recorded in the clayey sand. The sandy soils were underlain by stiff to very stiff high plasticity clay (CH) to the termination depth of 20 feet. N- values ranging from 9 and 19 blows per foot were measured. A page defining the terms and classification symbols used in the boring profiles is included in Appendix B of this report. 4.5 Ground Water Conditions The boring was advanced using mud -rotary methods, which precludes the determination of the depth of the water level once mud is introduced in the borehole. It should be noted that the boring was completed in April, which historically follows a dry period where lower ground water levels are normally recorded. Based on nearby surface water levels, the current ground water level is about 4 to 5 feet below grade. Fluctuation in ground water levels should be expected due to seasonal climatic changes, construction activity, rainfall variations, surface water runoff and other site - specific factors. Since ground water level variations are anticipated, design drawings and specifications should accommodate such possibilities and construction planning should be based on the assumption that variations will occur. 4.6 Estimated Seasonal High Ground Water Level Based on the mapping performed by the USDA, soils information obtained from the site and our experience in the area, we estimate that the seasonal high ground water level will be approximately 12 inches below grade. The area may become inundated during severe storm events. Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 5.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 5.1 General Our geotechnical evaluation is based upon the previously presented project information as well as the field test data obtained during this geotechnical exploration. If final structure location or foundation loads are significantly different from those described, or if the subsurface conditions during construction are different from those revealed by our boring, we should be notified immediately so that we might review our recommendations presented in this report. The assessment of site environmental conditions or the presence of pollutants in the soil, rock, or groundwater of the site is beyond the proposed scope of this geotechnical exploration. 5.2 Pile Foundations The proposed elevated generator pad can be constructed on a system of auger cast piles or drilled shafts. Based on the boring results, a 24 —inch diameter auger cast pile or 24 -inch diameter drilled shaft extending to a depth of approximately 18 feet should achieve the required compression capacity of 27 kips per pile. The foundation elements would be installed to the ground surface. Reinforcement extending out of the foundations would serve as lap- splices for the required columns. 5.3 Installation Method Installing auger cast piles requires equipment consisting of a mobile base carrier fitted with a hollow -stem flight auger. The auger is drilled into the ground to the desired depth and then grout is pushed through the auger as it is taken out of the ground. A continuous flow of fluid should be observed at the ground surface during grouting. Reinforcement is placed after the pile is grouted. The reinforcement should include at least one #8 bar the full length of the pile. A cage of additional reinforcement can also be placed into the pile as soon as grouting is complete. Drilled shafts are constructed using a truck- mounted or crane - mounted auger. After setting a temporary near surface casing, a hole having a diameter of 24- inches is drilled to a depth of 18 feet. Drilling fluid should be used in order to keep the hole open. A full - length reinforcing cage is then lowered into the hole and the hole is filled with concrete starting at the bottom of the shaft. 5.4 Settlement Settlement of pile /shaft supported structural elements should be small and tolerable for a typical foundation configuration. Based on the subsurface soil conditions encountered in the soil boring performed for this report and our past experience with similar soil conditions, we do not anticipate significant downdrag loads acting on the piles /shafts. 5.5 Foundation Recommendations for the Bulk Diesel Tank Following our recommended General Site Preparations, the proposed bulk diesel tank can be constructed on a mat designed for an allowable bearing pressure of 1,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The mat should be embedded so that the bottom of the foundation is a minimum of 16 inches below the adjacent compacted grades on all sides. The subgrade soils should be compacted to a density of at least 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D- 1557). This compaction requirement should be 1 1 1 1 1 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 uniformly obtained at the bearing level. A moisture content within 2 percentage points of the optimum indicated by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D -1557) is recommended prior to compaction of the existing ground. 5.6 Settlement for the Bulk Diesel Tank The majority of the settlement of the mat - supported on sandy soils should occur during initial filling. Provided that the recommended subsurface preparation operations are properly performed, we estimate that total settlement will be on the order of I/2-inch. 7IPage Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 6.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION 6.1 General All pavements, vegetation, topsoil, grass, and root systems should be removed from the construction areas. Prior to construction, the location of any existing underground irrigation, septic tanks, drainage, or other utility lines within the construction area should be established. It should be noted that, if underground pipes are not properly removed or plugged, they may serve as conduits for subsurface erosion which subsequently may result in excessive settlements. A materials testing laboratory should be retained to provide on -site observation of earthwork activities. Density tests should be performed in the top one foot of compacted existing ground at the bottom of foundation excavations. 6.2 Ground Water Control Ground water levels should be determined immediately prior to construction. Shallow ground water should be kept at least 24 inches below the lowest working area to facilitate proper material placement and compaction. It is anticipated that surface water could be handled by ditching and pumping from sumps. Surface run -off water should be drained away from the excavations and not be allowed to pond. 6.3 On -Site Soil Suitability The borings indicate that the majority of the upper 4 feet of soil encountered should be generally suitable for backfill. Classification indicates the upper site soils at this site consist of coarse grained soils classified as SP, based on the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Suitable structural fill materials should consist of fine to medium sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, and be free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Any off -site materials used as fill should be approved by AREHNA prior to acquisition. 1 i 1 1 1 1 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Engineering Analysis May 8, 2013 East WRF Generator Improvement AREHNA Project B -13 -008 7.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil boring performed at the location indicated. Regardless of the thoroughness of a geotechnical exploration, there is always a possibility that conditions may be different from those at specific boring locations and that conditions will not be as anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition, the construction process itself may alter soil conditions. AREHNA is not responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on the data presented in this report. APPENDIX A Project Site Location Map — Figure 1 Field Exploration Plan — Figure 2 USGS Topographic Survey — Figure 3 USDA Soil Survey — Figure 4 Faawp Cat Stephens Park ; t D`f '6'/leaaoo$ tf F flume troll c Qa Crew St durruuda Btid v V J if t . Leeward flks I 4h Paea+KUd FEantlea P..0 4. r en Burt to Bay Bled Gr4f Say Bari c:earwrder Travel FreAo!f i LEGEND { B -# Standard Penetration Test Boring East WRF Generator Improvements, Clearwater, FL Client: ARCADIS U.S. Inc. Project: B -13 -008 Date: April 30, 2013 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street, Tampa, FL 33609 Phone 813.944.3464 • Fax 513.944.4959 FIELD EXPLORATION LOCATION MAP Checked By: KSL Drawn By: KCA FIGURE I 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Project Site N ,M East WRF Generator Improvements, Clearwater, FL Client: ARCADIS U.S. Inc. Project: B -13 -008 Date: April 30, 2013 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street, Tampa, FL 3360-9 ph,ne, 82,944,3464 ' Fax 613,944,4959 USGS TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY Checked By: KSL Drawn By: KCA FIGURE 3 u if To Mid Project Site Soil Mapping Unit 31— Wabasso soils and Urban land 1 4kiar N East WRF Generator Improvements, Clearwater, FL Client: ARCADIS U.S. Inc. Project: B -13 -008 Date: April 30, 2013 AREFINA Engineering, inc. USDA SOIL SURVEY Checked By: KSL Drawn By: KCA FIGURE 4 APPENDIX B Soil Boring Records Key to Classification Symbols 1 1 t 1 r 1 o DEPTH (ft) SOIL DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS WATER LEVEL I GRAPHIC LOG SAMPLE TYPE SPT BLOW COUNTS N -VALUE • SPT N VALUE • 20 40 60 80 MC ® I I 20 40 60 80 • FINES CONTENT ( %) • 20 40 60 80 Gray fine SAND (SP) with asphalt debris AU 2 2 9 19 10 • , . • III A� - Very loose very dark gray clayey fine SAND (SC)" A'1 -SPT 1-1-1-1 SPT 1 -1 -1 -1 10 Stiff to very stiff bluish gray high plasticity CLAY (CH) % =t SPT 4 -4-5-6 — W SPT 1 -8-11 / _ 20 Stiff bluish -gray sandy high plasticity CLAY (CH) /r, SPT 6-4-6 Bottom of borehole at 20.0 feet. Date Drilled: 4/23/13 Drilled By: AREHNA Method: ASTM D -1586, Standard Penetration Test Boring Ground Water Level: Groundwater not encountered in top 10 feet Remarks: CLEARWATER EAST WRF GENERATOR IMPROVEMENT AREHNA Project No.: 8-13-008 ARCADIS U.S., Inc. lik. AREHNA 1 Engineering, Inc. SOIL BORING LOG Drawn By VAF Checked By: KL Date: 4/29/2013 Boring B -01 PAGE 1 OF 1 AREHNA CLIENT ARCADIS KEY TO SYMBOLS Engineering, Inc. U.S. Inc. PROJECT NAME Clearwater East WRF Generator Improvement PROJECT NUMBER B -13 -008 PROJECT LOCATION LITHOLOGIC SYMBOLS (Unified Soil Classification System) SAMPLER 2 SYMBOLS Hand Auger Standard Penetration Test SP: Poorly- graded Sand ���, ;; SC: Clayey Sand jCH: High Plasticity Clay Standard Penetration Resistances SAND & GRAVEL No. of Blows Relative Density 0 -4 Very Loose 5 -10 Loose 11-30 Medium Dense 31 -50 Dense Greater than 50 Very Dense SILT & CLAY No. of Blows Consistency 0 -2 Very Soft 3 -4 Soft 5 -8 Arm 9 -15 Stiff 16 -30 Very Stiff Greater than 30 Hard No. ofoBlows Consistency 1 -20 Soft LIMESTONE 21 -50 Medium 51 -50/3" Hard Greater than 50/3" Very Hard WOR = Weight of Rod WOH = Weight of Hammer Static (Push) Cone Penetration Test Bearing capacity 2 Soil Consistency Soil Consistency (Dc) Soils Cohesive Soils Ground Water Level Measurements Water Level at Time Drilling, or as Shown it Water Level After 24 Hours, or as Shown 0 -16 Very Loose Soft to Firm 17 -40 Loose Stiff 41 -120 Medium Dense Very Stiff ABBREVIATIONS LL - LIQUID OMIT PI PLASTIgTY INDEX OI w - MSTURE CONTENT ( %) DD - DRY DENSITY (PCF) NP - NON PLASTIC -2(X) - PERCENT PASSING NO. 200 SIEVE FINE GRAINED SOILS SOIL BOUNDARY CLASSIFICATIONS COARSE GRAINED SOILS SILT or CLAY SAND GRAVEL Cobbles Boulders Fine Medium Coarse Fine Coarse # 200 #40 # Sieve Sieve Sieve 0 #4 Sieve 3/4 -inch 3 -inch 12 -inch i f 1 1 1 1 APPENDIX C Laboratory Test Results — Table 1 Field and Laboratory Procedures 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 TABLE 1 SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS East WRF Generator Improvements Clearwater, Florida AREHNA Project No.: B-13 -008 �k i f f 8 De Percent Moisture Index B -01 4.0 - 6.0 25.8 35.3 37 19 18 B -01 8.0 -10.0 47.7 83.9 113 48 65 FIELD PROCEDURES Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Borings The SPT borings are performed in general accordance with ASTM D -1586, "Penetration Test and Split - Barrel Sampling of Soils." A rotary drilling process is used and bentonite drilling fluid is circulated in the boreholes to stabilize the sides and flush the cuttings. At regular intervals, the drilling tools are removed and soil samples are obtained with a standard 2 -feet long, 2 -inch diameter split -tube sampler. The sampler is first seated 6 inches and then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140 -pound automatically tripped hammer falling 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final foot is designated the "Penetration Resistance." The penetration resistance, when properly interpreted, is an index to the soil strength and density. 1 1 1 r t LABORATORY PROCEDURES Water Content The water content is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the weight of water in a given mass of soil to the weight of the solid particles. This test is conducted in general accordance with FM 1 -T265. Atterberg Limits (Plasticity) A soil's Plasticity Index (PI) is the numerical difference between the Liquid Limit (LL) and the Plastic limit (PL). The LL is the moisture content at which the soil will flow as a heavy viscous fluid and is determined in general accordance with ASTM D -4318. The PL is the moisture content at which the soil begins to crumble when rolled into a small thread and is also determined in general accordance with FM 1 -T 90. Fines Content In this test, the sample is dried and then washed over a No. 200 mesh sieve. The percentage of soil by weight passing the sieve is the percentage of fines or portion of the sample in the silt and clay size range. This test is conducted in general accordance with ASTM D -1140. 1 1 A 1 1 BRILEY, WILD & ASSOCIATES RECORD DRAWINGS (1988/90) SEE FOLDED DRAWINGS (24" X 36 ") IN INSERT /SLEEVE Appendix 07.07.14.docx 7/7/2014 ID Z NQ a� N V �p A z tap p� W W Q O z Y a w 0 o o U zo N J z >L 011 O O U 0 0 0 0 a O N �aznk„r22 E z 3W Q Uj lop. ta 11Mll331M:)Ntl lvdnlondls InINVHD3W ¢ : 5 a 11 u � a gff„ ma E N ¢ W 10 O o LL V � o � w a¢aS w�a¢ ¢��¢' vii ����FS � all�i°HH h G,`v,GGG,,,v,��i v�✓,��$b¢rw�:�������>i�»>�33333�OS333�n S" � 4 4 C? tt 4 N Z _ TTT1 T �� o' zz did g W WHO 5� o ¢¢aS¢¢orz¢a ¢K¢¢mv,H%nv°,���i ��Gyff��✓,h✓3,n.r:3r�..:�t�S AT»»» 333333'33333z�. Z 7 LL O W T T T T T- % aa3 ° W °w� Z> U W a Y A a F N a U) ° O a Q � d z so oQ� az Qo o m mr aamam hi E ' I lot & a� Q gggggg g ^gy^�pp .,ca�aaaaaa<a¢t<�8$�a<a IIMIId ammmmm HOME Q� Nx N ge zWgo Co\ I QQ all V zs m toC F 9 s w9e RE CD W MM` V LAJ r,1` ��'A N O O - O I ¢� b 1 R+a+ � F Q O Lu EL m - 5 a g x g a ry-]EII'l-21E � \y N g a I I I / ooz r s� ` u , g Ff t =a _ I = I es .,a ao.naao M -- ------- -------- ..a--------- ----- --- — — ---� z— xxxxx—x—xx xxxxxxxxxxxxx— as w - z p z, w> p a= a,ion. g Ao 4 5V 3 an rI y u cc °o o `a. rT oo � i m I" € \\ Z) ro Ulm ry Ix a.w'g o� t A I _ ¢Za O. a zaU- '� g `\ "- ow zaoo o °o ,�ali0 i "I1 `- _ -+✓ £ '+ $ 6 110118010 lots! oz 3 k oo°o o f pNU boo . z000� �o ¢ w HIM HIM mo, x I - z 8 h � m - I v jj l I j I I x W71 1 _ Woe If �d N -------- ,5�3d s n o \ I� -- -x-x-x-xxxxx xxxx xx x-xx-x xx x 1lllm � g9Q wa r4 y2 �a ;3. EM-, 2C G4 °� Oz a� w � w o � o o 0 a zs _ - _ 4° 3 h 98 yam , � � � •� ' I ICI o p ��Id 3n F O I V _ A b3NIV 3 - yn� o z w m U z ¢ 1- .� Iii)•� ��: ,� � � �� �� � � � ,� _ LU ip a w E:y LL Q ® J O H � H O ww $Fy O uJ� O Jti FS I N — ' Z a 1QI O■A O Z J W t H U W Ijl Iy' ] d zo J o_ 3 f wU e _ _ wo a z °wuw x m ozrl H $y. � I q ti 0 �'0 o N0 i !tea H,baa � .J a h o — - J w Y i � t � o 2 ¢ x 2 ' � I \ 3 O rr r 0 1 o IR N3W/03S — I� _ oos lur NeaoN � �- 61 � aanns ooa3 N H W n9 001 0350d0ad n 3H5 31H ON00 x iltl �Id.43 a r � bObtl � 9 11tl13 33S 11nM b3Nl tl13b O350dObd,9L6 - ~ � ��� f - - 1ffiv`n3da o o �0 z o Z e �WIY W40 Vj� 3 m� '�wLL I.ti J q a. WV MYS P a s ti o M $ "-n�LF¢_" 11=LJISj m T z ° � z w w i ll o l FR TM a W r z q V m \ _ m 0 W f \4' N� m I R a r r i � oas Qu .III U 'o Y \s o z I— O wK Y - W . 1- `� a W I� g p : RN n J �F- I I.W o LIJ Lu k° o 2¢ Q WR =og $ m TM i oo U k a I I � _ m r C C] m h WHO .53 WHO ,F a'° ° 4 og gad 'I- m- =�o a,�p im ac D Wo z �a C v° gL qvv CD MM ov INt '_v9c h b M . Uti e x z az olg; (iI 6 lltl OOO—09S S,LSI H1f10 W � y Lu Lu o o o o Lu Y Wa obi lR w w = 2 j . °z y 0 W 0 a e � J a 6 w z a 3 00 N1NOS _ l a aW a � � IU H. o J' -- W oN wdrtOS gym" . .. . • .. . © Bl 1IY130 335 .m 8 l 1 33 m l '¢ I 'nW 'lltlbObbl10001 O3SOdObd - - 'b 1 HS 3 � W 6 Q -'� --- T 1Itl130 335-lltlM b3NIY13N a350dObd,Bt Od0 OB $ Iz a n8g �m� °zs�¢m �3QWW 22 m QI°W,yQw E"$ M 6 m�¢' UWOOs b �NO,¢W �o �«aa lolls � r 2 TRW W2 �W I o ¢�'a g w Q2Qy� i oN W Q~O 1�4Nly2U WNQ Q W a z °y 2W 1 fW'~ 202I .a m x W 2b y2 42l94 2�Q 1 M 1481 it-. w gWWyj W y¢2W 32j QTi°�40 h O�QQO Paz .gym W=w• o O ° N — N, O Rn Q00_ O.J.I>O-i JW O?m�1� N 2 4Q�QIU 7v Qa2¢¢m nWQ QQ N i 16 n ` C '^ N / 00 I ¢ WU I, R4h W4 \ 2 F IW WI W\ \ O N a ° myo,� op lal ¢ o, WU I� I o g w •�P oQi I W 1 n a ti gp � I z ea i W AWN I� I °a z - -- ) HI © W ry >7s= I� a y R W IjN/ Z�W °1 9F 1 I� WW, " =gnlW Wo go Wizz "a ojg4y ma SECTION V - MN MN O S MN IIIIII MI OS I 1111111 111111 NM MS N OM N MN UN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 14 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 15 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 17 SectionV.docx Page i 3/25/2014 CORD ® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 10/8/2014 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). RODUCER SIHLE INSURANCE GROUP, INC. P. O. BOX 160398 LTAMONTE SPRINGS FL 32716 CONT NAMEACT Certificate Department PHONE 407 - 869 -5490 (A/C, No, Eat): ADDRESS: Certificates @sihle.com FAX 407 - 389 -3580 (A/C. Nor INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : FFVA Mutual Ins Co 10385 NSURED .L. Smith Electric, Inc. 9252 US Hwy 27 Dundee FL 33838 -4285 BLSMI -1 INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : OVERAGES 1022224128 • THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD SWVD POLICY NUMBER (MM /DDY/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: LIMIT APPLIES PRO- JECT PER: LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTOS ED HIRED AUTOS SCHEDULED NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ DED RETENT ON $ $ A AND EMPLOYERS' L ABILITY N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N / A WC840- 0021850 -2014A 4/1/2014 4/1/2015 X STATUTE OT ER H- $1,000 Ded. E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space Is required) RE: East WRF Generator & Marshall Street WRF Lab Electrical Improvements (Project No. 11- 0025 -UT). Blanket Waiver of Subrogation plies as respects workers compensation when required by written contract. ERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of St. Petersburg, Procurement & Supply Mgmt. One 4th St., North, 5th Floor St. Petersburg, FL 33701 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE CORD 25 (2014/01) © 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD SMIT -38 OP ID: BH r�� °- CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM /DD/YYYY) 10/07/2014 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). RODUCER Phone: 863 - 967 -4454 Mulling Insurance Agency, Inc. Fax: 863 - 967 -7592 0 Box 308 208 E Park Street uburndale, FL 33823 -0308 ark E. Spann, CIC CONTACT NAME; Barbie Humbert Zeal. 454 (ac. No. Ext): FA'( (aC, No): 863 - 967 -7592 ADREsS: barbieh @mullinginsurance.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A: United Fire & Casualty 13021 NSURED B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. 29252 US Hwy 27 Dundee, FL 33838 -4285 INSURER B : 02/24/2014 INSURER C : EACH OCCURRENCE INSURER D : DAMAGES (RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) INSURER E : INSURER F : CLAIMS4vIADE ES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: • THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSR SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM /DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MM /DD/YYYY) LIMITS GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X 60411997 02/24/2014 02/24/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGES (RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) 100,000 $ � CLAIMS4vIADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GE 'L AGGREGATE POLICY LIMIT APPLIES PRO - JFCT PER: LOC PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 2,000,000 Emp Ben. $ 1,000,000 ' AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS X X AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS 60411997 02/24/2014 02/24/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ A X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE 60411997 02/24/2014 02/24/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 DED X RETENT ON $ 10000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER /EXECUTIVE OFFICER /MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N / A WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E. L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ A Equipment Floater 60411997 02/24/2014 02/24/2015 Leased/ 200,000 Rented ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) RE: CITY OF ST.PETERSBURG East WRF Generator and Marshall St. WRF Lab lectrical Improvements Project # 11- 0025 -UT ity of St. Petersburg is included as additional insured per written ontract. ERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of St. Petersburg Procurement & Supply Mgmt. One 4th St. North, 5th Floor St. Petersburg, FL 33701 CITYSPI SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE CORD 25 (2010/05) © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NOTEPAD INSURED'S NAME B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. SMIT -38 PAGE 2 OP ID: BH DATE 10/07/14 Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.05 OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255.05(2) OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES. Executed in 3 Counterparts BOND NO: 964124691 CONTRACTOR NAME: B L Smith Electric, Inc. CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: 29252 US Hwy 27 Dundee, FL 33838 -4285 CONTRACTOR PHONE NO: (863) 439-7401 SURETY COMPANY: The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 62 Maple Avenue Keene, NH 03431 (617) 357 -9500 OWNER NAME: City of Clearwater, Florida OWNER ADDRESS: 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Ste 200 Clearwater, FL 33756 OWNER PHONE NO.: (727) 562 -4750 OBLIGEE NAME: (If contracting entity is different from the owner, the contracting public entity) OBLIGEE ADDRESS: OBLIGEE PHONE NO.: BOND AMOUNT: $1,527,457.00 CONTRACT NO.: (If applicable) Project No. 11- 0025 -UT DESCRIPTION OF WORK: East WRF Generator and Marshall Street WRF Lab Electrical Improvements PROJECT LOCATION: 3141 Gulf to Bay Blvd., Marshall Street, 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater FL LEGAL DESCRIPTION: (If applicable) FRONT PAGE All other bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be printed thereon. THE ATTACHED STATUTORY COVER PAGE FORMS AND BECOMES A PART OF THIS BOND. BOND NUMBER: 964124691 executed in 3 counterparts CONTRACT BOND (1) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF POLK KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we B.L. SMITH ELECTRIC, INC. as Contractor and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company (Surety) whose home address is 62 Maple Avenue. Keene NH 03431 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety ", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sure of: THE BASE BID OF $1,523,120.00 AND THE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE BID OF 54,337.00, FOR A TOTAL OF ONE MILLION, FIVE HUNDRED TWENTY- SEVEN, FOUR HUNDRED FIFTY -SEVEN AND 00/100 Dollars ($1,527,457.00) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of , 2014, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS 01? THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and . further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub - Contractor, or Sub - Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the stun to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract, SectionV.docx Page 1 of 18 3/25/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A CONTRACT130ND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. ' IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this l3 -tti day of Q ere.-44A., , 2014. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ATTEST: Print Name: WITNESS: Caro (YN S lve ei( 7u £4144,4- Print Name: 'Leslie M Donahue COUNTERSIGNED: Print Name: Patricia Slaughter Florida Licensed Resident Agent Inquiries: (407) 786 -7770 SecdonV.docx Page 2 of 17 B.L. SMITH ELECTRIC, INC. (CONTRACTOR) Print Name: p ,,; d IA) . S Title: Pie.`,c.de^3 t The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company SURETY By: ATTORNEY -IN -FA Print Name: Patricia L. Slaughter 3/25/2014 Iu PHIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No, 6424645 American Fire and Casualty Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Fire & Casualty Company and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein collectively called the "Companies "), pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint, Cheryl Foley; Don Bramlage; Gloria A. Richards; Jeffrey W. Reich; Kim E. Niv; Leslie M. Donahue; Lisa Roseland; Patricia L. Slaughter; Susan L. Reich; Teresa L. Durham all of the city of MAITLAND , state of FL each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney -in -fact to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed, any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations, in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attomey has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed Ithereto this 23rd day of January 2014 d e 7 ai 0 ito 1_ STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 23rd day of January , 2014 , before me personally appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of American Fire and Casualty Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, The Ohio Casualty Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscr : ° _,- and affixed my notarial seal at Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written. ss By: American Fire and Casualty Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company West merican Insurance Company David M. Care , assistant Secretary COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA ..................................................................................... .............................._ Notaria 0 a Thresa P s , a Notary 17818M Plymouth •Rivpi, Montgomery County asi .Es • I'a 8 28, 2017 By 4ed(71-40 Teresa Pastella , Notary Public This Power of Attomey is made and execut ority of the following By -laws and Authorizations ofAmerican Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company , t 1 h: n Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: ARTICLE IV — OFFICERS — Section 12. Power of Attorney. Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe, shall appoint such attomeys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attomeys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attomey -in -fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. ARTICLE XIII — Execution of Contracts — SECTION 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attomeys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attomeys -in -fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company, authorizes David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attomeys -in- fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors, the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Gregory W. Davenport, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Power of Attomey executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this day of 20 LMS_12873_122013 By: Gregory W. Davenport, Assistant Secretary 89 of 200 os co) N m c y as c O Vy >,(0 - W c O G. <C4) 3RI of a. to o▪ 0 w 0 O c °a To .a a1 0 w � E N C ▪ M 00 0 1— r CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this 1'7 day of , 2014 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and B.L. SMITH ELECTRIC, INC., of the City of Dundee, County of Polk, and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) in the amount of $1,527,457.00 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. SectionV.docx Page 3 of 17 3/25/2014 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SectionV.docx Page 4 of 17 3/25/2014 CONTRACT (3) The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. SectionV.docx Page 5 of 17 3/25/2014 CONTRACT (4) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: CO �K�c �e t µ� /8, AL-44AL William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: B : l o1 A Cr e\ Y George N. Cretekos, Mayor (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Attest: u_ ietiL Rosemarie Call City Clerk Approved as to form: Ma a Smith Assistant City Attorney B.L. SMITH ELECTRIC, INC. (Contractor) By: �'� (SEAL) Print Name: 46v Title: his/0014T SectionV.docx Page 6 of 17 3/25/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF POLK On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of B.L. SMITH ELECTRIC, INC., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 29252 U.S. Hwy. 27, Dundee, Florida, 33838 (herein, the "Contractor "). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of , 20 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub - contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. ' Sworn and subscribed to before me 1 1 1 1 1 This day of , 20 NOTARY PUBLIC AFFIANT BY: My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT SectionV.docx Page 7 of 17 3/25/2014 PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, B L Smith Electric, Inc. as Principal, and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company as Surety, who's address is 62 Maple Avenue Keene, NH 03431 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sutra of QNt /t u„ dpi --e_v e AS 71y o 4 Dollars ($ [zo_, oo o,,pct) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of B L Smith Electric, Inc. as Principal, and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company as Surety, for work specified as: Bid No. 11-0025-UT - East WRF Generator and Marshal Street WRF Lab Electrical Improvements - 3141 Gulf to Bay Blvd., Clearwater, FL 33759 and 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL 3755 all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages, Signed this 28th day of August , 2014 , (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his tide; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). SectioiV.docx Page 8 al'? Principal By: X-e-C.-COGroli-- lai�iyJ i i1 Title The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Surety Patricia L. Sla 'ter Attorney -in -Fact & FL Licensed Resident Agent 3/25/2014 THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS NOT VALID UNLESS IT IS PRINTED ON RED BACKGROUND. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except In the manner and to the extent herein stated. Certificate No, 6424619 American Fire and Casualty Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company West American Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Fire & Casualty Company and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of New Hampshire, that Liberty Mutual Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Massachusetts, and West American Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana (herein collectively called the "Companies "), pursuant to and by authority herein set forth, does hereby name, constitute and appoint, Cheryl Foley; Don Bramlage; Gloria A. Richards; Jeffrey W. Reich; Kim E. Niv; Leslie M. Donahue; Lisa Roseland; Patricia L. Slaughter; Susan L. Reich; Teresa L. Durham all of the city of MAITLAND , state of FL each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attorney -in -fact to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver, for and on its behalf as surety and as its act and deed, any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations, in pursuance of these presents and shall be as binding upon the Companies as if they have been duly signed by the president and attested by the secretary of the Companies in their own proper persons. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Power of Attorney has been subscribed by an authorized officer or official of the Companies and the corporate seals of the Companies have been affixed thereto this 2Srd day of January , 2014 STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY On this 23rd day of January , 2014 before me personally appeared David M. Carey, who acknowledged himself to be the Assistant Secretary of American Fire and Casualty Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, The Ohio Casualty Company, and West American Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, execute the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscr:, a° u: <s , and affixed my notarial seal at Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania, on the day and year first above written. COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA - ss By: American Fire and Casualty Company The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Liberty Mutual Insurance Company West Pmerican Insurance Company David M. Carey(Assistant Secretary Tests r: Plymouth •rwp. Mortgo ,e Ccrrnmssk n Exp`'e Ma, Teresa Pastella , Notary Public This Power ofAttomey is made and execute rity of the following By -laws and Authorizations of American Fire and Casualty Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company ' �, c= n Insurance Company which resolutions are now in full force and effect reading as follows: ARTICLE IV — OFFICERS — Section 12. Power of Attorney. Any officer or other official of the Corporation authorized for that purpose in writing by the Chairman or the President, and subject to such limitation as the Chairman or the President may prescribe, shall appoint such attorneys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Corporation to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attomey, shall have full power to bind the Corporation by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Corporation. When so executed, such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the President and attested to by the Secretary. Any power or authority granted to any representative or attorney -in -fact under the provisions of this article may be revoked at any time by the Board, the Chairman, the President or by the officer or officers granting such power or authority. ARTICLE XIII — Execution of Contracts — SECTION 5. Surety Bonds and Undertakings. Any officer of the Company authorized for that purpose in writing by the chairman or the president, and subject to such limitations as the chairman or the president may prescribe, shall appoint such attomeys -in -fact, as may be necessary to act in behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Such attomeys -in -fact subject to the limitations set forth in their respective powers of attorney, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach thereto the seal of the Company. When so executed such instruments shall be as binding as if signed by the president and attested by the secretary. Certificate of Designation — The President of the Company, acting pursuant to the Bylaws of the Company, authorizes David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary to appoint such attomeys -in- fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of the Company to make, execute, seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations. Authorization — By unanimous consent of the Company's Board of Directors, the Company consents that facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any assistant secretary of the Company, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company in connection with surety bonds, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. I, Gregory W. Davenport, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of American Fire and Casualty. Company, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, Liberty Mutual Insurance Company, and West American Insurance Company do hereby certify that the original powet;9f,attorhey df which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Power of Attomey executed by said Companies, is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. t, • • O4A IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals orsatd Companies this �a day of , 2 0/7< LMS_12873_122013 By: Gregory W. Davenport, Assistant Secretary 63 of 200 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF POLK ) Carolyn Sheek being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 29252 US Hwy 27 (Street & Number) Dundee Polk FL (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that David W. Smith is President (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. or said corporation by virtue of Provision of By -Laws (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Affiant Sworn to before me this 28 day of August , 20 14 �(6 Not Public •�;+t:e', MICHELLE CINQUINO Commission # EE 187008 Expires April 5, 2016 .. Bonded Thru Troy Fain Insurance 800'3054019 Michelle Cinciuino Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any SectionV.docx Page 9 of 17 3/25/2014 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Polk ) David W. Smith being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President of B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Affiant Sworn to and subscribed before me this 28 day of August , 2014 . Nota Public s P 4" `yf'" MICHELLE CINQUINO :A_ . Commission # EE 187008 .,.■ •:a ` Expires April 5, 2016 tr ; ;'O`�� Bonded llwu Troy Fn tnjrance Innate 800-385-7019 SectionV.docx Page 10 of 17 3/25/2014 PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: SectionV.docx Page 11 of 17 3/25/2014 PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Bank, for the sum of One Hundred Seventy Thousand Dollars and no cents ($ 170.000.00 (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: David W. Smith, President 1071 Sunset Drive. Lake Wales. FL 33853 Carolyn Sheek, Secretary 92 Pine Forest Lane. Haines City, Fl 33R44 Signature of Bidder:i," 2i_•� _ 4 (The bidder must indicate whethe Cor oration artnership, Company or Individual). SectionV.docx Page 12 of 17 3/25/2414 PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: /�w..,..,,iJ . j , # / 7 14 -' G I Ic By: Aft va/L-'_.57,4 . M Title: Aee..rt dCA/ r Business Address of Bidder: 29252 US Hwy 27 City and State: Dundee. FL Dated at Dundee FL SectionV.docx Zip Code 33838 , this 28 day of August , A.D., 2014. Page 13 of 17 3/25/2014 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET . PROJECT: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 8/13/2014 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: SectionV.docx B.L. Smith Electric. Inc. (Name of Bidder) ( ignature of Officer) President (Title of Officer) 08/28/2014 (Date) Page 14 of 17 3/25/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: EAST WRF GENERATOR AND MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT #11- 0025 -UT) CONTRACTOR: B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 1,527,457.00 (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: One Mil(icni Five Hundred Twenty Seven Thousand, Four Hundred Fifty seven dollars and no cents. (Words) MI DESCRIPTION UNIT MU OTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL EAST WRF GENERATOR 1 Mobilization/Demobilization and General Conditions 1 LS $ 65,000.00 $ 221,807.00 $ 65,000.00 $ 221,807.00 2 -a Owner - Direct Purchase (ODP) 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank. 1 LS 2 -b ODP 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank, Sales Tax Savings 1 LS $ 13,358.42 $ 13,358.42 2 -c ODP 800kW Generator w/ Enclosure & Day Tank. Coordination, Installation, Testing, and Contractor Warranty of Generator, Enclosure & Day Tank 1 LS $ 10.904.58 $ 10,904.58 3 Structural 1 LS $ 170,005.00 $ 170,005.00 $ 681.085 06 $ 66.550.00 $ 48.400.00 4 Electrical 1 LS $ 681.085.00 5 Mechanical 1 LS $ 66,550.00 6 Instrumentation & Controls 1 LS $ 48.400.00 7 Allowance for Installation Conflicts for the New Underground Ductbank 1 LS $60,000.00 $60,000.00 8 Allowance for Replacement of New Direct Buried Conduit with Exposed Conduit 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Total East WRF (Items 1 -8) $ 1,347,110.00 MARSHALL ST. WRF LAB ELECTRICAL IMPROVEMENTS 9 Mobilization/Demobilization and General Conditions 1 LS $ 4.356.00 $ 4,356.00 10 Electrical 1 LS $429a $123.254.00 $ 48,400.00 $ 176,010.00 11 Instrumentation & Controls 1 LS 6 $ 48,400.00 Total Marshall St WRF (Items 9 -11) Bidder's Grand Total (Items 1-11) 1 $1,523,120.00 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE: (Approval by the Owner and Engineer is Required Prior to Proceeding) iM J� = OTY Mall= TOTAL DESCRIPTION NO. 12 East WRF: Simplex Model "Joe Filter" and connection appurtenances 1 LS $ 4,337.00 $ 4,337.00 Total: Bidder's Grand Total + Additive Alternate (Items 1 -12) = $1,527,457.00 SectionV.docx Page 15 of 17 3/25/2014 THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV.docx Page 16 of 17 3/25/2014 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTIONIH, ITEM25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Polk Authorized Signature David W. Smith Printed Name President Title B 1 Smith Flertrir, In Name of Entity /Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before one on this 28 day of August , 2014 by David W. Smith (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the President (title) of B.L. Smith Electric, Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein Yes , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. My Commission Expires: 04/05/2016 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Nary Public chelle Cinquino Printed Name VPy ., MICHELLE CINQUINO R Commissionn5E2187008 Ededr April 0 o�o �F BdeTtm, Fain InsuranceBooa85. 7O19 SectionV.docx Page 17 of 17 3/25/2014